Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.

No preview available

The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About113294 DRAHOTA CONSTRUCTION - CONTRACT - BID - 5684 TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITYTRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY BID NO, 5684 BID OPENING: PURCHASING DIVISION 215 NORTH MASON STREET, FORT COLLINS MARCH 19, 2002, 3:OOP.M. (Our Clock) Gniav PRECAST WINDOW SILL -CURVED �� SGALE: NTS VAUGHT • FRYE AT, ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESIGN 401 West Mountain Avenue Suite 200 Fort Collins, CO fix97Q21R.1662 drone 970/124.1191 wwwvanoMR,. TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY P h f a,9I' .9 j ADDENDUM #2 Ref. Sheet # Checked by •m 3 schedule and other schedules prepared by the CONTRACTOR and consult with the ENGINEER concerning acceptability. 9.3.2.2. Conferences and Meetine - Attend meetaw with the CONTRACTOR such as tneconstrw tion conferences, progress meetings and other Job conferences and prepare and circulate copies of minutes of meetings. 9.3.2.3. Liaison 9.3.2.3.1. Serve as ENGINEER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR working principally throueh CONTRACTOR'S sucerintendent to assist the CONTRACTOR in understanding the Contract Documents. 9.3.2.3.2. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional detiuls or information when rewired, for pro= execution of the Work. 9.3.2.3.3. Advise the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shoo Drawing or sample submission if the submission has not been approved by the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.4.Review of Work. Reiection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests - 9.3.2.4.1. Conduct on -site observations of the Work in progress to assist the ENGINEER in detemvnmg that the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.3.2.4.3. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having iurisdiction over the Proiect, record the results of these inspections and report to the ENGINEER 9.3.2.5. Interpretation of Contract Documents. Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to CONTRACTOR clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents as issued by the ENGINEER 9.3.2.6. Modifications. Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR'S suggestions for E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 20 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) modification In Drawings or Specifications and report these recommendations to ENGINEER Accurately transmit to CONTRACTOR decisions issued by the ENGINEER 9.3.2.7. Records. 9.3.2.8. Reports. 9.3.2.8.1. Furnish ENGINEER periodic report& as required of the progress of the Work and of the ..CONTRACTORS compliance with the progress schedule and schedule of shop Drawing and sample submittals. 9.3.2.8.2, Consult with ENGINEER Jn advance of scheduling maior tests, inspections or start of important phases of the =0 9.3.2.8.3. Draft proposed Change Orders and Work Directive Changes obtaining backup matenial from the CONTRACTOR and recommend to ENGINEER Change Orders. Work Directive Chanees and field orders 9.3.2.8.4. Report immediately [o ENGINEER and OWNER the occurrence of any accident. 9.3.2.9. Payment Requests. Review applications for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendation to ENGINEER noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work. 9.3.2.10. Completion. 9.3.2.10.1. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring correction or completion 9.3.2.10.2. Conduct final inspection in the company of the ENGINEER. OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of items to be corrected or completed. 9.3.2.10.3. Observe that all items on the final list have been corrected or completed and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. 9.3.3. Limitation of Authority: The Representative shall not: 9.3.3.1. Authorize any deviations from the Contract Documents or accept any substitute materials or equipment. unless authorized by the ENGINEER 9.3.3.2. Exceed limitations of ENGINEER'S authority as set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.3.3.3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR. Subcontmctorc or CONTRACTOR'S superintendent 9.3.3.4. Advise on, or issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the means methods techniques sequences or procedures for construction unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents 9.3.3.5. Advise on or issue directions regarding or assume control over safety precautions and proeatns in connections with the Work. 9.3.3.6. Accept Shoo Drawings or sample submittals from anyone other than the CONTRACTOR. 9.3.3.7. Authorize OWNER to occupy the Work in whole or in part 9.3.3.8. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others except as specifically authorized by the ENGINEER. Ciardfrcadons and Interpretations. 9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the FJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. Authorized Variations in Work. 9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved Promptly. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as Provided in Article 1 i or 12. Rejecting Defective Work. 9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as afunctioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments. 9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraphs 6.24 through 6.28 inclusive. 9.8. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. 9.9. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. Determinations for Unit Prices. 9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application 21 for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER thereon will be final and binding upon OWNER and and CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR 9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under delivers to the other and to ENGINEER written notice of paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not show intention to appeal from ENGINEER'S decision and: (i) an partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time liable in connection with any interpretation or decision limits and in accordance with the procedures set forth in rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of Exhibit GC -A, 'Dispute Resolution Agreement", entered a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 or into between OWNER and CONTRACTOR pursuant to 9.11 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other Article 16, or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement matter (except any which have been waived by the making _ has been entered into, a formal proceeding is instituted by or acceptance of final payment as provided in the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to paragraph 14.15) will be a condition precedent to any exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or have with respect to ENGINEER's decision, unless remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any CONTRACTOR Such appeal will not be subject to the such claim, dispute or other matter t-t&AAie". procedures of paragraph 9.11. 9.13. Limitations on ENGINEER'S Authority and Decisions on Disputes: ^ Responsibilities: 9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the 9.13.1. Neither ENGINEER'S authority or " requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision ^ other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the -" Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority the Work and claims under Articles 11 and 12 in respect of or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be or give rise to any duty owed by ENGINEER to referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with a request CONTRACTOR any Subcontractor, any Supplier, — for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. any other person or organization, or to any surety for Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter or employee or agent of any of them. ^ will be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event 9.13.2. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or control or have authority over or be responsible for event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, be submitted to ENGINEER and the other party within sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any -- ENGINEER allows an additional period of time for the failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and submission of additional or more accurate data in support Regulations applicable to the furnishing or of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform �. within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last or famish the Work in accordance with the Contract submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). Documents. -� ENGINEER will render a fimmal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if 9.13.3. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the any, in accordance with this paragraph. ENGINEER's acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or _ be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR organization performing or furnishing any of the unless: (i) an appeal from ENGINEER'S decision is taken Work. within the time limits and in accordance with the procedures set forth in EXHIBIT GC -A, "Dispute 9.13.4. ENGINEER's review of the final Application Resolution Agreement", entered into between OWNER and for Payment and accompanying documentation and CONTRACTOR pursuant to Article 16, or (ii) if no such all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a guarantees, Bonds and certificates of inspection, tests written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's and approvals and other documentation required to be _ written decision is delivered by OWNER or delivered by paragraph 14.12 will only be to CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within determine generally that their content complies with thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of inspections, tests and approvals that the results competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies certified indicate compliance with, the Contract as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, Documents. dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such 9.13.5. The limitations upon authority and ^ FJCI)C GENERAL CONDMONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 22 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) ti responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.13 shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Representative and assistants. ARTICLE 10—CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). 10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Article 1 I or Article 12. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.23 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.9. 10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 10.4.1. changes in the Work which are (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work under paragraph 13.14, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 10.4.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties; and 10.4.3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29. 10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents EICDC GENERAL. CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4@000) (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. ARTICLE 11—CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense without change in the Contract Price. 11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2. 11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 11.3.L where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of 23 paragraphs 11.9.1 through 11.9.3, inclusive); 11.3.2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed payment basis, including lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph l 1.6.2); 11.3.3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 11.3.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (detemvned as provided in paragraph 11.6). Cost of the Work., 11.4. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5: 11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR Such employees shall include without limitation superintendents, foremen and other personnel employed full-time at the site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full-time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall inalode,but be limited to; salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health andteEirerileet benefits; bemuses; applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in.the above to the extent authorized by OWNER 11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Work performed or furnished by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, E1CDC GENERAL CONDMONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 24 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER which bids, if any, will be accepted If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in paragraphs 11.4, 11.5, 11.6 and 11.7. All _ subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. 11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing ^ laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the " Work. 11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following: 11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. —' 11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which -- remain the property of CONTRACTOR. 11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction ^ equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof —all in accordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 11 A.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. - 11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. 11 A.5.6. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not .. compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9), provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR's fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2. 11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. 11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work. 11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph l IA.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4—all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. 11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR'S principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR'S office at the site. 11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above). EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) wl CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/200o) 11.5.5. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property. 11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11.4. 11.6. The CONTRACTOR's fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fused fee; or 11.6.2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: 11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be fifteen percent; 11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be five percent; 11.6.2.3. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraphs 11.4.1, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 and 11.6.2 is that the Subcontractor who actually performs or furnishes the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of fifteen percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.4.1 and I I A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee to be negotiated in good faith with the OWNER but not to exceed five percent of the amount paid to the next lower ter Subcontractor. 11.6.2.4. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5 and 11.5; 11.6.2.5. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and 11.6.2.6. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR'S fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.5, inclusive. 11.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be 25 determined pursuant to paragraphs lIA and 11.5, CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting pnactices and submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. Cash Allowances: 11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowancesso named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 11.8.1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; and 11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted 11.9. Unit Price Work: 11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.10. 11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to coves CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 11.9.3.OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if. 11.9.3.1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 26 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) and 11.9.3.2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 11.9.3.3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. 11.9.3.4. CONTRACTOR acknowledws that the OWNER has the right to add or delete items in the Bid or change quantities at OWNER'S sole discretion without affecting the Contract Price of any remaining item so long as the deletion or addition does not exceed twenty-five percent of the original total Contract Price. ARTICLE 12=CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.1. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows additional time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustrnent in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be determinxd by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph 12.1. 12.2. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. 12.3. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 12.4. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall OWNER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. ARTICLE 13—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. Nodce of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER have actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR All defective Work may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13. Access to Work. 13.2. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at for their observation, inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. Tests and Inspections. 13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 13A. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 13.4.1. for inspections, tests or approvals covered by paragraph 13.5 below; 13.4.2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.9 EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CrrY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) below shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.9; and 13.4.3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 13.5. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or pan thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. 13.6. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. 13.7. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.6 shall be at CONTRACTOR'S expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. Uncovering Work. 13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. 13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction, (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may [Hake a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such 27 uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER May Stop the Work: 13.10. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any surety or other party. Correction or Removal of Defective Work. 13.11. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.12. Correction Period. 13.12.1.If within onetwo veers after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terns of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. 13.12.2.In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to ran from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. 13.12.3. Where defective Work (and damage to other EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 28 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph 13.12, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of ere year two veers after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Acceptance of Defective Work. 13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, also ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of fatal payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the. Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER OWNER May Correct Defective Work: 13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other contractors and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants access to the site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against CONTRACTOR and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in perfomtance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. ARTICLE 14—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Schedule of Values: 14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. Application for Progress Payment: 14.2. At least twenty days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to Protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. Any funds that are withheld by the OWNER shall not be subject to substitution by the CONTRACTOR with securities or any arrangements involving an escrow or custodianship. By executing the application for payment form the CONTRACTOR expressly waives his right to the benefits of Colorado Revised Statute& Section 24-91-101 et seg. CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Tide. 14.3. CONTRACTOR wan -ants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. Review ofApplicadons for Progress Payment. 14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REv 4/2000) recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of the last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's on -site observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief: 14.5.1. the Work has progressed to the point indicated, 14.5.2. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation), and 14.5.3. the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled insofar as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. However, by recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections have been trade to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, shall not mean that ENGINEER is responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the famishing or performance of Work, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to perform or fiunish Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to 29 SEALANT TREATED Ix3 CONT, CONT. TREATED 2x6 NAILER JPPER PARAPET 1---24 0" CONT. GALV. METAL CLEAT Y ROOF MEMBRANE RUN UP OVER TOP OF PLYWOOD & FACE OF 2x6 NAILER aPARAPET DETAIL1 SCALE: 11/2" = P_0^ VAUGHT • FRYE AVA7 ARCHITECTS ARCH E INTERIR DESIGN 401 West 1rn4a,mmm AFvatue Swbc200 Fort Colhns,00 fax 970,2U I662 phone 970224.1191 www.vau PRF-FINISHFD MFTAi SEALANT TREATED lx3 CONT. CONT, TREATED 2x6 NAILER T 0, Parapet CONT. GALV. METAL CLEAT ROOF MEMBRANE RUN UP OVER TOP OF PLYWOOD & FACE OF 2x6 NAILER GAILY. METAL FLASHING _ B.O, MTL BAND 116' 8" CHANNEL CLOSURE TO MATCH METAL PANEL COLOR PARAPET DETAIL 2 SCALE 11/2" = 1'-O" TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM #2 Ref. Sheet # AD-5 OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.5. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary, in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: 14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, 14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order, 14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.14, or 14.7.4. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.4 inclusive. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because: 14.7.5. claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR'S performance or furnishing of the Work, 14.7.6. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, 14.7.7. there are other items entitling OWNER to a set- off against the amount recommended, or 14.7.8. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.7.1 through 14.7.3 or paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.4 inclusive, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRACTOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. Substantial Completion: 14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within fourteen days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. 14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. Partial UNUmdon: 14.10. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of arty substantially completed part of the Work, which: (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR'S performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following: 14.10.1.OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. E1CDC GENERAL. CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 30 µ./ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that Part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.10.2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of property insurance. Finallnspection: 14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such work or remedy such deficiencies. Final Application for Payment: 14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by paragraph 5.4, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.4.13, (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may finish receipts or releases in full and affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (h) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER' property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 412000) to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may fiunish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. Releases or waivers of liens and the consent of the surety to finalmu oavment are to be submitted on fonns conforming to the format of the OWNER'S standard forms bound in the Promect manual Final Payment and Acceptance: 14.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.15. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and substance and with ENGINEER's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR subject to oameraoh 17 6 2 of these General Conditions. 14.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Waiver of Claims. 14.15. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 14.15.1.a waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after 31 final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.11, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 14.15.2. A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. ARTICLE 15-SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION OWNER May Suspend Work: 15.1. At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER May Terminate: 15.2. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.9 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.6); 15.2.2. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority Of ENGINEER; or 15.2.4. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days' written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid EiCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 32 w/CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by OWNER arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and when so approved by ENGINEER incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed 15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. 15.4. Upon seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 15.4.1. for completed and acceptable Work exacted in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 15.4.2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract. Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 15A.3. for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and 15.4.4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: 15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted or OWNER fails for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally deterntined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.4. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.5 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making claim under Articles 11 and 12 for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16—DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that OWNER and CONTRACTOR have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure, if any, shall be as set forth in Exhibit GC -A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", to be attached hereto and made a part hereof. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.10, 9.11 and 9.12, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. ARTICLE 17—MISCELLANEOUS Giving Notice: 17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm, or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.2. Computation of Time: 17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight will constitute a day. Notice of Claim: 17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.Cumulative Remedies: 17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR paragraphs 6.12, 6.16, 6.30, 6.31, 6.32, 13.1, 13.12, 13.14 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. Professional Fees and Court Costs Included: 17.5. Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages", it shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs. 17.6. The laws of the State of Colorado aroly to this Agreement. Reference to two pertinent Colorado statutes are as follows; 17.6.2. If a claim is filed OWNER is re.,uired by law (CRS 38-26-107) to withhold from all pavments to CONTRACTOR sufficient funds to insure the pavment of all clauns for labor materials team hire sustenance orovtstons provender, or other sunnlies used or consumed by CONTRACTOR or his 33 FJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-9 (1990 Edidw) 34 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) (This page left blank intentionally.) EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 35 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. 4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: Report of A Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation For New Streets Facility, 725 East Vine Drive, Fort Collins, Colorado, Vaught Frye Architects_ Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: WORre 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. , 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). SC-8.10 OWNER's Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the -- Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the ., Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall 00800-2 at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, -techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for. any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on -site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. 13.12.1 And 13.12.3 Connection Period: Change from 2 years to 1 year. VAUGHT • FRYE -*VAF ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR 401 West Mmtail Avenue Suite 200 Fort fex970224.1662 dl 97W2741191 — SEALANT TREATED Ix3 COLT, CONT. TREATED 2x6 NAILER W/ 3/8" ANCHOR BOLTS Cla 48" O.C. TO UPPER PARAPET 1240"� COW, GALV, METAL CLEAT ROOF MEMBRANE RUN UP OVER TOP OF PLYWOOD & FACE OF 2x6 NAILER PARAPET DETAIL 3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = T-O" TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM # 2 um Ref. Sheet # SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment 00970 Work Change Directive 9/99 SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: Traffic Operations Facility CONTRACTOR: BID NUMBER: 5684 DESCRIPTION In preparing change orders show in order as separate numbered paragraphs the following: Reason for change: 2. Description of change: 3. Change in Contract Cost: 4. Change in Contract Time: (Attach additional sheets as required) ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $0 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS 0 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDERS 0 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER n ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $0 (Assuming all change orders approved) ACCEPTED BY: APPROVED BY: Contractor's Representative Date Facilities Project Manager Date cc: City Clerk Project File Contractor Purchasing Engineer Section 00960 Application for Payment Insert page 9/99 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROJECT: PAY ESTIMATE NO: DATE: CONTRACTOR: ADDRESS: CONTRACT FOR: PARTIAL TO The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief the work covered by this application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all accounts have been paid by him for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received, in this current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: Date: FINAL In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on site observations and the data comprising the above application, the Architects Certifies to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. ENGINEER: By: Date: Application is made for Payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. attached. Schedule of Values is The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS TO DATE ADJUSTED CONTRACT AMOUNT TOTAL WORK COMPLETED AND MATERIALS USED RETAINAGE (10% OF TOTAL) TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE LIQUIDATED DAMAGES WITHHELD TOTAL EARNED LESS LIQUIDATED DAMAGES LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS CURRENT PAYMENT DUE APPROVED BY (Title) cc: Accounting City Clerk Contractor Engineer Project File DA SECTION 00970 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE 9/99 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE km DATE OF ISSUANCE EFFECTIVE DATE CONTRACTOR Contract,: Project: OWNERts Contract No. ENGINEER's Project No. You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Price: El Unit Prices ❑ Lump Sum El Cost of the Work Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract $ Times: If the change involves an increase, the estimated Substantial Completion: days; amount is not to be exceeded without further Ready for final payment: days. authorization. RECOMMENDED: ENGINEER AUTHORIZED: OWNER By: By: EJCDC No. 1910-8-F (1996 Edition) Psepmed by the Engintmn Joint Conbw Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America and the Construction Specifications Institute. WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order should be used. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. _ Based on conversations between Engineer and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: - METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract — Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is _ approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the.estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimated time is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked 'Not Applicable". _ Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer's recommendation. Paragraph 10.03.A.2 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to cover any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change Directive. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SPECIFICATIONS TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY FORT COLLINS, COLORADO CITY OF FORT COLLINS PROJECT NO.2001-59 BID SET FEBRUARY 8, 2002 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 100 Summary ................................................................................. 1-2 01210 Allowances- ............................. 1-2 01312 Project Meetings .................. ........................... .................1-2 01330 Submittal Procedures------------------------------------ 1-6 01410 ---------------------------------------------------------- Regulatory Requirements - - 1 01421 Abbreviations and Acronyms .................................. -................... _-------- 1-2 01423 Reference Standards - 01450 Quality Control --------------------------------•-------------• 1-3 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls----------•--------------------------------•----•-------------------- 1-5 01600 Product Requirements.........................................1-5 - - - 01656 Disinfection of Domestic Water Lines------------------------------------------------------------ 1-4 01666 Testing Piping System ........... ............................... 01722 Field Engineering.. .............. ......................................................1-2 --------- -1-3 01732 Cutting and Patching---------------------------------------------------------------- - 1-2 01741 Final Cleaning..................................................... 1-2 01770 - Closeout Procedures 1 01780 Closeout Submittals ...................... ..................-1-4 01800 Facility Operation.------.........................................1-2 DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting__________________________________________________________ ...........1-11 02223 Selective Site Demolition 1 02232 Selective Clearing ........... - _ ......................................... 1-2 02300 Earthwork --------------•------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1 8 02370 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 02713 Water Distribution System .......... ................................. 6 02530 -1 Sanitary Sewer Collection System_____________________________________________________ 1-6 02575 Pavement Repair and Resurfacing ............................. _................. __.................... 02615 _____1-2 Ductile Iron Pipe ...............................-.............. - - I-6 02622 ---- Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe ...................... ....... --........................................ 02641 .. -1-2 Valves-- ... .......................................... ............ 1-5 VF"2001-59 00010-1 02644 Fire Hydrants..................................................•---------------------------•-------........................---_1-4 02646 Service Lines, Meters and Appurtenances .................................................................. 1-11 02730 Aggregate Surfacing ................................................ 02740 Flexible Pavement 1-3 02750 _ Rigid Pavement .................................................................. ..........................................1-5 02765 Pavement Markings ............................................ ........ __....... ................ ...................... 1-2 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks 1-7 02810 Irrigation ....... .................... __..... ---....------...-•----------------------------------.............................. 1-14 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 1-4 02828 Automatic Gate Operators ........................................ .................... ................................ 1-3 02871 Bicycle Rocks ....................... .......... .............. .......................................................... -•......... 1 02891 Post -Mounted Signs.......----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 02900 Planting ................................... _.......................... ...... ---...... ........ •-• ............................... 1-13 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 1-4 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 1-4 03240 Fibrous Reinforcing--- ...................... _-------- ............ ......... _............ ------- I .................... 1-2 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 1-14 03365 Concrete Hardener and Sealer 1-3 03453 Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies .................................................................... 1-4 03481 Precast Concrete Splash Blocks- .......... , .•.....•, ._.__•_-• ......... ......... .........1 03600 Grouts 1-3 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04060 Masonry Mortar ----- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- •........ *---------------- 1-3 04070 Masonry Grout................................................................................................................1-3 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement ........... _............... _... -.................................... 1-2 04090 Masonry Accessories ............ .............................................................. .. ............•.1-2 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies............................................................................................ 1-11 DIVISION 5 --METALS 05120 Structural Steel. ........••------------------------------------------•---------...------------....................1-10 05213 Open Web Steel Joists ................................... ...... ............................................... ......... 1-4 05310 Steel Deck -----• ...................................--- ................------............................ 1-6 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing ..................•..... ............................. -•-........................... 1-3 05500 Metal Fabrications ................................................................. ....................................... 1-6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry_______ 06200 Finish Carpentry_________ 06400 Architectural Woodwi DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 1-4 1-2 1-6 07111 Bituminous Dampproofing......................... .....................................................................1-2 07133 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing -............................. ---.................................. 11-4 07190 Water Repellents ............ ................................................................................................. 1-3 07210 Building Insulation ............................................................................................................ 1-2 07261 UnderslabVapor Retarder ................................................................................. --.......... 1-3 07263 Building Vapor Retarders....................................................................................._....- 1-2 VF 2001-59 00010-2 07467 Steel Siding .......... -----................. ............ .....................................- ..-...1-3 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing ........... _........................... ___....... _................ __-1-8 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal ----------------- ---- --- - -----------------------------------• ---- 1-4 07610 ................... Sheet Metal Roofing............................ ........ .......................1-4 07720 Roof Accessories 07840 Firestopping .................................... .......... ........ ................................... 1-4 07920 Joint Sealants--------- ....................... --------------------- ------------------------ - -- 1-6 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors ......................... ................................. 1-4 08310 Access Doors and Panels ---------------------•------------------------------..................-- 1-2 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors - 1-2 08411 - Aluminum -Framed Storefronts____________________________________________________________________________________ 08710 Door Hardware................................................................... - ___1-5 1-4 08744 Automatic Door Operators ............................. 1-2 08771 Key Storage and Control Equipment__________________________________________________________ 1 08800 _ Glazing... ............. ........... .------............................ DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits ................. --.................... -........................................ 1-4 09300 Tile ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5 09510 Acoustical Ceilings--------------- ---------------------------------------- ----------------- - 1-3 09650 - Resilient Flooring.---•---------------------------------------------------- •----............. - - 1-4 09680 - Carpet_______________ 09900 Paints and Coatings.... .......... .............................................1-7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments ........................... ............. ........................ 1-2 10350 Flagpoles--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 10440 Interior Signage............................... --------- .......- .........................-1-3 10520 Fire Protection Specialties------------------ ----------- --------- ....... -1-2 10810 Toilet Accessories 1-2 DIVISION 1 1 - EQUIPMENT 11132 Projection Screens,________ DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12481 Floor Mats_---_._- 12497 Vertical Louver DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used V F 2001-59 00010-3 1-2 VAUGHT • FRYE I ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESK 401 Wm Maueam Avenue Spite 200 Fort CDIIM fix 970224.1662 phone 970224.1191 w vmgh 11 a �t! o< g< wq �o NF OF 119-J 1 „O•A 1 .9-1„O,,£ 1 BREAK ROOM # 121 SCALE: NTS TRAFFIC ADDENDUM # 2 OPERATIONS Project number FACILITY Date 03/11/02 Ref. Sheet# A6.1 .w. W LL. Z Z W 0 16535 Emergency Lighting Equipment .................... --1-2 16722 Fire Alarm System ................. ........................... ........... ............ 1-4 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VF 2001-59 00010-5 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 1.01 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The Traffic Operations Facility consists of an approximately 9,600 square foot building, located on Lot 5A of the East Vine Streets Facility development, at the southeast corner of East Vine Drive and Linden Street. The Work will include sitework, utilities, landscaping and an underground irrigation system, on approximately 3.25 acres. The building is a steel -framed structure, with concrete foundations and slab -on -grade floor system. Exterior to be brick and CMU veneer over metal stud or CMU back-up. Interior finishes will include painted gypsum board partitions, carpet, VCT, suspended acoustical board ceilings, wood and hollow metal doors and frames. 1.02 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS A. Division 1 - General Requirements govern work under all divisions of Specifications. B. Fees and Permits: 1. The following fees and permits shall be paid by the Contractor: a. Building Permit. b. Plan Check Fee. 2. The following fees and permits shall be paid by the Owner: All other development and plant investment fees. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA A. Drawings: See index on Drawings. B. Specifications: Traffic Operations Facility, Fort Collins, Colorado, dated February 8, 2002. C. Addenda: All addenda issued prior to bidding. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Failure to Visit Site: Will not relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications without additional cost to Owner. 1.05 CONTRACTS A. Single Contract: All work indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications will be executed under one prime contract between Owner and General Contractor. VF 2001-59 01100-1 1.06 WORK BY OTHERS A. Coordination and Cooperation: Coordinate with the work by others in the review of shop drawings and the exact location of rough -ins for their equipment. Cooperate in the scheduling of work and in the use of space. Furnish and install related items such as rough -in, blocking and structural supports, grouting, electrical rough -in, mechanical rough -in, etc. B. Work by Others to be Executed During or After Completion of this Contract: l . Site grading. 2. Asphalt paving. 3. Pavement markings. 4. Office equipment. 5. Furniture. 6. Interior signage, except as specified. 7. Appliances. 8. Exterior bench. -. 9. Site sculpture. 10. Other items indicated to be included in tenant finish or as not in contract (N.I.C.) on Drawings. 1.07 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Operations of Contractor: Limited to areas where work is indicated. See Section 01500 regarding construction fence. 1.08 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate work of various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Equipment: Verify that characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. -� 1. Electrical Requirements: Comply with NEC. C. Spaces: Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize - spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. Finished Areas: In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 01100-2 .y SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Allowances: Include in contract sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents or agreed upon in writing. Designate in construction progress schedule, delivery dates for products specified under each allowance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions, Article 3.8 Allowances. 1.03 ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances: 1. Cost of the product to the Contractor or subcontractor, less any applicable trade discounts. 2. Delivery to site. 3. Applicable taxes. 4. Labor to install only when allowance includes installation. B. Contractors Costs Included in Contract Sum: 1. Labor for installation and finishing, unless allowance includes installation. 2. Handling at site including unloading, uncrating and storage. 3. Protection from elements and from damage. 4. Other expenses required to complete installation. 5. Contractors and subcontractors overhead and profit. 1.04 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWANCES A. Architect's Duties: l . Consult with Contractor in consideration of products and suppliers or installers. 2. Make selection in consultation with Owner. 3. Transmit Owner's decision to Contractor. 4. Prepare change orders. B. Contractor's Duties: l . Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect. 3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect. 4. Notify Architect promptly of any: a. Reasonable objections Contractor may have against any supplier, or party under consideration for installation. b. Effect on the construction schedule anticipated by selections under consideration. VF 2001-59 01210-1 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION A. Purchase: On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples as required. B. Delivery: Make arrangements for delivery. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. C. Installation: Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification sections. 1.06 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS A. Adjustment: Should net cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, contract sum will be adjusted accordingly by change order. 1.07 . SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Section 04810: Allow sum of $350/M for purchase and delivery of face brick. B. Section 09680: Allow sum of $25.00/SY for purchase and delivery of carpet. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01210-2 SECTION 01312 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES A. Preconstruction and Contract Accomplishment Conference: Meeting will be scheduled by Architect after Notice of Award. l . Contractor will submit executed bonds and insurance certificates and will sign contract at this meeting. 2. Administrative requirements such as products lists, schedule of values, payment applications, progress charts, change order procedures and project closeout will be reviewed in detail. 3. Tax exempt status procedures will also be discussed. B. Site Mobilization Conference: Meeting will be scheduled by Architect at site immediately prior to Contractor move -in. Representatives of Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors, Geotechnical Engineer, Owner, Architect and Architect's Consultants will be present. Job site procedures to include following items will be discussed: 1. Procedures for maintaining project record documents. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls. 4. Temporary utilities. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Materials testing. 7. Services of the Geotechnical Engineer. 8. Requirements of start-up trades. 9. Building layout. 10. Communications with Architect's consultants. 11. Access to and use of site in relation to continued use of existing facilities. 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Meetings: Contractor will schedule regular periodic meetings at Contractors job site field office. Representatives of Owner and Architect will be invited to attend. Also invited as appropriate to items under discussion, will be selected subcontractors and suppliers and Architect's consultants. Following items will be discussed: 1. Review of work progress since previous meetings. 2. Field observations, problems, conflicts. 3. Problems which impede construction schedule. 4. Review of off -site fabrication, delivery schedules. 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revisions to construction schedule. 7. Plan progress, schedule during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of schedules. 9. Maintenance of quality standards. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Review proposed changes for effect on other trades, construction schedule and completion date. VF 2001-59 01312-1 SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 7.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. List of Subcontractors: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. General Conditions. B. Products List: 1. Section 01600 Product Requirements C. Progress Schedule: 1. General Conditions. D. Schedule of Values: 1. General Conditions. E. Performance Bond/Payment Bond: 1. General Conditions. Insurance Certificates: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions. G. Applications for Payment: 1. General Conditions. H. Project Record Documents: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. Warranties: 1. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. J. Final Paperwork: 1. General Conditions. 2. Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submittals: Made early enough to account for processing described below and reasonable period for review by Architect and Architect's consultants. Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1. Allow at least 10 days for initial review for Submittal submitted per Submittal Schedule. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals or if submittal is unscheduled. Architect will promptly advise the Subcontractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. VF 2001-59 01330-1 2. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. 3. Allow at least 10 days for reprocessing each submittal. _ 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. _ C. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate submittal number and the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of supplier. " d. Name of manufacturer. e. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. D. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification stamp on each submittal certifying that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 2. Contractor: Review submittals for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with Contract Documents. Stamp with Contractor's stamp/date. Signature of individual who reviewed shop drawings is required below Contractor's stamp. 3. Architect/Engineer will review each scheduled submittal once. Items submitted without sufficient information, or found to be inadequately prepared will be rejected. For submittal and/or Shop Drawings rejected/resubmitted items will occur at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates, payable by the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer based upon the Architect/Engineer's time records for the r duplicated submittal review service. 4. For submittals where action and return is required or requested: Contractor shall review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return within time period specified herein. VF 2001-59 01330-2 a. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. b. Submittals for information, closeout documents, record documents and other submittals for similar purposes: no action will be taken. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Schedule: In form of chart and indicate start and completion of each of elements on Schedule of Values. l . Completion Time: As specified in Agreement. Revise schedule when completion time is revised by change order. Schedule Submittal: Within ten days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of preliminary construction schedule. l . Within 10 days after receipt of review comments on preliminary schedule, submit one reproducible and four prints of construction schedule. 2. With each monthly application for payment, submit four prints of updated construction schedule indicating actual work progress in comparison to scheduled progress. C. Estimated Payments: Prepare and submit estimate of partial payments as reflected by estimated work progress with submittal of construction schedule. D. Monthly Reports: l . With each monthly application for payment, submit itemized report of delivery status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and material, including shop drawings and status of shop and field fabricated work. 2. If completion of any part of work or delivery of materials is behind construction schedule, submit plan for bringing work up to schedule. 3. Owner shall have right to withhold progress payments for work if Contractor fails to update and submit progress schedule and reports as specified. E. Contractor's Responsibility: Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be usurpation of Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of Contract Documents. 1.04 SUBMITTALS LIST, SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. Submittal: Within 30 days after award of contract, and before any items are submitted for review, submit to Architect two copies of submittal list and schedule. B. Schedule: Compile complete schedule of all submittals anticipated to be made during progress of work. 1. Include list of each type of item for which Contractors drawings, shop drawings, product data, Certificates of Compliance, samples, warranties or other types of submittals are required. 2. On acceptance by Architect, Contractor shall adhere to schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted. VF 2001-59 01330-3 C. Code Designation: On schedule, designate each item with number code utilizing specification section five digit numbers. 1. Each Submittal: Marked with same code designation. D. Coordination: Coordinate schedule with subcontractors and materials suppliers. E. Revisions: Revise and update schedule on monthly basis as necessary to reflect conditions and sequences. Promptly submit any revised schedules to Architect for review. Transmittals: Include transmittal letter with each submittal, identify item by above code " designation and reference to specification section. Use separate transmittal for each submittal. 1. Each Submittal: Have chronological submittal number. 2. Resubmittals: Have original submittal number and letter in alphabetical order for ^ each resubmiteal. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Submittals: Broken down into parts so that individual parts can be resubmitted without confusion. G. Deviations: Clearly mark and note any deviations from Contract Documents in submittals. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Make particular note of field -measured dimensions, as -built conditions, and conditions requiring special coordination with other contractors and requirements of activities of Owner. B. Subcontractor: Submit one reproducible tracing and three prints per shop drawing sheet and specified number of samples to Contractor. C. Contractor: 1. Review shop drawings for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with Contract Documents. Make notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and prints. 2. Stamp with Contractor's stamp/date. Signature of individual who reviewed shop drawings is required below Contractor's stamp. 3. Print as required for Contractor's record. 4. Send reproducible tracings and three prints to Architect. 5. Shop drawings not stamped and signed by Contractor will be returned. D. Architect: 1. Check drawings by making notes and corrections on reproducible tracings and - prints, stamp "No Exceptions Taken", "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected", etc. as required. 2. In event that shop drawings require consultant's check, route reproducible and print through consultant and back to Architect as necessary. Consultant will retain one H. set of prints. 3. Retain one set of prints for record and transmit one set to Owner if required. 4. Return marked reproducibles to Contractor. VF 2001-59 01330-4 WOMEN 125 VAUGHT • FRYE A Af ARCHITECTS _ARC NIT ECT URE INTERIOR OESI RESTROOM ENTRY AREA SCALE: NTS TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM # 2 Ref. Sheet # A6.1 Checked by JR CEILING LEVEL 1 109'-0" ILE THRO UG H ILET RM5. IA9.1 TOP OF 5LA6 .w E. Contractor: 1. Send reproducible tracings to subcontractor. F. Subcontractor: l . Print necessary copies for record, distribution, etc. G. Resubmittal: In event shop drawings have to be resubmitted to Architect, original reproducible tracings and prints shall be returned directly to Contractor. Subcontractor shall make his corrections and re-route new reproducible tracings and prints as outlined above. H. References: Reference shop drawings to applicable Drawings and specification sections to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Subcontractor: Submit six copies of brochure material and any required samples. B. Routing: Routing will be as indicated above for shop drawings with Architect and Engineer retaining three copies for file and returning three copies to Contractor for his file and distribution to subcontractor as applicable. C. Reference: Reference product data to applicable Drawings and specification sections, and to UL Design number when product is a component of a UL classified assembly, to facilitate ease and accuracy of checking. D. When contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to submittal, clearly indicate which portion of contents is being submitted for review. 1.07 JOB SITE DOCUMENTS A. Documents: Keep complete set of accepted shop drawings or product data at jobsite. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field Measurements: Responsibility of Contractor. 1.09 SAMPLES A. Sample requirements for materials where colors, textures or finishes are subject to selection by Architect are indicated in their respective Sections of the Specifications. Certain other samples may also be requested for use by Architect in preparation of color and material sample presentations for Owner. B. Submittal: Promptly after receipt of checklist, assemble and deliver to Architect complete collection of required samples. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples in quantity.which is required to be returned plus one which will be retained by Architect. C. Samples: Bear tag or label providing following information: 1. Project name and location. VF 2001-59 01330-5 2. Manufacturer, supplier. 3. Name, finish, and composition of material. 4. Location of where material is to be used. 5. Specification section number. Labels: Large enough for acceptance stamp. D. Selection: Upon receipt of complete collection of samples, Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make selections and prepare and deliver to Contractor schedule covering items subject to selection. Architect reserves right not to make individual determination or selections until all samples of all materials are submitted. 1.10 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE A. Certificates: 1. Where Certificates of Compliance are specified, show on each certification name and location of work, name and address of Contractor, quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate applies, and name of manufacturer. 2. Certification: In form of letter or company standard forms. 3. Certificates: Signed by officer of manufacturer. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: Show date of testing, specified requirements for which testing was performed, and results of tests. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01330-6 SECTION 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PERMITS AND FEES A. See General Conditions and Section 01100 Summary. 1.02 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Compliance: All contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect at time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to following: Applicable local codes and ordinances Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition with Fort Collins Amendments Uniform Mechanical Code, 1997 Edition Uniform Plumbing Code, 1997 Edition Governing fire department requirements Utility company requirements State of Colorado Energy Standards State Department of Labor Requirements State Department of Health Requirements National Fire Protection Association Standards State and Federal Safety and Health Laws NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Americans with Disabilities Act/Accessibility Standards American National Standards Institute A117.1-1992 B. Discrepancies: If discrepancies occur between Contract Documents, local codes, local utility requirements, etc., most stringent requirements shall apply. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01410-1 SECTION 01421 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawing or Schedule Abbreviations: Drawings or schedules. 1.02 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION A. These Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. 1. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall', "in conformity therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the Drawings", "a", "the", are intentional. 2. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference. 3. Supply words "shall be" or "shall' by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. 4. Supply words "on the Drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. 5. 'Provide' shall mean furnish and install. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Reference in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized authorities and other institutions include following organizations which are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations or acronyms: AA Aluminum Association AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM ASTM International AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWS American Welding Society BIA Brick Industry Association CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. CDOT Colorado Department of Transportation CEMA Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association CRA California Redwood Association VF 2001-59 01421-1 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) DFPA Douglas Fr Plywood Association FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association ICBO International Conference of Building Officials MIA Marble Institute of America MIL Military Specification MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association -' NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association NPVLMA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturer's Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association _ NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute _ PS Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPA Southern Pine Association SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) SSPC Society for Protective Coatings SWI Steel Window Institute TCA Tile Council of America TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association UBC Uniform Building Code _ UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. WCLA West Coast Lumbermen's Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WRCLA Western Red Cedar Lumberman Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Association VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 01421-2 A �r SECTION 01423 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or federal standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of Architect's consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Effective Date: Date of standard is that in effect as of documents date except when specific date is specified or when standard is part of applicable code which includes edition date. C. Copies: when required by individual sections, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site during work. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01423-1 SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Cost of Testing: General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 TESTING - GENERAL A. Contractor: Provide equipment and facilities as required, subject to Architect's review, for conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. 1. Do'not use materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have been made and materials or equipment found to be acceptable. 2. Do not incorporate any product into work which becomes unfit for use after acceptance thereof. B. Testing: Materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their preparation or use. Furnish required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of placing of orders to permit testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after being received at site of work. C. Tests: Made by accredited testing laboratory selected by Owner. Except as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of materials and laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with latest standards and tentative methods of ASTM. 1. Specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is included under applicable sections of Specifications. - 2. Any modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures included for specific materials under their respective sections in Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures. 1.03 TESTS PAID FOR BY OWNER A. Control Tests of Fill and Backfill: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 02300 Earthwork. B. Control Test of Asphalt Paving Base and Finish Courses: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 02730 Aggregate Surfacing and Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. C. Control Tests of Concrete Work: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. D. Control Tests of Masonry Mortar and Grout: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Sections 04070 Masonry Grout and 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. E. Control Tests of Welding: At such times and in such numbers as specified in Section 05120 Structural Steel; also the following sections: 1. 05213 Open Web Steel Joists. V F 2001-59 01450-1 2. 05310 Steel Deck. 3. 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 1.04 OTHER TESTING A. Following Testing: Performed at expense of Contractor: 1. Other Tests: Any other tests required by Contract Documents not listed in article above. 2. Any additional tests required because of any tests that fail subject to following conditions: a. Quantity and Nature of Tests: Determined by Architect. b. Tests: Taken in presence of Architect. c. Proof of Noncompliance: Contractor liable for corrective action which Architect feels is required including complete removal and replacement of - defective material. 3. Material Substitution: Any tests of material or equipment offered as substitute for specified item on which test may be required in order to prove its compliance with Specifications. B. Contractor: May have tests performed on material and equipment for his own information and job control so long as Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials. 1.05 TEST REPORTS A. Reports of tests made by testing laboratories shall be distributed by testing laboratory as follows: 1 Copy - Contractor 1 Copy - Applicable Supplier or Subcontractor 1 Copy - Owner 1 Copy - Applicable Engineer 1 Copy - Architect Other Copies - As Directed 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM — A. Quality Control: Establish system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work, including that of subcontractors, to ensure conformance to Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification. 1. Control System: Establish for all construction except where Contract Documents provide for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories and engineers ^ employed by Owner. _.. 2. Control System: Specifically include all testing required by various sections of Specifications. B. Quality Control System: Means by which Contractor assures himself that construction complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 1. Controls: Adequate to cover all construction operations and keyed to proposed construction schedule. VF 2001-59 01450-2 C. Records: Maintain correct records on appropriate form for all inspections and tests performed, instructions received from Architect and actions taken as result of those instructions. 1. Records: Include evidence that required inspections or tests have been performed (including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken. 2. Document inspections and tests as required by each section of Specifications. 1.07 SPECIAL INSPECTION A. Regulatory Requirements: If required by the Building Official, special inspections will be provided in accordance with Section 1701 of the 1997 UBC. B. Special inspection services will be paid by Owner. C. Special Inspector: Qualified person acceptable to Building Official with jurisdiction over this project to inspect particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection. D. Special Inspection Reports 1. Distribution: a. Building official: One b. Architect: One c. Structural Engineer: One d. Contractor: One 2. Final Report: Special Inspector will submit and distribute signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with the approved Drawings and Specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the UBC as adopted by the local building code jurisdiction. E. Work To Be Inspected By Special Inspector: See Divisions 2 through 16 specific requirements. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01450-3 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Service and Distribution: 1. Provide temporary electrical service to site including installation of meter. 2. Provide temporary wiring, outlets, lights, etc. from load side of meter as required for construction power and lighting during construction period. 3. Properly ground service and distribution system in accordance with NEC. Provide ground fault interrupters as required by code. 4. Remove temporary electrical service and wiring upon completion of work. B. Temporary Power Distribution: 1. Provide, install, and maintain temporary overhead wiring to building and temporary loop providing temporary power and lighting service as specified. a. Provide minimum of one double duplex 120V outlet for every 100 lineal feet of temporary loop. b. Each Contractor: Furnish extension cords necessary to convey electricity from temporary loop outlets to locations of work. c. Special Power Required for Welders or Other Special Equipment: Provided by contractor requiring such power. 2. Distribution equipment and wiring devices for temporary power and lighting need not be new, however, installation shall conform to safe general practice as required by OSHA. C. Temporary Lighting: l . Provide one light for every interior room regardless of square footage area except closets and pipe chases. In larger rooms, provide one light for every 750 square feet. 2. Each Contractor: Provide plug-in portable lights as required for task lighting. D. Use of Permanent Systems 1. After work is completed to extent that permanent electric service into building is installed and permanent outlets are available, permanent system may be used as necessary for power and light. 2. Be responsible for any damage to permanent wiring or fixtures as result of temporary use. 3. Permanent branch circuit wiring may be used to supply pigtail lights if protected by properly sized circuit breaker or fuse. Do not use permanent receptacles for construction power. Replace receptacles and device plates showing wear or abuse. 4. Provide lamps necessary to temporarily light work in permanently installed fixtures. 5. Clean permanently installed light fixtures which are used for temporary lighting during construction using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Remove lamps used temporarily in permanent fixtures and replace with new lamps at completion of work. VF 2001-59 01500-1 RECEPTION DESK m � 7 a � hNUN0. SCALE:. NTS VAUGHT • FRYE TRAFFIC AADDENDUM # 2 .7 OPERATIOVNS prof d umber ARCHITECTS FACILITI D 03/11/02 co" 80521 Rom. Sheet # A6.1 AD-10 191 E. Electrical Consumption: Pay for electricity used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion. 1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat necessary for execution of work. Install, maintain and operate temporary heating apparatus in manner to facilitate work, so work r can continue and so finished work will not be damaged. B. Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures necessary for holding temporary heat for masonry and concrete work, and for thawing frozen ground. C. Use of Permanent System: 1. After building is entirely permanently enclosed, glazing of exterior openings -- completed, permanent or temporary doors on exterior openings and permanent heating system installed and capable of being adequately controlled, permanent heating system may be used to provide heat for building. _ 2. In using permanent heating system, assume complete responsibility for its proper operation and for any damage which may occur to heating apparatus or any ^� phase of work except such wear and tear which would ordinarily result from normal usage. 3. At completion and before work is accepted by Owner, clean air vents and coils, clean cleanable filters and replace replacement air filters. 4. Pay for gas and electricity used in connection with operation of permanent system up to date of Notice of Acceptance of entire project by Owner. 5. If permanent heating system is used during construction, Contractor shall remain responsible for full mechanical guarantee from date of Notice of Acceptance of total project by Owner. 1.03 TEMPORARY WATER A. Temporary Water: Provide as required for execution of work. 1. Provide service, temporary connections, plumbing, piping, etc. necessary to convey same to places needed. 2. Pay for water used through temporary and permanent systems up to date of Notice of Substantial Completion. 1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: Provide and maintain, in neat and sanitary condition, adequate _. chemical toilet facilities for use of employees engaged on work, in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances. — 1.05 FIELD OFFICE AND OTHER TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A. Field Office: Provide and maintain suitable temporary field office. 1. Telephone Service: Install telephone in field office. Pay for installation, ' maintenance, removal and other charges for use of telephone. 2. Make office and telephone available for use by Owner and Architect. VF 2001-59 01500-2 B. Temporary Structures: Provide temporary structures and storage areas as required. 1. Remove offices and other temporary structures from site upon completion of work. 1.06 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for protection of public and general protection of workmen on project. l . Provide warning signs against hazards created by such items as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, window openings, stairways and falling materials. a. Danger lights: Keep lighted each night from sundown to sunrise. 2. Provide and maintain fire extinguishers and active fire hydrants where required. Maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction. 3. Provide temporary walks, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and signals, etc. required for work by applicable safety laws and building codes. 4. Maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout term of work. Remove at completion of work. Repair and replace work damaged by temporary protective facilities. B. Each Subcontractor: 1. If in performance of his subcontract, it becomes necessary, convenient or advisable to remove, replace or interfere with any safety devices or controls installed by Contractor or another subcontractor; subcontractor shall replace or restore such devices at his expense. 2. In event such safety devices or controls are not so replaced or restored, subcontractor shall reimburse Contractor for doing so for subcontractor's account, or by deduct change order to his subcontract. 1.07 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS A. Scaffolding: Provide as necessary for work. B. Runways, Guard Rails, Platforms and Similar Temporary Construction: Provide and maintain for safe performance of contract. 1. Provide facilities of type and arrangement as required for their specific use, substantially constructed, strongly supported, and well secured. 2. Comply with applicable safety laws and codes. 1.08 CLOSURES A. Temporary Closures: Erect over openings when weather conditions render such action necessary for proper installation of work. 7.09 PROTECTION FOR WORK IN PLACE A. Work in Place: When subject to injury because of operations being carried on adjacent, cover, board up, or substantially enclose with adequate protection. l . Block and board heads, jambs and sills of permanent openings used as thoroughfares for introduction of work and materials. VF 2001-59 01500-3 2. Construct forms of protection in manner that, upon completion, entire work will be delivered to Owner in undamaged condition. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Construction Fence: Provide as required for security and the safety of the public. 1. Fence: 6-W high chain link fencing with steel posts 8'-0" o.c. B. Gates: Provide where indicated and required. Keep gates closed after working hours. C. At completion of exterior work (except site development work), remove fences from the site. Patch asphalt damaged by fence posts after removal. _ 1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN " A. Sign: Furnish and install painted project identification sign consisting of 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood with exterior glue on 2x and 4x supporting structure. 1. Exact Design, Text and Colors: Provided by Architect, including name of building and Owner, any emblem selected by Owner, Architect's name, names of Architect's principal consultants, Contractor's name, and names of firms executing _ principal parts of the work. 2. Place in location directed by Architect and maintain for duration of project. 1.12 ACCESS A. Limit access to necessary routes to perform the work. 1. Coordinate access with Owner. 1.13 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Noise: Minimize noise near residential areas. Properly muffle equipment. Do not operate noisy equipment after hours. C. Dust: Control when construction procedures result in dust which becomes nuisance to Owner, private property or traffic. D. Water: Control flow of water at site to prevent damage to Owner's private and public facilities. E. Debris: Continually police work to prevent collection and scattering of debris uncovered, loosened, or caused by prosecution of work. F. Pollution: Take precautions to prevent spilling and littering of water polluting substances. Do not dump any foreign materials into sewer and storm sewer collection systems. 1. Burning of debris or any other air polluting methods or equipment not allowed. G. Erosion: Provide facilities necessary to prevent erosive damage to Owner's property and to adjacent properties. VF 2001-59 01500-4 1.14 CLEAN UP A. General: Maintain project and site in clean and orderly condition. Periodically clean interior areas. Regularly remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site. B. Each Subcontractor: Cleanup work on daily basis. Failure to clean up will result in cleanup by others with such costs being backcharged to Subcontractor by deduct change order to his subcontract. C. Interior Areas: Clean prior to start of finish work and continue cleaning as required. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to newly coated surfaces. D. Final Cleaning: See Section 01741. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01500-5 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions. 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Products: Include material, equipment and systems. 1. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. a. Components of Specified UL Design Assemblies: Products supplied shall be limited to products listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory. See Section 01423. 2. Components Supplied in Quantity within a Specification Section: Same and interchangeable. 3. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. B. Regulatory Requirements: Material suppliers are responsible to verify that each material and product proposed for use in this project, whether named in the Specifications or by a request for substitution, is approved by the City of Fort Collins Building Permits and Inspections Division. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transportation: Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry. B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. C. Inspection: Inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 1. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Each Subcontractor: Be responsible for hoisting and stocking of his materials and equipment on site. l . Material Stocked on Floors: Palletized or packaged in appropriate containers on floor by floor basis. 2. Material Stocking: Coordinated with Contractor's superintendent. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's recommendations. VF 2001-59 01600-1 Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well drained area; prevent mixing With foreign matter. B. Exterior Storage Protection: 1. Fabricated Products: Place on sloped supports above ground. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Inspection: Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under recommended conditions. 1.05 INSTALLATION A. Pre -Installation Conferences: Hold pre -installation meeting at site before installation of each unit of work which requires coordination with other units of work. Installer and _ manufacturer's representatives of particular work and affected work shall attend. 1. Notify Architect of meeting time. - 2. Discuss coordination of work with other work including shop drawings, product data, possible conflicts, compatibility concerns, acceptability of substrates, protection, etc. _. 3. Record significant discussions at each meeting, agreements, disagreements and final plan of action. Distribute record to those in attendance and to Architect. 4. Do not proceed with unit of work until pre -installation meeting is successfully concluded with agreed upon plan of action. ^ B. Inspection of Substrates: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work and conditions under which work is to be performed. 1. Installer: Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to satisfaction of installer. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements specified or indicated. 1. Notify Architect of any conflicts between manufacturers instructions or recommendations and requirements specified or indicated. D. Attachment: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work. 1. Secure work true to line and level, and within specified tolerances, or if not ^ specified, industry recognized tolerances. 2. Allow for expansion and building movement. 3. Exposed Joints: a. Provide uniform joint width. b. Arrange joints to obtain best visual effect. c. Refer questionable visual -effect choices to Architect for final decision. E. Measurements and Dimensions: Recheck as integral step of starting each installation. VF2001-59 01600-2 Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of work under conditions to ensure best possible results in coordination with entire project. l . Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 2. Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests to minimize necessity of uncovering work for those purposes. G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized standard mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Architect for final decision. 1.06 PRODUCTS LIST A. Submittal: Within 30 days after Notice of Award, transmit three copies of list of major products which are proposed for installation, including name of manufacturer. 1. Tabulate products by Specifications section number, title, and article number. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. B. Architect: Will promptly reply in writing whether there is reasonable objection to listed items. Failure to object to listed item shall not constitute waiver of requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 PRODUCTS OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Substitution Paragraph: Products of named manufacturers meeting Specifications. Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of Specifications for specified product. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers meeting Specifications; no options, no substitutions. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of Specifications for specified product. D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option, no substitution allowed. 1.08 LIMITATION ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding Period: Requests for substitutions will not be considered until after the effective date of the Agreement. See Instructions to Bidders. B. After Bidding Period: Submit requests to Architect allowing adequate time for review after effective date of the Agreement and in compliance with requirements of this section. VF 2001-59 01600-3 C. Substitutions: 1. Will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 2. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance. 3. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted provide specified product. 4. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions. 1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submittal : Submit two copies of each request. Submit separate request for each substitution. ' 1. Identify products by Specifications section and article numbers. _ 2. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of products, and model or catalog number. 3. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate. B. Documentation: Document each request with complete data substantiating _ compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents: 1. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01330. — 2. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variation, and reference to specification section and article numbers. 3. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and specified product. 4. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 5. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work or products. — 6. Reference UL Fire Resistance Directory design number if applicable. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION A. Request for Substitution: Representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product: 1. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 2. - Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes _ as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 3. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent. B. Replacement: If substituted products do not meet or exceed above requirements, whether before, during, or after incorporated into work, Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, replace substituted products with products originally specified. 1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Architect: Will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. VF 2001-59 01600-4 1. If accepted by Architect, products proposed for substitution will be accepted subject to modifications by manufacturer, if necessary, to meet detailed requirements of Drawings and Specifications. 2. Architect will not make exhaustive attempt to determine that products proposed for substitution are equal to, or can be modified in order to be equal to specified products. B. Architect's Acceptance: Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. C. For Accepted Products: Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples in accordance with Section 01330. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 01600-5 OCT87 SECTION 01656 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER LINES PART i - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the filling and disinfection of potable water. distribution lines. B. The City shall operate existing valves to prevent the disinfectant solution from flowing back into the line supplying the water or into adjacent parts of the in-service distribution system. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference the Forwards to AWWA B300-80 and AWWA C651-86. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hypochlorites. I. Reference AWWA B300-80. B. Adhesive. I. Permatex No. 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The contractor shall flush and satisfactorily disinfect new water lines prior to placing them in service, in accordance with AWWA C651-86. B. Filling pipe: 1. The City shall operate existing valves to fill the pipe, open air blow -offs, and hydrants. 2. If permanent air vents are not available, the contractor shall install corporation stops at high points in the water line, in order to evacuate air. a. All Corporation stops, which were installed to facilitate evacuation of air from the water main, shall -be removed and plugged after the water main is filled. 01656-1 SPALAN7 C LUUNN PMLA5T LAP WAR LauHx Utinu I rne' rae• 1D aoLUH N ►AS t PMLh57 LAP DtTAII ENTRY COLUMN c a°r M 57PPCT. *RTPU55 LpIHtFTW L FAMA57 MUN N GAP 56710 HM76R s, r1m rat muHP 57WILr,MR 7YTt a SUPP [RT P I SIPOLE wY111t PNCK MUHN WRAP I a Ila"l'I a • PN'LAST ft c7►Ast G AP 5TIN HIM7AR PL= TD H ATCH PURPING r Dr SLAY - PItN rl71NPATILM Rt 9152i DETAILS 1 SCALE: NTS p arum N stL71CM VAUGHT • FRYE TRAFFIC ADDENDUM # 2 AT, OPERATIONS Projectnumb=2wi A R C H I T E C T S FACILITY ore11 ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESIGNRef Sheet#401 WestMoumam Avenue Suire200 FortCo1ffi&C08052f>oc97WU.1662 phw 97Q224.1191 wwwvaulufiChecked by 3.2 PRELIMINARY FLUSHING A. The City shall flush pipelines at a minimum velocity of 2.5 ft./sec., in order to remove foreign material prior to disinfection. 1. Preliminary flushing shall not be performed if the tablet method of disinfection is approved by the City. 3.3 METHODS A. General. 1. The City shall: a. Determine the disinfection method to be used. b. Approve the method for disposal of flushing water. c. Sample and test flows from the pipe system extremities until clear, potable water is obtained. B. Tablet method. — 1. The tablet method consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules and tablets in the water main during construction, and filling the main with potable water when installation is completed. a. The tablet method shall not be used if trench water or foreign _ material has entered the water line, or if the water temperature -• is below forty-one degrees Fahrenheit (five degrees Celsius). i. If trench water or foreign material has entered the water line, or if the water temperature is below forty-one degrees Fahrenheit, the continuous -feed method of chlorination shall be used. b. The tablet method shall not be used for extensions which are _ over 1000 feet in length, or for water lines which are larger than 12-inches in diameter. c. Calcium hypochlorite granules shall be placed at the upstream end of the first section of pipe, at the upstream end of each _ branch main, and at 500 ft. intervals. i. Reference Table 1, AWWA C651-86. - d. 5-gram calcium hypochlorite tablets shall be placed in each section of pipe, hydrant, hydrant lateral, and'other appurtenances. i. Reference Table 2, AWWA C651-86. 01656-2 e. Tablets and granules shall be placed in sufficient number and amount to produce a minimum chlorine concentration in the treated water of 50 milligrams per liter. f. Except in hydrants and joints, tablets shall be attached with an approved adhesive, and shall be on the top of the interior of - the pipe in such a manner that there is no adhesive on the tablet except on the broad side of the tablet next to the pipe surface. i. Reference paragraph 2.1.B. g. The City shall introduce water into the pipes at a velocity of less than 1 ft./sec. h. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the lines for a minimum of 24 hours, at which time the treated water must contain no less than 25 milligrams per liter of chlorine throughout the entire length of the main. C. Continuous -feed method. 1. The continuous -feed method of disinfecting water mains consists of placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the main during construction, completely filling the main to remove all air pockets, flushing the completed main to remove the particulates, and filling the main with potable water chlorinated so that after a 24 hour holding period in the main, there will be a free chlorine residual of not less than 10 milligrams per liter. a. Calcium hypochlorite granules shall be placed in the pipe sections during construction. i. Reference Section 3.3.B.l.c. b. Preliminary flushing shall occur. i. Reference Section 3.2 and AWWA C651-86. c. Chlorinated water shall be introduced into the water lines at a constant, measured rate so that the chlorine concentration is maintained at a minimum of 25 milligrams per liter of free chlorine.. i. The entire main shall be filled with the chlorine solution. ii. Reference Table.4 of AWWA C651-86. d. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main for a minimum of 24 hours, at which time the treated water must contain no less than 10 milligrams per liter of free chlorine residual throughout the entire length of the'main. 01656-3 D. Slug Method. 1. The slug method of disinfecting water lines shall be used only at the direction of the Utility. a. Reference AWWA C651-86. 3.4 FINAL FLUSHING A. After chlorination, the City shall assist the contractor to flush the chlorinated water from the water lines until the chlorine concentration .is no higher than that prevailing in the system, or is less than 1 _ milligram per liter, whichever is higher. 3.5 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTS _ A. The Utility's Water Quality Lab shall collect samples from the pipeline after final flushing, and prior to placing water lines in service, to test for bacteriological quality to show the absence of coliform — organisms. 1. The Water Quality Lab shall be given a minimum of 24 hours'advance _ notice, prior to collecting samples. B. The number and frequency of samples shall be determined by the Utility's Water Quality Lab based upon AWWA C651-86. 1. In no case shall the number of samples be less than one (1). 3.6 REPETITION OF PROCEDURE A. If the initial disinfection, or subsequent disinfections, fail to _ produce satisfactory samples, the main shall be reflushed and resampled. If the samples are still not satisfactory, the main shall be - rechlorinated by the continuous -feed or the slug method of chlorination until satisfactory results are obtained. — B. If the residual is less than 25 milligrams per liter, as stated in Paragraph 3.3, the water lines shall be rechlorinated by the - continuous -feed or slug method of chlorination and retested. 01656-4 OCT87 SECTION 01666 TESTING PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the hydrostatic testing of water distribution lines. B. Once the pipeline has been filled and disinfected, and backfilling has been completed and approved, a pressure test shall be conducted. 1. The contractor shall provide all equipment and personnel to perform the hydrostatic test. a. Test equipment shall be able to maintain a continuous internal pipe pressure of 150 psi. and accurately measure leakage from the pipe over a 2 hour, minimum test period. b. The maximum allowable pressure gauge increment shall be 5 psi. c. A water meter shall be used to measure the amount of water used in pressurizing the system. 2. The City will record times, leakage readings and pressure over the test period. C. Testing shall not occur until at least 7 days have elapsed since the last concrete thrust restraint was cast. 1. A minimum of 72 hours shall elapse if high -early -strength cement is used. D. Testing shall not occur until after the pipeline has been chlorinated and flushed. E. Pipe shall remain filled with water for a minimum of 24 hours prior to the hydrostatic pressure test. . F. Unless prior permission is given by the City, the hydrostatic pressure test shall be performed against all valves within the new piping system. 1.2 PRESSURE TEST A. "Leakage" is the quantity of water that must be added to the pipeline to maintain a pressure of within 5 psi. of the specified test pressure, after the air has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water. 01666-1 B. Test pressure. 1. For steel pipe, ductile iron pipe, cast iron pipe, and PVC pipe, the -. minimum test pressure shall be 150 psi. 2. A residual pressure of within 5 psi. of the test pressure shall be _ maintained for a minimum of 2 hours. C. The maximum allowable leakage for each test section of ductile iron pipe, cast iron pipe, steel pipe, and PVC pipe is determined by.the following formula and table: 1/2 where: L - maximum allowable leakage, in -" L = ND P gallons. - 7400 N - number of joints in the length of pipeline. D - nominal pipe diameter, in inches. - P = average test pressure during the leakage test, in psi. H = number of test hours. - 1. Reference AWWA C600-77. D. Testing and Leakage. 1. Unless prior written permission is given by the City, a test section ^ shall not be any longer than the length of pipe between adjacent line valves. 2. When testing against existing valves, an additional leakage of -- 0.0078 gal/hour/inch of nominal valve size will be allowed for each closed valve. 3. There will be no additional leakage allowance for resilient seat valves. 4. Testing through fire hydrants shall not be allowed. 01666-2 1.3 PASSING A. If the tests disclose leakage greater than that specified, the defective materials and joints shall be located and repaired. 1. The tests shall be repeated until the leakage is less than the maximum allowed. B. With the exception of obvious leaks, passing of the pressure test shall be on the basis of maximum allowable leakage per section tested. C. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of maximum allowable leakage. 01666-3 SECTION 01722 FIELD ENGINEERING PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Field engineering services required for proper execution and completion of work under this contract. B. Related Sections: 1. Record Documents: Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of surveyor or professional engineer to be employed by Contractor to Architect for acceptance before beginning work at site. 2. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or engineer shall maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. 3. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of work, submit certificate to Architect signed by surveyor or engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance with Contract Documents. Note any items of non-conformance. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Employ land surveyor or professional engineer registered in State of Colorado and acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Surveyor or Engineer: Responsible for location of building and major site elements; establishment of building horizontal and vertical controls; installation of control stakes as required; and final certification that finish grading has been completed within tolerances specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Points: Civil Engineer will identify existing control points and property line stakes indicated on Drawings and site survey. Immediately upon entering project, locate and maintain bench marks and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any errors or inconsistencies to Architect and Civil Engineer before commencing work. VF 2001-59 01722-1 B. Permanent Bench Marks: Surveyor or engineer shall establish minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points. _ C. Batter Boards and Levels: Surveyor or engineer shall stake out building and provide and rigidly set batter boards. 1. Contractor: Remain responsible for their maintenance and accuracy. 2. From permanent bench marks surveyor or engineer shall ascertain grades and levels to building as needed. D. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve monuments, bench marks, property markers, reference points, and stakes. 1. In case of his destruction of these, the Contractor shall be charged with expense of replacement and shall be responsible for an mistake of loss of time that may be caused. " 2. Protect permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or _ disturbed until properly referenced for relocation. 3. Furnish materials and assistance for proper replacement of such monuments or bench marks. E. Layout and Control by Surveyor or Engineer: 1. Building: Establish building horizontal and vertical controls by instrumentation. 2. Site: Establish lines, levels and locations by instrumentation. Set control stakes for finish grading. Reset stakes as required during progress of work. F. Completion: Upon completion of work, surveyor or engineer shall survey site to verify that locations and elevations required by Contract Documents have been achieved within specified tolerances. " G. Each Subcontractor: Provide complete engineering layout for work to be performed under his subcontract, including grades, elevations, and all other engineering required to perform his scope of work. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01722-2 SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: All cutting, fitting and patching including related excavation and backfill, required to complete work and to: l . Make its parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. B. Related Requirements: l . Selective Site Demolition: Section 02223. 2. Excavation and Backfill: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notification of Architect: Notify Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of project. 3. Integrity of effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of products or performance of work. B. Notification: Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect. Do not Proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions. VF 2001-59 01732-1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value and integrity of affected portion of work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. 1. Provide protection from elements for that portion of project which may be exposed by cuffing and patching work. 2. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Provide openings in construction which are required for later work. _ 1. Various Contractors: Be responsible to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed information for openings. 2. In event of failure to supply this advance information, required cutting shall be done only after concurrence of Architect and at expense of negligent party. B. Cutting: 1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other -- work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repairs. 2. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. Comply with Section 02300. 3. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cuffing and patching for: a. Weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. b. Sight -exposed finished surfaces. 4. Cut asphalt, concrete or masonry using masonry saw or core drill as applicable. Pneumatic tools will not be allowed unless accepted by Architect. C. Fitting: Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. D. Patching: Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material penetrates or passes through fire-resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with cement grout, plaster, or fire-resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor. E. Finishing: Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. 1. Work: Accomplish with mechanics skilled in finish trade. _ 2. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01732-2 3' - 2' 3.-2' 3' - 2' 1 3'K3'Kltk' DOUPLE AWC LE - TAINTEP 12' - 9' II' - 3' NOTE: ALL WELPS TO PE GROUND SMOOTH d ALL STEEL TRU55 MEMDERS TO PE TAINTEP ENTRY CANOPY m DETAIL SCALE: NTS VAUGHT • FRYE TRAFFIC ADDENDUM # 2 OPERATIONS Project nuTT6er ATA7 ARCHITECTS FACILITY Date 03/11/02 ARCHITE$01 WwMowtainARvenue INTERIORSuite 200 F dCollim,008052 Ref. Sheet# A8.1 Sz970224.1662 P1wne970224.1191 3' MTL PECK 1' SQUARE STL PAR STOCK KU55 DEAKW o ELEV. 110-0' TOY OF /RECAST LEY. Y73'-4' w n OT OF SLAP ELEV. 100'-0' AD-12 SECTION 01741 FINAL CLEANING 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Clean-up During Construction: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 CLEANERS A. Cleaners: Professional cleaners with exception of clean-up of site and cleaning specifically assigned to installers and applicators under various sections of Specifications. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, carefully and thoroughly clean all surfaces on exterior: concrete, metal, etc. Glass: Carefully and thoroughly clean both sides of glass and leave absolutely clean and free from paint, labels, grease, dirt, etc. 1. Cleaners: Professional window cleaners. C. Hardware: Clean and polish hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. D. Plumbing: Clean and polish plumbing fixtures, fittings and exposed plated piping. Leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove labels. E. Electrical: Clean and polish electric fixtures, including glassware, switchplates, etc. and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean items of equipment, mechanical, electrical, cabinets, ductwork, etc. G. Floors 1. Resilient Floor Coverings: Mop with warm water and mild detergent as recommended by manufacturer of flooring, then thoroughly machine buff. 2. Carpeting: Vacuum and clean. Remove all spots as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Concrete Floors: Damp mop or scrub concrete floors as required. 4. Floors: Leave them thoroughly clean when building is turned over to Owner's Representative. H. Ceramic Tile: Remove grout haze, observing the manufacturer's recommendations. Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water. VF 2001-59 01741-1 1.04 COMPLETION A. Entire Work Inside and Out: First-class clean condition upon completion before being accepted by Owner. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 01741-2 SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.01 FINAL SITE REVIEW A. Procedures: Following project closeout procedure defines responsibilities of Contractor, Owner and Architect in closing project: Step 1 Contractor advises Architect in writing that he has reached "Substantial Completion" and provides list of items to be completed or corrected. Closeout may be conducted by areas or portions of work if requested by Owner. Step 2 Architect inspects work to determine if it is substantially complete, and issues Certificate of Substantial Completion plus "Punch List' of items to be completed or corrected. Step 3 Contractor completes and/or corrects all punch list items and notifies Architect in writing that his work is ready for final inspection. At this time, final application for payment is submitted. Step 4 Architect makes final inspection. When work is found to be acceptable under Contract Documents, and contract fully performed, Architect will issue final Certificate for Payment. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01770-1 SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Project Site Record Documents: Maintain at project site one record copy of following: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Accepted Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 5. Change Orders 6. Other Modifications to Contract 7. Field Test Records B. Record Documents: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. C. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document'. 1. Mark information with contrasting color using ink. 2. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is recorded. D. Drawings: Record following information on drawings: 1. Depth of foundation elements. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes by change order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract Drawings. E. Specifications: Record following information on specifications: l . Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of products and items of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made after review as specified for drawings above. G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect with transmittal letter containing date, project title and number, Contractor's name and address, title and number of each record document, and certification that each document is complete and accurate. Submittal shall be signed by Contractor. V F 2001-59 01780-1 1.02 FINAL PAPERWORK A. Final Paperwork: Prior to release of final payment, Contractor shall deliver following items to Architect: 1. Inspection Certificates, as applicable. 2. Contractor's Warranty of Materials and Workmanship. 3. Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists, as specified. 4. All Guaranties, Warranties and Submittals, as specified. 5. Receipts for Extra Materials Delivered to the Owner. 6. Miscellaneous Keys, Switches, Etc. 7. Final Application for Payment. `- 8. Consent of Surety (if any) to Final Payment. _ 9. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA Form G-706A). 10. Project Record Documents The above items are described in following articles or applicable sections of the _ Specifications. 1.03 INSPECTION CERTIFICATES Each subcontractor shall, upon completion of the work, secure in triplicate, certificates from any state or local governing bodies having jurisdiction in dictating that the work is in strict accordance with the applicable codes and deliver same to the Contractor for transmittal to the Owner. 1.04 WARRANTIES A. One Year Correction Period: Remedy any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear in work within a period of one year from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. B. Warranty: Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect, in duplicate, a written warranty based on the provisions of the Contract Documents properly signed and notarized. -" 1. Warranty shall be addressed to the Owner. 2. Provide separate written warranties from mechanical and electrical subcontractors. C. Subcontractor Warranties: Include labor and materials signed by manufacturer or subcontractor as case may be and countersigned by subcontractor. l . Address warranty to Owner. 2. Deliver to Architect upon completion of project and before or with submission of request for final payment. D. Extended Warranties: Deliver in duplicate extended warranties as specified and dated from the date of Notice of Substantial Completion and signed by subcontractors and manufacturers. VF 2001-59 01780-2 E. Manufacturer Warranties: Deliver in duplicate manufacturer's warranties as specified and dated from date of Notice of Substantial Completion signed by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's Warranties: Supplement and not replace implied and express warranties provided for by Uniform Commercial Code. Any statements in manufacturer's warranties denying or limiting responsibility for such implied and express warranties shall be void. 1.05 MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES AND WRENCHES A. Submittal: At completion of project, account for all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment keys and wrenches for door closers and panic hardware, keys for electric switches, electrical panels, etc. and turn over to Contractor for transmittal to Owner. 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Equipment Manuals: Upon completion of work, submit three typed and bound copies of operating and maintenance manual or manuals. V/2' x 1 1" in size, to Architect for his acceptance. 1. Manual: Have index with tab dividers for each major equipment section to facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment. 2. Identify data within each section with identification numbers as they appear on Drawings and by specification section and article number. B. Data: Include as minimum following data: 1. Alphabetical list of all system components, with name, address and 24 hour phone number of company responsible for servicing each item during first year of operation. 2. Operating instructions for complete system including: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment. b. Major start, operation and shutdown procedure. 3. Maintenance instructions including: a. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. b. Necessary cleaning, replacement and adjustment schedule. 4. Manufacturer's product data on each piece of equipment including: a. Installation instructions. b. Drawings and Specifications. c. Parts lists. d. Complete wiring diagrams (as -built). e. Marked or changed prints locating all concealed parts and all variation from original system design. 5. Schematic diagram showing component parts of system. 6. Simplified system description and preventative maintenance program. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: See following sections for equipment requiring operating and maintenance data manuals: 1. Planting: Section 02900. 2. Automatic Gate Operators: Section 02828. 3. EPDM Roofing: Section 07538. 4. Sectional Overhead Doors: Section 08361. 5. Door Hardware: Section 08710. VF 2001-59 01780-3 6. Automatic Door Operators: Section 087". 7. Projection Screen: Section 11132. 8. Mechanical: Division 15. 9. Electrical: Division 16. See above sections for specific requirements of operating and maintenance data for each group of equipment. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01780-4 SECTION 01800 FACILITY OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals: Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Mechanical Equipment: Section 15990 Test -Adjust - Balance. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING A. Equipment Demonstrations: Upon completion of work, schedule time with Architect, and instruct Owner's representative(s) once, in presence of Architect and Engineers, on proper operation and maintenance of equipment. l . Participants: As minimum presenting participants shall include Contractor, appropriate subcontractor, equipment manufacturer's representatives, and appropriate sub -subcontractors. 2. Contractor's Representatives: Thorough knowledge of particular installation. 3. Manufacturer's Representative: Thorough understanding of particular equipment. B. Demonstrations: See following sections for equipment requiring demonstrations: 1. Automatic Gate Operators: Section 02825. 2. Security Lock System: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 3. Projection Screen: Section 11132. 4. Mechanical: Division 15. 5. Electrical: Division 16. See above sections for specific requirements of demonstrations for each group of equipment. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE A. General: Include complete service and maintenance calls spaced at maximum of three month intervals plus emergency calls throughout one year correction period. During each service and maintenance call as minimum check: 1. Safety devices on each piece of equipment. 2. Lubrication of all moving parts; lubricate where required. VF 2001-59 01800-1 B. Service and Maintenance: See following sections for equipment requiring maintenance: 1. Mechanical: Division 15. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01800-2 JUNE90 SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 - GENERAL - 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section concerns excavation and trenching; including subsurface drainage, dewatering, preparation of subgrades, pipe bedding, backfilling, compacting, and finish grading for underground pipelines, service lines and appurtenances. B. Reference Detail Drawing No. 1. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Soil compaction tests shall be performed in accordance with: 1. ASTM D698-- Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils. 2. ASTM D4253 & D4254 - Standard Method of Test for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils. B. Construction Staking. I. Construction staking shall be performed under the supervision of a licensed land surveyor. 2. All survey notes and construction staking notes shall be entered into bound, hard cover field books. 3. Adequate staking shall be provided to establish acceptable horizontal and vertical control. 4. Offsets shall be staked so that vertical and horizontal alignment may be checked. 5. All survey data, which is developed by the Contractor or the Developers Engineer in performing surveys which are required by the work, shall be available to the Engineer for examination throughout the construction period. 02221-1 i SEE ACVZ MA I fQ4 r£NEER M,, (4� - x AT fAovaeo I PAD F000a SW &V FQ? i AWMEFQP. VAUGHT • FRYE V F7 ARCHITECTS ECTURE fax 9West ITMampm Avenue Suite 200 INTERIOR fax ortaollirts,lb f76?24.1662 plwne 97027A.1191 www.vaughtfry[ SECTION TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY COL69V. SfF PLAN FQ? W AND S00af fQP E f AND A4Wa? eaTS ---%T ARM2 N SWfRf 7/FS 0 is � Tlp G1�' PQASIER. Y/ARE cow?rTE ASIM r- ADDENDUM # 2 Ref. Sheet# AD-13 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Drainage and groundwater. 1. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to starting dewatering operations. _ a. If groundwater will be discharged into an irrigation ditch, pond, stream or other waterway, or will eventually drain to an irrigation ditch, pond, stream or waterway, a dewatering permit will be required. b. Permit applications are available from the Storm Drainage _ Department of the City of Fort Collins. 2. Any water which is encountered in the trench shall be removed to the extent necessary to provide a firm subgrade, to permit connections to be made in the dry, and to prevent the entrance of water into the pipeline. 3. Surface runoff shall be diverted as necessary to keep excavations and trenches free from water during construction. " 4. The excavation or trench shall be kept free from water until the structure, or pipe, to be installed therein, is completed to the . extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result. 5. Water shall be prevented from entering sewer pipe which is already in service and has been previously accepted by the Utility. 6. The pipe under construction shall not be used for dewatering, without the written approval of the Engineer. B. Sequencing. 1. Pipeline installation shall be performed within 400 linear feet of trench excavation. a. If construction is occurring in an open field, this distance may be amended, at the Engineer's discretion. _ 2. Initial trench backfill shall be performed within 50 linear feet of pipeline installation. a. If construction is occurring in an open field, this distance , may be amended, at the Engineer's discretion. 3. Backfilling and compaction of the trench shall be in progress to within four manholes of that portion of the sewer that is being constructed, unless authorized by the Engineer. 02221-2 C 4. Where excavation is a hazard to automotive or pedestrian traffic, the amount of open trench and the time duration of that opening is to be minimized, at the Engineer's discretion. a. The contractor shall coordinate the amount and duration of road closure with the City's Traffic Department. Underground obstructions. 1. The Design Engineer and/or Contractor shall field verify all As - Constructed information obtained from the City. 2. Contractor shall notify each utility owner and request utilities to be field located by surface reference. a. The request for the location of utilities shall be made a minimum of 48 hours prior to any trenching or excavation. 3. When a conflict exists, the contractor shall expose and verify the size, location, and elevation of underground utilities and other obstructions, and the Design Engineer will amend the construction drawings. a. In the case of a conflict, the Contractor shall notify the Design Engineer, who will notify the affected utility companies. b. In the case of a conflict, the proposed work may be modified, at the Engineer's discretion. 4. Existing improvements, adjacent property, utilities, trees, and plants that are not to be removed shall be protected from injury or damage resulting from the Contractor's operations. 5. If the Contractor removes any underground obstructions, the following shall apply: a. Drainage culverts may be salvaged, and reused in an appropriate location, if approval is obtained from the City's Storm Drainage Department. i. All other underground obstructions shall be replaced.as directed by the affected utility. ii. All field drains shall be repaired and replaced to their original condition. 02221-3 1.4 MAINTENANCE AND CORRECTION A. Contractor shall maintain and repair all trench settlement which occurs within the two-year warranty period, and make necessary repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of trench settlement. 1. Reference paragraph 1.7.C. of Section 01010. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. If the existing soil in the trench bottom is judged to be unsuitable by the Engineer, the top 6-inches of the pipe subgrade shall be removed and replaced with a stabilization material. 1. Stabilization material is crusher -run rock, conforming to ASTM D448, or COOH s357. SIZE PERCENT PASSING 2" 95-100 1" 35- 70 1/2" 10- 30 e4 0- 5 a. Or an approved substitute. B. Geotextile fabric may be used in conjunction with stabilization material, with the prior written approval of the Engineer. 1. Acceptable types of geotextile fabric and their manufacturers are: a. Mirafi 500 x, by "Celanese". b. Bidim C-28 and C-34. c. True Tex M G-100, by "True Temper". d. Fibretex Grade 150, by "Crown Zellerbach". e. TS700 or TS420, by "ADS". f. Or an approved equal. 02221-4 2.2 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Pipe shall be bedded in a uniformly graded material, conforming to CDOH R 67, unless otherwise noted on the approved construction drawings. SIZE PERCENT PASSING 1° 100 3/4" 90-100 3/81, 20- 55 ;4 0- 10 ng 0- 5 2.3 GROUND WATER BARRIERS A. If clay is used for ground water barriers, it shall meet the following soil classification. 1. GC - clayey gravels, gravel -sand -clay mixtures. 2. SC - clayey sands, sand -clay mixtures. 3. CL - inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, clean clays. B. Concrete used in ground water barriers shall have a minimum of 6 sacks per cubic yard,lillnd shall be allowed to develop a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. after 28 days. 2.4 . TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Trench backfill material shall be placed from a point 12-inches above the pipe to 12-inches below the ground surface or to the bottom of the pavement subgrade, whichever is greater. B. Trench backfill material shall be either soil excavated from the trench, or imported soil. 1. Any soil used for trench backfill, shall be free from frozen matter, stumps, roots, brush, other organic matter, cinders or other corrosive material, debris, and any rocks or stones which are larger than 6-inches, in any dimension. a. Rocks*or stones which are larger than 3-inches, in any dimension, shall not be placed within one foot of the pipe or within the pavement section. 02221-5 2. If imported soil is used for trench backfill, it shall meet CDOH specifications for Class n2 structural backfiil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Topsoil shall be stripped from areas which are to be disturbed by construction, and stockpiled. 1. Topsoil shall be segregated from non -organic trench excavation material, and debris. 3.2 TRENCHING A. Trenches shall be excavated by open cut methods, except where boring or tunneling is shown on drawings, or approved by the Engineer. B. Care shall be used when operating mechanical equipment in locations where it may cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. C. Mechanical equipment shall be designed and operated in such a manner that the bottom elevation of the trench can be controlled with uniform. trench widths and vertical sidewalls which extend from the bottom of the " trench to an elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe. 1. Contractor shall follow the most current regulations concerning excavations set forth by OSHA; 29 CFR Part 1926. D. Trench alignment shall be sufficiently accurate to permit pipe to be aligned properly with an 8 inch minimum clearance between the pipe and _ the sidewalls of the trench or trench box. I. The trench sidewall shall not be undercut in order to obtain " clearance. E. Contractor shall over -excavate a minimum of six inches below the bottom of the pipe wherever the trench bottom is rock, or other unsuitable material. 1. Over -excavation shall be backfilled and compacted with acceptable Granular Material. a. Reference paragraph 2.2 A. F. Preparation of trench bottom. I. Trench bottoms shall be graded uniformly to provide clearance for each section of pipe. 02221-6 2. Loose material, water, and foreign objects shall be removed from the trench. 3. The contractor shall provide a firm subgrade, which is suitable for application of bedding material. 4. Wherever unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, said material shall be over -excavated to a depth suitable for construction of a stable subgrade, as determined by the Engineer. a. The over -excavation shall be backfilled with stabilization material and compacted as required by the Engineer. i. Reference paragraph 2.1. G. Stockpiling excavated materials. 1. Suitable material for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner, and stored a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of the trench. 2. Excess excavated materials not suitable or not required for backfilling-shall be disposed of properly. 3. Excavated material shall not be stockpiled against existing structures or appurtenances. 3.3 PIPE BEDDING A. Placement and compaction. 1. Reference Detail Drawing No. 1. 2. Bedding material shall be distributed and graded to provide uniform and continuous support beneath the sewer main and all services at all points between bell holes, or pipe joints. a. Pipe shall not be supported by the bells. b. A minimum of 4-inches of bedding shall be placed prior to the installation of the sewer main and services. c. Bedding material shall not be dropped on pipe which has been supported only at each end. 3. To prevent lateral displacement, granular bedding material shall be deposited and compacted uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe. a. Bedding material shall not be dropped onto unsupported pipe. 02221-7 4. Granular bedding material shall be consolidated under and around the pipe. 3.4 GROUND WATER BARRIERS A. Ground water barriers shall be constructed in such a manner as to impede passage of water through bedding material for the full depth of the granular bedding material, and the full width of the trench. 1. Ground water barriers shall be approximately four (4) feet long and spaced not more than 400 feet apart. 2. Ground water barriers shall extend to a point two (2) feet above the existing ground water level. a. If the ground water barrier is near an irrigation ditch, pond, _ stream, or other waterway, the barrier shall extend to a point one (1) foot above the 100-year water level. _. 3. Material for ground water barriers shall be specified by the Utility. 3.5 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. All trench backfill shall be compacted. 1. Backfill around manholes shall be compacted with equipment which is capable of producing the required results. _ B. Backfill material shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers which may not exceed six (6) inches (compacted depth), in all areas:, _ 1. Other thicknesses may be used with the approval of the Engineer. —. C. Methods and equipment which are appropriate for the backfill of material shall be employed. 1. Backfill equipment or backfilling methods which damage the pipe shall not be used. D. Compaction shall not be performed by jetting or water settling. E. Sheeting removal (if the. Contractor elects to use sheeting). 1. Do not remove sheeting prior to backfilling. 2. Use effective methods to protect the construction, other ^' structures, utilities and properties during sheeting removal. .3. Voids left by sheeting removal shall be filled with dry sand. 02221-8 4. Sheeting which is left in place shall be cut off at an elevation 18 inches below the finish grade of unpaved areas, or 12 inches - below the subgrade of paved areas. F. Topsoil shall be replaced to the original depth_over all areas which are to be reseeded. G. Excess excavated materials and materials not suitable for backfill shall be disposed of properly. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field moisture/density control. 1. Field tests will be conducted.to determine compliance of moisture/density testing methods with specified density in accordance with ASTM D2922 (Tests for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods). 2. Moisture/density tests are the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be performed by a private Geotechnical Consultant. a. The method of testing of the compacted material and the validity of the results shall be the responsibility of the Geotechnical Consultantcertifying the testing. b. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor or the Geotechnical Consultant the day of the tests. i. Copies of the field work sheets are acceptable. c. Summarized test results shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the initial acceptance of the sewer system. d. The Engineer may elect to perform backfill density testing for compliance of the work within the public rights -of -way. 3. Results of all moisture/density tests shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer prior to acceptance of the sewer main. 4. Moisture/density tests shall be performed at a depth of two (2) feet above the top of the pipe bedding and in two (2) foot vertical increments up to the finish grade. 5. Moisture/density tests shall be performed at a minimum of 200 linear feet, as measured along the length of the pipe, -or as determined by the Engineer. 02221-9 6. Moisture/density tests in the vicinity of manholes shall be performed at a maximum of one (1) foot away from the manhole section. a. A test shall be made in all four directions from the manhole. b. A minimum of one test shall be performed for every two (2) feet of backfill material. 7. Moisture/density tests shall be performed below subgrade, and a - minimum of once for each service line installation. 8. All failed test areas shall be recompacted and retested. B. Compaction shall be to the following minimum densities: (Reference ASTM - D698 or AASHTO T99 unless otherwise indicated). 1. Ground water barrier material: 95% of maximum density (ASTM D698). 2. Pipe bedding. a. Compacted granular material: 80% of relative density (ASTM D4253 & 04254). 3. Trench backfill. a. Paved roadways, sidewalks and other areas which are to be paved: 95% of maximum density. i. The initial lift above the pipe may be compacted to 90% of maximum density. ii. A minimum of 4 feet of trench shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density: b. Gravel roadways: 95% of maximum density. c. Fields and landscaped areas: 90% of maximum density. d. All other locations: 95% of maximum density. e. A concrete cap shall be required over the sewer main in y instances where the distance from the top of the pipe to the finished surface of the ground is less than four (4) feet. 02221-10 C. Moisture content. 1. All compacted backfill shall be within a minimum of 2% (+/-) of the optimum moisture content of the soil as determined by ASTM 0698. 2. Water shall be added to the material, or the material shall be harrowed, disced, bladed, or otherwise worked to insure a uniform moisture content, as specified. 3. Expansive soils may require a higher moisture content, as determined through laboratory tests performed by a geotechnical engineer. 02221-11 2X2 STL TUBE FRAINI- COPING FLASHING TO MATCH BLDG. STL Flb OTS WELDED STL TUBE BOLLARD 4X4 5TL. TUBE DOLL,' 1/8" THICK 5TL. PLATE ON EXT. RADIUS CORN EASE EDGES SLIDING BOLTS INTO IN CONC SLAB n TOP OF SL v 100'-O" nvi �, f nuvi nLL bI LLL LLt ML NI °, '6 TRASH GATE DETAIL SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" VAUGHT • FRYE AVA7 ARCHITECTS ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESI 401 West Mountain Amw Suite200 FortCollins f=970,224A662 pinne970224.1I91 www..I.* TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM #2 Ref. Sheet # Checked by AI , Scale 1/4"= SECTION 02223 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Remove and dispose of site elements such as paving, curb and gutter, and sidewalks designated for removal. 2. Dispose of debris off site. 3. Clean up and leave site prepared for further construction. B. Related Sections: 1. Barricades, Warning Lights and Signs: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Use of Premises: Section 01100 Summary. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Permits: Obtain all required right of way permits from City of Fort Collins. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Execute demolition in manner to limit unnecessary dust and noise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Required PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE DEMOLITION A. Site Improvements: Remove existing curb and gutter, sidewalks, paving and other site improvements as indicated. Where new concrete adjoins existing concrete cut existing concrete to straight line using masonry saw. 3.02 CLEAN-UP During demolition operations, keep premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by employees or work, and at completion of work remove rubbish, tools and surplus material and leave premises clean and ready for subsequent work. Promptly remove waste, rubbish or debris from site. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 02223-1 SECTION 02232 SELECTIVE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Clearing and grubbing. 2. Removal of existing trees and shrubs as indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Site Demolition: Section 02223 Selective Site Demolition. 2. Grading: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Execute site clearing in manner to limit unnecessary dust and noise. Burning of materials on site not allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS A. Disposition of Cleared Materials: Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Benchmarks: Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. 2. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during site clearing. a. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3. Trees to be Transplanted: Protect and maintain trees indicated to be transplanted on Landscape Drawings. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Coordinate work under this Section with Section 02370. 3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Vegetation In Building Areas, Paving Areas, Areas to Receive Other New Site Improvements and Areas Indicated to be Regraded: Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, V F 2001-59 02232-1 grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes - digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 2. Removal: Include new and old stumps of trees and their roots. If impossible to remove roots, grind stumps to 12' below finish grade. B. Vegetation In Other Areas of Site: 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. a. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new _ construction. b. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 2. Remove trees and shrubs indicated to be removed. Landscape Architect will tag trees to be removed. 3. Clear existing vegetation in areas indicated to be sodded or seeded. Y C. Tree Removal: Fell trees in manner not to injure standing trees, plants and other improvements to remain. 3.03 DISPOSAL Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02232-2 SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Site grading. (N.I.C.) 2. Building excavation and backfill. 3. Underslab gravel. 4. Compaction. B. Related Sections: 1. Soil Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 2. Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 3. Selective Site Demolition: Section 02223. 4. Selective Clearing: Section 02232. 5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Section 02370. 6. Subgrade Preparation for Asphalt Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. 7. Subgrade Preparation for Concrete Vehicular Paving: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. 8. Subgrade Preparation for Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks Paving: Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 9. Underslab Vapor Retarder and Granular Protection Layer: Section 07261 Underslab Vapor Retarder. 10. Mechanical Excavation: Division 15 Mechanical. 11. Electrical Excavation: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with following: 1. Excavation: Colorado Division of Labor Rules and Regulations. 2. Compaction Standard: ASTM D698-91(1998) - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ff-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN- m/m3)). 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Bearing Subgrade: Site grading, excavation and fill shall provide the following bearing conditions. 1. Building Foundations: All footings shall rest on natural, undisturbed subsoils or on compacted engineered fill. 2. Fab Shop Floor Slab: Fab Shop area floor slabs -on -grade shall bear on a 6 inch thick layer of crushed aggregate base course, over scarified, moisture conditioned and recompacted natural subsoils. 3. Other Floor Slabs: Other floor slabs -on -grade shall bear on a three inch compactible granular protection layer over underslab vapor retarder installed VF 2001-59 02300-1 under Section 07261, over a 4 inch thick layer of clean -graded gravel, over moisture -controlled, compacted, engineered fill over scarified, moisture conditioned and compacted natural soils. 4. Exterior Slabs and Pavement: Bear on a minimum 2 foot thickness of well - compacted engineer controlled fill over scarified, moisture conditioned and compacted natural soils. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Soil testing during construction will be conducted by acceptable testing R laboratory. See Section 01450 Quality Control. l . Test reports of soils testing during construction specified under Field Quality Control will be distributed by the testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450 Quality Control. B. Geotechnical Engineer: Materials and operations under this section shall be executed " under observation of Geotechnical Engineer employed by Owner who will place qualified personnel on site during earthwork operations as necessary. M 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Geotechnical Data: The following data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. -' 1. Subsurface Investigation (Geotechnical Report): Each Bidder shall be fully familiar with the following document which has been prepared for Owner by a separate consultant. The following document will be available for examination at the offices of the Owner and Architect. In preparing his bid, each Bidder shall consider and _. evaluate data contained in the following document as well as the Drawings and Specifications prepared by the Architect. Log and report are believed to be accurate; however, neither Owner nor Architect guarantees information contained therein nor do they guarantee conditions indicated to exist at locations of test holes will prevail at other locations on site. Geotechnical Engineering Report City of Fort Collins East Vine Street Facility Additions East Vine Drive Fort Collins, Colorado R" I Terracon Fort Collins, Colorado Terracon Project No. 20985001 Dated February 3, 1998 2. Geotechnical data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. The data contained in the document prepared for the Owner by its separate consultant is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect does not guarantee its accuracy or completeness. VF 2001-59 04300-2 B. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during work until they have been examined by Owner. 1. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove affected sections without extra cost. 2. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Fill and Backfill: Correct settlement in backfill, fill, or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within one year correction period. Restore any structures damaged by settlement to their original condition at no cost to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Material: Clean on -site excavated soils or imported fill approved by Geotechnical Engineer.. Frozen soils not allowed. B. On -Site Excavated Material: Clean on -site excavated soil free of organic material, rubble or debris. C. Imported Fill for Use as Structural Fill Below Slabs: Use if sufficient quantities of on -site excavated material acceptable for use as structural fill are not available. Import well - graded material meeting following criteria. 1. Gradation shall provide following percent fines by weight passing sieves when tested in accordance with ASTM C136. a. 3 inch: 100 percent. c. No. 4: 50 to 80 percent. d. No. 200: 10 percent maximum. 2. Liquid Limit: 25 maximum. 3. Plasticity Index: 6 maximum. D. Imported Fill for General Site Use: Use at other locations if sufficient quantities of on -site excavated material acceptable for use as fill are not available. Import material meeting following criteria. 1. Gradation shall provide following percent fines by weight passing sieves when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136. a. 6 inch: 100 percent. b. 3 inch: 70 to 100 percent. c. No. 4: 50 to 80 percent. d. No. 200: 60 percent maximum. 2. Liquid Limit: 35 maximum. 3. Plasticity Index: 15 maximum. E. Underslab Gravel: 1. Fab Shop Area Underslab Gravel: Crushed aggregate base course meeting the specifications of ASTM C33, Size No. 57 or No. 67 aggregate. V F 2001-59 02300-3 2. Underslab Gravel for Remainder of Building: Imported, clean, free draining gravel as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. F. Backfill Material Behind Retaining Walls: Select granular materials approved by Geotechnical Engineer. G. Underground Utility Piping Bedding Material: Clean, free draining gravel as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Visit: Visit and inspect site and take into consideration known or reasonably inferable conditions affecting work. Failure to visit site will not relieve Contractor of furnishing materials or performing work required. 3.02 PREPARATION " A. Field Engineering: See Section 01722 Feld Engineering for bench marks, monuments, batter boards, reference points and layout and checking of the work. B. Protection: 1. Maintain undisturbed soils under foundations and slabs at natural moisture content. Maintain moisture content of controlled fill material at near optimum in accordance with ASTM D698. 2. Provide and maintain slopes, crowns and ditches in excavation to insure satisfactory surface drainage at all times. Provide temporary drainage facilities to prevent water from draining into excavations. When work is completed, restore temporary ditches or cuts to original grade or finish grade as indicated. 3. Bailing or Pumping: Immediately pump or bail out water found in excavations, whether rain or seepage. Keep excavations free from water at all times. Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control flow, drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of work under this section to avoid damage to work. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Over -Excavation: 1 Under Footings and Interior Slabs on Grade: Remove all existing uncontrolled fill, construction debris and soft spots as required to reach soil acceptable as bearing subgrade. a. Under Footings: Over -excavation shall extend horizontally to a distance equal to one horizontal to one vertical beyond bottom outside edge of footing on all sides. 2. Under Paved Areas: Remove upper 2 feet of existing uncontrolled fill. 3. Controlled Fill: Replace over -excavated areas with controlled fill as specified in �- Articles 3.04 and 3.05. VF 2001-59 02300-4 B. Footing and Area Excavations: Excavate site as required for walls, foundations, piers, area pits, etc. to depths indicated on Drawings. 1. Trenches: Bottoms of full width required. If through error, trenches are carried deeper than required, fill excess depth with compacted fill as directed at Contractors expense. 2. If debris, soft spots or loose or excessively moist areas are found at bottom of any excavation, immediately report condition to Architect who will determine if corrective work is necessary. 3. Slope or shore excavations in accordance with local and federal regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards. C. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation is considered as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra will be allowed. D. Cobbles and Boulders: Where cobbles or boulders are uncovered during excavation and at footing elevation they shall be immediately reported to the Architect to direct their removal. Cobbles or boulders shall be carefully removed to prevent disturbance of adjacent soils and the resulting depressions shall be filled with compacted earth fill. Stockpile boulders 12" in diameter and larger for future landscape use in on -site location as directed. E. Store suitable backfill material as space is available. Remove all other excavated material from the site. 3.04 PREPARATION OF NATURAL GROUND A. General: 1. Initial Grading: Level surface to receive fill. Provide for approximately uniform thickness of fill beneath building structures. 2. Verify removal of uncontrolled fill to specified depth and all topsoil and vegetation before beginning preparation of natural ground. 3. Remove frozen or muddy ground in fill areas. B. Fills Made on Hillsides or Slopes: Plow or scarify slope of the original ground upon which the fill is to be placed to a minimum depth of 8". Where slope ratio of original ground is steeper than 3 horizontal to 1 vertical, the bank shall be stepped or benched. C. Preparation: Mix and blend the plowed or scarified surface with a disc or grader blade so the surface will be free of large clods or rocks, ruts, hummocks or other uneven features which would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment to be used. D. Scarification and Compaction: 1. Natural Ground Under Interior and Exterior Slabs, Sidewalks and Paving, and All Areas to Receive Fill: Scarify to a minimum depth of 8 inches and compact at optimum moisture content to at least 95% of its Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698. VF 2001-59 02300-5 3.05 FILLING AND COMPACTION A. General: Fill and compact to levels required to complete the work indicated. Filling may require soil material in excess of quantity of suitable material available from required _. grading and excavations even though not indicated on the Drawings. Such material shall be imported at earthwork contractor's expense. B. Moisture Conditioning: 1. Clay Soils Placed Around or Beneath Foundations: Compact within a moisture content range of optimum to 2 percent above optimum. 2. Clay Soils Placed Beneath Pavement: Compact within a moisture content range 2 percent below to 2 percent above optimum. 3. Granular Soils: Compact within a moisture content range of 3 percent below to 3 percent above optimum unless otherwise directed by Geotechnical Engineer. C. Placing Fill: Distribute material to avoid formation of lenses or layers of material differing substantially from surrounding material. Deliver material at uniform rate to permit satisfactory procedure to result in uniformly compacted fill. 1. Avoid unnecessary concentration of travel causing ruts and uneven compaction. Regrade and compact ruts and hollows more than 6" deep before compacting. 2. Spread fill material in loose horizontal layers no greater than 10 inches thick. 3. Provide specified moisture contents and densities throughout each lift. D. Backfilling: FlII and compact temporary holes and excavation around interior walls, grade beams, piers, trenches, on inside of building and excavation around exterior foundation walls. 1. Backfill in even lifts on both sides of foundation walls to prevent excessive pressure on one side. Brace unsupported foundation walls, grade beams, and piers thoroughly before backfilling and leave bracing in place until supporting floors are in place. 2. Obtain permission before backfilling. 3. Debris, construction materials, or large chunks of earth are not allowed in backfill. - 4. Backfill and mechanically compact as indicated below. Puddling not allowed. E. Compaction of Cohesive Materials: When moisture content and condition of each spread layer is satisfactory, compact by method approved by Geotechnical Engineer to densities specified below. Compaction of Cohesionless Materials: When compacting material such as sands and gravels, deposit materials in layers and compact by surface or internal vibrators, smooth or pneumatic rollers, hand or power tampers, or by other means approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Thickness of horizontal layers after deposition shall be not more than 6' if compaction is performed by tractor treads, surface vibrators or similar equipment. If compaction is performed by internal vibrators, thickness of horizontal layers after _ compaction shall be not more than penetrating length of vibrator head. 2. Ponding or water flooding not allowed. VF 2001-59 02300-6 G. Compaction Requirements: Compact each layer by methods acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer to minimum of the following Standard Proctor Densities as determined by ASTM D698: l . Fill under foundations................................................... ... 95% 2. Fill and backfill under interior floor slabs..................................................................... 95% 3. Underslab gravel and aggregate base beneath slabs,............................................. .. 95% 4. Fill and backfill under exterior slabs and sidewalks ............... ... ...................... .......... 95% 5. Fill and backfill under asphalt or concrete paving ..................................................... 95% 6. Utility trench backfill................................................... ---.......................................... 95% 7. Miscellaneous fill in unpaved and other non-structural areas .................................. 901yo H. If a well defined maximum density curve cannot be generated by impact compaction in the laboratory for any fill type, engineered fill shall be compacted to a minimum of 70 percent relative density as determined by ASTM D4253 and D4254. Compact mechanical and electrical trenches excavated by utility companies as specified for utility trenches. l . Bedding Gravel: Compact to 70 percent of Relative Density in accordance with ASTM D4253. 3.06 EXCESS OR UNUSABLE MATERIAL Remove from site or spread and compact on site as directed. 3.07 DAMAGED EARTH Earth that has been rendered unfit to receive planting due to concrete water, mortar or lime water dumped on it shall not be used in areas to receive plantings. 3.08 UNDER SLAB GRAVEL A. Fill entire area beneath floor slabs on grade with compacted gravel. Screed to provide uniform true sub -base for bottom of slab. 1. Under -Slab Gravel Thickness: a. Fab Shop Area Floor Slab: Minimum 6 inch thickness. b. Other Floor Slabs: Minimum 4 inch thickness. 2. Where applicable, coordinate with vapor retarder and granular layer installed under Section 07261. B. Compact to density specified in Article 3.05. 3.09 FINISH GRADING A. General: Cut and fill all areas to elevations and tolerances specified. Leave graded surface clean, free from rubbish and large clods and reasonably smooth. B. Subgrade Under Building: Finish grade to smooth, even, well compacted surface at densities specified under Article 3.05 to elevations indicated. 1. Slab on Grade Subgrade Tolerance: (±) 0.02' (1 /4"). VF 2001-59 02300-7 5. SHEET A6.1: a.) Modify Break Room 121 cabinets, at Detail 1. Add 20 Amp. Outlet for microwave, at proper height. Refer to attached sheet AD-8. b.) Delete workstations, as shown on Details 2 and 4. c.) At Detail 3, carry ceramic wall tile pattern through from Toilet Rooms, as per Detail 1/A9.1. Refer to attached sheet AD-9. d.) See attached sheet AD-10 for dimensioned and noted Plan of Reception Desk. 6. SHEET A8.1: a.) Modify Detail 6, ENTRY COLUMN DETAILS. Refer to attached sheet AD-1 1. b.) Make minor modifications to Detail 7, ENTRY CANOPY DETAIL. Refer to attached sheet AD-1 2. SHEET S2.2: a.) Change Detail 9/S2.2 as shown on attached sheet AD-13. 8. SHEET C5: a.) Modify this sheet with the Change shown on attached sheet CD-1. B. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. SECTION 01210 —ALLOWANCES: a.) Article 1.07 A., delete this allowance. 2. SECTION 09680 — CARPET: a.) Article 1.01 B, delete this article. Carpet will be specified. b.) Article 2.01 A, Change as follows: ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER: 'Bentley Mills, Inc." — Pattern to be Continuity, Continuum or Mercator, 26 oz. nylon, minimum face yarn weight. To all prospective bidders under the specifications and contract documents described above, the following are answers to questions submitted: 1. Question: Please confirm that the rough grading and asphalt paving at Linden Street and the Private Access Drive are being provided by the Owner per General Notes I and 2 on AS. 1. Answer: Yes they are. 2. Question: Is the owner also performing the asphalt demo, pavement sub -grade, and pavement markings at Linden Street and the Private Access Drive? Answer: Yes. 2 Iw I V) Z \� w II PROPOSED ? f:D -,L \� SECURITY FENCE o \ / I \ \ / '° LOT \I s 16% \� 3.248 I I I I rol I \\ \ PF _ SE FE EE SH��jl OR U C7 E ; I j TREET ROME FLPWJNE IA planfuT bL,x \ i \ _ I I I I i �0 I \ f m� 00 — \ 4959 S9.pS ' _ _495C \ --- i � 4958 Icn VAUGHT • FRYE TRAFFIC ADDENDUM #2 *VA7 OPERATIONS Pm;�numbe� 2001 ARCHITECTS FACILITY ore o3/11102 CD-1 ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESIGN Ref. Sheet# C5 401 WMMotmtffiAe Sui4200 FonColWks,C05052 fax970224.1662 Oh 970224.1191 w .auoufryY. Checked by JRI Scale N.r.s C. Subgrade Under Sidewalk, Curb and Gutter: Finish grade to bearing surface as required. 1. Tolerance: (±) 0.04' (1/2"). n C, ifhnrnric I Inricr Aenhnl# Pnvinn• Finish n,rfn #n hniinm of fi dl rler�#4. nmhnH nr -'- 3.3 CONCRETE SURFACING A. With the exception of improvements on private property, asphalt, OT concrete drives, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, and similar structures shall be removed, disposed of, and restored in accordance with the "Standard Street Specifications", with the following minimum thickness: 1. Driveways and slabs shall be 6 inches thick. 2. 'Patios shall be 4 inches thick. u 3. Gutters shall be 6 inches thick. R 4. Concrete bases for brick pavers and concrete pavement shall be v 6'inches thick. 5. Sidewalks shall be 4 inches thick. 6. Cross pans shall be 8 inches thick. ., B. Reference Part I, Section 4.00 of the "Standard Street Specifications". C. Reference Section 03300. u 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. .Subgrade, aggregate base course, and bituminous pavement shall be compacted in accordance with the "Standard Street Specifications". B. Concrete. �r 1. Reference the "Standard Street Specifications". 2. Reference Section 03300. I OCT87 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 02615 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. This section covers ductile iron pipe. B. Pipe shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, specials and other accessories. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling 1. Slings, pipe tongs or skids shall be used for handling pipe. 2. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. a. Dropping pipe or fittings onto cushions is also forbidden. 3. Pipe shall not be handled in any manner which will cause damage. B. Storage 1. Lubricant shall be stored and used in a manner which will avoid contamination. 2. Rubber gaskets shall be stored in a cool, dark location away from grease, oil and ozone producing electric motors. 3. The maximum stacking heights of pipe as listed in Tables 1 and 2 of AWWA C600-77, shall not be exceeded. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. All ductile iron pipe, with push -on joints, shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.51-86(AWWA C151) B.• All ductile iron pipe, with flanged, flat faced joints, shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.15-83(AWWA C115). C. Ductile iron pipe which is less than 12 inches in diameter shall be Class 52 pipe. D. Ductile iron pipe which is 12 inches in diameter or larger shall be Class 51 pipe. 02615-1 E. All ductile iron pipe shall have nominal laying lengths of either 18 or 20 feet. 1. Random pipe lengths are not acceptable. 2.2 FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS A. All fittings and couplings shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C104-85, C110-77, and C111-85. B. All fittings and couplings shall have one of the following types of connections: 1. Flanged. 2. Mechanical joint. 3. Push -on. C. All fittings and couplings shall be made of either gray -iron or ductile iron, and have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi. 2.3 JOINTS A. All mechanical and push -on joints shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.11-85(AWWA C111). 1. A1.1 gaskets shall be made of synthetic rubber. 2. Lubricant shall be that which is specified by the pipe manufacturer. 3. All nuts and bolts shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI-A21.11-85(AWWA C111). B. All ductile iron pipe with threaded flanged joints shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.15-83(AWWA C115). 1, All flanges shall be sized and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 Cast -Iron Flange. 2.4 PIPE LINING A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a standard thickness cement mortar lining. 1. Ductile iron pipe which is less than 12 inches in diameter shall have a cement mortar lining with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. 2. Ductile iron pipe which is larger than 12 inches in diameter shall have a cement mortar lining with a minimum thickness of 3/32 inch. B. All ductile iron pipe lining shall conform to ANSI A21.4-85(AWWA C104). 02615-2 2.5 PIPE COATINGS A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a bituminous coating on the pipe exterior. 1. The minimum thickness of the bituminous -coating shall be 1 mil. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. All tie rods shall conform to ASTM A307. 1. All steel rods shall be of a standard weight and shall conform to ASTM A120, standard weight. 2. All washers shall be plain steel and conform to ANSI B27.2. B. Protecto Wrap Tape shall be r'200 or #200A PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pipe and fittings shall be examined for cracks, dents, abrasions or other flaws prior to installation. 1. Defective pipe and fittings shall be marked and removed from the site. B. Reference. Section 02713. C. Cutting the pipe. 1. The pipe shall be cut smooth, straight and at right angles to the pipe axis, with a saw or an abrasive wheel. 2. The pipe or cement lining shall not be damaged during the cutting operation. 3. The cut ends and rough edges of the pipe shall be ground off so they are smooth. 4. The cut end of the pipe shall be beveled for push -on joints. D. Field joints 1. Push -on joints shall be used in underground locations, unless indicated otherwise on the Project Drawings. 2. All joints shall be watertight and free from leaks. 3. Joi.nts shall not be deflected beyond the maximum values as specified in Tables 5 and 6 of AWWA C600-77. 02615-3 .t 4. After initial acceptance of the waterline, the Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any leak which is discovered within a two year period, . E. Loose polyethylene encasement 1. Polyethylene encasement shall be used whenever the resistivity of the native soil is less than 2,500 ohm -centimeters, or as required by the Utility. 2. All polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI 21.5-82(AWWA C105). a. Polyethylene shall be a minimum of 6 mils thick. b. Polyethylene encasement may be installed by Methods A, B or C, of ANSI 21.5-82(AWWA C105). 3. Rips, punctures or other damage to the polyethylene encasement shall be repaired with adhesive tape or with a short length of polyethylene, which shall be wrapped around the pipe and secured in place with tape. 4. A sealed encasement shall be maintained on the pipe with the polyethylene. a. The polyethylene shall be taped to existing lines and to the ends of other overlap sections. b. Sections of polyethylene shall overlap each other by 1 foot. 5. When polyethylene is used, the bedding and backfilling. shall be controlled so that the polyethylene is not torn or damaged. a. Sand shall be backfilled to a depth of six (6) inches above the top of the pipe. 6. Loose polyethylene encasement shall be used at these additional, buried locations: a. Valves and fitting with flanged or mechanical joints. r b. Bolted fitting, such as couplings. c. Tie rods and joint harness. 3.2 JOINT INSTALLATION A. Push -on joints 1. Dirt, oil, grit, excess coatings, and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot. 02615-4 �. 2. The gasket shall be inserted. 3. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the inside surface of the gasket and the spigot end of the pipe. 4. The joint surface shall not be allowed to come in contact with the ground. 5. The pipe shall have a depth mark prior to assembly to insure that the spigot end is inserted the full depth of the joint. 6. The joint shall be completed, taking care that the spigot is inserted to the depth mark. a. Stabbing of pipe shall not be allowed. B. Mechanical joints 1. Dirt, oil, grit, excess coating and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot. 2. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the inside of the bell, the outside of the spigot, and the gasket. 3. Nuts shall be alternately tightened on opposite sides of the pipe to produce equal pressure on all parts of the gland. 4. A torque limiting wrench shall be used, and bolts shall be tightened to the following torque values: Bolt Size Toroue(Ft. Lbs.1 40 - 60 3/4" 60 - 90 1" 70 - 100 1 1/4" 90 - 120 5. Holes in mechanical joint bells shall straddle the top centerline. C. Mechanical couplings 1. Dirt, oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter shall be removed from each end of the pipe. 2. Any cut ends or rough edges of the pipe shall be ground off so that they are smooth. 2. The gap between pipe ends being coupled shall be less than one inch .and greater than 1/4 inch. 02615-5 D. flanged joints 1. Pipe shall be extended completely through screwed -on flanges. 2. The pipe and the flange face shall be machine finished in a single operation. 3. Any restraints on the pipe which will prevent uniform gasket compression or cause unnecessary stress in the flanges shall be eliminated. 4. Mechanical connections shall not be assembled until all flanged joints, which are affected, have been tightened. 5. Bolts spaced on opposite sides of the pipe shall be alternately tightened to assure uniform gasket compression. 6. Holes in flanges shall straddle the top centerline. 02615-6' JUNE90 SECTION 02622 PLASTIC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section concerns plastic gravity sewer pipe, and includes the acceptable materials and construction practices which may be used in the installation of plastic gravity sewer pipe. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling. 1. Pipe shall not be handled in a manner which will cause damage to the pipe. 2. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. 3. Care must be taken to prevent damage to the pipo and fittings by impact, bending, compression, or abrasion. 4. Damaged pipe or fittings shall not be installed. B. Storage. 1. Lubricant shall not be stored or handled in a manner which will cause contamination to the lubricant. 2. Rubber gaskets shall be stored in a location which protects them from deterioration. 3. Pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 4. Pipe shall be stored on a surface which provides even support for the pipe barrel. a. Pipe shall not be stored in such a way as to be supported by the bell. b. Pipe which has a longitudinal deflection of greater than 1/8-inch per foot of pipe shall not be used. 5. Pipe which exhibits any signs of ultraviolet degradation shall not be used. 02622-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE A. All plastic gravity sewer pipe and all fittings -shall be made from PVC components which conform to ASTM 01784. B. All plastic gravity sewer pipe and all fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM 03034. 1. The standard dimension ratio (SDR) of plastic gravity sewer pipe, shall not exceed 35. 2.2 JOINTS A. All joints shall be of the push -on bell and spigot type, and shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3212. 1. All gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F477. 2. All bells shall be formed integrally with the pipe and shall contain a factory installed elastomeric gasket, which is positively retained. 3. Lubricant shall be that which is specified by the pipe manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Reference Part 3 of Section 02722. 02622-2 OCT87 SECTION 02641 VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers valves, valve operators, valve boxes, and appurtenances used for water distribution lines. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to materials during delivery and storage. B. Valves shall be stored off of the ground and away from materials that could contaminate potable water systems. C. Precautions shall be taken to keep all joints and internal parts clean. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All valves shall open clockwise (right). B. All buried valves shall have a 2-inch square operating nut. 1. All operating nuts shall be painted red. C. Any valve which will be placed in a vault, shall have a valve operator which is specifically approved by the Utility. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. All gate valves shall be a resilient seat type and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C509-87. I. All gate valves shall have an epoxy coated interior. B. All gate valves shall be provided with two 0-ring type stem seals, in accordance with Section 4.8.of AWWA C509-87. 2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. All butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA C504-80. 1. All butterfly valves shall have an epoxy coated interior. 2. All flanged butterfly valves shall be the short body type. 02641-1 Administrative Services urulasing uivrston Fort Collins CITY OF FORT COLLINS ADDENDUM No. 1 March 13, 2002 SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Description of Bid Package: Bid No, 5684, Traffic Operations Facility NEW BID OPENING DATE: 3:00 p.m. (our clock) March 22, 2002 Plan holders list and Pre -bid Conference attendance list attached. To all prospective bidders under the specifications and contract documents described above, the following are answers to questions submitted: 1. Question: Sheet C6, The proposed island at the Security Gate calls for an 8-inch glue - down curb with epoxy adhesive. Is this material referenced in the Spec's anywhere? Does 8-inch refer to the height or width? Answer: The epoxy material must comply with City standards for tack -down medians, and is not referenced in the Specifications. 8-inch refers to the curb face height. 2. Question: Sheet C6, Is the asphalt patch at the Private Access Drive to be included in the Owners Asphalt paving contract? Answer: Yes. 3. Question: Sheet C7, Are the new stripping and pavement markings on Linden Street included in the Owners Pavement Markings contract? Answer: Yes. 4. Question: Sheet C7, Are Bidders to include the sidewalk noted "sidewalk to be constructed upon approval by C & S Railroad" in our bids? Answer: No. 5. Question: If the Owner is to perform overlot grading, what can we assume the sub - grades will be when we mob on site? i.e. building pad, site concrete, gravel storage yard, asphalt paving areas, etc. Will the Owner be doing any site demolition as part of the overlot work? Answer: The sub -grades will be +/- .1 foot after the Owner performs the overlot grading. The Owner will demolish the existing asphalt, trees and fence. 6. Question: Will the Owner stockpile adequate topsoil on -site for replacement into landscape areas? Answer: No. 215 North Mason Street • 2nd Floor • P.O. Box 580 • Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580 0 (970) 221-6775 • FAX (970) 221-6707 3. All butterfly valves shall be Class 1508. 4. The operator torque shall be as specified in AWWA C504-80, Appendix A. 5. Acceptable manufacturers of butterfly valves are: a. Mueller. b. M & H. c. American. d. Or an approved equal. 2.4 VALVE BOXES A. Main Line Valves 1. Valve boxes shall be Tyler 5 1/4 inch shaft, screw -type with the word "WATER" cast into the lid. 2. Valve box bases shall be Tyler 6860 series, ; 6 base. 3. Valve boxes for all main line valves shall be Tyler 6860 series. B. Service Line Valves - 1. All valve boxes which will be used as service line curb stops (3/4" to 2"), will be located in a landscaped area. a. Reference Section 02646. '- 2. Valve boxes for service line valves which are 4" or larger, shall be Tyler 5 1/4 inch shaft, screw type with the word "WATER" cast into the lid. 2.5 AIR RELIEF/VACUUM RELIEF VALVES .. A. Materials and Construction -- 1. Air relief and vacuum relief valves shall have an integral type ` assembly which will function both as an air release and vacuum valve. 2. All air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be rated at a working pressure of 150 psi. and a minimum hydrostatic -test pressure of `- 250 psi. 3. The size of air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. 02641-2 4. Taps for air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be made by one of the following methods: a. Taps on new construction shall be a mechanical joint tapped tee with an iron pipe thread inlet corporation. b. Taps on existing lines shall be made with a tapping saddle. 5. Connections: a. The inlet connection for air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be 2-inches in diameter with a tapered iron pipe thread conforming to AWWA C800-66. b. Connections on the outlet side of air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be threaded and shall be protected to minimize entry of debris and dirt into the valve: 6. The body of all air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be either cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48-Class 35A, or ductile iron, conforming to ASTM A27-GR U60-30. 7. The working parts and seats of air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be brass, stainless steel, or other non -corroding material. S. The float of air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be stainless r steel. 9. All air relief and vacuum relief valves shall be watertight to a pressure of 150 psi. 10. A vacuum check shall be provided where required on Construction Drawings. B. Manufacturers r 1. Acceptable air release and vacuum relief valves, and their manufacturers are: -. a. APCO Combination Air Release Valve, by Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Universal Air Valve, by Multiplex Manufacturing. c. CAV Combination Air Release and Vacuum Valve, G.A. Industries Inc. r- r i r i 02641-3 3.2 OPERATION A. Fire Hydrants which have been accepted by the City, shall be operated by City personnel only. 02644-4 OCT87 SECTION 02646 SERVICE LINES, METERS AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the materials and installation of corporation stops, service lines, meters, meter setters and meter pits. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The product shall be handled, stored, and protected in a manner which will prevent damage to materials, coatings and finishes. B. All material shall be kept clean and free from dirt. 1.3 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE TAPS A. Utility contractors licensed by the City for utility work in the public right of way, shall be allowed to make service taps on water mains which have been initially accepted. B. Unless prior permission is given by the Utility, only the.Utility shall make service taps on mains which have passed final acceptance. C. The contractor shall not make any taps without permission from the Utility. D. Reference Detail Drawing No. 5 for services of less than 3-inches in diameter. E. 3/4-inch and 1-inch taps shall be installed by direct tapping. F. 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch taps shall be installed by one of the following methods: I. Taps on new construction shal•1 be a mechanical joint tapped tee with an iron pipe thread inlet corporation. 2. Taps on existing lines shall be made with a tapping saddle. G. Service taps on mains larger than 12" will be made only under the direct supervision of the Utility. The contractor shall give forty-eight hours advance notice to the Utility before a tap is made. H. Service or main taps which are larger than 2-inch will be made by the Utility, or installed with the water main at time of construction. 1. Reference Section 02713. 02646-1 I: The Utility reserves the right to make taps in lieu of the contractor and the right to deny permission for any main to be tapped. _ J. Tapping equipment shall be of good quality, used for the purpose intended and used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Reference Section 01600. 1.4 MAINTENANCE AND CORRECTION A. The contractor shall maintain and repair all service lines, meter pit,, and any associated appurtenances which leak, were installed incorrect:y, or otherwise prove to be defective, for a period of two (2) years after final completion and acceptance of the work. 1.5- METER SETTERS A. The Utility shall furnish meter setters for 3/4-inch and 1-inch meters. 1. Unless it is otherwise specified, the Utility shall install an idler, without charge, on all single-family and duplex structures within the city limits. 2. Exterior or interior meter setting shall be at the option of the developer. 3. Exterior meter settings shall be installed in accordance with Detail Drawing No. 6. 4. Interior meter settings shall be installed in accordance with Detail Drawing No. 7 or No. 8. B. Unless it is otherwise specified, meters, strainers, and meter setters for 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meters shall be purchased from the Utility. 1. Meter settings for 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meters shall be exterior settings only. 2. Meter settings for 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meters shall be installed in accordance with Detail Drawing No. 9. C. Unless it is otherwise specified, -meters and strainers for 3-inch and larger meters shall be purchased from the Utility. 1. Meter settings for 3-inch and larger meters shall be exterior �- settings only. 2. Meter settings for 3-inch and larger meters shall be installed in ., accordance with Detail Drawing No. 10. 02646-2 1.6 METER PITS A. 3/4-inch and 1-inch meters pits shall be installed by the contractor. 1. Meter pits shall be 20 inches in diameter, a minimum of 48 inches in length, and shall be constructed of bituminous fibers. a. All meter pits shall have a notched bottom. 2. Meter pit covers shall be constructed of cast iron with cast iron recessed lids and rubber or plastic inner lids. a. The minimum allowable opening for meter pit covers shall be 11 inches diameter. b. All meter pit covers shall have a 27/32" worm -lock with a Standard Waterworks pentagon head. 3. Acceptable meter pit covers and their manufacturers are: a. Ford, #W3. b. There will be no substitutions allowed. 6. 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meters pits shall be installed by the contractor. I. Meter pits shall be constructed from standard 48 inch inside diameter precast concrete manhole sections. a. Reference Section 03400. 2. Meter pit covers shall be an aluminum manhole ring and cover with a 24 inch diameter opening. a. All meter pit covers shall have a 27/32" worm -lock with a Standard Waterworks pentagon head. b. All meter pit covers shall have the word "water" cast in the lid. C. 3-inch and larger meter vaults shall be installed by -the contractor. I. Meter vaults shall be constructed from precast concrete box sections designed for H-20 bridge loading. a. Vault dimensions for different size meters are as follows: Meter Size Inside Vault Dimension 411 6' x 7' 7' x 7' 6„ x 8' 9 8" and larger determined by City 02646-3 I 2. Unless it is otherwise specified, meter vault covers shall be an aluminum manhole ring and cover with a 24 inch diameter opening. a. All meter vault covers shall have a 27/32" worm -lock with a Standard Waterworks pentagon head. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TAPPING SADDLES A. All tapping saddles shall have a bronze body, with bronze double flat straps and bronze nuts. 1. Outlet threads on tapping saddles shall be "cc" type only. B. Acceptable manufacturers of tapping saddles are: 1. Mueller: 2. Ford. 3. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.2 CORPORATION STOPS A. All corporation stops shall conform to AWWA C800-66. 1. All corporation stops shall be constructed of brass. 2. Corporation stop inlet threads for tapping saddles shall be "cc" type only. 3. Corporation stop inlet threads for tapped tees shall be IP type only. 4. All corporation stop outlets shall use a compression connection. S. Corporation stops shall be used for all taps which are 2-inches and smaller. 6. Corporation stops shall incorporate ball valves only. a. Plug valves will not be allowed. 02646-4 B. Acceptable manufacturers of corporation stops are: I. Mueller. 2. Ford. 3. A. Y. McDonald. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.3 COPPER SERVICE LINES A. Copper pipe shall be used for service lines which are 2-inches and smaller. B. All copper services shall conform to the Appendix to AWWA C8OO-66. 1. The copper for copper services shall be Type K, only. 2.4 COUPLINGS A. All couplings shall use a compression connection. B. Acceptable couplings and their manufacturers are: 1. Mueller; rH-15403. 2. Ford; K44-"d" a. "d" equals the diameter of the service. 3. A. Y. McDonald; R4758-22, or t4758T. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.5 CURB STOPS A. All curb stops shall have compression connections at both ends. B. The top threads for all curb stops shall be Minneapolis type. C. Curb stops shall be used for taps which are 2-inches and smaller. D. Acceptable 3/4-inch and 1-inch curb stops and their manufacturers are: I. Mueller; 2H-15155. 2. Ford; IB44-333M and #844-444M. 3.. A. Y. McDonald; #61O4-22, or '61O4T. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed.' 02646-5 f E. Acceptable 1 1/2-inch curb stops and their manufacturers are: 1. Ford; r'B44-666M. " 2. Mueller; RH-10287 (with Minneapolis threads), with two #H-15428 ends. _ - 3. A. Y.-McDonald; #6104-22, or a6104T. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. F. Acceptable 2-inch curb stops and their manufacturers are: 1. Ford; rB44-777M. _ 2. Mueller; aH-10287 (with Minneapolis threads), with two RH-15428 ends. 3. A. Y. McDonald; R6104-22, or r6104T. - 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.6 VALVE BOXES FOR CURB STOPS. -- A. Minneapolis pattern shall be used for all curb stops. B. Acceptable valve boxes and their manufacturers are: 1. Mueller; QH-10302. 2. There will be no substitutions allowed. C. Valve boxes for 3-inch and larger services. 1. Reference Section 02641 2.7 METERS A. All meters shall be purchased from the Utility, for installation by the contractor, unless otherwise specified. " B. The acceptable manufacturers of meters are: 1. Rockwell. 2. Neptune. 3. Badger. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. 02646-6 2.8 STRAINERS A. All strainers shall be constructed of brass. B. The acceptable manufacturers of strainers for water meters are: 1. Rockwell. 2. Neptune. 3. Badger. 4. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.9 METER SETTERS A. The acceptable manufacturers of 3/4-inch and 1-inch meter setters are: 1. Ford. 2. Mueller. 3. There will be no substitutions allowed. B. -Acceptable l 1/2-inch and 2-inch meter setters, and their manufacturers are: 1. Ford.. a. 1 1/2-inch, V'VVF6612B-13. b. 2-inch, rVVF77126-17. 2. Mueller. a. AH-1423. 3. There will be no substitutions allowed. 2.10 METER PITS A. The acceptable manufacturers of 3/4-inch and 1-inch meter pits are: I. Tallman. 2. There will be no substitutions allowed. B. Acceptable meter pit covers for 3/4-inch and 1-inch meter pits, and their manufacturers are: 1. Ford; RW3 2. There will be no substitutions allowed. 02646-7 7. Question: What is the proposed depth of road base at the gravel storage area? Spec section 02730 refers us to the civil drawings, which don't appear to note the depth. Answer: The Owner will be performing this work along with the asphalt paving. 8. Question: Sheet S1.1, The hatched slab calls for #3 rebar for reinforcement; is this in lieu of fiber reinforcing or inclusive of fiber reinforcing. Answer: The #3 rebar @ 24" O.C. is in addition to the fiber reinforcing. 9. Question: Have any colors been selected for the Storefront framing systems or tinting for the glazing? If not, is there a baseline that could be used for bidding purposes? Answer: No color has been selected for the storefront framing, and the glazing will have a bronze tint. 10. Question: Sheet A3.5, Detail 8, Should there be flashing between the window frame and the pre -cast? Storefront bidders are concerned that this may be a potential future problem area. Answer. No flashing will be required; the profile of the sill is not shown correctly; this will be clarified through the shop drawing process. 11. Question: At the area leading to the Men and Women's restrooms in Hallway 133, Sheet A1.1 shows P.T. for the floor finish, Sheet A5.1, detail 1, shows C.T. for the floor finish. Please clarify. Answer: Ceramic tile. 12. Question: Sheet A3.3, Wall Section 7, The sill detail for the windows appears to show a wood sill and refers us to detail 8 on A3.5. That detail makes no reference to the sill material or finish. Please clarify what happens at these exterior windowsills. Answer: There will be wood sills at all main floor windows and they will be finished as per Specification Section 09900, Article 3.04A. 13. Question: Several of the wall sections on sheet A3.2 & A3.3 have flag note Cl & F1 for the wall types. These flag notes are floor and ceiling finishes. Please clarify. Answer: The flag note designation F1 should be changed to W1 and the flag note designation Cl should be changed to W2. 14. Question: Sheet C10 details "Sign Post" and "No Parking Sign Detail". Please confirm quantities and locations. Answer: Only one (1) "No Parking Sign" is required, and shall be installed at the center of the north side of the large "island", between the accesses off the Private Drive. 15. Question: Sheet C5, South side of Private Access Drive. This area is noted as Landscaped Area (By Others), however Sheet L1 shows dryland seed and trees being c. 1 1/2-inch and 2-inch meter pits. 1. Reference Section 03400 2. The acceptable manufacturers of meter pit covers for 1 1/2-inch and — 2-inch meter pits are: _ a. Casting Incorporated. b. Or an approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The contractor shall not make any taps until the water main has been initially accepted, curb and gutter has been installed, and service locations and grades have been staked. 1. There will be no exceptions made for water mains which are located — in private roadways. B. The contractor shall obtain permission to tap, and scheduled an inspection of the tap, from the Utility's Meters and Services — Supervisor. 1. A minimum of 24 hours notice is required on all tap ihspections. a. There will be no exceptions to the 24 hour notice requirement. C. The contractor shall adjust stop boxes and meter pits to final grade as determined by the grade stake. 1. Grade stakes shall be a placed a minimum of five feet from the location of the stop box. 2. Grade stakes shall not be disturbed prior to inspection of the _ service by the Utility. O. The contractor shall mark the location of the water service with a cross chiseled into the face of the curb and gutter. 3.2 CORPORATION STOPS A. Taps shall not be made within two feet of any joint or fitting. B. Taps shall be separated by at least two feet (measured along the pipe length), even when taps are made on opposite sides of pipe. C. Taps which are made on the same side of the pipe and within 10.feet of each other (measured along the pipe length), shall be staggered fifteen degrees. -� 02646-8 3.3 SERVICE LINES A. All service lines shall be a minimum of 54 inches and a maximum of 66 inches below the final grade. B. There will be a maximum of one coupling per service, between the main and the curb stop. 1. Service lines (3/4-in. through 2-in.) sha1T be uniform in size from the corporation stop to 5 feet past the meter pit; or the curb stop, if the meter is set inside the building. C. When backfilling the service trench, care shall be taken so that no stones larger than 3" are resting against the service line. D. Service trenches shall be subject to compaction specifications. 1. Reference Section 02221. 3.4 CURB STOPS A. The contractor shall adjust the curb stop box to 1/2-inch above final grade prior to final inspection. B. Curb stop box shall be fully extended and screwed onto the curb stop. C. Curb stop box shall be plumb, so that a shut-off key can be placed on the curb stop. 3.5 METER PITS A. Exterior meter settings shall be installed in accordance with Detail Drawing No. 6. B. Service lines entering meter pits shall be a minimum of 54 inches and a maximum of 66 inches below the final grade. C. Meter pits shall not be installed in any street, alley, parking area, driveway, or sidewalk. D. There will be no major landscaping (trees, shrubs, boulders, etc.) or structure (retaining wall, etc.) within 4 feet of the meter pit. E. The ground surrounding meter pits shall slope away from the lid at a minimum grade of 2%. F. There will be no plumbing connections inside the meter pit. G. All tees, connections, and couplings shall be a minimum of 5 feet from the meter pit wall, and on the outlet side. 1. There will be no tees, connections and couplings installed between the curb stop and the meter setter. 02646-9 H. If the property owner changes the grade of the ground surrounding the meter pit, after the pit has been installed, he shall be required to adjust the meter pit cover to 1/2 inch above the final grade. 3.6 INTERIOR METER SETTINGS A. Interior meter settings shall be installed in accordance with Detail Drawing No. 7 or No. 8. B. If the water service is to enter the house through the floor, a minimum of 4 inches of concrete or 24 inches of soil shall cover the water service from the edge of the foundationtothe vertical riser. — 1. The vertical riser shall be installed under the utility room or any other heated portion of the residence. 2. The vertical riser shall be insulated from the point of connection with the horizontal service to the floor of the building. a. The insulation shall provide a minimum of 4 inches of cover on all sides of the water service. C. Any meter setters which are placed in a heated crawl space, shall be ^ installed no more than 5 feet from the entrance to that crawl space. D. All meter setters shall be installed so that the meter is in a horizontal position. 1. The meter setter shall not be installed above a hot water heater. E. A clear and unobstructed access of not less than 24 inches by 24 inches -� shall be provided so that.the meter setter can easily be reached. F. All tees and connections shall be at least 2 feet from the meter setter ". valve, on the outlet side. G. With the exception of the curb stop, there shall be no connections made between the water main and the meter setter. 02646-10 H. A readout cable shall be installed from the meter setter to the remote reading point. I. The -readout cable shall be four conductor, R18 gauge, insulated non-metallic sheathed cable. 2. The remote reading point shall be a recessed electrical box with a blank cover. a. The recessed electrical box shall be mounted on the outside wall of the building, 5-1/2 feet above the ground and within 4 feet of the electrical meter. 3. The readout cable shall have a minimum of 12 inches of extra cable at the meter setter and at the remote reading point. 3.7 INSPECTION A. The contractor shall insure that the curb stop, corporation stop, and any couplings remain exposed until after the inspection and the approval for backfill is given by the Utility. B. The contractor shall turn on water at the corporation stop when the service is ready for inspection. 1. The packing nut on the back of the corporation stop shall be tightened, and water shall be flushed through the curb stop. C. All tap and service inspections shall be scheduled with the Utility's Meters and Services Supervisor. 1. A minimum of 24 hours notice is required on all tap and 'service inspections. a. There will be no exceptions to the 24 hour notice requirement. D. The water shall be turned on at the curb stop by the Utility, only after the service line, curb stop, stop box, and meter setting is approved. 02646-11 OCT87 SECTION 02713 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the installation of water distribution lines.. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Water system installations shall conform to the regulations of the Colorado Department of Health, and the Water Quality Control Commission. B. Construction staking. I. Reference Section 02221. C. Horizontal alignment shall not be deviated from by more than 6 inches. D. Vertical alignment shall not be deviated from by more than 3 inches, as `measured from the pipe invert. E. The minimum effective area of thrust blocks, shall be as specified in Detail Drawing No. 11. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY,. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference Sections 02615, 02622, 02641, 02644, and 02646. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Foreign material, including trench water, shall not be permitted to. enter the pipe. B. Debris, tools, clothing, or other material shall not be permitted in the pipe. C. In order to prevent water, debris, and animals from entering the pipe, the open ends of the pipe shall be plugged with a blocked, watertight plug when pipe laying is not in progress. D. Effective measures shall be used to prevent uplifting or floating of the pipeline prior to completion of the backfilling operations. 02713-1 E. Pipe shall not be installed under the following conditions: 1. When the trench contains water. 2. When weather conditions are unsuitable. a. Temperature is less than -5 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Snowing. c. Raining. d. High winds. 3. When the trench bottom is unstable. F. Pipe and appurtenances shall be protected against dropping and damage. 1. Pipe and appurtenances shall not be used if they are damaged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. The same type of pipe material shall be used for each size pipe. 1. Pipe material shall not be interchanged, except where another type of pipe material is specifically indicated. B. Reference Sections 02615 and 02622. C. Plastic pressure pipe shall be used only when approved by the Utility for a specific job. 2.2 VALVES A. Reference Section 02641. 2.3 HYDRANTS A. Reference Section 02644. 2.4 SERVICE LINES, METERS, APPURTENANCES A. Reference Section 02646. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION ; A. Pipe barrel and fittings shall be free of dirt or other foreign objects prior to installation. 02713-2 B. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for cracks, dents, abrasions or other flaws prior to installation. C. Pipe and fittings with damaged linings or coatings shall be rejected. 1. Defective pipe shall be marked and removed from the site. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Trenching, backfilling and compaction. I. Reference Section 02221. B. Connections. 1. The location and elevation of the existing pipe shall be verified prior to construction. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. All pipe shall be installed with the bells pointing in the direction that the work is progressing. B. The contractor shall employ effective measures to prcvent the opening of joints during bedding and backfilling operations. C. The joint shall be completed in accordance with the applicable pipe material specification and the pipe shall be adjusted to the correct line and grade as each length of pipe is placed in the trench. D. The pipe shall be secured in place with the specified bedding tamped under and around the pipe. E. The pipeline shall be installed so that a uniform positive or negative grade is maintained between the designed high and low points.• F. The minimum depth of cover shall be 4 1/2 feet from the finished grade to the top of the pipe, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. G. The maximum depth of cover shall be 5 1/2 feet from the finished grade to the top of the pipe, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. H. Concrete. encasement shall be provided where indicated on the Construction Drawings or required by these Specifications. 1. Cast -in -Place Concrete. a. Reference Section 03300. 02713-3 2. At any location where water mains cross sewer lines .and the sewer is above the water main or there is less than 18 inches of vertical clear distance below the water main, the crossing shall be constructed by one of the following methods: a. One length of structural sewer pipe, with a laying length 18 feet or greater, shall be installed in the sewer line. i. The structural sewer pipe shall be centered on the water main, and shall be the same size as the remainder of the sewer line. ii. All structural sewer pipe shall be ductile iron pipe or an approved equal. b. Sewer lines which are 12-inches and smaller shall be encased in 6-inch reinforced concrete for a distance of 10 feet either side of the water main. i. The minimum allowable reinforcement shall be continuous No. 4 bars, placed at each corner of the section, and tied with No. 3 bars at 3 foot centers. ii. Reference Detail Drawing No. 12. C. Sewer lines which are larger than 12-inches shall have all joints, which are located 10 feet either side of the water main, encased in 6-inch reinforced concrete. _ 3. Suitable backfill or other structural protection shall be provided _ to prevent settling or failure of the higher pipe. 3.4 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Anchorage and Blocking. 1. Reference Detail Drawing No. 11. 2. Concrete thrust blocks and anchors for preventing pipe movement shall be provided at all mechanical joint plugs, wyes, tees, crosses, bends which deflect 11-1/4 degrees or more, reducers and valves. - 3. The minimum size of thrust blocks and thrust anchors shall be determined from the table in Detail Drawing No. 11. _ 4. Thrust block bearing shall be excavated into undisturbed soil. -- a. All loose soil shall be disposed of, and the location where the thrust block is to be poured shall be carefully shaped to provide a uniform bearing surface of the required size. b. Thrust block bottom shall be flat, and sides shall be vertical. r. 02713-4 5. The thrust block shall be formed to provide access to fittings, valves and hydrants. 6. The thrust block shall be extended from the fitting or valve to be blocked, to solid undisturbed earth. - a. Thrust blocks shall be constructed so that joints and drain holes are clear and accessible. 7. Concrete shall be separated from fittings, valves and hydrants by an 8 mil polyethylene film. a. Concrete shall not be poured directly on or over fittings. 8. The City shall be notified 24 hours before concrete is placed. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINE APPURTENANCES A. Valves, meters, hydrants and other appurtenances to the water distribution lines shall be installed at the locations shown on the Construction Drawings, or as approved by the Utility to accommodate field conditions. I. Measurements of the actual location of appurtenances shall be made prior -to backfilling for recording in the Project Record Drawings. B. All dead-end waterlines will be plugged and have a thrust block poured against the plug. 1. Dead-end waterlines that will be extended in the future, shall have the valve which controls that section of waterline left in the off position. C. Blow -offs will not be allowed to be permanently installed on dead-end waterlines. I. Dead-end waterlines, which have services, shall have a fire hydrant at the end of the waterline to facilitate the discharge of air and water from the. waterline. a. If the waterline is to be extended in the future, the fire hydrant may be installed temporarily, until the extension occurs. D. Blow -offs which are installed by the contractor during construction shall be abandoned at the main prior to acceptance of the waterline. 02713-5 f 3.6 PROTECTION OF METAL SURFACES A. If the supplied material has not been factory coated, or the coating has been damaged by installation, the material shall be protected by one of the following two methods: 1. Two coats of coal tar paint shall be applied to ferrous metal rods, rebars, clamps, bolts, nuts and other accessories which are subject to submergence or contact with earth or fill material, and are not encased in concrete. a. The first coat of coal tar paint shall be applied to a dry, clean surface. b. The first coat of coal tar paint shall be allowed to dry before the second coat is applied. 2. Ferrous metal rods, rebars, clamps, bolts, nuts and other accessories which are subject to submergence or contact with earth or fill material, and not encased in concrete shall be protected with coal tar paint and with Protecto Wrap. 02713-6 planted in this area. Please clarify. Answer: The Landscape Plan L1 is correct, please delete the note (By Others) on sheet C5. 16. Question: Sheet C6, There is a note between the Sand/Oil Interceptor and the 6" sanitary sewer service that says "by others". Please clarify what this note is referencing. Answer: "By others" is simply referencing the Mechanical Engineer, The CE Group. The Sand/Oil Interceptor was designed and sized, as shown on Drawing P2.0 at 6/P2.0. 17. Question: Sheet A6.1 (2 and 4) shows cabinetry for the Crew Room 126; should this be furniture instead? Answer: Yes, this will be furniture supplied by the City. 18. Question: Sheet C5 On the West side of the property there is a note that says: "Top of Planter retaining wall at El 61.45". Please provide additional information if the planter retaining wall exists in the project. Answer: This planter has been removed from the plan set. 19. Question: Please clarify the correct plan for curb & gutter sizing. Sheet AS.1 & the civil drawings show different curb & gutter sizing. Answer: The curb & gutter should conform to the Civil Drawings. 20. Question: Sheet C6 Utility Plan. On the Northwest side of the property, there are 2-Type 3 barricades shown. Are the barricades supplied and installed by the city or the GC? Answer: These will be supplied and installed by the City when we do the striping. 21. Question: Specification Section 07133, Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing. This section calls out to have membrane waterproofing under the standing seam roofing on the exterior canopy. Sheet A8.1, details 2,3 & 4 show 30# felt underlayment. Please verify if this section is required. Answer: Specification Section 07133 governs. 22. Question: Sheet A3.2, Wall Sections, Details 1 & 3. These details make reference to the ceiling and floor system notes at the wall. Please clarify the proper wall system for details 1 & 3. Answer: The flag note designation F1 should be changed to W1 and the flag note designation C1 should be changed to W2. 23. Question: Sheet A3.3, Wall Sections & Details. Detail 3. Same issue as Question 5. Answer: The flag note designation F1 should be changed to W1 and the flag note designation C1 should be changed to W2. 24. Question: Sheet A3.4, Wall Sections. Detail 3, lower wainscoat at wall. Same issue as JUNE90 SECTION 02722 SANITARY SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section concerns the installation of sanitary sewer collection mains, and includes the acceptable products, materials, and construction practices which may be used in the installation of sanitary sewer collection systems. B. The minimum allowable pipe diameter of sanitary sewer maims shall be 8-inches. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction Staking. I. Reference paragraph 1.2.6 of Section 02221. B. Horizontal alignment between consecutive manholes shall not be deviated from by more than 6 inches. C. Vertical alignment shall remain uniform between manholes, with no deviation from the grade specified on the Construction Drawings. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference Sections 02605 and 02622. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Foreign material, including trench water, shall not be permitted to enter the pipe under construction. I. The portion of the pipe being installed shall not be used to dewater the trench. B. Debris, tools, clothing, or other material shall not be permitted in the pipe• C. Water shall be prevented from entering sewer pipe which is already in service and has been previously accepted by the Utility. " D. Effective measures shall be used to prevent uplifting or floating of the pipeline prior to completion of the backfilling operations. 02722-1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Trenching, backfilling and compaction. 1. Reference Section 02221. B. Cutting the pipe. - I. The pipe shall be cut smooth, straight, and Iat right angles to the pipe axis, with saws or pipe cutters which are designed specifically for the material. 2. The cut end of the pipe shall be beveled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Burrs shall be removed and all dust shall be wiped off of the jointing surface. C. Connections. I. The location and elevation of the existing pipes and manhole inverts shall be verified prior to construction. 2. Connections to existing pipes shall be made with an approved coupling device. a. Acceptable manufacturers of couplings are: i. Fernco. ii. Or an approved equal. D. Joints. I. Dirt, oil grit, and other foreign matter shall be removed from the inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot. 2. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the inside surface of the gasket and the spigot end of the pipe, per the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 3. The lubricated joint surface shall be kept clean until joined. 4. The pipe shall have a depth mark prior to the assembly to insure that spigot end is inserted the full depth of the joint. 5. Stabbing of the pipe shall not be allowed. 6. Previously completed joints shall not be disturbed during the jointing operation. 02722-3 7. All joints shall be watertight and free from leaks. 8. After the initial acceptance of the sewer main, the Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any leak, resulting from improper workmanship or materials, which is discovered within a two year period. 3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Pipe installation shall begin at the lowest elevation and proceed _ upstream to the highest, unless prior written approval is obtained from the Engineer. 1. Pipe shall be installed so that the bells are pointing uphill. 2. The pipeline shall be installed so that a uniform grade is - maintained between manholes. B. The joint shall be completed in accordance with. the pipe material '- specification, and the pipe shall be adjusted to the correct line and grade as each length of pipe is placed in the trench. 1. Pipe shall be laid to and maintained at required lines and grades as specified in the approved construction drawings. C. The pipe shall be secured in place with the specified granular bedding -- material consolidated under and around the pipe. - — D. The contractor shall prevent the opening of joints during bedding and backfilling operations. — 1. Bedding material shall not be dropped onto unsupported pipe, which has been set to alignment and grade. E. Concrete encasement shall be provided where indicated on the Construction Drawings or required by these specifications. 1. Cast -In -Place Concrete. _ a. Reference Section 03300. — 02722-4 2. At any location where a water main crosses a sewer main, and the sewer is above the water main, or the vertical distance between the two mains is less than 18 inches, the crossing shall be constructed by one of the following methods: a. One length of structural sewer pipe, with a laying length of 18 feet or greater, shall be installed in the sewer main. i. The structural sewer pipe shall be centered on the water main, and shall be the same size as the remainder of the sewer main. ii. All structural sewer pipe shall be ductile iron pipe or an approved equal. iii. Any joint within 10 feet of the centerline of the pipe being crossed shall be encased in 6-inch reinforced concrete. b. Sewer mains which are 12-inches or smaller, shall be encased in 6-inch reinforced concrete for a distance of 10 feet either side of the water main. i. The minimum allowable reinforcement shall be continuous No. 4 bars, placed at each corner of the section, and tied with No. 3 bars at 3 foot centers. ii. Reference Detail Drawing No. 6. C. Sewer mains which are larger than 12-inches shall have all joints, which are located 10 feet either side of the water main, encased in 6-inch reinforced concrete. d. Suitable backfill or other structural protection shall be provided to prevent settling or failure of the higher pipe. 3. Sanitary sewer mains which cross waterways shall be encased in concrete. a. Reference Detail Drawing No. 7. F. Concrete cut-off walls shall be constructed at all waterway crossings. I. Reference Detail Drawing No. 7. 3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. Reference Section 02605. B. Manholes shall be installed at the location and to the elevation shown on the Construction Drawings, or as approved by the Engineer/Utility to - accommodate field conditions. 02722-5 C. Measurements of the actual location and elevation of sewer main inverts shall be made for recording in the As -Constructed Drawings, by the Design Engineer. 3.5 SERVICE CONNECTIONS - - A. Service wyes, tees or saddles, shall be installed at the locations designated on the approved construction drawings. 1. Reference Detail Drawing No. 8. "- 2. The centerline of the service branch shall be inclined upward at a 45 degree angle. B. Service connections on existing mains shall be installed using a -' saddle. 1. Service connections on existing mains shall be installed by the -- Utility. _ C. All sewer services shall be extended at a constant grade to a point 6 feet inside the property line. 1. _Maximum grade of all sewer services shall be 8%. 2. Minimum grade of 4-inch sewer services shall be 1/4-inch per foot, _ (2%). 3. Minimum grade of 6-inch sewer services shall be 1/8-inch per foot, _ (1%). D. The end of all sewer services shall be plugged with an airtight plug. E. The end of all sewer services shall be marked with a 4" x 4" wooden marker. 1. Ail wooden markers shall extend from the end of the service to a point 2 feet above the ground surface. F. The Contractor installing the sanitary sewer main and services, shall mark the location of the sewer service with an "S" chiseled into the _. face of the curb and gutter. 02722-6 SECTION 02730 AGGREGATE SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . New gravel service yard paving as indicated. B. Related Sections l . Rough Grading Before Placement of Gravel: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Asphalt Base Course and Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. 3. Concrete Aprons: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600 B. Delivery: Do not deliver surfacing materials to the site until finish grading is completed and surfacing may be immediately applied. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Construct gravel surface service yard after completion of building construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate Surfacing Material: Class 5 or 6 Road Base Material as defined by Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: l . Layout: Verify layout of areas to be covered as indicated on the drawing prior to starting operations. 2. Grades: Verify that fine grading is within tolerance specified in Section 02300. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Aggregate Surfacing: Place and compact within 2% of optimum moisture. Continue compaction until the base course has a density of not less than 95% of Standard Proctor Density 1. Maximum Lift Thickness: 6 inches. V F 2001-59 02730-1 2. Compacted Thickness of Completed Aggregate Surfacing: As indicated on Civil Engineering Drawings. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02730-2 SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT (N.I.C.) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . New asphalt paving for passenger car parking and driveways. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Pans, Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter: Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Pavement Marking: Section 02765 Pavement Markings. 3. Cut and Fill Under Paved Areas: Section 02300 Earthwork. 4. Concrete Vehicular Paving, Concrete Aprons and Trash Enclosure Slab: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. 5. Vehicle Sensor Pad: Section 02828 Automatic Gate Operators. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Prior to starting asphalt work, submit asphalt concrete mixes to the Architect for approval. Include the following and all other information used in designing mixes. 1. Hveem Properties. 2. Optimum asphalt content 3. Job mix formula 4. Recommended mixing and placing temperatures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the Contractor listing the time and date of Placement of all asphalt work. Retain all records until the completion of the project and make available to the Architect for examination at any time. B. Inspection of Batching Plants: The Architect shall be offered uninterrupted access to the batching plant at all times that the work is in progress. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Sections 400 Pavements, 702 Bituminous Materials, and 703 Aggregates of the CDOT Standard Specifications, latest edition which shall be made a part of these specifications by reference. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASE COURSE MATERIAL A. Aggregate Base Course Material: Class 5 or 6 base course material as defined by Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. VF 2001-59 02740-1 2.02 TACK COAT Grade CSS-1 h Emulsified Asphalt as defined by Paragraph 702.04 of Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. 2.03 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXTURE A. Asphalt Concrete: Grades C and CX as defined by Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. Use Grade CX for all final lifts (top surface -, course) and Grade C for all other lifts. B.. Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete: Grades C or G as defined by Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. 2.04 SOIL STERILIZER _ Elanco Treflan Liquid Sterilizer or approved equal. Mix 4 gallons sterilizer with 46 gallons water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PAVEMENT DESIGN -- A. New Asphalt Pavement: See Pavement Table on Civil Engineering Drawings, for new _ pavement design sections. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Cut and Fill: Earthwork subcontractor shall perform all cut and fill work required to bring the grade to the correct level to receive base course material or asphalt. _ B. Proof Rolling: Before beginning subgrade preparation, asphalt paving subcontractor shall proof roll subgrade with heavily loaded pneumatic tired vehicles. Areas which W deform under proof rolling shall be reported to the Architect before proceeding. C. Compaction of Subgrade: ^ 1. Asphalt paving contractor shall plow or scarify all subgrade to a depth of 8 inches and recompact within 3 percent of optimum moisture to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D698. 2. Proctor Density tests will be taken by the Soils Engineer and his written approval _ obtained before proceeding. 3.03 . SOIL STERILIZATION Immediately prior to application to aggregate base course material or full depth .., asphalt, apply soil sterilizer to subgrade. Treat surface with 50 gallons of water/sterilizer r. per acre uniformly distributed. Apply as recommended by the manufacturer taking extreme care not to sterilize the adjacent area. _ VF 2001-59 02740-2 3.04 PLACEMENT OF AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Hauling and Placing: l . Exercise care in the hauling and placing of base course so as to avoid segregation of the course and fine materials. Place base course material on the previously prepared subgrade in sufficient quantity to conform to the thickness specified. The material shall be mixed and watered to obtain a uniform mixture at optimum moisture. 2. See Paragraph 3.01 for base course thickness. Place in maximum compacted lifts of 6". 3. Place and compact within 2% of optimum moisture. Continue compaction until the base course has a density of not less than 95% of Standard Proctor Density. B. Surface and Thickness Tolerances: The subgrade of the prepared base course material shall be free from depressions exceeding 3/16" in 10' when measured with a straightedge. The surface shall be smooth and true to the established crown and grade. Any areas not complying with these tolerances shall be reworked to conform. 3.05 TACK COAT APPLICATION Apply tack coat of emulsified asphalt to edge of curb and all other concrete or existing asphalt surfaces adjoining asphalt paving. 3.06 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE A. Comply with requirements of Section 401, Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. B. Maximum Lift Thickness: 3 inches. C. Second, third and fourth lifts must be placed within 48 hours of preceding lift or a tack coat will be required. D. Compaction: Minimum of 95 percent of Hveem density, ASTM D1560, ASTM D1561. 3.07 SEAL COATING Seal coating of new asphalt is not required. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Testing of base course compaction and sampling and testing of asphalt concrete mixtures for quality control during paving operation will be done by the testing laboratory using applicable ASTM and AASHTO testing procedures. 3.09 STRIPING See Section 02765 Pavement Markings. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02740-3 Question 5. Answer: The flag note designation F1 should be changed to W1 and the flag note designation C1 should be changed to W2. 25. Question: Sheet C5 & C6, Site Plans. What is the Scope of work for the General Contractor for Linden Street? Is the city going to remove the existing asphalt, prep and grade, asphalt pave, stripe and furnish and install signage? Answer: The City will remove the existing asphalt, overlot grade, prep and grade, asphalt pave and stripe. The GC should plan to install signage. 26. Question: Sheet C9, Details. Are there any "No Parking, Bike Lane" signs required to be supplied by the GC in this bid? Answer: No. 27. Question: Sheet AH, Floor Plan. Column detail at grids 8.1 & H. The detail reference appears incorrect. Should this detail be referencing 1 1/A3.5? Answer: Yes. 28. Question: Sheet AT1, Doors and Windows. Wood Frames "WF4, WF6, WFT'. Change frame detail cut from "9/A7.2" to "9/A7.3"? Answer: Yes. 29. Question: Sheet Al .1, Floor Plan. Should the Door/Window frames at Room 112 be labeled as a "WF4"? Answer: Yes. 30. Question: Are any other topsoil amendments required other than those listed on Sheet C3, under Grading and Erosion Control Notes? Answer: No. 31. Is hydro -seeding an acceptable method of seeding for this project? Answer: Yes. 32. Spec Section 15300, 1.02, A. This item calls for a complete non -freeze (wet) fire sprinkler system. Are you implying that this system needs to be an antifreeze system? Please clarify. Answer: This is a wet pipe fire sprinkler system. The term non -freeze should be removed. RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BY A WRITTEN STATEMENT ENCLOSED WITH THE BID/QUOTE STATING THAT THIS ADDENDUM HAS BEEN RECEIVED SECTION 02750 RIGID PAVEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Concrete paving for apron slabs at overhead doors. 2. Trash enclosure slab and apron. 3. Other vehicular concrete pavement as indicated. 4. Includes: a. Subgrade preparation. b. Reinforcement. c. Concrete placement, finishing and curing. d. Joint treatment. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Concrete: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Bollards: Supplied under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications C. Related Sections l . Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 2. Subgrade Preparation: Section 02300 Earthwork. 3. Asphalt Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. 4. Concrete Pans, Curbs and Sidewalks: Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. D. Related Requirements: l . Quality Control: Section 01450. 2. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 3. Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 4. Concrete Testing: Section 03300 Cast -in -place Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Prior to placing any concrete, submit concrete mixes in accordance with Section 01450. Submit separate mix designs for each type of concrete to be used in project. Submittals shall include all information used in designing mixes. See Section 03300 for design procedures. B. Quality Control Submittals: l . Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests or core tests specified under Field Quality Control Article of Section 03300 shall be distributed by testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with design standards of City of Fort Collins and Lorimer County. VF 01-06 02750-1 2. Comply with CDOT Standard Specifications. B. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by testing laboratory. See Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete and Section 01450 Quality Control. C. Record of Work: Keep record listing time and date of placement of concrete. Keep record until completion of project and make available to Architect for examination at „ any time. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Comply with Section 03300. B. Extra Water: Comply with Section 03300. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with Section 03300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Comply with Section 03100. -� B. Reinforcement: Comply with Section 03200. C. Concrete: Provide ready mixed concrete in accordance with Section 03300. On -site , mixed concrete not allowed. D. Curing Compounds: Comply with Section 03300. E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Expansion Joints: 1 /Z' thick asphalt impregnated premolded fiber. 2. Poured Joint Sealer: Comply with AASHTO M-173 or D1190-97 Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Applied Elastic Type. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX _ A. Mix Design: See Section 03300. B. Air Entrainment and Admixtures: Comply with Section 03300. C. Mixing: Comply with Section 03300. VF 01-06 02750-2 -� Y�1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Subgrade: Inspect subgrade to verify elevation and compaction requirements. See Section 02300 Earthwork. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. C. Architect's Review: Provide ample notice to Architect to allow him to review forms and reinforcement just before concrete is deposited and to observe placing of concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Subgrade: Perform minor cut and fill required to bring grade to correct level to receive concrete work. Recompact to comply with Section 02300. B. Concrete Work Preparation: Comply with Section 03300. C. Existing Asphalt: Where new concrete paving abuts existing asphalt paving, cut asphalt to straight line and place concrete against asphalt to avoid necessity of patching asphalt. D. Protection: Comply with Section 03300. 3.03 FORMWORK Install in conformance with Section 03100. 3.04 PAVING A. General: Construct paving in accordance with Drawings, and in conformance with applicable local codes and ordinances. B. Finish: Broom or belt finish unless otherwise indicated with final surface finish as directed by Architect. 1. Finish edges with slightly rounded edging tool. C. Thickness: Total 7 inch full thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Slope: Slope slabs next to building away from building unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Place concrete in conformance with Section 03300. VF 01-06 02750-3 1. Concrete: Place, strike off and consolidate with mechanical finishing machine, vibrating screed or by hand -finishing methods. _ 2. Screeding: Carry depth of at least two inches of concrete in front of screed for full width of pavement. 3. After concrete has been struck off and consolidated, bullfloat may be used to remove any high or low spots. Bull float use shall be confined to minimum. B. Control Joints or Contraction Joints: 1. Form by sawing, hand -forming, or forming by premolded filler. 2. Minimum Joint Depth: 1 /4 of slab thickness. 3. Hand -formed Joints: Maximum edge radius of 1 /4 inch. 4. Sawed Joints: Begin sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit _ sawing without excessive raveling. 5. Complete joints before uncontrolled shrinkage, cracking occurs. 6. Joints: Continuous across slab, unless interrupted by full depth premolded joint filler. 7. Clean joint openings 1 /4 inch and wider and seal before opening paving to traffic. _ 8. Spacing: 10 feet o.c. unless otherwise indicated. - C. Expansion Joints or Isolation Joints: 1. Install recessed premolded joint filler for full depth of slab. _ 2. Sealant Joints: a. Prepare, prime and install in accordance with requirements of Section 07920. b. Seal over expansion joint filler with poured sealant. Do not over -fill. - c. Apply sealants in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets, using a ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun. _ d. Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will not extrude from joints. e. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean adjoining surfaces. -- f. In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry. 3. Locations: _ a. Provide at fixed objects abutting or within paved area. b. Continue expansion joints in paving perpendicular to curbs through curb and any adjacent sidewalks. 4. Spacing: Provide as indicated. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION Cure and protect in accordance with Section 03300. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Comply with Section 03300 and Section 01450. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Paving: Do not open to traffic for at least 72 hours after placing and until concrete as reached minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi. -� VF Ol-06 02750-4 l . Restrict traffic to passenger cars and light trucks for at least seven days after concrete is placed. B. Protect newly finished concrete from rain damage. END OF SECTION VF 01-06 02750-5 SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Layout and paint lines and direction arrows, signs, handicapped designations, etc. at: a. Asphalt paving. B. Related Sections: l . Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 2. Asphalt Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Pavement, 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in pavement marking with proper equipment for pavement marking project of this size. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking in wet weather or when temperature is below 400 F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRIPING PAINT A. Paint: Solvent base paint complying with Colorado Department of Transportation specifications. 1. Handicapped Markings: Blue and white. 2. Color of Parking and Directional Markings: Yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MARKING A. Preparation and Layout 1. After paving is fully cured, sweep paving clean. 2. Layout: Layout and paint symbols, direction arrows, signs, etc., on asphalt paving, and concrete paving indicated on Drawings. 3. Verify marking layouts with Architect before proceeding. B. Markings: 1. Lines: Four inches wide painted by mechanical striping machine. VF 2001-59 02765-1 2. Markings: Apply lining and other markings sufficient quantity to produce completely opaque lines and markings. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02765-2 SECTION 02776 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete curb and gutter. 2. Concrete sidewalks, islands, and other exterior concrete pedestrian paving. 3. Concrete cross pans. 4. Exterior concrete equipment pads. 5. Miscellaneous site concrete as indicated. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Exterior Concrete: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Steel Embedments: Supplied under Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. C. Related Sections: 1. Layout: Section 01722 Field Engineering. 2. Finish Grading: Section 02300 Earthwork. 3. Quality Control: Section 01450. 4. Fence Post Embedment: Section 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates. 5. Bicycle Racks: Section 02871. 6. Vehicular Concrete Paving, Apron Slabs and Trash Enclosure Slab: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. 7. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 8. Steel Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 9. Concrete Testing: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 10. Flagpole: Section 10350. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. l . ACI 117-90 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301-96 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 306.1-90 - Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1-98- Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. MSP-1-97 - Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: l . ACI 305R-89 - Hot Weather Concreting. 2. ACI 309R-87 - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. VF 2001-59 02776-1 C. Field References: Keep at least one copy in Contractor's field office at all times: ACI Field Reference Manual, SP-15, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings (ACI 301) _ with Selected ACI and ASTM References. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: See Section 03300 for design procedures and submittal requirements. B. Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests or core tests specified under Section 03300 shall be distributed by the testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450 Quality Control. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with design standards of applicable local codes and ordinances. B. Testing Agency: All testing will be conducted by approved testing laboratory. See Field y Quality Control - Part 3 and Section 01450. " 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Hauling Time: Discharge all concrete transmitted in a truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1-1 /2 hours after the mixing water has been added. B. Extra Water: Comply with Section 03300. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with Section 03300 and ACI 306.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS '- 2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS r A. Form Facing Materials, Formwork Release Agents and Formwork Accessories: Supplied under Section 03100. 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Bars and Welded Wire Fabric: Supplied under Section 03200. _ B. Wire Bar Supports and Spacers: Comply with CRSI MSP-I. Provide rigid support and clearances required in concrete stairs. 1. Supported on Soil: Class 3. Provide earth -bearing plates. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Use ready mixed concrete conforming with ASTM C94. No on job mixed concrete will be allowed. VF 2001-59 02776-2 B. Concrete supplied under Section 03300. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Curing and Sealing Compounds: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Minimum 30%solids content, maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per square centimeter (300 square feet per gallon coverage): a. L&M Dress & Seal WB 30. b. W.R. Meadows Sealtight Vocomp-30. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Curing Compound - Vertical Surfaces: Conform to ASTM C309. B. Expansion Joints: 1 /2 thick asphalt impregnated premolded fiber. 1. Joints at Building Foundation Walls: Greenstreak G-Seal flexible modified polyvinyl chloride joint seal over premolded filler. a. Seal Color: As selected by Architect. C. Poured Joint Sealer: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1. Colors: As selected by Architect. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXES A. Design: See Section 03300 for mix design. B. Mixing: ASTM C94. See Section 03300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Subgrade: Inspect subgrade to verify elevation and compaction requirements. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. C. Forms and Reinforcement: 1. Provide ample notice to the Architect to allow him to examine all forms and reinforcement just before concrete is deposited and to observe the placing of all concrete. Do not begin placement until approval of Architect is obtained. 2. Contractor's Review: Contractor shall inspect forms and reinforcing prior to concrete placement to assure accurate placement of embedded items. VF 2001-59 02776-3 NAME X�J L R/7/014 0,412^ C'rl_ Cat Po(ZX�j o Ss�L 6G :x9�v Cows ATTENDANCE RECORD PREBID CONFERENCE Project: Traffic Operations Facility Time: 10:OOa.m. Date: February 25, 2002 Location: 625 Ninth Street, Training Room '� 1..E o • 353- 8z5 K s3-3 ao ?7Eyoo,,/z, 5f�h Iv� GerVia a,� Cow,,,, 97a-6cy-a�7w Boao 3 ?o - Z24 - �0 6 0 I zz/-css7 FAX # E-MAIL ADDRESS 70- 35'%-oS3 quo ySz83� �d rc r� bi Co 94 zV-ZIOZ c.o-- 4ALi&LkA-nv, 7zo cn„ Sf tN OFC ov, Lv _vfa y C� ,72I-G17o —r(�vrro s�gfG�o 3.02 PREPARATION A. Finish Grading: 1. Work by Earthwork Contractor: Earthwork contractor will perform all cut and fill necessary to bring the subgrade to within ± 0.04' (1 /2") of bottom surface of sidewalks, curb and gutter and other concrete work under this section. 2. Work by Concrete Curb and Sidewalk Contractor: Cut or fill and finish grade as required to bottom of sidewalk or curb and gutter within a tolerance of 0.02' (1 /4"). If fill is required use on -site material compacted in accordance with Section 02300 or ._ Class 6 road base material compacted in conformance with Section 02300. 3. Fine grade to smooth, level surface prior to installation of forms. B. Concrete Work Preparation: Do not begin concrete work until operations are complete enough to allow placement to be carried on as continuous operation for entire section that is to be placed. Clean equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. l . Forms: Constructed under Section 03100. Cleaned of debris and ice, wetted (except in freezing weather) and coated with form oil before concrete placement. 2. If water accumulates in forms, pump out before concrete is deposited. 3. Clearly mark finish top surface of concrete on form walls. C. Reinforcement: Clean prior to placing concrete to remove oil, soil, ice or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. D. Existing Asphalt: Where new curb and gutter abuts existing asphalt paving, cut asphalt to a straight line and pour toe of gutter against asphalt to avoid necessity of patching _ asphalt. E. Protection: Comply with Section 03300. ^ 3.03 STEEL REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Steel Reinforcement: Installed under Section 03200. Provide reinforcing steel type, sizes, spacings and locations indicated on Drawings. 1. Sidewalks: Reinforce pedestrian concrete paving and sidewalks with 6 x 6 - W 1.4 x W 1.4 welded wire fabric unless indicated otherwise. 2. Curbs and Gutter: Steel reinforcement not required unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. Cross Pans: See Drawings for reinforcing requirements. 4. Equipment Pads: Reinforcement to match sidewalks unless otherwise indicated. 5. Bicycle Rack Slab: See Drawings. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 301. Place, strike off and consolidate with mechanical ` finishing machine, vibrating screed or by hand -finishing methods. B. Placement: Place concrete in approximately uniform horizontal layers not over twelve inches in height. Piling up of concrete in forms or chuting in manner to separate .. aggregates will not be permitted. Do not drop concrete in free fall over 5 feet. VF 2001-59 02776-4 u C. Water: Prevent accumulations of water on surface of concrete due to water gain, segregation, or other causes, during placement or compacting. Make provision for removal of water as may accumulate so that concrete not be placed in such accumulation. D. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during and immediately after depositing by means of mechanical vibrators. Supplement by hand spading at corners and angles of forms, around embedded fixtures and in other difficult areas. 1. Mechanical Vibrator: Comply with ACI 301-96, Table 5.3.2.5. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. 3. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. 4. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6' into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 5. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. E. Finishing: Where top of cast -in -place concrete placement will form finished surface, immediately finish concrete in form by skilled cement finisher. Surfaces not finished to level subject to removal and replacement. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Reference Standards: ACI 301 and ACI 308.1 B. Protection: Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete from rain damage. C. Form Removal: Do not remove forms until times as specified. Remove carefully to not injure concrete surface. Protect edges and corners to prevent cracking, chipping or other damage and premature drying. D. Vertical Surfaces: Clean all surfaces of loose sand, mortar, debris and grout; spray lightly with water and coat with a clear or translucent curing compound as soon as possible after removing forms. Apply curing compound in all cases the some working day that the forms are removed. E. Horizontal Surfaces: As soon as possible after placing concrete, coat all exposed horizontal surfaces with curing compound as specified. Give special attention to obtaining adequate curing of slab edges. Protection: Protect concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping, and other damage during progress of the work, and leave in good condition upon completion. 3.06 SIDEWALKS, ISLANDS, AND EXTERIOR SLABS A. General: Construct sidewalks, islands and slabs in accordance with details on the Drawings and in strict conformity with the ordinances of the City of Fort Collins and Larimer County. VF 2001-59 02776-5 B. Finish: Light and medium broom finish perpendicular to direction of travel as indicated. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. 1. Broom finish perpendicular to direction of travel as indicated. 2. All final surface finishes as indicated or as directed by the Architect. 3. Finish edges with a slightly rounded edging tool. C. Thicknesses: 1. Sidewalks and Other Paving Subject to Pedestrian Traffic Only: Full 4 inches unless indicated otherwise. 2. Islands and Other Paving Subject to Vehicular Traffic: Full 7 inches unless indicated otherwise. 3. Cross Pans Thicknesses: See Drawings. D. Control Joints: Provide control joints as indicated on the Drawings or as specified. Provide scored joints with minimum depth of 3/4". Locate control joints where shown on _ the Drawings, or 10 feet maximum on center. Locate score joints 5 feet on center unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. E. Expansion Joints: Extend through the entire slab (Cold joints). Provide bituminous fiber expansion joint filler where indicated. 3.07 CURB AND GUTTER A. General: Construct curb and gutter in accordance with details on the Drawings and in strict conformity with the ordinances of the City of Fort Collins and Lorimer County. B. Finish: 1. Finish all curb and gutter surfaces while the concrete is still green to a brush finish. For any surface areas that are too rough or where surface defects make additional finishing necessary, the curb shall be rubbed to a smooth surface with a _ soft brick or wood block, with water used liberally. 2. Finish edges with a edging tool having a radius of % inch 3. Remove all curb and gutter forms within 24 hours after concrete is in place, and fill minor defects with mortar composed of one part Portland cement and two parts fine aggregate. Plastering is not permitted. C. Gutter Thickness: 6 inches minimum unless indicated otherwise. D. Control Joints: Provide control joints as indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 1. Locate control joints where shown on the Drawings, or 10 feet maximum on center. 2. Joint width: 1 /8 inch minimum. E. Expansion Joints: Extend through the entire slab (Cold joints). Provide bituminous fiber expansion joint filler where indicated. Tolerance: Test the gutters with a 20 foot straight edge laid parallel to the centerline of the roadway while the concrete is still plastic. Straight edging shall be done along the edge of the gutter cross-section. Irregularities in excess of Y. inch shall be corrected immediately. VF 2001-59 02776-6 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS SITE CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all other site concrete indicated on the Drawings even though not specifically mentioned herein to complete the work. - B. Bollards: Install and fill steel bollards supplied under Section 05500 as indicated. C. Anchors and Sleeves: Install anchors and sleeves supplied under other sections in accordance with approved shop drawings. D. Signs: Embed exterior sign posts in concrete where indicated. See Section 02891. E. Bicycle Racks: Coordinate embedment with Section 02871. F. Flagpole: Provide concrete for flagpole base as indicated. G. Light Pole Bases: Form and place as shown on Electrical Drawings. Coordinate with Electrical Subcontractor. 3.09 BACKFILLING A. Backfilling: After the concrete has set sufficiently, but no later than 3 days after the Pouring, the spaces in front and back of the curb and other excavation generated from this work shall be refilled to the required elevation with suitable material, placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not to exceed 6 inches. B. Final Grade Tolerance: ± 0.1 foot. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Testing: All testing, with the exception of slump tests, shall be performed by an approved testing laboratory. Comply with testing requirements specified in Section 03300. B. Record of Work: A record shall be kept by the Contractor listing the time and date of Placement of all concrete. Such record shall be kept until the completion of the project and shall be available to the Architect for examination at any time. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect all exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. B. Protect freshly placed concrete against rain damage. C. Protect all concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping and other damage during progress of work, and leave in good condition upon completion. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02776-7 DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02810-IRRIGATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"). C. Connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system. D. Maintenance period. E. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire. 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. Excavation, installation, and backfill of tap into municipal water line. B. Excavation, installation, and backfill of water meter and vault. C. Provision and installation of backflow prevention device. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Materials List: Include sleeving, pipe, fittings, mainline components, sprinkler, drip irrigation components, control system components, and all other components shown on the drawings and installation details or described herein. Components such as pipe sealant, wire, wire connectors, ID tags, etc. must be included. Quantities of materials need not be included. B. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and Operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list. C. Shoo Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS: A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 1 Irrigation Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities. _ B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above -mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. 1.05 TESTING: A. Notify the Owner's Representative three days in advance of testing. B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent -welded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing. C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Owner's Representative. D. Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retests. E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: 1. Subject mainline pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating pressure of 70 PSI for two hours. Test with mainline _ components installed. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings. 2. Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test. 3. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. Operational Test: Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The Owner's Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage. 2. Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational deficiencies. 3. Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage deficiencies. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 2 Irrigation 4. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 5. Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW: The purpose of on -site reviews by the Owner's Representative is to periodically observe the work in progress, the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents, and to address questions with regard to the installation. A. Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout or testing must be scheduled with the Owner's Representative as required by these specifications. B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project. C. A review will occur at the completion of the irrigation system installation and Project Record (As -Built) Drawing submittal. 1.07 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner's Representative. B. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY: Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and which are the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Alternative equipment must be approved by the Engineer prior to bidding. The Contractor is responsible for making any changes to the design to accommodate alternative equipment. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 3 Irrigation B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. ._ 2.03 SLEEVING: 2.04 A. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle. _. B. Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe _ with solvent welded joints. C. Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent _ welded joints. D. Sleeving beneath retaining walls shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints. E. Sleeving diameter: as indicated on the drawings and installation details or equal to twice that of the pipe or wiring bundle. PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, v ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end. 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions ^ and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal _ diameters which are not manufactured in Class 200. 3. Use solvent weld mainline pipe. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent J weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to _ ASTM Standard D2564. B. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National _ Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-13, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. 2. Use Class 160, SDR-26, rated at 160 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 4 Irrigation primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564, of a type approved by the pipe manufacturer. 3. For drip irrigation laterals downstream of zone control valves, use UV radiation resistant polyethylene pipe manufactured from Prime Union Carbide G-resin 7510 Natural 7 manufactured by Union Carbide or a Union Carbide Licensee with a minimum of 2% carbon black. Use PVC/compression line fittings compatible with the drip lateral pipe. Use tubing stakes or landscape fabric staples to hold above -ground pipe in place. C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: Copper pipe: Use Type "K" rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88. Use wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, soldered or threaded per the installation details. Use a 95% tin and 5% antimony solder. 2. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: a. Use pipe specifically intended for use as a flexible swing joint. Inside diameter: 0.490+0.010 inch. Wall thickness: 0.100+0.010 inch. Color: Black. b. Use spiral barb fittings supplied by the same manufacturer as the hose. 3. Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings. 4. Joint sealant: Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe thread sealant formulated for use on threaded connections and approved by the pipe fitting manufacturer. 2.05 MAINLINE COMPONENTS: A. Winterization Assembly: as presented in the installation details. B. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: double swing joint arrangement as presented in the installation details. 2.06 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RQ0 Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: as presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot -stamped black letters on a yellow background. B. Sprinkler Assembly: as presented in the drawings and installation details City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 5 Irrigation 2.07 DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: as presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot -stamped black letters on a yellow background. B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. C. Drip Emitter Assembly: 1. Use barb -mounted, pressure compensating emitter device as presented in _ the installation details. 2. Use emitter quantities as presented in the installation details. 3. Use flexible plastic distribution tubing to direct water from emitter outlet to emission point. Use 1/4-inch diameter distribution tubing compatible with the emitters. Length of distribution tubing shall not exceed five feet. Secure distribution tubing outlet with tubing stakes. 4. Install an access sleeve for each multiple -outlet emitter. _ D. Flush Cap Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Locate at the end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. 2.08 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Irrigation Controller Unit: 1. As presented in the drawings and installation details. _ 2. Lightning protection: Provide one 5/8"x10 foot copper clad UL listed grounding rod, #6 AWG bare copper grounding wire, one 6-inch round _ valve box, and one CADWELD connector. 3. Wire markers: Prenumbered or labeled with indelible nonfading ink, made of permanent, nonfading material. B. Control Wire: 1. Use American Wire Gauge (AWG) No. 14 solid copper, Type OF or PE cable, UL approved for direct underground burial from the controller unit to each remote control valve. _ 2. Color: Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished _ colors for other control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active control wire. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 6 Irrigation ATTENDANCE RECORD PREBID CONFERENCE Project: Traffic Operations Facility Time: 10:OOa.m. Date: February 25, 2002 Location: 625 Ninth Street, Training Room Splices: Use wire connector with waterproof sealant. Wire connector to be of plastic construction consisting of two (2) pieces, one piece that snap locks into the other. A copper crimp sleeve to be provided with connector. 4. Protect wiring not located near PVC irrigation pipe with warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide, colored yellow, and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW". 2.09 OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing toolsspare parts and other items indicated in the General Notes of the drawings. B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: A. Site Inspections: Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"): Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground utilities. 2. Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the staking has been completed. Notify the Owner's Representative one week in advance of review. Modifications will be identified by the Owner's Representative at this review. 3.02 LAYOUT OF WORK: A. Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, control valves, manual valves, controller, and isolation valves. B. Install all mainline pipe and mainline components inside of project property lines. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 7 Irrigation 3.03 EXCAVATION TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING: A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade): 1. 18-inch over mainline pipe and over electrical conduit. 2. 20-inch over control wire. 3. 12-inch over lateral pipe to sprinklers and over manifold pipe to drip system zone control valves. 4. 8-inch over drip lateral pipe in turf or paved areas downstream of drip system zone control valves. 5. 3-inch minimum mulch cover over drip lateral pipe in planting beds downstream of drip system zone control valves. C. PVC lateral pipes may be pulled into the soil utilizing a vibratory plow device specifically manufactured for pipe pulling. Minimum burial depths equals minimum cover listed above. D. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. E. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill: Backfill shall be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. F. Backfill unsleeved pipe and sleeves in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding .. soil. G. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc., in sleeves. Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698-78. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, "puddling", will not be permitted. H. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades. 1. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner's Representative for trench depth adjustments. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 8 Irrigation 3.04 SLEEVING AND BORING: A. Install sleeving at a depth which permits the encased pipe or wiring to remain at the specified burial depth. B. Extend sleeve ends six inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe ends and mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled "x" at sleeve end locations. C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions which cannot be removed. Employ equipment and methods designed for horizontal boring. 3.05 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. 3. Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the limits of the curvature of the pipe. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20 foot length of pipe by pipe size are shown in the following table. All curvature results from the bending of the pipe lengths. No deflection will be allowed at a pipe joint. B. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use only strap -type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe. C. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 9 Irrigation 3. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted. ^ C. Lateral Pipe and Fittings: - 1. Use only strap -type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. ^ b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing _ water in the pipe. c. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. 3. UV Radiation Resistant Polyethylene Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. _ b. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench, on the soil surface. _ Stake pipe at 10' intervals. Pipe is not to be compressed or crimped by the stake or staple or other construction activity. C. Pipe on Terraces: Lay pipe in straight rows on uphill side of plant material, allowing slack for expansion and contraction. Pipe is not to be compressed or crimped by the stake or staple or other construction activity. 4. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted. D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe: a. Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux. b. Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference. 2. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory -formed threads. Field -cut threads are not permitted. b. Use only nonhardening, nontoxic thread sealant. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 10 January 8, 2002 Irrigation C. When connection is plastic -to -metal, the plastic component shall have male threads and the metal component shall have female threads. 4. Make metal -to -metal, threaded connections with nonhardening, nontoxic pipe sealant applied to the male threads only. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS: A. Winterization Assembly: as presented in the installation details. D. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: double swing joint arrangement as presented in the installation details. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: 1. Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly. 2. Install where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Install connectors and sealant per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. Allow at least 12-inches between valve boxes. 4. Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure. 5. Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring. B. Sprinkler Assembly: Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. 2. Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings. 3. Locate rotary sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved areas. 4. Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved areas. 5. Install sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade. 6. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best performance. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 11 Irrigation 7. Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best -performance. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: 1. Flush mainline pipe before installing RCV assembly. 2. Locate as shown on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof _ sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Connectors and sealant shall be installed as per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install only one RCV to valve box. Locate at least 12-inches from and _ align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. — 4. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. Set RCV assembly discharge pressure to 30 PSI. B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: Install at locations shown on the drawings. C. Drip Emitter Assembly: 1. Locate as shown on the drawings and installation details. 2. Flush lateral pipe before installing emitter assembly. 3. Cut emitter outlet distribution tubing square. 4. Install an access sleeve as part of each multiple -outlet emitter assembly for emitters located in turf areas. 5. Use tools and techniques recommended by the manufacturer. Make openings for barb -mounted emitters with the emitter manufacturer's hole - punching tool. D. Flush Cap Assembly: Install at the end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe as shown on the installation details. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Irrigation Controller Unit: 1. The location of the controller unit as depicted on the drawings is — approximate; the Owner's Representative will determine the exact site location upon commencement of contract. 2. Lightning protection: Drive grounding rod into soil its full length. Connect #6 AWG copper grounding wire to rod using CADWELD connection. Install 6-inch round valve box over CADWELD connection. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 _. Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 12 Irrigation 3. Attach wire markers to the ends of control wires inside the controller unit housing. Label wires with the identification number (see drawings) of the remote control valve to which the control wire is connected. 4. Connect control wires to the corresponding controller terminal. B. Control Wire: 1. Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with pipe wrapping tape spaced at 10-foot intervals. 2. Control wiring may be chiseled into the soil utilizing a vibratory plow device specifically manufactured for pipe pulling and wire installation. Appropriate chisel must be used so that wire is fed into a chute on the chisel, and wire is not subject to pulling tension. Minimum burial depth must equal minimum cover previously listed. 3. Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90 degree change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil 24- inch length of wire within each remote control valve box. 4. Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve. Multiple valves on a single control wire are not permitted. 5. If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in a valve box which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 12-inch standard valve box. Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in -line splices. 6. Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and below PVC mainline pipe. 7. Protect wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe with a continuous run of warning tape placed in the backfill six inches above the wiring. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools and Spare Parts: Prior to the Review at completion of construction, supply to the Owner operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts, and any other items indicated in the General Notes on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 13 Irrigation 3.11 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS: A. The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. Maintain " on -site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as -built information is recorded. B. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference _ dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation system valve, each backflow prevention device, each controller or - control unit, each sleeve end, each stub -out for future pipe or wiring connections, _ and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box. C. Prior to construction completion, obtain from the Owner's Representative a reproducible mylar copy of the drawings. Mylars or CAD data files compatible with AutoCAD software, can be purchased from the Engineer. Cost of mylar reproducible drawings is $25 per sheet and the cost of AutoCAD data files on diskette is $150 per project set. Using technical drafting pen or CAD, duplicate information contained on the project drawings maintained on site. Label each sheet "Record Drawing". D. Turn over the 'Record Drawings" to the Owner's Representative. Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of the _. irrigation system installation. 3.12 WINTERIZATION AND SPRING START-UP: A. Winterize the irrigation system in the fall following completion of construction and _ start-up the irrigation system in the following spring. Repair any damage caused in improper winterization at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate the -- winterization and start-up with the landscape maintenance personnel. _ 3.13 MAINTENANCE: A. Upon completion of construction and Review by the Owner's Representative, — maintain irrigation system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components so as to achieve the most desirable application of water. B. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period, the Owner will be - responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for trimming around sprinklers, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after the landscape maintenance operation. City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 14 Irrigation 3.14 CLEANUP: A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. END OF SECTION City of Fort Collins Traffic Operations Center January 8, 2002 Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 15 Irrigation SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Vinyl coated security fencing as indicated. 2. Rolling gates. B. Related Sections: l . Automatic Gate Operators: Section 02828. 2. Concrete: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts indicating material compliance and specified options. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of fences and gates with dimensions, details, and finishes of components, accessories, and post foundations.. 3. Samples: a. Submit color selection for PVC finishes. b. Submit 12 inch square sample of coated fabric in specified gauge and mesh sizes. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Chain link fabric and pipe frame material shall comply with standards and specifications of the Chain -Link Fence Manufacturers Institute. 1.04 SEQUENCING Final grading shall be complete before beginning this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: l . Anchor Fence, Inc./Master Halco; www.fenceonline.com. 2. Accepted substitute. VF 2001-59 02821-1 PROJECT DIRECTORY City of Fort Collins TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY Fort Collins Colorado City of Fort Collins PO Box 580 Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 970/221-6805 970/221-6534 FAX Contact: Ron Kechter, Owner's Representative rkechter@fcgov.com Vaught'Frye Architects 401 West Mountain Avenue; Suite 200 Fort Collins, Colorado 80521 970/224-1191 970/224-1662 FAX Contact: John Renhowe, Project Coordinator jrenhowe@vfavfr.com JVA Incorporated 4710 South College Avenue Fort Collins, Colorado 80521 970/225-9099 970/225-6923 FAX Contact: Blake Larsen, Project Engineer blarsen@jvajva.com The CE Group 300 East Boardwalk Drive Building 3, Suite C Fort Collins, Colorado 80525 970/266-9888 970/266-8876 FAX Contact: Mark D'Rosario, Project Engineer markd@theCEgroup.com Electrical Systems Consultants 212 West Mulberry Street Fort Collins, Colorado 80521 970/224-9100 970/224-9137 FAX Contact: Gene Strom gstrom@electsys.com VF 2001-59 00008-1 Owner Architect Structural Engineer Mechanical and Plumbing Engineer Electrical Engineer 2.02 EXTERIOR FENCING MATERIALS A. Quality: All steel, including fabric, pipe and fittings shall be first quality, full weight material. All weights and dimensions are nominal. 2.03 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC A. Coating: ASTM F934. PVC, thermally fused to steel core wire. l . Minimum Thickness: 7 mils. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. B. Fabric: No. 9 gauge wire helically wound and woven into 1 inch chain link mesh, _ galvanized after fabrication. Zinc coating by weight not to be less than 1.2 oz. per sq. ft. Wire used in fabric shall be open hearth steel, containing not less than 0.20% copper with a tensile strength of not less than 75,000 lbs. per square inch. Top and bottom selvage of the fabric shall be knuckled. 2.04 STEEL FENCE FRAMING A. Posts and Rails: ASTM F1083 standard weight (Schedule 40) steel pipe coated with 1.8 ounces per square foot of hot dipped zinc. l . Line Posts: 2-1 /2" o.d. weighing 3.65 lbs. per ft. 2. Top Rail: 1-5/8" o.d. weighing 2.27 lbs. per ft. provided with 7" long expansion sleeve couplings. 3. Terminal Posts: Provide Y o.d. weighing 5.79 lbs. per foot at end, corners and pull _ posts. B. Coating: ASTM F1043. PVC or polyolefin elastomer thermally fused coating. 1. Minimum Thickness: 10 mils. 2. Color: Match fabric. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Chain Link Fence Accessories: Provide items required to complete fence system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match framing. _ B. Post Tops: Formed steel or cast malleable iron weathertight closure cap for tubular posts. Provide one cap for each post. Provide tops to permit passage of top rail. 1. Line Post Tops: Heavy galvanized, cast from eye top fitting. 2. Terminal Post Tops: Heavy galvanized iron tops of bullet type construction. C. Top Rail and Brace Rail Ends: ASTM F626 pressed steel, for connection of rail and brace to terminal posts. D. Top Rail Sleeves: 7 inch expansion sleeve with spring, allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail. E. Fabric Ties: No. 9 gauge galvanized steel tie wire for fabric to framework ties. _ 1. Double wrap 13 gauge for rails and braces.. 2. Ties to tension wire shall be made with 12'/z gauge hog rings. VF 2001-59 02821-2 F. Tension Bars: One piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of fabric with a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/, inch or equivalent fiberglass rod. Provide tension bars where chain link fabric meets terminal posts. G. Tension Wire: ASTM F1664, Class 2 b. Thermally fused PVC or polyolefin elastomer applied to metallic coated steel wire. 7 gauge diameter core wire with tensile strength of 75,000 psi. Provide attaching fittings. H. Truss Rods and Tightener. Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16 inches and capable of resisting a tension of at least 2,000 pounds. I. Brace Panel Assembly: Brace end and gate posts with top rail material and adjustable 3/8" galvanized truss rod with malleable iron truss tightness. Furnish corner posts with two complete brace panel assemblies. J. Nuts and Bolts: Galvanized but not vinyl coated. K. Touch-up Coating: Provide cans of PVC paint in sufficient quantity to touch up minor coating damage occurring during construction and to coat all nuts and bolts. 2.06 GATES Rolling type, constructed of 2-3/8" ad pipe weighing 3.65 lbs. per foot, frames with welded corners. Provide intermediate bracing as required. Fabric filler and framing coating to be same as used in fence. All hardware to be heavy duty, galvanized with lockable latches. 2.07 CONCRETE A. Post Bases: 3000 psi concrete in accordance with Section 03300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify areas to receive fencing are completed to final grades and elevations. B. Ensure property lines and legal boundaries of work are clearly established. 3.02 LAYOUT A. Install property line fence so no part of the fence foundation projects beyond the property lines, and, in general, the center lines of the fence shall be set back 6" inside the property lines. Determine the exact location of property lines from survey plots and legal descriptions of the property. Guarantee that the fencing is located correctly with respect to property lines and will assume any additional cost that may be required to relocate fencing that may be installed off the Owner's property. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of 30 degrees or more. V F 2001-59 02821-3 C. Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on center unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Workmanship: Comply with ASTM F567. The complete fence shall be plumb, both in line and transverse to the fence, straight and rigid with fabric tightly stretched and held firmly in place. Details of construction, not specified, shall be performed in keeping with good standard fencing practice. B. Post Bases: Set all posts in concrete, designed to have a minimum compressive strength- of 3000 psi at 28 days. Allow all posts to set at least seven days before top rails, center ' rails, wire fabric and fittings are installed. 1. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. 2. Line Posts: Set in concrete W' deep and not less than 10" in diameter with top of - concrete domed to drain. ;r 3. Terminal and Gate Posts: Set into concrete footings 36" deep and a minimum of 1 Z' in diameter, with top of concrete footings domed to drain. 4. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. C. Bracing: Install horizontal pipe brace at mid -height for fences 6 feet and over, on each side of terminal posts. Firmly attach with fittings. Install diagonal truss rods at these points. _ Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. D. Top Rail: Set top rails as nearly parallel to the finish grade as possible and at the specified _ height of fence. In the case of sloping grades, the top rail shall be sloped uniformly parallel to the finish grade as nearly as possible and in a manner to prevent any abrupt changes in grade at the top rail. Connect joints with sleeves for rigid connections for expansion and contraction. E. Tension Wire: Provide tension wire at bottom of fabric. Install before stretching fabric and attach to each post with ties. Secure to fabric with hog rings at 24 inches on center. F. Bottom Rails: Install between posts with fittings and accessories. _ G. Fabric: Install on security side and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. 1. Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. 2. Fabric Ties: Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15 inches on center and to rails, braces and tension wire at 24 inches on center. Tension Bands: Provide one fastener for each one foot of fabric height. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 02821-4 SECTION 02828 AUTOMATIC GATE OPERATORS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pedestal mounted card operator. 2. Gate operators. 3. Detector loops. 4. Auxiliary components. B. Related Sections: 1. Asphalt Paving: Section 02740 Flexible Pavement. 2. Cast -In -Place Concrete: Section 03300. 3. Electrical Rough -In and Final Hook -Up: Division 16 Electrical. 4. Chain Link Gates: Section 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: System shall be a "card in - free out" system located at entrance/exit gate. B. Entrance: Upon entering the entrance lane, the vehicle operator shall use his card to operate the card switch unit. This operation will open the gate to allow entrance. As the vehicle proceeds into the facility, it is sensed by the closing loop which closes the gate after the vehicle has left the detection system. C. Exit: Upon entering the exit lane, the vehicle will be sensed by the opening loop which will open the gate. As the vehicle proceeds out of the facility, it will be sensed by the closing loop which will close the gate after the vehicle has left the detection system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Include equipment wiring diagram and electrical circuitry diagram. 2. Include evidence of the manufacturer's approval of the installer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Maintain an approved equipment service center within 100 miles of the Project site. The service center shall: 1. Use experienced manufacturer trained personnel. 2. Assume total responsibility for proper installation and operation of all components within the system. B. All Equipment: Provided by the same manufacturer and UL approved. VF 2001-59 02828-1 C. Installer: Worked continuously and successfully with the equipment manufacturer for a minimum of 5 years. 1.05 WARRANTY Provide manufacturer's one year warranty for materials and installation in accordance with Section 01780. Warranty shall cover keeping equipment operational. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Crown Industrial Operators, www.crown-industdol.com. 2. Stanley Electronics. _ 3. Approved Substitute. B. Equipment List: Provide following basic components as indicated: Eauipment Entrance Exit Vehicle Detector 1 1 -- Detector Loops l 2 Pedestal Mounted Card Operated _ Entrance Controller 1 — Gate Operators 1 1 — C. Gate Operators: Crown Industrial Model 1295 with hand crank for manual operation in case of power failure. 1. Motor: '/z HP, 3 phase, 208V. D. Auxiliary Items: Provide auxiliary items required for the complete proper functioning of the system including but not limited to heaters, wiring, transformers, relays, etc. 1. Provide radio operated reversing gate safety edge. _ E. Operating Conditions: Provide equipment with sufficient insulation, heating and cooling systems to operate effectively under the following climatic and exposure conditions: _ Equipment Minimum Temperature Maximum Temperature Operators -20°F. 1100F. F. Keys: Provide the Owner with 2 sets of keys for equipment cabinets. Keys shall be unique to this equipment and not fit any other equipment in the area. G. Cards: As directed by Owner. H. Entrance Controllers: Programmable. VF 2001-59 02828-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: Inspect setting surfaces, power wiring and conduit installation to verify that they are proper for a satisfactory installation. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. B. Acceptance: Beginning of Installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Provide those responsible for related work with: 1. Installation diagrams and details for setting equipment. 2. Templates and cast -in inserts for setting equipment. 3. Electrical wiring diagrams and details. 4. Electrical power requirements. B. Electrical: Meet with the Division 16 contractor before any rough -in work begins to review the project in relation to the gate opening equipment. Explain details and precautions necessary to assure a proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION AND SYSTEM START-UP A. General: Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and reviewed shop drawings. B. Adjustment: Program the equipment as necessary to ensure proper operation as specified under System Description in Part 1 Adjust and tune the system as required to assure proper operation. Test all functions. C. Acceptance: System must operate continuously for 5 days with no down time in order to be considered acceptable. 3.04 COMPLETION SERVICES A. Demonstration: Instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with Section 01800. B. Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Section 01780. Include wiring and electrical circuitry diagrams. 3.05 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE A. Service: Provide maintenance and call-back service of gate operating equipment for a period of one year from the time of final acceptance of the project. Use only original manufacturer's parts for replacements. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02828-3 SECTION 02871 BICYCLE RACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bicycle racks where indicated. B. Related Sections: l . Concrete Base Encasement: Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data according to Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BICYCLE RACKS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brandir Enterprises, Inc. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Brandir Model RB-07-1-G, ribbon rack with in -ground anchor mounting. 1. Length: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Material: Steel 3. Finish: Polyester powder coat. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Set in concrete according to manufacturer's instructions and approved product data. See Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02871-1 SECTION 02891 POST -MOUNTED SIGNS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Site signage for the handicapped. 2. Traffic control signs. Related Sections: l . Temporary Project Sign: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Handicapped Pavement Marking: Section 02765 Pavement Markings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01330. B. Submit catalog cuts, shop drawings, copy layouts, and samples of colors and materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of all regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of Americans With Disabilities Act. 3. Comply with applicable regulations of the City of Fort Collins. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNS A. Traffic Control Signs: Construct painted traffic control signs of 0.080 inch thickness aluminum. Provide signs painted by a professional sign painter using one coat of primer and two coats of sign paint. 1. Posts: See Civil Engineering Drawings. 2. Accessories: Provide fasteners and accessories for mounting of signage on posts. 3. Size and text of lettering and graphics as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 SIGNS FOR THE HANDICAPPED A. Comply with requirements of Americans With Disabilities Act and applicable regulations of the City of Fort Collins. B. Handicapped Parking Stall Signs: 1. Required locations: At each parking space reserved for the handicapped. 2. Size: See Drawings. VF 2001-59 02891-1 3. Graphics: Reflective vinyl dye cut international symbol of accessibility and text as indicated on Drawings in Helvetica Medium caps. 4. Colors: As indicated. 5. Construct signs of anodized aluminum mounted on anodized aluminum posts. 6. Center sign at end of parking stall. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to installation of signs, examine the site conditions and the work of others insofar as it affects the work and report immediately in writing to the Architect any conditions which interfere with the installation. B. Begin installing signs only after deficiencies have been corrected in an acceptable manner. C. Commencement of installation implies acceptance of related work performed by others. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install signs level and plumb or as detailed on the Drawings. B. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. C. Sign Posts: Set in concrete as indicated. 1. Traffic Control Signs: Coordinate direction of sign face with Owner prior to setting posts. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02891-2 DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02900 PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work included in this Section: Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and transportation and perform all operations necessary and incidental to proper execution and completion of all work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Related Work Specified Under Other Sections: Consult all other sections, determine the extent and character of related work, and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a finished, workmanlike installation. 1.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FEATURES A. Protect all existing site development including, but not limited to, existing buildings, equipment, underground utilities, walls, walks, roads, materials, trees, etc. Any existing site development damaged by willful or negligent acts of the contractor or any of his employees shall be replaced or repaired at no cost to the owner and in a manner satisfactory to the owner's representative before project acceptance is given. B. The above provision applies to on -site damage as well as to that which may occur to adjacent properties. C. Until the project has been accepted, erect and maintain shoring, barricades, guards, warning lights and lights as necessary or required for the protection of the public, the work and the workers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submit duplicate samples and manufacturers guaranteed analysis of the following items and such other materials as may be required written approval thereof by the owner's representative before beginning fabrication or delivery of material to the project site. Finished work shall match approved samples. VF2001-59 02900-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section BID INFORMATION 00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00100 Instruction to Bidders 00300 Bid Form 00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement Forms 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release(Contractor) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions Exhibit GC -A 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment 00970 Work Change Directive SPECIFICATIONS Pages 00020-1 - 00020-2 00100-1 - 00100-9 00300-1 - 00300-2 00400-1 00410-1 - 00410-2 00420-1 - 00420-3 00430-1 00500-1 00510-0 00520-1 - 00520-6 00530-1 00600-1 00610-1 - 00610-2 00615-1 - 00615-2 00630-1 00635-1 00640-1 00650-1 - 00650-2 00660-1 00670-1 - 00670-2 00700-1 - 00700-34 GC -Al - GC-A2 00800-1 - 00800-2 00900-1 00950-1 - 00950-2 00960-1 00970-1 — 00970-2 1.05 1.06 a. Soil amendments and mulch materials. b. Tree ties and guying materials. C. Fertilizers. ANALYTICAL TESTS Submit 2 copies of an analytical test, performed by certified soil laboratory, demonstrating compliance with these specifications for the composted manure and peat moss. INSPECTIONS A. Pre -Planting Inspection: -- 0 C. VF 2001-59 1. All plant materials must be inspected at the place of growth and/or on the project site before planting commences. Plants shall be inspected for _ size, variety, condition, defects or injury. The owner's representative reserves the right to reject unsatisfactory plant material at any time during the work. 2. Notify the owner's representative of the source of material no later than 30 days after award of the contract. 3. All fertilizers, pre -mixed backfill mixes, mulches and soil amendments will be inspected at the site by the owner's representative before they are used in planting operations. -- Planting Inspections: 1. The owner's representative shall inspect the staked location of all trees -~ before digging for those trees occurs. 2. The owner's representative shall inspect container stock with said plants set on the ground at the proposed locations before digging commences. ^ Pre -Maintenance Inspection: 1. As soon as all planting is completed, a planting review and preliminary inspection to determine the condition of the plantings will be held by the owner's representative upon request of the contractor. 2. The contractor shall have all planting areas free of weeds and neatly cultivated. All plant basins shall be in good repair. Irrigation systems shall r, be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted. All debris and litter shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. The inspection shall not occur until these conditions are met. 3. If, after the inspection, the owner's representative is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the contract documents, and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the 02900-2 contractor written notice of acceptance and the 60 day maintenance period shall begin. 4. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the owner's representative shall be performed within the first ten (10) days of the maintenance period. Any work not performed within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the maintenance period. Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the contract documents, and shall be made by the contractor at no cost to the owner. D. Final Inspection: At the completion of the maintenance period, the final inspection shall be performed. 2. If, after the inspection, the owner's representative is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the contract documents, and that all plant materials are in satisfactory growing condition, he will give the contractor written notice of acceptance and completion of the formal maintenance period. 3. Final approval will not be given until all deficiencies are corrected. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. All trees, shrubs, perennials, and other plant materials except any annuals shall be guaranteed to take root and grow and thrive for a period of 1 year after final acceptance of the work. B. Any trees, shrubs or evergreens that die back and lose the form and size originally specified shall be replaced, even though they have taken root and are growing after the dieback. C. Within 15 days of written notification by the owner, remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials, which for any reason, fail to meet requirement of guaranty. Replacement planting for trees shall be done in the spring planting season only, except as approved otherwise. Replacements shall be made to same specifications required for original materials and shall carry the some guaranty from the time they are replaced. VF 2001-59 02900-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, SHRUBS, AND PERENNIALS A. Quantities: Plant material shall be furnished in quantities required to complete work as indicated on the Drawings and shall be of species, kinds, sizes, etc., specified. B. Nomenclatures: Plant names listed on Drawings conform to standardized plant _ names established by American Join Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature except that for names not covered therein, the established custom of the nursery trade is followed. C. Quality: Plants shall be symmetrical and typical for species and variety. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from disease and insect pests or their eggs. All plant material shall conform to the requirements of the Colorado Nursery Act of 1965, Title 35, Article 26, CRS1973. D. Digging, wrapping, and handling: Plants shall be dug and prepared for shipment in a manner that will not cause damage to branches, shape and future development after planting. E. Balled and burlapped plants: Shall be nursery grown stock adequately balled with firm, natural balls of soil in sizes and ratios conforming to the Colorado Nursery Act as cited above. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with non -treated ._ burlap, secured with wire or jute. Broken balls will not be accepted. Ponderosa Pine may be field collected with root ball sizes in conformance with the Colorado Nursery Act as cited above. F. Container grown plants: Shall have been nursery grown in containers and shall have sufficient roots to hold the entire soil mass together after container removal without being root -bound. G. Options as to method: If all other requirements are met, a balled and burlapped `- plant may be substituted for a container grown plant or field collected plant of the same or larger size at the contractor's option. H. Plant protection: Plants shall be handled so that roots are adequately protected ~ at all times from drying out and from other injury. Protect balls of balled plants, which cannot be planted within 24 hours from delivery with soil or other suitable material. Where possible, store plants in the shade. Keep all plant roots moist before, during, and after planting. I. Pruning: Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery, except as authorized by the ` owner's representative. J. Substitutions: Will be allowed only when specified material is proved unavailable and only with approval of the owner's representative. Proposals will be considered for use of nearest equivalent size and variety with the equitable adjustment to the Contract price. VF 2001-59 02900-4 K. Size of Conifers: Measure of conifer height shall not include more than fifty (50) Percent of this year's vertical growth (top candle). Conifers shall be fully branched to within 12" of ground line. 2.02 SEED Furnish seed mix specified on the Drawings. The wholesale dealer shall mix all seed. The contractor shall furnish the dealer's guaranteed statements of composition of mixture, percentage of purity, germination and maximum weed of each seed mix. 2.03 SEED MIXES New crop seed delivered in original containers, unopened, bearing dealer's warranty analysis. Maximum crop and weed content shall be 0.10% each. Minimum germination rate shall be 85%, with 98% minimum purity. Compensation is to be made for a lesser percentage of purity or germination by furnishing additional seed to equal specified mix. Product comparison shall be made on basis of pure live seed (P.L.S.) in pounds. Formula for determining quantity of PLS shall be: Pounds of Seed x Purity x Germination = PLS IRRIGATED BLUEGRASS Irefer fn rirnwinncl -.__... Species _ Recommended Lb. PLS/Acre Percent of Mix Mixed Lb. PLS/Acre Freedom Kentucky Bluegrass 130 35% 45.6 Nassau Kentucky Bluegrass 130 25% 32.5 Ran 1 Kentucky Bluegrass 130 20% 1 26.0 SR4000 Rye Grass 130 20%D 26.0 Total 130.0 DRYLAND SEED Irefer fn rirnwinnd Species P Recommended LB. PLS/Acre Percent of Mix Mixed Lb. PLS/Acre Sand Bluestem, Garden Co. 130 10% 13 Switchgrass, Blackwell 130 25% 32.5 Westem Wheatgrass, Barton 130 25% 32.5 Canby Bluegrass, Canbar 130 10% IT3 Slender Wheatgross, Pryor 130 30% 139 Total 130.0 �,r �� I'll moo., iui r. q�" ar. Ka., Greeley, CO. (970) 356-4710; or other commercial supplier of native grasses. VF 2001-59 02900-5 2.04 SOD A. Source: Commercial sod nursery; obtain the owner's representative's approval prior to delivery to site. B. Quality: Bluegrass sod shall be a blend of not less than three improved Kentucky Bluegrass varieties. Sod shall be healthy, field -grown sod, at least one year old, free from other grasses, weeds, insect eggs, diseases, stone and debris. Sod shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick, harvested in rolls and delivered to the site within 24 hours of harvesting. C. Protection: Handle sod so that it is adequately protected at all times from drying out, exposure of roots to sun, and from other injury. - 2.05 SOIL AMENDMENTS / FERTILIZERS / MULCHES A. Composted Manure: Composted dairy cow or sheep manure: Free from lumps, stones, or other foreign matter. Free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life. Manure that has received treatment with a bacterial enzyme culture raising the manure temperature to 145 degrees minimum for 3 weeks minimum, aged at least 18 months, yielding a soil amendment with the following properties: Organic Matter: 35 - 4076 (oven -dry basis) _ Total Nitrogen: 1.6 - 2.0% Conductivity: 50.0 EC's (max) PH: 7.5 to 8.5 Submit analysis as required by 1.04 B. Peat Moss: Free from lumps, stones or other foreign matter. Free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life. Acid reaction of 3 to 5 pH. ., Shall contain no less than 6017o organic matter by weight on an oven -dry basis. Submit analysis as required by 1.04. C. Top Soil: On -site topsoil (located in stockpile on -site) for use in backfill mix. D. Fertilizers: 1, Tablets for free and shrub planting - 'The Pill" by Agriform with 20-10-5 analysis, 21 gram size. 2. Fertilizers for grass (sod), shrub, and tree planting shall be commercial type of uniform composition, free flowing, and conforming to the applicable State and Federal laws. Submit manufacturers guaranteed analysis as required in 1.03. Guaranteed analysis shall be designed to conform with amendment requirements given in Part 3, "Execution." VF 2001-59 02900-6 E. Mulch: Gravel Mulch: River washed gravel, 1-1/2" nominal size (7/8" to 1-1/2" size range). Approximately 35% fractured faces minimum. Acceptable colors: gray, tan, and no pink. Submit sample for approval. 2. Bark Mulch: Basic aspen bark mulch or shredded cedar bark mulch. Bark Mulch must be approved by Landscape Architect prior to installation. Submit sample for approval. F. Weed Barrier: Shall be Mirafi 140, Dewitt, Typar, or similar product approved by Architect. 2.06 MATERIALS FOR STAKING AND GUYING A. Stakes: Lodgepole Pine tree stakes treated with copper napthanate, chamfered top and bottom; or metal T-posts painted dark areen or black. B. Ties: Fabric: Nylon or rubberized cloth straps, 2" x length required. C. Tree Guys: 1. Anchors: Metal T-posts, 2 feet long. 2. Wires: Galvanized 12-gauge wire. 3. Hose Collars: Fabric reinforced rubber hose: collar diameter. 4. Cable Clamps: Galvanized. 5. Tumbuckles: 6' in open aluminum turnbuckle; eye and fittings 5/6" in diameter; 4-1N'take-up. 2.07 STEEL EDGING Galvanized steel header 1/8-inch x 4-inch with 12-inch long galvanized pins. Ryerson steel edging or equal with safety cap. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Inspection: Examine the substrate in which the work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Dimensions: All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the owner's representative of any discrepancy between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions. VF 2001-59 02900-7 C. Coordination: Coordinate work with other trades to insure proper sequencing of construction. 3.02 SOIL PREPARATION A. Grades have been established under work of another Section to within 1 ", plus or minus of required finished grades. Verify that grades are within 1" plus or minus, of required finished grades. Notify the owner's representative prior to commencing soil preparation work if existing grades are not satisfactory, or assume responsibility for conditions, as they exist. B. Weed and debris removal: All ground areas to be planted shall be cleaned of all weeds and debris prior to any soil preparation or grading work. Weeds and debris shall be disposed of off the site. C. Contaminated soil: Do not perform anysoil preparation work in areas where soil is contaminated with cement, plaster, paint or other construction debris. Bring such areas to the attention of the owner's representative and do not proceed until the contaminated soil is removed and replaced. Soil contaminated by chemical herbicides in parking area islands and plant areas shall be removed to a depth of 12" and replaced with soil. D. Moisture Content: Soil shall not be worked when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied, if necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for tilling and planting. E. Soil Loosening: Soil in all planting areas shall be ripped or cultivated to a depth of six (6") inches. Water shall be added and ripping or cultivating shall be continued — until the entire specified depth is loose and friable. All debris, pavement, concrete, and rocks over 2"in diameter shall be removed from the site. 3.03 SOIL CONDITIONING After soil preparation has been completed and high and low spots graded, add 3 cubic yards of composted manure per 1,000 square feet and rototill, making repeated passes with the cultivator to the depth specified until the amendments have been thoroughly mixed. 3.04 FINE GRADING When weeding, soil preparation, and soil conditioning have been completed and soil has been thoroughly water settled, all planting areas should be smooth -graded, ready for placement of plant materials and for seeding and/or sodding. A. Grades: Finish grades shall conform to site grading plans and produce a smooth even surface without abrupt changes. Minor adjustments of finish grades shall be made at the direction of the owner's representative, if required. B. Drainage: All grades shall provide for natural runoff of water without low spots or _ pockets. Flow -line grades shall be accurately set and shall not be less than 2% gradient wherever possible. VF 2001-59 02900-8 C. Shrub Areas: Finished grades shall be 1-1/2" below top of adjacent pavement, edging, curbs, or wall, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. D. Lawn Areas: Finished grade shall be %" below top of adjacent pavement, curbs, or edging. E. Slopes: Tops and toes of all slopes shall be rounded to produce a gradual and natural -appearing transition between relatively level areas and slopes. 3.05 SEEDING A. Seed shall be drill seeded by means of mechanical power drawn drill seeders. Seed at the rates specified on the drawings. Seed in two passes. Half the seed shall be sown with the seeder moving at right angles to the first sowing. Provisions shall be made with markers or other means to assure that the successive seeded strips will overlap or be separated by a space no greater than the space between the rows planted in a single pass by the equipment being used. Do not seed during windy weather. B. In areas inaccessible to a drill seeder, seed shall be broadcast by approved equipment in two opposite directions. Broadcast seeding shall not be done during windy weather. Rake in seed after broadcasting. C. Hydroseeding may be used in inaccessible areas or on slopes greater than 3:1. 3.06 LAYING SOD A. Apply controlled release fertilizer to the sod bed at the rate of 20 pounds per 1000 square feet of area. Roll the area to an evenly compacted firm soil bed. Scarify surface to a depth of 3/8". B. Moisten sod bed thoroughly. Lay sod smoothly; edge to edge, and with staggered joints. Buff edges tightly. Lay within eight hours after delivery. Do not lay sod closer than 24" from the center of shrubs and 12" from the trunks of trees. C. Water sod lightly as laying progresses to prevent drying of sod. D. After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly so that water penetrates soil to a depth of 6'. When surface of grass has dried, roll sod with a light roller diagonally, leveling irregularities and sealing joints. 3.07 GROUND COVER, ANNUAL AND PERENNIAL BEDS Excavate areas to be planted with material smaller than I gallon size to a depth of six (6') inches and backfill with the following mix. 1. 8090 on -site topsoil by volume (from owner's stockpile). 2. 2090 peat moss by volume. 3. Five (5) pounds bone meal per cubic yard of backfill. VF2001-59 02900-9 3.08 The specified backfill materials shall be pre -mixed, then fumed several times with a front end loader to a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free of all pockets of unblended material and any clods or stones greater than two (2") inches in diameter. Backfill mix has occurred. Pre -mixed back -fill mix shall be inspected per 1.06A, "Pre -Planting Inspections." TREE, SHRUB AND PERENNIAL (#1 and larger) PLANTING A. Planting Pits: 1. Locate planting holes per planting plans ,bringing any conflict with underground utility lines to the attention of the owner's representative. _ Locations for holes shall be according to 1.06B, "Planting Inspections." 2. Excavate holes to be the same depth as the root ball and two times the diameter of the root ball wide. 3. The sides of the holes shall be roughened to remove any compacting or "glazing" caused by the digging operation. The bottom of the hole shall _ be loosened to a minimum depth of six (6") inches. Mix loosened soil with specified backfill to blend soil types. 4. Fill the entire hole with water and allow to drain completely. Contractor should notify owner's representative if a pit does not drain in a satisfactory time, then contractor should correct drainage problem by using a PVC drain or a grovel sump shall be installed. ^ 5. Dispose of excavated -soil off the site at no cost to the owner. B. Backfiiling - Tree and shrub planting pits shall be backfilled with the following mix: 1. 8076 on -site topsoil by volume (from owners stockpile). 2. 20% peat moss by volume. 3. Five (5) pounds bone meal per cubic yard of backfill. The specified backfill materials shall be pre -mixed, then turned several times with a front ^ end loader. to a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free of all pockets of unblended material and any clods or stones greater than two (2" ) inches in diameter. Backfill mix shall be delivered to each planting pit after mixing has occurred. Pre -mixed backfill mix shall be inspected per 1.06A, "Pre -Planting Inspections:' C. Planting: 1. General - Do not install plant materials until all construction work has been - completed and sprinkler systems have been installed and tested. Planting areas shall have been graded and prepared as herein specified and shall have been approved by the owner's representative. VF 2001-59 02900-10 2. Carefully remove stock from containers to avoid breaking the root ball. Do not lift or handle container plants by tops, stems, or trunks at any time. 3. Plant conifers so that the top of the ball is higher than ground level and cover with 1 /2" of conditioned soil, gently sloping down to ground level. All other plants shall be set so that, when settled the natural grade in the container or the top of the soil ball will be flush with surrounding grades. 4. Build a four (4") inch high berm around edge of root ball to form a basin for holding water (omit for all conifers). No basin is required for trees planted in lawn areas. Fill basin with water, being careful not to break down berm with hose stream. 5. Fertilize trees and shrubs by placing 21 gram fertilizer tablets three (3") inches laterally and three (3") inches top of root ball as follows: 1 for ]- gallon containers, 3 for 5-gallon containers and 5 for balled and burlapped material. 6. Untie and lay back burlap from root ball on balled and burlapped material. Remove wire baskets from sides of root balls. Backfill one-half (1/2) of remaining hole with backfill mixture and water in thoroughly before placing any more backfill, firming down to eliminate all air pockets without packing the soil. 8. All plants shall be planted immediately after the containers are cut, and containers shall be regularly removed from the site so as not to present a hazard to persons using the area. 9. Flatgrown plant material - Install plants at spacing indicated on the drawings. Plant in staggered rows, evenly spaced. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots. Place plants to root system lies free without doubling. Firm soil around roots to eliminate air pockets. Broadcast controlled release fertilizer over the entire planting area at the rate of 20 pounds per 1000 square feet of area. 3.09 EDGING A. B. C. Steel edging shall be installed prior to installation of sprinklers adjacent thereto. Install edging true to line and grade as indicated and detailed on the drawings. Edging shall be set flush with adjacent paving. Top of edging shall be'/," above sod grade. VF2001-59 02900-11 SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID 3.10 MULCHING A. All perennial beds shall be mulched with a three inch (W) layer of specified mulch. B. All shrub beds shall be mulched with a three inch (3") layer of specified mulch. C. All free basins shall be mulched with a C layer of specified mulch. D. Following soil preparation and seeding, seeded areas shall be mulched with straw. It shall be applied at the rate of 2 tons per acre, and shall be crimped in with a crimper or other approved equipment. Hand crimping operations shall be employed on such areas where excessive slopes or confined spaces would cause unsatisfactory crimping to result. E. Hydro mulch may be used in inaccessible areas or on slopes greater than 3:1. Mix ingredients to form a homogeneous slurry. Using the color of the mulch as a metering agent, spray the slurry mixture uniformly over the designated seeded area. The mixture shall be applied at a rate as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be approved by the owner's representative. Hydro mulching shall not be done in the presence of surface water. Thoroughly clean site amenities after mulching. 3.11 TREE STAKING AND GUYING A. All evergreen trees are to be guyed in a true vertical position according to construction details. B. Double stake all trees up to and including 2-1/2" caliper. Set stakes plumb and at right angles to the prevailing wind. Securely nail or bolt rubber straps to stakes: leave straps loose enough to allow a minimum of 3' lateral movement. 3.12 MAINTENANCE A. Continuously maintain all plantings in areas included in the contract from the beginning of contract work, during the progress of work, and for a period of 60 days after completion of all work until final acceptance of all contract work by the owner. B. Scope 1. New plantings. 2. Existing plantings within the construction area. 3. Continuous operations of watering, weeding, cultivating, mowing, trimming, edging, rolling, fertilizing, spraying, insect, pest, fungus, and rodent control, and any other operations to assure good normal health. C. Fertilizing: In addition to fertilizing of trees, shrubs, perennials, annuals, and lawns herein specified, furnish and apply any additional fertilizers necessary to maintain VF 2001-59 02900-12 plantings in a healthy, green, vigorous growing condition during the maintenance period. D. Mowing: Mow grass to 2-1 /2" when it reaches a height of 3-1 /2". E. Weeding, cultivating and cleanup: Planting areas shall be kept neat and free from debris at all times and shall be cultivated and weeded at not more than 10- day intervals. F. Insect, pest, and disease control: Insects and diseases shall be controlled by the use of approved insecticides and fungicides. G. Prune new trees and shrubs at the direction of the owner's representative. H. Protection: Work under this Section shall include complete responsibility for maintaining adequate protection for all areas. Any damaged areas shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Owner. Replacements: Immediately replace any plant materials that die or are damaged. Lawns that do not grow shall be resodded. Replacements shall be made to the specifications as required for original plantings. 3.13 CLEAN UP A. Remove all cans, surplus materials, and other debris from site. Neatly dress and finish all planting areas. Flush walks, paved areas, and the like, clean to the satisfaction of the owner's representative. B. Rinse foliage of all plant -materials within the construction area as often as necessary to keep the foliage free from dust generated by the work of this contract. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 02900-13 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete. 2. Formwork accessories. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Cast -in Items such as Angles, Plates, Pipe Rail Sleeves, Anchor Bolts. Etc.: Supplied under Sections 05120 and 05500. C. Related Sections: 1. Layout: Section 01722 Feld Engineering 2. Exterior Concrete: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement and 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 3. Steel Reinforcement and Accessories: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 4. Concrete and Flatwork Screeds: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Blockouts: Divisions 15 and 16. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. 1. ACI 117-90 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301-96 Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. B. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Safety: Assume responsibility for safety of formwork and provide necessary design, construction, materials and maintenance to produce required concrete work safely. B. Vertical Formwork: Design formwork to withstand pressure resulting from placement and vibration of fresh concrete and to maintain specified tolerances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK MATERIALS A. Form -Facing Materials: 1. Footings and other non -exposed concrete: Plywood, steel or dressed lumber. VF 2001-59 03100-1 2. Exposed Walls and Piers: One of the following a. New APA B-B Plyform Class 1 Ext, 4'x 8' sheets _ b. Tempered concrete -form -grade hardboard. B. Chamfer Strips: Chamfer Strips: One inch, 450 job cut wood or one inch 450 PVC for unexposed surfaces. Use PVC for exposed surfaces. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Adjustable in length to permit tightening of forms and of type to leave no ^ metal closer than one inch of surface nor holes or depressions larger than 7/8" in diameter. 1. Exposed Concrete: Bar break back type with break -off point minimum of 1-1/2" behind face of concrete. No cones. - B. Clamps, Brackets, Braces, Washers, Wedges, Walers, Etc.: Contractor's option. C. Shoring System: Contractor's option. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Form Oil: Non -staining. Contractor's option. _ B. Slab Edge and Expansion Joint Premolded Filler: Bituminous fiber type complying with ASTM D1751. Thickness as indicated by full depth of slab. C. Slab Construction Joint Forms: Burke Keyed Kold, Superior Jahn Load Key Joint or approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Provide strippable vinyl insert at joints to receive sealant specified in Section 07920. D. Slab Control Joint Forms: Demay Equipment and Supply Co., Inc. Zip strip with red Zip top or Burke Zipstrip. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Foundation Bearing Surfaces: Inspected and approved by Geotechnical Engineer prior to start of formwork. B. Formwork: Provide ample notice to Architect to allow for review of formwork surfaces that will provide finish surface of exposed concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Layout: See Section 01722. B. Subgrade Under Slabs and Footings: Fine grade to smooth, level surface prior to _ installation of forms. 1. Granular Base Over Vapor Retarder: See Section 07261 Underslab Vapor Retarder. VF 2001-59 03100-2 3.03 ERECTION A. Construction and Erection: ACI 301. l . Lap Forming: Not allowed. 2. Provide forms conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members indicated on Drawings, substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 3. Properly brace or tie to maintain position, shape and lateral stability. 4. Clearly mark top surface of concrete on form walls. Set elevations and verify formwork locations and alignment using surveying instruments in accordance with Section 01722. a. Make required adjustments prior to concrete placement. B. Tolerances: ACI 117. C. Footings: 1. Use of earth as form not allowed. 2. Butt form material end to end. 3. Close gaps greater than 3/4 inches between bottom of forms and soil surfaces at isolated over -excavated depressions. D. Walls 1. Use of earth as form not allowed. 2. Provide sufficient strength to carry construction operations and material dead loads without deflection or vibration. 3. Design forms to be capable of needed adjustments. Watch carefully as work proceeds and promptly correct faults. 4. Where finished concrete will remain exposed, space joints regularly and hold to minimum both horizontally and vertically. 5. Provide access panels in formwork for cleanout or placing as required. E. Embeds: l . Anchors, Inserts, Blockouts and Built-in Items: Securely fasten anchor bolts, inserts, form blockouts and other items built into concrete to formwork or hold in place with templates. Insertion into concrete after pouring not allowed. Chamfer Strips: Install strips at exposed outside corners. 1. Securely nail within forms using finish nails. 2. Chamfer exposed vertical exterior corners of concrete one inch unless otherwise indicated: 3.04 JOINTS A. General: 1. Use construction joints at temporary stopping of concrete placement or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Submit locations of joints desired for construction to Architect for acceptance. 3. Leave joints in reinforced structural members rough and provide longitudinal or vertical keys as indicated at least 1-1 /2" deep. VF 2001-59 03100-3 B. Slabs on Grade: 1. Locate construction joints and control joints as indicated on Drawings. a. Panels: Not larger than 144 square feet nor longer than 12 feet in any direction. - b. Center a construction or control joint on each column line unless indicated otherwise. 2. Place joint forms in straight line flush with finished surface and in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 3. Wire bottom alignment slots and bottom of key to metal support stakes. _ 4. Sawed joints may be substituted for joint forms at contraction joints. a. Provide sawed joints 1 /4 of slab thickness in depth. b. Time joint sawing properly with setting of concrete. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. 3.05 FORM COATING A. Coating: 1. Coat surface of formwork prior to each pour. 2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Apply coating prior to placing of reinforcement. 4. Promptly remove excess coating material. 5. Remove coatings of dust from contact surfaces of forms prior to depositing concrete. 3.06 REMOVAL A. Removal: Remove forms only in manner to insure safety of structure. B. Timing: 1. Generally, forms maybe removed from: a. Vertical Surfaces: After 24 hours from time of placing. b. Horizontal Surfaces: After 72 hours from time of placing. Unless otherwise specified under Cold Weather in Section 03300. 3.07 REUSE A. Forms: Clean form material suitable for reuse before erection. Form material will not be acceptable for reuse, if in opinion of the Architect, it will not produce finished surface _ required by these specifications or called for on Drawings. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03100-4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars for cast -in -place concrete. 2. Welded wire fabric for cast -in -place concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Exterior Concrete: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement and 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 3. Concrete: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 4. Fibrous Reinforcing: Section 03240. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. 1. ACI 117-90 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301-96 - Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI Detailing Manual (SP66), 1994 edition. 4. ACI 318-95 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Parts 2 and 3. 5. MSP-1-97 - Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 6. ANSI/AWS D1.4-98 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. B. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by supplemental requirements on the Drawings or by these Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Indicate size, configuration, pertinent dimensions, number, exact position, and spacing of reinforcement and exact location of openings, framing, and special conditions affecting work. 2. All shop drawings shall be original drawings produced by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the contract documents. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Reinforcing Steel: Unload and store reinforcing steel to keep clean. Store on timber skids while awaiting use. VF 2001-59 03200-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Stirrups and Closed Ties: ASTM A615, Grade 40 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706. 3. Masonry Reinforcement: ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless otherwise indicated. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: No. 14 or No. 16 gauge, black, soft iron wire. B. Wire Bar Supports and Spacers: Comply with CRSI MSP-1. Provide rigid support and clearances required in footings, walls, columns and flotwork. 1. Against exterior exposed surfaces: Class 1, plastic protected. 2. Supported on Soil: Class 3. Provide earth -bearing plates. — C. Precast Concrete Bar Supports: Comply with CRSI MSP-1. 1. Locations: Use to support foundation mats and reinforcing bars in slabs -on -grade — only. 2. Types: Provide plain for single mats, doweled for double mats. 3. Sizes: a. Depth: Sized to provide exact clearances indicated. b. Width and Length: 2" minimum, 6" maximum. D. All -Plastic Bar Supports: Not allowed for slabs and flatwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Reinforcement: Provide minimum 48 hour notice to Architect to allow for review of completed concrete reinforcement before placing concrete. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with General Notes on Structural Drawings and ACI 318. B. Bending: l . Bend reinforcement cold. _ 2. Provide full length bars, accurately bent to details. 3. Do not field bend bars partially embedded in concrete except as indicated on the — Drawings or specifically permitted by the Architect. C. Placing: _ 1. Place reinforcement accurately and hold firmly in place before and during the placing of concrete. — VF 2001-59 03200-2 2. Provide minimum concrete protective cover for reinforcement from the exterior face of members in accordance with ACI 318 and notes on Drawings. 3. Provide bar supports and spacers to place bars in the proper location and wire adequately at intersections to hold bars firmly in position while concrete is placed. 4. Project dowels adequately to provide Class B splice unless otherwise indicated. Wire bent dowels in place before pouring. 5. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117. D. Supports and Spacers: 1. Provide supports properly spaced and with sufficient strength to carry loads of reinforcing steel and deposited concrete without collapsing or allowing bars to sag. 2. Provide plastic coated or stainless steel protected bar supports and spacers where they will be in contact with concrete surfaces exposed to weather. 3. Do not use bar supports to support runways for concrete buggies or similar loads. 4. Brickbats or precast blocks used to support mats of bars only with acceptance of Architect. E. Lap Splicing: l . Wherever it is necessary to splice reinforcement other than as indicated on Drawings, character of splice shall be accepted by Architect on basis of stress in reinforcement at splice. 2. Do not splice at points of maximum stress nor splice adjacent bars at some point. 3. Where spliced, lap continuous bars 36 diameters, but not less than 18 inches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. F. Welded Connections: Comply with ANSI/AWS D1.4. Undercut bars are subject to rejection. 3.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Installation: I. Lay welded wire fabric continuously, with edges and ends overlapping adjoining sheets minimum of one full mesh, plus 2", and,not less than 6', tied and placed over all piping and conduit. _, 2. Support fabric on bar supports at position indicated on Drawings. 3. Where required, construct bulkheads at construction joints and screeds to place fabric in proper position. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: See Section 01450 Quality Control. 1. Notify independent testing agency inspector at least 48 hours before reinforcing steel installation is ready for inspection. 2. Coordinate scheduling of placement of concrete under Section 03300 to allow sufficient time for independent testing agency inspector's observations of completed installation and for making any necessary adjustments to the reinforcing placement before delivery of concrete. 3. For walls above 4 feet in height, notify independent testing agency inspector in time to allow his observation of reinforcing before buttoning up of forms. VF 2001-59 03200-3 B. Special Inspection: See Section 01450 Quality Control. Special Inspection is required for the following work under this Section. 1. Placement of reinforcing steel for concrete requiring special inspection. See General Notes on Structural Drawings. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel. 3.05 CLEANING A. Reinforcement: Clean prior to placing concrete to remove oil, soil, ice or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03200-4 3. General Note I / AS.1 states that all rough site grading shall be performed by the owner. a. Question: What grade does the owner intend to furnish? Within 0.1' of the landscape, site pavement sub -grade, or building foundation sub -grade? Answer: Yes, within 0.1'. b. Question: Is the owner providing the surveying and grade stakes to accomplish the rough grading? Answer: Yes. 4. Question: Since the owner is doing the rough grading and asphalt paving work at the new parking lot per General Notes I and 2 / AS.1, is the owner also performing the 2' over -excavation, sub -grade scarification, existing fill cleaning or import fill, reinstallation, and compaction? Answer: Yes, for the paving areas and the gravel storage lot. 5. Question: Please confirm that the General Contractor is only responsible for the "building permit" and "plan review" fee portions of the building permit. That is, confirm that all development fees, street oversize fees, etc. are being paid by the owner. Answer: Yes, the GC is responsible for the Building Permit and Plan Check fees and the Owner is responsible for Development Fees, Street Oversize Fees, etc. 6. Question: Please confirm that Curb & Gutter concrete, Sidewalk Concrete Mixes are to have Fibrous Reinforcing. Answer: Yes they are. 7. Question: Please confirm that all exterior Sidewalks are to receive Welded Wire Fabric. Answer: Yes they are. 8. Question: Please clarify the "continuous fabric covered strip" in 5/A6.1. Answer: The strip should have been labeled "continuous fabric covered tackboard strip". 9-Question: Please confirm that the trash enclosure gate is a custom steel gate per AS.2, not a hollow metal gate per 08110-1.01A7. Answer: The trash enclosure gate is a custom steel gate, not hollow metal. 10. Question: Please clarify the construction of the "painted steel gate" in 3/AS.2. Requirements not indicated in detail or 05500. Answer: The construction is clarified by attached sheet AD-14. SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID Date: February 14, 2002 Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on MARCH 19, 2002 for the TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; Bid No. 5684. If delivered, they are to be delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2"a Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing address is P. 0. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580. At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Contract Documents provide for an approximately 9,600 square foot building, located on Lot 5A of the East Vine Streets Facility development, at the southeast corner of East Vine Drive and Linden Street. The Work will include sitework, utilities, landscaping and an underground irrigation system, on approximately 3.25 acres. The building is a steel -framed structure, with concrete foundations and slab -on -grade floor system. Exterior to be brick and CMU veneer over metal stud or CMU back-up. Interior finishes will include painted gypsum board partitions, carpet, VCT, suspended acoustical board ceilings, wood and hollow metal doors and frames. All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with The City of Fort Collins, 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524. Contract Documents will be available February 15, 2002. Copies of the Contract Documents, complete with Construction Specifications and Drawings, may be obtained from Purchasing Division at 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80521 upon payment of a refundable fee of Fifty Dollars ($50.00) per set. No partial sets will be issued. The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined at: 1. City of Fort Collins, Purchasing Division. 2. The Daily Journal, 2000 S. Colorado Blvd. Suite 2000, Denver, Colorado. 3. CMD Denver Plan Room, 9250 E Costilla Ave, STE 400, Englewood, CO 4. Builders Exchange, 223 South Link Lane, Fort Collins, Colorado. 5. The Plan Room, 2176 South Jasmine St. Door "E"/Suite 219, Denver, Colorado. A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be held at 10:00 a.m. on February 25, 2002, in the Training Room, at Streets Facility, 625 Ninth Street, Fort Collins. Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this meeting. Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents. 07/2001 Section 00020 Page 1 SECTION 03240 FIBROUS REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Incorporation of synthetic fibrous concrete reinforcement in interior slabs on grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Metal Reinforcing and Accessories: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Cast -In -Place Concrete: Section 03300. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Record of Work: Comply with requirements of Section 03300. Batch trip tickets shall show, in addition to the information specified in Section 03300, the amount of fibrous concrete reinforcement material added to the batch. B. Comply with requirements of Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete as supplemented herein. C. The fibrous concrete reinforcement supplier shall provide the services of a qualified technical representative to instruct the concrete supplier and Contractor in proper botching, mixing, testing, placing and finishing of materials to be provided under this section. D. Work provided under this section shall produce concrete conforming to the requirements for each type and class of concrete specified when tested in accordance with specified methods. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBROUS CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Acceptable Products: 1. Fibermesh; Fibermesh, Inc. 2. Forta-CFP; Forta Corp. 3. Approved Substitute B. Material: Virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers containing no reprocessed olefin materials and have tensile strength of not less than 70 ksi. VF 2001-59 03240-1 C. Fiber length: Per manufacturer's recommendations for the applicable concrete mix. D. Performance Requirements: ASTM Cl 11b, Type III, Performance Level 15. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 03300 for which fibrous concrete reinforcement will be supplied. 3.02 BATCHING AND MIXING A. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement materials at the time concrete is batched. Add minimum of 1.5 lb. of fiber per cubic yard of concrete. B. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PLACING AND FINISHING A. Place and finish concrete in accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instructions. B. Quality and tolerance of finish for fiber reinforced concrete shall comply with the requirements of Section 03300. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03240-2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed cast -in -place concrete. 2. Concrete flatwork. 3. Miscellaneous concrete. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: l . Concrete for Sitework for Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 2. Concrete for Vehicular Paving for Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Floor Mat Frame from Section 12481 Floor Mats. D. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 2. Quality Control: Section 01450. E. Related Sections: 1. Formwork: Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Reinforcement: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Non -Shrink Grout: Section 03600 Grouts. 4. Fibrous Reinforcing: Section 03240. 5. Concrete Hardener and Sealer: Section 03365 6. Ready -Mixed Grout for Masonry: Section 04070 Masonry Grout. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with following except as modified by supplementary requirements of this project specification. 1. ACI 117-90 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301-96 - Standard Specification for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 306.1-90 - Standard Specifications for Cold Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 308.1-98 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete 4. ACI 318-95 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Parts 2 and 3. 5. ACI 503.2-92 - Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi -Component Epoxy Adhesive. 6. ASTM C94-96 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 7. ASTM C494-92 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: l . ACI 211.51? - 96-Guide for Submittal of Concrete Proportions. 2. ACI 305R-91 - Hot Weather Concreting. VF 2001-59 03300-1 3. ACI 309R-96 - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. C. Field References: Keep at least one (1) copy of ACI 301 on site at all times. Other ^ reference standards listed above shall be kept on site when directed by Architect or Engineer. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Not less than two (2) weeks prior to placing any concrete, submit concrete mixes for acceptance in accordance with Product Data provisions of Section 01330 and ACI 211.5R. 1. Submit manufacturer's data and/or certifications verifying conformance of mix _ materials including admixtures with specified requirements. 2. Submit separate mix design for each concrete mix type to be used in project. -- Include following: a. Mix identification designation. b. Statement of intended use for mix. c. Mix proportions, including admixtures. d. Wet and dry unit weight. ^ e. Entrained air content. f. Design slump. g. Design compressive strength h. Water/cementitious materials ratio I. Aggregate Source j. Strength qualification data. 3. Strength Qualification Data: a. Submit required average strength qualification data and documentation per ACI 301 4.2.3. b. If trial batches are used to qualify average strength, mix design shall be ^ prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve average compression strength a minimum of 1200 psi greater than specified strength with slump within one inch of maximum permitted and air content within 0.5% of maximum allowable. c. If field test data is used to qualify average strength, submit separate qualification data for each production facility which will supply concrete to ^ project, including copies of concrete testing agency's reports from which data was compiled. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: All testing will be conducted by approved testing laboratory. See Field Quality Control - Part 3 and Section 01450. 1. Test Reports: Reports of control tests, special tests and core tests specified under Field Quality Control in Part 3 shall be distributed by independent testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450. B. Source Quality Control: Architect shall be offered uninterrupted access to ready -mix batching plant while work is in progress. , VF 2001-59 03300-2 C. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of placement of concrete for structure. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Architect for examination at any time. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Materials handling and botching shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM C94. B. Hauling Time: Discharge concrete transmitted in truck mixer, agitator or other transportation device within 1-1 /2 hours after mixing water has been added. C. Extra Water: 1. Deliver concrete to site in exact quantities required by design mix. 2. Should extra water be required for workability before depositing concrete and water/cement ratio of accepted mix design will not be exceeded, General Contractor's superintendent shall have sole authority to authorize addition of water. Any additional water added to mix after leaving batch plant shall be indicated on truck ticket and signed by person responsible. 3. Where extra water is added to concrete it shall be mixed thoroughly for 50 revolutions of drum before depositing. 4. Water may be added at the site only once for each batch. D. Redosage with High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): May be done with prior acceptance of Architect regarding dosage and time periods. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: l . Cold Weather Placement: a. When for three successive days prior to concrete placement the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40OF or when the average outdoor temperature is expected to drop below 40OF on the day of concrete placement, preparation, protection and curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 306.1. b. Minimum temperature of concrete upon delivery shall conform to ACI 301 4.2.2.7. Concrete temperature at placement shall conform to minimum values of ACI 306.1 Table 3.2.1, and shall not exceed minimum values by more than 20°F. c. Subject to acceptance of Architect, an accelerating admixture may be used. Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. Calcium Chloride and other chloride -type accelerating admixtures will not be allowed. d. Subject to acceptance of Architect, Contractor may substitute cement for equal weight of fly ash in design mix. e. Comply with concrete protection temperature requirements of ACI 306.1. Record concrete temperatures during specified protection period at intervals not to exceed 16 hours and no less than twice during any 24 hour period. f. Submittal of detailed procedures, means, and methods for production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather is not required. VF 2001-59 03300-3 2. Hot Weather Placement: a. When depositing concrete in hot weather, follow recommendations of ACI _ 305R. b. Temperature of concrete at time of placement shall not exceed 85°F. c. When air temperatures on day of placement are expected to exceed 90°F, mix ingredients shall be cooled before mixing. Flake ice or well -crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of mix water. d. Retarding Admixture may be used subject to acceptance of Architects Admixtures shall meet requirements of Part 2. e. Protect to prevent rapid drying. Start finishing and curing as soon as possible. 3. Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet, or snow. Rainwater shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water nor to damage the surface finish. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Interior Flalwork Over Vapor Barrier with Granular Protection Layer: Schedule concrete placement to occur immediately following installation of granular protection layer. See Section 07261. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. ACI 301: Provide materials in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed, unless amended or superseded by requirements of this section or general notes on Structural Drawings. B. Concrete Materials: ACI 301 4.2.1. 1. Ready -mixed Concrete: ASTM C94. On -site mixed concrete not allowed. 2. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1/II. 3. Fly ash will be allowed as a cementitious component of the mix unless otherwise indicated under concrete mix types.. Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618 Class C or _ F. Fly ash shall not exceed 20% of total cementitious material by weight. 4. Aggregate: ASTM C33, obtained from same source throughout project: a. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand. -- b. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone containing no deleterious substances which cause surface spalling. 5. Water: Potable. 6. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C260 7. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A: a. Eagle Admixtures Conad N. b. Euclid Eucon WR-75, WR-89, or WR-91. c. Master Builders Pozzolith 200. d. Prokrete Industries Prokrete-N. e. Sika Plastocrete 161. f. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. ._ 8. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G: a. Euclid Eucon 37 or 537. VF 2001-59 03300-4 b. Sika Sikament 300. c. Master Builders Rheobuild 1000. e. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 9. Non -Corrosive, Non -Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494. Type C or E, containing not more chloride ions than present in municipal drinking water and with long term test data from independent testing laboratory providing non -corrosive effect on reinforcing steel: a. Euclid Accelguard 80 or 90. b. W.R. Grace Daraset. c. Sika Plastocrete 161 FL. d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing more than 0.10 percent chloride ions or sodium thiocyanates not allowed. 10. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D: a. Euclid Eucon Retarder 75 b. W.R. Grace Daratard-17 c. Sika Plastocrete 161 R d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Miscellaneous Materials 1. Curing Compound - Vertical Surfaces: ASTM C309. 2. Curing Compound - Interior Slabs to Receive Foot Traffic Topping, Tile in Mortar Bed, Coating, Resilient Flooring, Terrazzo, Seamless Flooring, Adhered Carpet, Concrete Stain or Chemical Hardener: VOC-compliant, non -membrane forming penetrating type. a. L&M Cure. b. US Spec Permasil. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Comply with requirements of floor finish manufacturers. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior Slabs to Remain Exposed, Interior Slabs to Receive Access Flooring or Carpet With Pad, and Exterior Concrete: ASTM C1315, Class B. Minimum 30% solids content, maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per square centimeter (300 square feet per gallon coverage): a. L&M Dress & Seal WB 30. b. W.R. Meadows Sealtight Vocomp-30. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Comply with requirements of floor finish manufacturers. 4. Floor Sealer: Second coat of Curing and Sealing Compound - Interior Slabs to Remain Exposed as specified above, except slabs to receive chemical hardener/sealer under Section 03365. 2.02 ADHESIVES AND BONDING COMPOUNDS A. Epoxy Adhesives for Use in All Structural Repairs: Two component. 100% solids, 100% reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces and comply with ASTM C881. 1. Euclid Euco Epoxy 452 or 620. 2. Sika Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod or Armatec 110. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. VF 2001-59 03300-5 Where epoxy injection procedures are used, use low viscosity epoxy made by one of - above manufacturers. B. Bonding Compound (interior only): 1. Euclid Euco Weld 2. Larsen Products Weldcrete 3. Sika Sikabond 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Use only at areas not subject to moisture. — C. Epoxy Joint Filler/Sealer: Two component, flexible, solvent -free, moisture insensitive - compound with minimum ASTM D2240 Shore A hardness of 80 at 28 days. Use self - leveling formulation for floors. Use non -sag formulation for vertical and overhead joints. 1. Euclid Euco 700. -- 2. Sika Sikodur 51 NS/SL. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.03 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Reference Standards: ACI 301 Section 4, and ACI 318, Chapter 4. B. Design: Conform to General Notes on Structural Drawings. Proportion ingredients for _ mixes in accordance with ACI 301 4.2.2 and 4.2.3. 1. Should Contractor require special mix due to structural requirements, weather or materials, submit samples of cement and aggregate to be used to approved testing laboratory. Testing laboratory will make analysis of materials and design proper mix to be used. -. C. Durability: Conform to ACI 301 4.2.2 and ACI 318 Chapter 4 as modified herein. — 1. Concrete Exposed to Weather or Freeze -Thaw Including Paving, Site Work and Exterior Slabs: Meet requirements of ACI 301 and 318 Tables 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 except that concrete shall have a water -cement ratio not exceeding 0.45. 2. Calculation of Water-cementitious material ratios: Water includes free surface moisture on aggregates and liquid admixture. D. Slump: Design concrete mixes to provide slumps indicated under mix type. .. 1. Concrete Containing High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): — Slump of 2-3' upon arrival at site, maximum slump of 8" after addition of superplasticizer. 2. Other Concrete: Maximum 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Design slump of fiber reinforced concrete shall be the slump prior to addition of fibers. E. Water/Cementitious Material Ratio: Provide concrete with following water/cementitious material ratios: l . Concrete Subject to Freezing/Thowing: Maximum 0.45. 2. Other Concrete: Comply with Structural General Notes on Drawings. -� Water includes free surface moisture on aggregates and liquid admixture. _ F. Concrete for Floors: Conform to ACI 301 4.2.2.1. VF 2001-59 03300-6 G. Admixtures: I. General: No admixtures will be allowed except as specified herein unless authorized by the Architect. All requests for approval or substitution must be made by the General Contractor and be accompanied by sufficient information and test data for evaluation. 2. All admixtures shall be chemically compatible with cementitious materials and all other admixtures used in the mix. 3. All admixtures shall be chloride free. No calcium chloride shall be added to concrete. H. Chloride Ions: Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentration in concrete mix shall not exceed 0.15 percent by weight of cementitious materials. Mixing: Add aggregate and approximately two-thirds of required water to mixer first and mix minimum of 70 revolutions at mixing speed to ensure wetting of all aggregate particles, then add cement, air entraining agent and remaining water and mix minimum of 30 revolutions at mixing speed. 2.04 CONCRETE MIX TYPES A. Concrete Mixes: Mix A - For Interior Slabs -On -Grade: 3000 psi minimum compressive strength at age of 28 days. Type 1/II Cement, minimum of 540 pounds cement per cubic yard. Fly ash not allowed. One Inch Maximum Aggregate Size. No air entrainment. 4 Inches (8 Inches with Superplasticizer) Maximum Slump. Water Reducing Agent: Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fibrous Reinforced in accordance with Section 03240. Mix B - For Footings and Walls: 3000 psi minimum compressive strength at age of 28 days. Type 1/11 Cement minimum of 490 pounds cementitious material per cubic yard. One Inch Maximum Aggregate Size. No air entraining admixture. 4 Inch (8 Inches with Superplasticizer) Maximum Slump. Mix C - For Sidewalks, Concrete Paving and Other Exterior Concrete: 4000 psi minimum compressive strength at age of 28 days. Type 1/11 Cement, minimum of 6.5 bags per cubic yard. Fly ash not allowed. One Inch Maximum Aggregate Size. 6% ± 1-1 /2% Entrained Air. 4 Inches Maximum Slump. Water Reducing Agent: Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fibrous Reinforced in accordance with Section 03240. VF 2001-59 03300-7 B. Admixtures: 1. Non -Corrosive, Non -Chloride Accelerator: Use at all concrete slabs placed at air _ temperature below 50°F. 2. Air Entraining Agent: Use at all concrete required to be air entrained. 3. Superplasticizer: Contractor's option at: a. All pumped concrete. _ b. Concrete with water/cement ratio below 0.50. C. Mix Designs: Identify by mix identification letter. Submit new mix designs indicating slump, air content and admixtures for all mixes designated to receive fibrous reinforcing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Testing Agency's Review: Provide minimum of 24 hour notice to independent testing agency inspector to allow him to review forms and reinforcement just before concrete is placed and to observe placing of concrete. B. Contractor's Review: Contractor shall inspect forms and reinforcing prior to concrete placement to assure accurate placement of embedded items. 3.02 GENERAL Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, paragraphs as listed unless amended or superseded by this section or notes on Structural Drawings. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Do not begin concrete work until operations are complete enough to allow placement to be carried on as continuous operation for entire section that is to be placed. Clean equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. 1. Forms: Cleaned of debris and ice, wetted (except in freezing weather) and coated as specified under Section 03100. 2. If water accumulates in forms, pump out before concrete is deposited. 3. Clearly mark finish top surface of vertical members on form walls. B. Protection: Cover masonry walls, glazing, and other finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to placing of slabs, sidewalks or floors above. 3.04 PLACEMENT _ A. General: Comply with ACI 301, Section 5. B. Placement: Place concrete in approximately uniform horizontal layers not over twelve inches in height. Piling up of concrete in forms or chuting in manner to separate aggregates will not be. permitted. Do not drop concrete in free fall over 5 feet. C. Water: Prevent accumulations of water on surface of concrete due to water gain, segregation, or other causes, during placement or compacting. Make provision for VF 2001-59 03300-8 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS removal of water as may accumulate so that concrete not be placed in such accumulation. D. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during and immediately after depositing by means of mechanical vibrators. Supplement by hand spading at corners and angles of forms, around embedded fixtures and in other difficult areas. 1. Mechanical Vibrator: Comply with ACI 301, Table 5.3.2.5. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. 3. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. 4. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6' into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 5. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. E. Finishing: Where tops of cast -in -place concrete walls will form finished surface, immediately finish concrete in form by skilled cement finisher. Walls or surfaces not finished to level subject to removal and replacement. 3.05 FLAT WORK A. Screeds: Establish finish plane of horizontal surfaces by screeds, carefully aligned and securely set, spaced not over eight feet apart and installed at proper level or slope, prior to placing concrete. B. Floor Slab Tolerances: Level within maximum tolerance of 1 /4" in 10 feet except slope to drains as indicated. Comply with stricter tolerance requirements of floor finish manufacturers where applicable. C. Selection of Finishes: In accordance with ACI 301 5.3.4 unless otherwise indicated. Finish surfaces sparingly with special tools, such as roller bugs, to force coarse aggregate slightly below surface. Jitterbug tampers not allowed without acceptance of Architect. Dusting of wearing surfaces with dry materials not allowed. Steel or magnesium trowels and floats shall be used for finishing interior slabs containing fibrous reinforcing. D. Requirements for Slab Finish: Comply with requirements of various Sections for slab tolerances, finishes, curing, etc. Be responsible to repair or replace slabs as required and specified in those sections to meet requirements. E. Exterior Slabs: Installed under Section 02776. 3.06 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Construction Joints of Structural Members: ACI 301 5.3.2.6. Use polyvinyl acetate bonding compound, applied as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Joints Subject to Moisture: Do not use bonding compound, use epoxy adhesive. 2. Use of other bonding methods such as surface retarder, Portland cement grout, or roughening of surface not allowed without written acceptance of Architect. VF 2001-59 03300-9 3.07 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 5.3.7. B. Inspection: Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. C. Repair. 1. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details, and elevations. 2. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural finished concrete except upon express direction of Architect. 3. Patch holes and defects. " D. Repair defects in structural concrete walls as follows: 1. Deep Defects Exposing Reinforcing: Chip to sound concrete and clean thoroughly to remove loose concrete and dust. Apply thin coat of epoxy adhesive. Form and pour full with non -shrink grout prior to development of tack -free condition of epoxy adhesive. Strip forms after grout has hardened and provide specified finish. Moist cure and apply clear curing and sealing compound immediately after finishing. 2. Defects Greater Than 1/2Inch Depth Not Exposing Reinforcing: Chip, clean and _ apply epoxy adhesive. Place or dry pack using non -shrink grout prior to development of tack -free condition of epoxy adhesive. If dry pack consistency is required, use non -shrink grout damp pack formula. Provide specified finish and cure. 3. Defects Less Than 1 /2 Inch Depth and All Tie Holes: -- a. For concrete having a specified compressive strength of 5,000 psi or less: Chip and clean per 1. above. Dry pack, finish and cure per 1, above. 4. Other equivalent repair procedures may be used subject to review of Architect. E. Unformed Surfaces: l . Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding or other methods acceptable to the Architect after concrete has cured a minimum of 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of ^ surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Where acceptable to the Architect, the specified underiayment compound, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, may be used. 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective _ areas to sound concrete with clean. square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" patching concrete and apply specified bonding compound. Mix -- patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. VF 2001-59 03300-10 r 5. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose particles. Dampen cleaned surfaces and apply specified bonding compound. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-172 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve. using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3.08 TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 5.3.3. B. Form Removal: Finish and cure concrete surfaces covered by formwork immediately after forms have been removed. Do not expose more surface area than can be finished and cured in one working day. C. Patching: 1. Patch voids, honeycombs or damaged areas in accordance with repair of surface defects above. 2. Add white cement to patching grout as required to match color of existing concrete where patches are exposed to view. 3. Patch tie holes where concrete is in contact with earth and where concrete is exposed. 4. Use specified bonding compound and epoxy adhesive. D. Laitance: Remove deposits of laitance occurring on top of concrete surfaces as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent injury to concrete. Repair areas where laitance is removed as specified for patching. E. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Treat surfaces of concrete wall, slabs, beams, and columns, which are to be covered by subsequent work, as specified under Patching. Exposed Concrete Surfaces: 1. Carefully protect from damage and soiling concrete surfaces, both interior and exterior, to remain exposed but unpainted. 2. Patch where required as specified under Patching. Upon completion of work, reclean damaged or soiled surface as required to make clean, smooth and finished in every respect. 3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Reference Standards: ACI 301 5.3.6 and ACI 308.1. B. Protection: Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying and frost. Protect freshly placed concrete from rain damage. Protect finished slabs from mortar leakage from pouring of slabs above. VF 2001-59 03300-11 C. Form Removal: Do not remove forms until times as specified. Remove carefully to not injure concrete surface. Protect edges and comers to prevent cracking, chipping or other damage and premature drying. D. Vertical Surfaces: Clean surfaces of loose sand, mortar, debris and grout; spray lightly with water and coat with clear or translucent curing compound as soon as possible after removing forms. Apply curing compound same working day that forms are removed. E. Horizontal Surfaces: l . As soon as possible after placing concrete, coat exposed horizontal surfaces with curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and cover with white polyethylene sheeting of minimum of six mil nominal thickness. Give _ special attention to providing adequate curing of slab edges. 2. Provide polyethylene sheeting as wide as practical, edges lapped minimum of six inches, weighted to prevent blowing, and sealed to prevent loss of moisture. Keep sheeting in place a minimum of seven days. 3. Slabs to Receive Thin Set Ceramic Tile: Wet cure for at least seven days. Do not use curing compounds. Protection: Protect concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping, and other damage during progress of the work, and leave in good condition upon completion. G. Protection: Protect concrete surfaces from staining, cracking, chipping, and other damage during progress of the work, and leave in good condition upon completion. -- 3.10 FLOOR SEALING A. Sealer/Hardener for Fab Shop Areas: Section 03365. B. Other Floor Sealer: Cure concrete floor slabs as specified above. l . Prior to completion .of project, apply second coat of curing and sealing compound to concrete floors not receiving other finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Upon completion, provide surface clean without discoloration or traces of excess material. - 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE REQUIREMENTS A. Other Concrete Work: Furnish and install other concrete work indicated on Drawings, even though not specifically mentioned herein to complete work, including following: 1. Anchors: Install anchors furnished under Sections in accordance with accepted shop drawings for structural and miscellaneous steel. 2. Equipment Bases: Furnish and install concrete bases for pumps, boilers, tanks, fans, transformers, floor mounted electrical equipment, etc. as indicated. Furnish and install concrete fill in inertia base frames provided under Division 15. Install anchor bolts and inserts in accordance with setting diagrams furnished by contractor responsible for installing the equipment. Finish bases in workmanlike manner with troweled finish. Locate and size bases as determined by contractor furnishing equipment. VF 2001-59 03300-12 3. Supply concrete for signage, fencing, and bases of miscellaneous items indicated on Site Drawings. a. Post -Mounted Signs: Coordinate with work specified in Section 02891 Post - Mounted Signs. 4. Light Pole Bases: Form and pour light pole bases shown on Electrical Drawings. Coordinate with work specified in Division 16 Electrical. 5. Floor Mat Frames: Install frames furnished under Section 12481. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reference Standard: ACI 301 1.6 and 1.7. B. General: Testing will be conducted by an approved testing laboratory. See Section 01450. Special Inspection Requirements: See notes on Structural Drawings. C. Test Priority: Control tests shall be used to determine concrete quality throughout project; however, special tests shall have precedence over control tests, and core tests shall have precedence over all previous tests. D. Tests: Cooperate fully with those making tests. Following tests and procedures are subject to change during construction at discretion of Architect: 1. Test Reports: In accordance with Section 01450. 2. Slump Tests: The General Contractor shall provide necessary equipment and shall make tests in conformity with ASTM C143. The Contractor shall make slump tests on the first truck of each pour and as often as deemed necessary by the Contractor to maintain the required slump and adequate records. In addition, the Contractor shall make slump tests when directed by the Architect or Engineer. a. Tests shall be made by person thoroughly familiar with requirements specified. b. Sample concrete at point of placement c. Should slump exceed limits stated Concrete Mix Types in Part 2, batch shall be rejected. d. Keep accurate record of time, location in work and results of slump tests which shall be available for inspection by Owner's Representative and Architect. 3. Control Tests: a. Control tests of concrete work shall be made on every 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed and, in any case, minimum of once during each day's pour. b. Each test shall consist of four standard 6' test cylinders cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C172. c. Sample concrete at point of placement. d. One cylinder shall be broken at end of seven days after placing, two cylinders shall be broken at end of 28 days after placing, and remaining cylinder shall be stored until their disposition is determined by Architect. e. In general, remaining cylinders will be broken only when previous test reports indicated unsatisfactory results. f. Tests on remaining cylinders shall be at expense of the Contractor. g. Architect reserves right to stop future concrete work when seven or 28 day tests indicate unsatisfactory results until, in his opinion, proper corrective measures VF 2001-59 03300-13 have been taken to insure quality concrete in future work and corrections -- deemed necessary have been made. h. Tests shall be made at time control tests are taken and so stated in reports to determine slump, air content, unit weight and temperature of concrete. i. All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C138 or ASTM C231. 4. Special Tests: a. Should Contractor desire control tests to facilitate early removal of forms. They shall be made in addition to those specified for control tests and shall be - completely site -cured. _ b. Expense for making additional test cylinders, testing, curing and protection shall be Contractors: 5. Strength Level: Considered satisfactory if average of all three sets of consecutive _ strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi. 6. Core Tests: a. If, at any time, concrete control test specimens show compressive strength of 28 days below required level, or if concrete has been frozen before it has taken final set, so severely that, in opinion of Architect, its strength has been adversely affected, Contractor shall, at his own expense, have sufficient core tests taken, number and location to be accepted by Architect on such portions of work as may have been affected to determine actual conditions of concrete. b. Securing, Preparing and Testing: ASTM C42. Should tests reveal that concrete does not meet requirements of this specification, Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace entire section involved or make corrections deemed necessary by Architect. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Installed Work: Protect newly finished slabs from weather damage. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03300-14 SECTION 03365 CONCRETE HARDENER AND SEALER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete sealer, densifier, dustproofer and chemical hardener for Fab shop area floor slab. B. Related Requirements: 1. Concrete Curing: Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Related Sections: 1. Curing Agents and Sealers: Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's current catalog literature in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. Include the following. 1. Submittal for Review: Manufacturer and product for acceptance. Include the following. a. Typical physical properties of hardened concrete. 2. Submittal for Information: a. Manufacturer's surface preparation recommendations. b. Material Safety Data sheets. c. Manufacturers application instructions. d. Manufacturer's maintenance recommendations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Product shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. 2. USDA approved for incidental food contact. B. Record of Work: Keep record listing time, location and date of application of concrete chemical hardener. Keep such record until completion of project and make available to Architect for examination at any time. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: In Manufacturer's original unopened containers bearing original labels. C. Storage and Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's printed instructions. VF 2001-59 03365-1 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Acceptable Ambient Temperature Range at Time of Application: Minimum 40 degrees F to maximum 100 degrees F. 1.06 SCHEDULING Schedule application of chemical hardener to occur at least 28 days after concrete placement. 1.07 WARRANTY — Submit Manufacturer's warranty in accordance with Section 01780 that treated concrete - surfaces will maintain hardening, densification and water resistance as documented in Manufacturer's product data for a period of ten years. — PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CHEMICAL HARDENER AND SEALER A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products - Clear, Penetrating Liquid Concrete Sealer, _ Densifier and Chemical Hardener: 1. Dayton Superior Day -Chem Sure Hard (J17). — 2. Curecrete Chemical Company Ashford Formula. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals Seal Hard. 4. Sonnebom Lapidolith. — 5. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Maximum 0.0 gms/titer. C. Active Ingredients: 100 percent solids. _ D. Physical Properties of Treated Concrete l . Abrasion Resistance: 50 percent wear reduction when tested in accordance with _ ASTM C779, 30 minute interval. 2. Water Absorption: 80 percent reduction of rate of water absorption of untreated concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C642. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions l . Examine concrete substrate to verify surface is clean, unstained, and free from foreign materials which would prevent execution and quality of materials applied under this section. -- 2. Verify new concrete has cured minimum 28 calendar days. 2. Verify existing concrete surfaces are structurally sound. 3. Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor with copy to Architect. VF 2001-59 03365-2 4. Do not proceed with application until defects have been corrected and specified preparation work has been completed. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. New Concrete Surfaces 1. Prepare floors according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Surfaces shall be fully cured, dry and clean. 3. Cleaning: a. Plaster Stains: Remove with medium grit sandpaper or steel wire brush. b. Oil, Wax and Grease: Chemically clean as recommended by hardener manufacturer. c. Curing Compound Membrane: If surface has acrylic or resin -based curing compound membrane, or if dissipating -type curing compound membrane has not fully dissipated, remove membrane by method approved by hardener Manufacturer. B. Protection: Cover walls, adjacent concrete, and finish materials with polyethylene or otherwise protect from damage due to application of hardener. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply two coats according to Manufacturer's instructions. 1. Apply uniformly, avoiding puddling. 2. Scrub into surfaces with a mechanical scrubber or bristle broom. B. Immediately mop up or otherwise remove all excess. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03365-3 SECTION 03453 PRECAST CONCRETE FOR MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Plant -precast concrete bands. 2. Plant -precast concrete caps. 3. Plant -precast concrete sills. 4. Other plant -precast concrete architectural shapes and elements as indicated. B. Related Sections: l . Mortar: Section 04060 Masonry Mortar. 2. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement: Section 04080. 3. Water Repellent Sealer: Section 07190 Water Repellents. 4. Unit Masonry Assemblies: Section 04810. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: 1. Production of Precast Units: Comply with PCI MNL 117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products. 2. Materials: Comply with ACI 318-95 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Part 2. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of precast units and trim components including anchorage. 1. Indicate drips and reveals on shop drawings. 2. Do not fabricate precast units until shop drawings are approved. 3. Shop drawings shall be original drawing produced by the precast concrete contractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of precast unit to be provided for the Project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up: Supply accepted precast units for incorporation in mock-up wall panel constructed under Section 04810. V F 2001-59 03453-1 1.0 2.0 3.0 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub - bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430 fully executed. 2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in Section 00420. 3.2. In accordance with Section 8-159 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services required, (2) whether the bidder can 7/96 Section 00100 Page 1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Transporting: Use care in transporting precast units to the jobsite. Handle members in a manner to prevent excessive stresses, spalling or cracking. B. Storing: Store products utilizing good plant procedures and proper handling in a manner to prevent damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS " A. Material: Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 3. 1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 2.02 MIXES A. Concrete Properties: 1. Concrete Strength: 4000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2. . Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 lbs. water to 100 lbs. cement. 3. Air Entrainment: a. With 3/8 inch maximum aggregate size: 7-1/2% b. With 1/2 inch maximum aggregate size: 7% c. With 3/4 inch maximum aggregate size: 6% d. Tolerance: Plus or minus 1-1/2% B. Testing: Sampling and testing in accordance with the manufacturer's standard procedure, subject to approval by the Architect. C. Color: Integral color as selected by Architect. _ 2.03 FABRICATION A. Manufacturing procedures shall be in general compliance with PCI MNL 117. B. Finishes - Exposed Surfaces: Acid etched. 2.04 STEEL ANCHORS Furnish and install steel anchors or threaded inserts cast into precast, cast into cast -in- r place concrete to receive precast caps, and loose steel items needed for installation of precast. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Quality control of precast concrete products shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer. The Architect or his representative shall have access to the " manufacturing plant at all times during the manufacture of precast concrete products. The manufacturer shall cooperate with the Architect by providing casting schedules when requested. VF 2001-59 03453-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Prior to start of installation, the bearing surfaces to receive precast units for proper grades and elevation. Verify surfaces over clean and properly prepared for precast installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to General Contractor with one copy to Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONCRETE IN MASONRY A. Masonry Construction: Comply with Section 04810. B. Lay precast units in flat mortar beds in horizontal courses. Do not wet units. Lay dry. C. Project or recess units as indicated on Drawings. D. Completed installation shall match accepted sample panel. E. Flashing: Coordinate with Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.03 JOINTS A. Fill all bed and head joints solidly with mortar throughout entire thickness of wall. l . Width: Uniform, approximately 3/8 inch wide. B. Avoid splashing exposed faces of precast units with mortar. Remove droppings and splashing immediately with clean sponge and water. C. Tooling: Glove raked. Match appearance of accepted sample panel. 3.04 PATCHING A. Repair: Units may be repaired providing damage does not impair the structural adequacy or appearance. Cosmetic patching will be allowed only after the Architect's approval of methods and workmen to be used. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed bands, lintels, sills, copings, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1 /4 inch in 20 feet. I n, B. Erection Tolerances: Erect precast bands, sills, and caps with joints in positions indicated on the Drawings and within the following limits: 1. Face Width of Joints: Drawing dimension plus or minus 1 /4". 2. Joint Taper: 1 /4" per foot of length with a maximum length of tapering in one direction of 10'. 3. Step in Face: 1 /4" maximum. 4. Jog in Alignment of Edge: 1 /4" maximum. VF 2001-59 03453-3 3.06 JOINT SEALING A. Leave clean and open joint between end joints of precast caps, bands and sills and elsewhere where caulking or sealant is indicated. B. Sealing will be installed by sealant contractor under Section 07920. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces as necessary to remove dirt and stains which may be on surfaces after installation. B. Clean precast units after installation procedures are completed. C. Wash and rinse exposed surfaces in accordance with precast manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 03453-4 SECTION 03481 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete splash blocks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Pack to prevent breakage during transport to site. B. Delivery: Do not drop or drag across paved surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SPLASH BLOCKS A. Description: 12' x 60" x 3" wire mesh reinforced plant precast concrete. Site cast splash blocks are not acceptable. 1. Concrete Strength: 4,000 psi PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install on roof under each downspout, sloped to drain away from wall. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 03481-1 SECTION 03600 GROUTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shrink -resistant, cementitious, non-metallic grout under steel joist, beam and column bearing plates. 2. Shrink -resistant grout elsewhere as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Foundations: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Steel Framing and Base Plates: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: l . ASTM C 1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non -Shrinkable). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets and installation instructions for each grout product to be installed under this Section in accordance with Section 01330. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver palletized in original sound, dry, unopened containers with manufacturer's source code marking. C. Storage: 1. Store under cover in dry area. 2. Storage Temperature: Minimum 40 degrees F, maximum 90 degrees F unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. 3. Storage Damage: Immediately remove from site any material which becomes damp or otherwise defective during storage. 4. Storage Time: 6 months maximum, or shorter time if so recommended by manufacturer. VF 2001-59 03600-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Euclid Chemical Company. 2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Master Builders, Inc. 4. U.S. Grout Corporation. .. 5. US Mix Products Company. 6. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. " 2.02 SHRINK -RESISTANT, CEMENTITIOUS, NON-METALLIC GROUT A. Grout Under Steel Joist, Beam and Column Bearing Plates: Meet all performance requirements of ASTM C1107 at plastic consistency. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Euclid NS Grout. b. Five Star Grout. c. L&M Crystex. d. Master Builders Embeco. e. US Spec Multi -Purpose Grout. f. Approved Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Compressive Strength: 2 inch cubes, stiff damp pack consistency, in accordance with ASTM C109. _ a. 3 Day Strength: 4,500 psi minimum. b. 7 Day Strength: 6,100 psi minimum. c. 28 Day Strength: 8,000 psi minimum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation for Cementitious Grouting: 1. Clean steel and concrete surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, laitance, loose concrete and other contaminants. 2. Remove free-standing water from concrete surfaces before grouting. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF CEMENTIOUS GROUT A. General: Mix and install grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. l . Mix with minimum water necessary for placement method to be used. 2. Extend grout with gravel for placements greater than 3 inches in depth. B. Grouting Under Steel Joist, Beam, and Column Bearing Plates: Place grout at non -sag, _ damp pack consistency, completely filling area below plates with grout. Manually compact to eliminate air pockets and voids. VF 2001-59 03600-2 3.03 FINISHING A. Finishing Edges of Cementitious Grout: Before grout has reached final set, remove all grout above bottom edge of plate. In no case shall grout extend upward along side of base plate. Trowel edges at approximately 450 angle from bottom of plate to top of substrate. Horizontal shoulders will not be allowed. 3.04 CURING A. Curing Cementitious Grout: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Maintain grout temperature between 400 F and 900 F for minimum 24 hours following placement. 2. Cover exposed grout surfaces with clean, wet rags and maintain moisture for minimum 6 hours following placement. 3. Immediately after removal of wet rags, apply Curing and Sealing Compound as specified in Section 03300. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 03600-3 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04060 MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Mortar for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Mortar for Section 03453 Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies. B. Related Sections 1. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 3. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 4. Brick and Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: Submit mortar design mixes indicating ASTM C270 proportion or property criteria used for each type of mortar, including Portland cement, lime sand, water and admixture proportions. l . Indicate coloring admixture by percentage of.dry mix weight. B. Samples: Submit cured samples of colored mortar for acceptance. 1. Final Color Acceptance: In sample masonry wall required in Section 04810. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up Panels: Supply and install each mix of colored mortar for mock-up panels as specified under Section 04810. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: cold weather construction. 1. Masonry cement not allowed. / ASTM Cl 50, Type I, except Type III may be used for VF 2001-59 04060-1 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. - C. Aggregates: ASTM C144. D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis or organic materials. E. Mortar Color: As selected by Architect. 1. Davis Colors 2. Color Pigments Industries _ 3. Solomon Grind -Chem Service 4. Accepted Substitute F. Other Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Mortar Materials and Proportions: Comply with ASTM C270. B. Unit Masonry Setting Mortar: 1. Type: Type S, 1800 psi average compressive strength in 28 days. 2. Provide colored mortar to match accepted samples at exposed colored masonry units. 3. Provide colored mortar to match accepted samples at face brick. 4. Preblended Mortar: Preblended mortar as manufactured by Spec Mix, Inc. may be provided at Contractor's option. All cementifious materials and aggregate shall be blended in factory under controlled conditions, and the mix shall require only the addition of water and water repellent admixture at the job site. C. Pointing Mortar. One part Portland cement, 1 /8 part hydrated lime or lime putty and two parts aggregate passing the No. 80 sieve. .. 1. Provide colored mortar to match accepted samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION -- Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing mortar before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: l . Job Site Mixing: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not _ allowed. 2. Spec Mix Option: Use factory blended dry mortar mix materials. VF 2001-59 04060-2 B. Mortar Mixing: Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for at least five minutes and not more than ten minutes in mechanical batch mixer, with maximum amount of water to produce workable consistency. C. Retempering: Retemper mortars that have stiffened because of evaporation of water from mortar by adding water as frequently as needed to restore required consistency. l . Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 04060-3 SECTION 04070 MASONRY GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Grout for Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 3. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 4. Block and Reinforced Masonry Construction: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Grout Mix Designs: l . Submit in accordance with Product Data provisions of Section 01330 if ready -mix grout is to be supplied. Mix design submittal is not required for site -mixed grout. 2. Follow provisions of Section 03300 for mix design submittal requirements and procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Testing will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section 01450. 1. Test Reports: Reports of tests will be distributed in accordance with Section 01450. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. 1. Masonry cement not allowed. VF 2001-59 04070-1 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Aggregates: ASTM C404. D. Water: Clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic materials. E. Admixtures: Not allowed. 1. Antifreeze Compounds: Calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents not allowed. 2. Use of accelerators not allowed. 2.02 MIXES A. Site -Mixed Grout for Masonry 1. ASTM C476. Proportion by volume with sufficient water added to produce consistency for pouring without segregation. 2. Coarse Grout: Coarse grout may be used only in filled -cell construction 3' or more in both horizontal dimensions. Coarse grout to be composed of one part Portland cement with not more than one -tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three parts sand, and not more than two parts gravel. -- 3. Fine Grout: Use fine grout in all locations where coarse grout may not be used. Composed of one part Portland cement, with not more than one -tenth part hydrated lime or lime putty added, and two and one-fourth to three parts sand. 4. Grout shall attain a minimum strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. B. Ready -Mixed Grout for Masonry: Proportion with sufficient water added to produce consistency for pouring without segregation. 1. Minimum: 28-day compressive strength: 2,000 psi 2. Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Design Slump: 8 inch minimum, 10 inch maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION y A. Clean equipment for mixing, transportation and placing grout before starting work. 3.02 MEASUREMENT AND MIXING A. Measurement Method: By either volume or weight so that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel not allowed. B. Site Mixing of Grout: Mix cement and aggregate for at lease 3 minutes and not more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide the desired workability. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Grout Tests: Control tests will be conducted by accepted testing laboratory. See Section 01450 and Section 03300 for requirements. VF 2001-59 04070-2 B. Ready -Mixed Grout 1. Compressive strength shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the ASTM C1019. 2. Testing Agency: Grout tests will be conducted by a testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. 3. Test Specimens: Take grout samples as grout is being placed into the wall. Construct three test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 1019 under the observation of the testing agency. Cure, protect, and store specimens on -site for 48 hours. Protect from freezing and variations in temperature until collected by testing agency. 4. Frequency: Minimum of one sample consisting of three specimens shall be built and tested at start of masonry work and for each 2000 square feet of wall area as masonry construction progresses. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 04070-3 SECTION 04080 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCEMENT PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Anchors and ties. 2. Joint reinforcement. B. Related Sections: 1. Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Precast Concrete Bands: Section 03453 Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies. 3. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 4. Masonry Grout: Section 04070. 5. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 6. Brick and Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up: Supply and install ties and joint reinforcement for mock-up panels as specified under Section 04810. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 2. AA Wire Products. 3. Heckman Building Products. 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 6. Accepted Substitute 2.02 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Horizontal Reinforcement 1. General: Welded wire units of ASTM A82 cold drawn wire, No. 9 gage deformed side rods and No. 9 gage plain cross rods. a. Width: Approximately 2" less than width of wall. b. Provide prefabricated comers and tees. 2. Finish at Interior Walls: Brite finish. 3. Finish at Exterior Walls: Galvanized. 4. Type: Truss design except provide ladder type at reinforced masonry walls. 5. Cavity Walls: Provide brite finish side rods and galvanized cross rods with drip. Omit drip where cavity contains rigid insulation. VF 2001-59 04080-1 2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES A. Masonry Veneer Wall Ties: _ 1. Anchors to Sheathing: Dur-O-WaI D/A 213 Adjustable Veneer Anchors. _ a. Drywall Screws: Self -tapping, self -drilling, galvanized No. 8 x 1-1 /4'. Use two screws per anchor. — 2. Anchors to Reinforced CMU: a. Adjustable Type: Dur-O-WaI D/A 360 Ladur-Eye. b. Reinforcing Type: Dur-O-WaI D/A 320 TR Tri-Rod. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Walls: 1. Install joint reinforcement continuously in every second horizontal block course (16" o.c.) of masonry walls. 2. Install continuously at 8" o.c. at parapet walls. 3. Lap 6" at splices. 4. Provide one additional piece above and below openings extending 2' minimum beyond opening. 5. Use prefabricated pieces at comers and tees. 6. Cavity Walls: Span cavity, lapping equally into block and brick. 7. Joint reinforcement not required at masonry veneer framed walls. B. Control Joints: Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. 3.02 WALL TIES — A. Masonry and Precast Concrete Over Steel Stud Walls: 1. Bond masonry and precast concrete bands to steel studs with wall ties located not more than 16" vertically on each stud. 2. Space at 8" o.c. vertically and horizontally at perimeter of openings in masonry, and 8" o.c. horizontally at the top and bottom stud wall tracks. 3. Fasten ties through sheathing into steel studs using power driven screws. 4. Install triangular ties sized according to width of cavity providing 7' projection into the horizontal mortar joint. — B. Masonry Over CMU Backup: 1. Where coursing is in alignment: Install tri-rod or Ladur-Eye joint reinforcing full width of total wall. 2. Where coursing is not in alignment: Install Ladur-Eye joint reinforcement at 16" o.c. in both directions. VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 04080-2 SECTION 04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Control joints. 2. Weep holes. 3. Flexible flashing. B. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Mortar: Section 04060. 2. Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 3. Brick and Block: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 4. Sheet Metal Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Sealing Control Joints: Section 079'20 Joint Sealants. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Up: Supply and install weep holes and flexible flashing for mock-up panels as specified under Section 04810. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Block Control Joints: ASTM D2000, 2AA-805 rubber with durometer hardness of approximately 80. B. Brick Control Joints: ASTM D1056, 3/8" thickness closed cell neoprene with adhesive backing on one side. 3" width. 2.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. Flexible Flashing: 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-WaI, Inc. b. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Flexible Flashing: Dur-O-WaI DCF Reinforced vinyl ethylene with D/A 1502 flashing tape. B. Weep Holes: 1. Rope Weeps at Bottom of Single Wythe CMU Walls: 1 /4" cotton sash cord. 2. Weeps for Masonry Veneer Over Stud Walls: 1 /4" i. d. PVC tubing. VF 2001-59 04090-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL JOINTS A. Install control joints in masonry walls as indicated on the Drawings. Joints shall be installed completely through and full height of masonry. 1. Both Sides of Joints: Sealed under Section 07920. 2. Where not otherwise indicated, space joints at 24 feet maximum on center. 3.02 FLEXIBLE FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES A. Flexible Flashings: Install in slurry of fresh mortar as indicated. Start flashings 1 /2" from outside face of wall. Turn up face of sheathing a minimum of 8" and tape top edge. Lap and tape all end joints. B. Weep Holes: Install where flashing or waterproofing turns out and terminates in horizontal mortar joints. Install at 24" o.c. in soft mortar. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 04090-2 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Block masonry walls. 2. Brick veneer. 3. Concrete masonry veneer. 4. Installation of precast concrete. 5. Cavity insulation. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Masonry Reinforcing Bars: Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Mortar: Section 04060 Masonry Mortar. 3. Grout: Section 04070 Masonry Grout. 4. Items to be Built -In From Other Sections: a. Bolts and Anchors. b. Nailing Blocks. c. Inserts. d. Flashing Reglets and Other Sheet Metal. e. Steel Lintels. f. Expansion Joints - Sheet Metal or Manufactured. g. Mechanical or Electrical Sleeves or Blockouts. h. Access Panels. i. All Other Built -In Members. 5. Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies: Section 03453. C. Related Requirements: 1. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement. 2. Control Joint Material, Embedded Flashing and Weepholes: Section 04090 Masonry Accessories. 3. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 4. Quality Control: Section 01450 Quality Control. D. Related Sections: 1. Precast Concrete Bands, Sills and Caps: Section 03453 Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies. 2. Water Repellent: Section 07190 Water Repellents. 3. Calking Control Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. E. Face Brick Allowance: Section 01210 Allowances. VF 2001-59 04810-1 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. American National Standards Institute, ANSI/NBS 211 (A41.1), "Building Code Requirements for Masonry". 2. Uniform Building Code (UBC). Chapter 21 - Masonry. 3. ACI 530.1-95/ASCE 6-95 Specification for Masonry Structures. 4. National Concrete Masonry Association, NCMA, "A Manual of Facts on Concrete Masonry' (collection of TEK Bulletins). .- 5. Portland Cement Association, PCA, "Concrete Masonry Handbook ". 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS _ A. Structural Performance Criteria 1. Minimum compressive strength, fm of concrete masonry at the age of 28 days: 1,500 psi. 2. Minimum compressive strength, fm of solid brick masonry at the age of 28 days: 1,500 psi. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330 for all reinforced masonry. Include minimum of the following. 1. Fabrication dimensions and locations for placing reinforcing steel and accessories. 2. Details of steel reinforcement, including lap lengths and bends. _ 3. Grade of reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry lintels. - B. Samples: l . Face Brick Samples: Submit full size samples of face brick illustrating the full range of color and texture for acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 2. Face Masonry Unit Samples: Submit three full size samples of each type of face block for acceptance. 3. Architect will retain one set of accepted samples. 4. Keep one set of accepted samples at site throughout construction period. 5. Submitted samples must match samples in Architect's office. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit following tests for each class of unit and type of masonry assemblage two weeks prior to start of construction. Prepare specimens and test in accordance with Uniform Building Code and standards cited therein. a. Tests made on individual masonry units within last four months. b. Current mortar test including mortar proportions. c. Current grout test including grout proportions. d. Current prism test. .� (1) Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens. (2) Substantiate that each type of masonry assemblage meets or exceeds required 28 day compressive strength (f'm). _ VF 2001-59 04810-2 2. Certificates: If requested by the Architect, furnish manufacturer's certification and test results indicating that concrete masonry units meet specified ASTM requirements. 3. Masonry Subcontractor Qualifications: Masonry bidders shall submit evidence of qualifications along with bid proposals. Include evidence of minimum experience and a list of successfully completed projects with similar materials and complexity. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Where a fire-resistant classification is indicated, comply with the applicable building code requirements for materials and installation to achieve the indicated rating. B. Mock -Up: Construct minimum 8 foot by 8 foot cavity wall panel with face brick, soldier course, all face block types, precast concrete band, and colored mortar in location as directed by Architect. Sample panel shall include metal stud framing, exterior sheathing, anchors, flashing and weeps as required to demonstrate the entire wall assembly. 1. Accepted Sample Wall: Standard for rest of work 2. Remove at completion of project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Masonry Units: Handle carefully to avoid chipping and protect against wetting prior to use allowing air circulation under stacked units. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Cold Weather Protection during Installation: a. Preparation: Before beginning work, remove ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to touch. Remove frozen or damaged masonry. b. Air Temperature 40°F to 320F: Heat sand or mixing water to minimum of 550F and maximum of 120°F. c. Air Temperature 320F to 25OF: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 650F and maximum of 120°F. d. Air Temperature 250F to 20OF: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 750F and maximum of 120°F. Use salamander or other sources of heat on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. e. Air Temperature 20OF and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to minimum of 75OF and maximum of 120°F. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20°F. f. Grout: Place grout in masonry at minimum temperature of 70OF and maximum temperature of 120°F. Maintain grouted masonry above 320F for 24 hours following placement of grout. g. Admixtures: Mortar admixtures will not be permitted without written acceptance of Architect. VF 2001-59 04810-3 11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form. 11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. 11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 12.0 BID PRICING. Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules. 13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS. 13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. 14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. 14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 7/96 Section 00100 Page 5 h. Frozen Work: Above paragraphs are designed to permit masonry work to - continue during periods of cold temperature. Any frozen masonry work will be prima facie evidence that above requirements have not been complied with. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Architect. 2. Cold Weather Protection after Installation: a. Mean Daily Air Temperature 400 F to 320F: Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours. b. Mean Daily Air Temperature 320F to 250F: Cover masonry completely for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25OF to 20OF: Cover masonry completely with insulating blankets for 24 hours; 48 hours for grouted masonry. d. Mean Daily Air Temperature 200 F and Below: Maintain Masonry temperature _ above 320F for 24 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps or other method proven to be satisfactory. 3. Hot Weather Protection During Installation: When air temperature exceeds 990F in shade, protect freshly laid masonry from direct exposure to wind and sun. 4. Moisture Protection During Installation: Where exposed to weather, Cover top of masonry walls at end of each day's work using waterproof material weighted down to ensure its remaining in place. Maintain such protection until final capping of wall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS _ 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Lightweight Concrete Block (Less than 105 pounds per cubic foot oven -dry weight of concrete): ASTM C90. 1. Aggregate: ASTM C331 (Lightweight). 2. Classification: Grade N, Type 1. a. Curing: In moisture controlled atmosphere at normal pressure and temperature, or in an autoclave, to comply with requirements for Type I units. 3. Nominal Sizes: Eight inch high by 16 inch long: thickness as indicated. 4. Minimum Net Compressive Strength: 1900 psi over minimum ungrouted net area. 5. Provide lintel blocks, corner blocks, jamb blocks, header blocks and required special shapes as detailed or required to complete the job. _ 7. Provide bullnose blocks as indicated for interior walls. B. Face Masonry Units: Provide medium weight Grade N, Type 1 units with integral color: l . Types: Provide following face units as indicated. a. Split Face: Integrally colored split face concrete block. b. Smooth Face: Smooth face integrally colored concrete block. Provide dense aggregate and matrix for smooth surface. 2. Integral Color: As selected by Architect. Different for each type. 3. Block manufacturers must match color, texture, density and quality of sample blocks in Architect's office. Submitted samples must be accepted before delivery of face masonry units to site. See "Submittals" and "Quality Assurance" in Part I of this section. C. Face Brick: ASTM C216, SW Grade, Type FBX. Each bidder shall include in his proposal an allowance as specified in Section 01210. VF 2001-59 04810-4 l . Size: 2-1 /4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/8" modular unless indicated otherwise. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength of Units: 4400 psi over gross area. 2.02 MORTAR AND ACCESSORIES A. Mortar: See Section 04060. B. Grout: See Section 04070. C. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchors: Section 04080 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcement D. Masonry Accessories: See Section 04090. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Bars: Supplied under Section 03200 2.04 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Rigid Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. R-Max Inc. C. Apache. d. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Insulation: Insulation: Dow Thermax Sheathing, polyisocyanurate foam plastic core with reflective foil faces on both sides, two inches thick unless otherwise indicated, aged R-Value 16. Provide in widths as required for ease of installation. B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: l . Bearing Surfaces: Inspect foundations and other bearing surfaces for proper grades and elevations, freedom from dirt and other foreign material. Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cooperation: Check relationship of masonry to work under other sections, cooperate with others and proceed as desirable for general progress and best interest of project. B. Cleaning: Remove dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls, ties and reinforcing prior to installation. V F 2001-59 04810-5 3.03 MASONRY INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay masonry plumb, level and true to lines to tolerances indicated. Bond as indicated on elevations and details. 2. Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts and to maintain bond. Cut neatly around contacting work. _. 3. Construct slots, chases, cavities and similar spaces as required for other work. 4. Masonry dimensions for exterior openings are nominal. Lay out masonry openings to provide 1 /4 inch maximum sealant joint at metal frames. 5. Radius: Lay in smooth radius curves where indicated. B. Solid Units: 1. Use solid units for top course of exterior piers, walls, window sills, etc. as indicated and required. 2. Use solid units for soldier courses in bearing walls and wherever cores of hollow units would be exposed to view or weather. C. Mortar Joints: 1. Lay masonry work in shoved manner in full beds of unfurrowed mortar. Completely fill vertical and horizontal joints and voids with mortar. 2. Joints: Plumb or level. _ 3. Joint Treatment: a. Tool exposed joints to slightly concave surface well bonded to units. b. Cut unexposed joints flush. _ 4. Avoid overplumbing and pounding of comers and jambs to fit stretcher units after being set in position. Where adjustment must be made after mortar has started to - harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. D. Built -In Items: l . Cooperate to build -in items of others into masonry as work progresses. 2. Steel Door Jambs: Grout steel door jambs set in masonry full of mortar as wall is built. 3. Lintels: Install lintels furnished under Section 05500 for openings over 16 inches in width. Install in beds of mortar and do necessary pointing. Fill hollow masonry units full with grout for three courses at lintel bearings. 4. Chases and Recesses: Provide chases in masonry walls as indicated and required for mechanical and electrical work for pipes and conduits. Build recesses as required for accommodation of cases and cabinets, radiators, and unit heaters. Install lintels for recesses over 16 inches in width. 5. Built-in Items: Install sleeves of proper size provided by others, where directed, to permit passage of pipes through walls. Build -in wall sleeves, anchors, plates, and other members provided by others. Properly set built-in items as walls progress and under direction of party providing some. _ 6. Access Panels: Install access panels occurring in masonry walls. a. Access Panels: Furnished under other sections. See Section 08310. _ b. Accurately locate as directed. 7. Embedded Sheet Metal: Install embedded sheet metal flashing, reglets, etc., provided by others. Clean surfaces of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or otherwise damage embedded materials. Place VF 2001-59 04810-6 embedded items on bed of fresh mortar. Cover with fresh mortar before laying succeeding courses. E. Starting and Stopping: Where fresh masonry joins partially or totally set masonry, clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and wet lightly to obtain good bond with new work. Remove loose masonry and mortar. If it is necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, step back 1 /2 masonry unit length in each course. Do not tooth. F. Cutting: Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with motor -driven masonry saw. G. Accessories: Install joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, control joints, weep holes, flexible flashing and other accessories in accordance with Section 04090. H. Bracing: Adequately brace masonry until cured and permanently supported. 3.04 CONCRETE BLOCK INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay concrete block in running bond. 1. Install bullnose block at exposed corners and at locations as indicated. B. Installation: l . Joints: Uniform approximately 3/8 inch wide. 2. Wetting: Do not wet units. Lay dry. 3. Partition Heights: Extend interior masonry walls to structure above unless otherwise indicated. C. Face Masonry Unit Stripes and Precast Concrete Bands: Horizontal bands and stripes shall appear continuous on each elevation and each pair of elevations which can be viewed at any one time. 3.05 FORMS AND SHORES Construct forms as required to shape, lines, and dimension indicated substantially and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar or grout. Brace or tie to maintain position and shape. Do not remove until masonry cured sufficiently to support own weight and other applied loads. 3.06 WIND BRACING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Design: General Contractor shall employ a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Colorado to design wind bracing for all non -reinforced and reinforced masonry walls. Wind bracing shall be designed to resist wind load and exposure required by Local Code without damage to walls. Design calculations shall be available to the Architect for examination upon request. B. Installation and Removal: Wind bracing shall be installed as the wall is laid up and shall be removed only when permanent supports and braces are in place, walls are fully cured and permission of the Structural Engineer is obtained. VF 2001-59 04810-7 C. Responsibility: Structural adequacy and safety of wind bracing is the sole responsibility of the General Contractor and his masonry subcontractor. 3.07 BRICK INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay brick in running bond. l . Install recessed and soldier courses as indicated. B. Joints: Uniform approximately 3/8 inch wide. C. Wetting: Wet brick having absorption rate greater than 0.025 ounce per square inch per minute sufficiently so absorption rate when laid does not exceed this rate. 3.08 REINFORCED MASONRY A. General: Where indicated on Structural Drawings, reinforce masonry unit cores or -" cavities with deformed steel reinforcing bars and grout as indicated. B. Layout: Build reinforced hollow unit masonry to preserve unobstructed vertical continuity _. of cells to be filled. C. Reinforcement: Hold vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom and at _ intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. D. Grouting: 1. Grout spaces less than two inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. In spaces greater than two inches use coarse grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. 2. Hold mortar in bed joints back 1 /4 inch from edges of masonry unit adjacent to grout spaces, bevel back and upward from grout space. Keep mortar droppings , out of grout spaces. Head and bed joints shall be shoved at least 1 /2 inch into place. 3. When the grouting is stopped for one hour or longer, stop pouring of grout, one inch below top of uppermost unit. 4. Consolidate grout by mechanical vibration during placing before loss of plasticity in a manner to fill the grout space. Grout pours I Z' or less in height shall be mechanically vibrated or puddled. E. Low Lift Grouting: Grout in lifts not exceeding 16 inches and pours not exceeding 48 inches. Immediately vibrate grout spaces sufficiently to cause grout to flow into spaces between masonry units. F. High -Lift Grouting: Drop vertical reinforcing into position after laying of masonry wall is _ completed, but prior to grouting. 1. Provide clean out openings, no more than four inches high, at bottom of each reinforced grout cell; omit every other unit on one side of wall for collar joint grouting. Where individual elements are grouted, provide one or more opening for each element. a. Cleanouts: Of sufficient size and location to allow cleaning and inspection of grout spaces. VF 2001-59 04810-8 b. During work, use high pressure jet of water if necessary to remove excess mortar and clean grout space. c. Seal clean out after inspection, before grouting. 3. Do not place grout until mortar has set and cured sufficiently to prevent "blow -outs". Deliver grout in transit mix trucks. Add water so slump is near maximum without segregation. Pump grout from mixer into grout space as rapidly as practical and discard if not in place within 1-1 /2 hours after water is first added to batch. 3.09 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. Rigid Insulation: Install with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. l . Provide small pads of mortar or adhesive spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways on inside face. 2. Fit boards of insulation between joint reinforcement and other confining obstructions in cavity. Tightly butt edges both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry. 3. Wedge insulation from outside wythe with small fragments of masonry spaced two feet o.c. both ways. 3.10 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises: a. 1 /4 inch in 10 feet. b. 3/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum. c. 1 /2 inch in 40 feet. 2. For external comers, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: a. 1 /4 inch in any story 20 feet maximum. b. 1 /2 inch in 40 feet. B. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, stripes, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1. 1 /4 inch in any bay or 20 feet. 2. 1 /2 inch in 40 feet. C. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions of columns, walls and partitions: 1. 1 /2 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum. 2. 3/4 inch in 40 feet. 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Do such work with experienced mechanics in workmanlike manner. B. Do not cut and patch work which will tend to injure strength or appearance of finished work. C. Cutting of finished masonry for purpose of building -in members will not be allowed. V F 2001-59 04810-9 3.12 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Cut out any defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Take care to match color of exposed joints in masonry which will not be painted or otherwise covered. B. Daily Cleaning: Make every practical effort to keep masonry work as clean as possible during construction. At a minimum, dry brush masonry surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. C. Final Cleaning: l . Clean all mortar, dirt and construction film from masonry using stiff brush and water _ when mortar is at least 7 days and not more than 14 days old. Deviations from this procedure must be requested in writing from the Architect prior to starting masonry -- work. Should the use of commercial brick cleaners be requested, the written request must be accompanied by the following information: a. Description of cleaning solution proposed including manufacturer's name and descriptive literature. b. Description of cleaning procedure proposed. c. Written approval from the brick manufacturer for solution and procedures. d. Statement from masonry contractor assuming responsibility for any deleterious effects to masonry, such as staining, caused as a result of use of said products. 2. Remove efflorescence or other stain in accordance with brick manufacturers recommendations. D. No high pressure cleaning will be permitted. Pressure to be 100 psi maximum. r. E. Acid will not be permitted. — F. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning leave the work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prism Tests for Structural Masonry: 1. General: Compressive strength of masonry shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 1314. -� 2. Testing Agency: Prism tests will be conducted by a testing laboratory selected and paid by the Owner. Testing Agency shall be experienced in testing procedures of ASTM C1314. 3. Prisms: Materials, workmanship, mortar bedding, joint thickness and tooling for prisms shall conform to this Specification and shall be those in use on this Project. 4. Prisms shall contain no masonry grout. 5. Prism thickness: Some thickness of concrete block most commonly used for exterior walls, bearing walls and shear walls in the structure. 6. Height of prisms: At least twice the thickness and minimum 15 inches in height. If directed by Testing Agency cut block top and bottom courses of 8 inch thick prisms to limit prism height to 15 inches. 7. Testing Agency shall cure and test prisms in accordance with ASTM C 1314. VF 2001-59 04810-10 8. Tests: One initial set of 3 prisms shall be built by the mason and tested in accordance with ASTM C1314 at start of masonry construction. A minimum of one set of 3 prisms shall be built and tested for each 4000 square feet of wall area as masonry construction progresses. 9. Prisms shall be tested at the age of 28 days. 10. If average compressive strength of a set of 3 prisms fails to achieve strength at 28 days corresponding to specified f'm strength at 28 days, or if Contractor fails to provide required prism test sets, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, have prism samples taken from masonry work in place, the size, number and location to be approved by the Architect, to determine the in place strength of the masonry. Testing Agency shall test these prisms in accordance with ASTM C 1314. Should the tests reveal that the masonry does not meet the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace the entire section involved and/or make all corrections deemed necessary by the Architect. B. Mortar and Grout Tests for Structural Masonry: Tests will be conducted on materials used to construct first set of three prisms in 2 or 3 above. In event such tests fail to achieve required strength, additional testing may be required at discretion of Architect. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect projecting masonry liable to damage after setting by suitable planking well supported. Securely box jambs and sills of openings used for passage. B. Replacement: Replace masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 04810-11 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel framing and support members, pipe or tube columns and struts, complete with required braces, hangers, connection plates, welds, washers, bolts, nuts, shims, anchor bolts and templates. 2. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel trusses for canopy. 3. Base and cap plates. 4. Headed anchor studs. 5. Erecting, connecting, field welding, and adjusting for plumb and level. 6. Other structural steel components indicated on Drawings. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchors, Anchor Bolts, Bearing Plates, Angles etc. for Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories and Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control. 2. Quality Control System: Section 01450 Quality Control. D. Related Sections: 1. Bearing Plate Grouting: Section 03600 Grouts. 2. Steel Joists: Section 05213 Open Web Steel Joists. 3. Steel Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 4. Structural Steel Studs: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 5. Miscellaneous Metals and Loose Steel Lintels: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 6. Supports for Mechanical or Electrical Equipment: Division 15 and Division 16. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. 1. Design, Detailing, Fabrication and Erection: AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 1989 Edition. 2. Fabrication, Delivery and Erection: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Sections 5 through 7, latest edition. 3. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10. 4. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, latest edition endorsed by AISC. 5. AWS Dl.1 Structural Welding Code -Steel. VF 2001-59 05120-1 B. Comply with listed reference standards except as modified by Supplementary Requirements on the Drawings or by these specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: For the purposes of this Section, structural steel is defined as loadbearing structural metal framing excluding structural steel studs, steel joists, metal decking, metal stairs, and loose steel angle lintels built into masonry. B. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Steel surfaces and connections fabricated under this Section which will remain exposed and subject to normal view by the public or occupants of the completed structure shall be considered Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel as defined by the AISC Code of Standard Practice, and shall be subject r to all requirements for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel specified in Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop and erection drawings for all items under this Section. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 2. Shop drawings shall be original drawings produced by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. 3. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the following: a. Profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural steel members. b. Connections, attachments, and anchorages. c. Framed openings. d. Size and type of fasteners e. Cambers and clearances. -- 4. Checking: Shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy by fabricator and initialed by individual responsible for checking prior to submittal. ^ 5. Connections: _ a. Detail, fabricate and erect structural steel connections as indicated on Drawings. b. If Contractor elects to propose alternate connection details, substitution request shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01600. Shop drawings indicating alternate connection details without Architect's prior approval of -- substitution request will be rejected. c. Shop drawing submittal of alternate connection details shall be accompanied by calculations for each proposed alternate connection. Calculations shall bear the seal and signature of a professional engineer registered in the State of Colorado. 6. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights indicated on the Drawings are not readily available, secure Architect's acceptance of acceptable substitute sizes in time to prevent any construction delay due to such substitutions. B. Certificates: 1. Mill Test Reports: Upon request, furnish for all structural steel supplied. Furnish mill test reports and load test results of each lot of high strength bolts if requested by -' Architect. VF 2001-59 05120-2 ^ qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded. 17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening. 18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY. The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required Contract Security. 19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT. When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification. 20.0 TAXES. OWNER is exempt equipment to be in the Contract Conditions. 21.0 RETAINAGE. from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. 22.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS. Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions are available for review in the Purchasing and Risk 7/96 Section 00100 Page 7 2. Welder Certificates: Furnish for all welding operators used for fabrication and erection. C. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for the following: 1. Expansion bolts. 2. Adhesive anchors. D. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 prior to the submission of shop drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done by AWS certified welding operators only. B. Testing Agency: If directed by the Architect, weld tests will be made by an approved testing laboratory experienced in X-ray or ultrasonic testing of weld joints, selected and paid for by the Owner. C. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: 1. All fabricators and/or erectors for this project must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative the following qualifications in addition to any other requirements of the Project Manual. a. Business longevity under current business names of five years or more immediately prior to bidding this Project. b. Previous experience showing successfully completed projects of similar size and complexity as this project involving fabrication and erection of structural steel. Fabricators must show fabrication experience and erectors must show erection experience to be considered. 2. Any change of steel fabricator/erector required as a result of failure to meet the above requirements shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Regulatory Requirements: Expansion anchors and adhesive anchors shall have current published ICBO Evaluation Report indicating ICBO approval as acceptable method of construction under the UBC. Comply with all limitations on use of anchors stipulated in Evaluation Report. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery and Storage: I . Steel: Store members above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. 2. Other Materials: Store in weatheright and dry place, until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original unbroken package or container. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Materials to be Installed by Others: VF 2001-59 05120-3 l . Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast -in - place concrete construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast -in -place concrete operations. — 2. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES A. Wide Flange (W) Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50. B. Channels (C and MC), Angles (L), Bars and Plates: ASTMA36-94. C. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A53-93a, Type E or S, Grade B. D. , Hollow Structural Sections (TS and HSS): ASTM A500-93, Grade B. 2.02 FASTENERS, ANCHORS AND WELDING MATERIALS A. Bolts: ASTM A325. 1. Connection Types: a. Type N bearing -type with bolt threads included in shear plane. B. Nuts: ASTM A563. l . Grade and surface finish: Nuts for use with A325 or A490 bolts shall comply with requirements of RCSC Specification for bolt type required. C. Washers: ASTM, F436. Provide flat circular washers or square or rectangular beveled — washers as indicated or required for each bolted connection. _ D. Anchor Bolts: Size, type and length as shown on Drawings. Provide hex nuts and plain washers unless indicated otherwise. 1. Hooked Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. - a. Minimum hook projection: 3 inches unless indicated otherwise. b. Minimum threaded length: Match length of bolt projection. 2. Threaded Rod Anchors: ASTM A36. 3. Headed Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. 4. Minimum length of embedment: 8 inches unless indicated otherwise. 5. Minimum length of projection: 4 inches unless indicated otherwise, and sufficient to fully engage nut after installation of steel member being anchored and washer, plus allowance for normal installation tolerance. .. E. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type, complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A510 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM 8633. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel VF 2001-59 05120-4 anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. Kwik-Bolt II. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head Red Head Wedge Anchor. c. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Power -Bolt. d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, complete with required nuts, washers, epoxy or ester -based adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture provide threaded carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A36. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Architect, provide one of the following: a. Hilti Inc. HAS or HIT threaded rods. HVA or HIT HY-150 Adhesive Anchorage System for anchorage to concrete or stone. HIT HY-20 Adhesive system for anchorage to brick or concrete masonry. b. Powers Rawl Fastening Systems Straight Cut Anchor Rod with Power -Fast Cartridge System. c. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. G. Welding Materials: 1. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1. a. Strength level: In accordance with AISC and AWS specifications for base metals joined, weld type, and direction of applied load to weld. 2. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.1 or A 5.5. H. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors: Conform to ASTM A108. Studs shall be manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW, or approved substitute. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications. B. Connections: Provide connections as shown or noted on the Drawings. 1. Connections not shown or noted shall be standard framed beam connections as shown in AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 9th edition, pp. 4-9 through 4-31 inclusive, except that bearing -type bolts in slotted holes may not be used to transmit any component of stress in the direction of the slot. 2. All bolts shall be installed snug tight. 3. No combination of welds and bolts, or of tensioned and snug tight bolts, may be used to transmit stress in the some toying surface of any connection. VF 2001-59 05120-5 C. Provide anchors for columns, beams, channels, plates, etc., as indicated on Drawings and required. Locate as indicated on accepted shop drawings. D. Marking: Mark members in protected plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on setting diagrams. E. Finished Work: Finish work in accordance with accepted shop drawings. 1. Work: True and free from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for accommodation of other trades and do whatever is necessary to secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling not allowed on project without acceptance of Architect. G. Subassemblies with Milled Surfaces: Completely assemble and weld before milling. H. Welding: Comply with AISC Specifications and AWS D1.1. Welds not specified shall be 1 /4' continuous fillet but not less than AISC minimum based on thickness of parts joined. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain required lengths not allowed without prior acceptance of Architect unless indicated on Drawings. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors: Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached. Remove scale by grinding or sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to interfere with proper welding. 2.04 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Priming: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust, loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: ., a. Surfaces to be Concealed in the Completed Structure: SP-3 power tool cleaning. -- b. Surfaces to be Exposed in the Completed Structure: SP-6 commercial blast cleaning. �. c. Surfaces to Receive High Performance Coating: Thoroughly clean surfaces in -- accordance with SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3. 2. Paint Application: Shop coat fabricated items with shop paint in accordance with SSPC-PA-I. a. Shop Paint Thickness: 2.5 dry film mils. b. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete, surfaces to be field welded, and surfaces to receive welded studs. 3. Exterior Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Prime with Sherwin-Williams Kern Bond HS Universal Metal Primer (B50Z) or other similar high solids, rust inhibitive steel primer compatible with specified high performance coating system. See Section 09900. a. Shop Paint Thickness: 3.0 to 4.5 dry film mils. 4. Interior Exposed Structural Steel: One of the following. a. Tnemec Series 10 modified alkyd primer. V F 2001-59 05120-6 b. Society for Protective Coatings Specification SSPC Paint 25 lead and chromate free primer. 5. Concealed Interior Structural Steel: Shop painting not required. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Access: Architect, Structural Engineer and Independent Testing Agency shall be offered unlimited access to fabrication facility while work is in progress. Cooperate with Testing Agency to allow weld testing required on fabricator's premises. B. High Performance Coatings: A representative of the coatings manufacturer shall be present at the steel fabricator's to assure proper surface preparation and application of prime coat paint on steel to receive high performance coatings. Prime coat shall not be applied until surface preparation is inspected and approved by the representative of the coatings manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Embeds: Prior to start of erection of steel, check location of embedded plates and anchor bolts and report deviations from embedded plate and anchor bolt setting plan to General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Do not proceed until all unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. B. Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing as required to maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary guy lines as required to properly align members before bolting or welding. C. Field Measurements: Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erection: 1. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications and with additional requirements of this section. 2. Erection Safety: Sole responsibility of Contractor and structural steel erection subcontractor. Take precautions to ensure safety of personnel on site during erection of steel. Follow accepted industry standards and comply with all regulatory requirements. a. Provide and maintain barricades and temporary coverings over deck openings and edges until permanent construction at openings is installed. b. Schedule installation of projecting items that may present temporary tripping hazards as late as possible to minimize time of exposure. VF 2001-59 05120-7 c. Install temporary bolted and welded connections during erection sufficient to - hold members in place until permanent connections are completed. _ d. Take special precautions when working on slippery surfaces and in unfavorable weather conditions. - 3. Bearing Plates: Set base and bearing plates level and leveling plates level (± 1 /32") and at correct elevations (± 1 /16"). Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed. 4. Field Assembly: Assemble structural steel frames to lines and elevations indicated within specified erection tolerances. a. Align various members forming parts of complete frame or structure after being assembled and adjust accurately before fastening. b. Splice only where indicated on Drawings. _ c. Field correction of fabricated items by gas cutting not allowed. 5. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high strength bolts or field welding unless otherwise indicated. a. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. b. Tighten bolts to snug tight condition with nut rotation sufficient to bring all plies in joint into firm contact. c. Drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes not allowed. d. Make minor corrections by reaming. e. Do not correct serious defects in field but call to attention of Architect for decision as to method or procedure. He may order new holes drilled or the _ member rejected and replaced. 6. Temporary Bracing: Consider structural steel as non -self supporting steel frames. Provide suitable temporary bracing as necessary to maintain structural steel in proper position until permanently secured. Leave temporary bracing in place as required for safety. 7. Field Modification: Using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel not allowed without written acceptance of Architect. Be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in field. B. Allowable Erection Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice except maximum accumulative tolerance from all sources shall not exceed 1" on columns. 1. Bases of Columns: Located on established column lines within ±1 /8". ^ 2. Members Connecting to Columns: a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to supporting column working line shall not exceed +1 /16" from the location shown on Drawings. b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of supporting column shall not exceed +l /8" or -1 /4" from the elevation shown on Drawings. 3. Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and elevation with respect to the supporting member shall not exceed ±1/16" from the location and elevation shown on Drawings. 4. Leveling and Plumbing: Based on mean temperature of 70°F. 5. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. VF 2001-59 05120-8 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Section 01450. Cost of basic testing required by this Article shall be borne by Owner. Cost of additional testing required by this Article shall be borne by the installing contractor. B. Testing Agency's Inspector: Perform duties in such way that neither fabrication nor erection is unnecessarily delayed or impeded. Inspector will not recommend or prescribe method of repair of defect. C. Field Inspection: Include examination of erected steel for welding, proper fitting and tensioning of bolts and alignment. D. Welding and Materials 1. Inspection of welding will endeavor to assure that work conforms to specified requirements and will include: a. Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal arc welding and electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to requirements of this section. b. Ascertainment that specified welding procedure and specified welding sequence are followed without deviation, unless specific acceptance for change is obtained from Architect. c. Ascertainment that welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. Testing Agency will witness such qualification testing of welding operators and welders, if required. d. Ascertainment that fit up, joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and Contract Documents, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without acceptance of Architect. 2. The testing agency shall perform the following tests in the fabricator's shop: a. All Welds: 100%visual. b. The requirements for independent inspection by the testing agency in the fabricator's shop may be waived, provided the fabricator is an "approved fabricator' and satisfies all of the requirements of the 1997 Uniform Building Code, Section 1701.7. 3. Testing Agency will test all field welds, 100% visual. 4. Additional testing will be required if more than 10%, of tested welds are rejected, then additional 10% of welds will be tested using same method. This 10% additional testing process will be repeated until rejection rate drops below one in 10. 5. In addition, if defective welds are discovered, remaining uninspected welds will receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by Architect. 6. Testing Agency will have authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion weldment would not pass more detailed investigation. 7. All rejected welds shall be replaced and retested at the expense of the Contractor. 8. Reports by Testing Agency will contain, as minimum, adequate description of each weld tested, identifying mark of welder responsible for weld, critique of defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and statement regarding acceptability of weld tested, as judged by current AWS standards. VF 2001-59 05120-9 91 10. a. Reports shall be distributed as early as possible but not later than two work a - weeks after tests have been performed. b. Architect shall be notified by phone if, in judgment of inspector, test results require immediate comment. Bolted Connections: Testing Agency will visually inspect all bolted connections to ascertain that all bolts, nuts and required washers have been installed and are of proper type, that all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contact. Drilled -In Inserts: a. Self -Expanding Inserts: The testing agency will inspect self -expanding, drilled -in — inserts shown on the Structural Drawings as follows. 1) Prior to installation, the testing agency will determine that the installing contractor has the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the — receiving surface of required diameter and length. 2) All inserts will be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. 3) The testing agency will inspect all inserts for a snug tight condition. Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. If at any time the number of rejectable inserts exceeds 10% of the number of inserts tested at that level, all inserts at that level shall be tested by the same method and this 100% testing rate shall be continued on all succeeding levels until 10% or less of the inserts tested at a level are found to be rejectable. - b. Adhesive -Bonded Inserts: The testing agency will inspect adhesive -bonded, drilled -in inserts as follows: 1) All inserts will be visually inspected after installation to endeavor to ensure that the insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. The testing agency will inspect 207o of all inserts for a snug tight condition as defined for self -expanding inserts above. If at any time the number of rejectable inserts exceeds 10% of the number of inserts tested, all inserts shall be tested by the same method and this 100° — testing rate shall be continued until 10% or less of the inserts tested are found to be rejectable. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 05120-10 SECTION 05213 OPEN WEB STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. K-Series and KCS Series open web steel joists. 2. Bridging, anchors and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Testing: Section 01450 Quality Control 2. Quality Control System: Section 01450 Quality Control C. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel 2. Bearing Plates: Section 05120 Structural Steel 3. Roof Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck 4. Steel Studs and Light Gage Joists: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 5. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Standard Specifications of Steel Joist Institute (SJI). 2. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. 3. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, 1989 Edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. All shop drawings shall be original drawings prepared by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the contract documents. 1. Include sizes, spacing and location of joists, connections, locations of bearing and bearing details, bridging, reinforcing anchorages, cambers, loads and accessories. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. B. Calculations: 1. Submit design calculations for joists carrying non -uniform loads indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Currently certified according to AWS D1.1. VF 2001-59 05213-1 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Current designs checked by the Steel Joist Institute and found to conform to its standard specifications and load tables, and each plant _ inspected and certified by the Steel Joist Institute to manufacture Standard Open Web Joists (K-Series). C. Testing Agency: Field testing and inspection will be made by accepted testing laboratory. See Sections 01450 and 05120. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. — B. Store metal joists at project site on platforms, skids or other supports and upright to — prevent twisting. C. Inspect joists during delivery. Repair or replace damaged joists as directed by Architect. D. Keep joists free from dirt and mud during storage and erection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 JOISTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Canam Steel Corporation. 2. Vulcraft Divisions of Nucor Corporation. 3. SMI Joist Company. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Fabrication: Fabricate joists to conform to SJI Standard Specifications. Provide series, sizes, and lengths as indicated on drawings. 1. Sloped end bearings: Provide beveled ends or sloped shoes where differential — slope at bearing exceeds 1 /4 inch in 12 inches. 2. K-Series bearing ends: 2-1/2 inches unless indicated otherwise. C. Design Yield Strength: 36,000 psi minimum, 50,000 psi maximum. 1. K-Series chords: 50,000 psi. D. Shop Painting: Dip, spray or paint joists and bridging with one coat red oxide paint meeting minimum requirements of SSPC Paint Specification No. 15-68T, Type 1. E. Joist Bridging: 1. Provide standard horizontal and diagonal bridging and number of rows in accordance with SJI standard specifications unless otherwise indicated. - 2. Provide diagonal bridging at discontinuous ends of bottom chord horizontal _. bridging. 3. Bridging row nearest joist midspon shall be bolted diagonal bridging for joists 40 feet and longer and where span of joist exceeds the erection stability span as indicated in the SJI standard load tables. VF 2001-59 05213-2 SECTION 00300 BID FORM 4. Wind uplift: Provide additional row of bridging near first bottom chord panel point from each end where design wind uplift exceeds design roof dead load. Accessories: Provide accessories as required and as indicated. G. Extended Ends and Top Chord Extensions: Design for load carrying capacity equal to joists unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work including height and location of bearing surfaces before beginning installation. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. C. Verification: Verify that joists are undamaged and ready for erection. Repair or replace damaged or twisted joists. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. 3.03 ERECTION A. General: Handle and erect joists in conformance with SJI Standard Specifications and in the exact locations indicated on drawings. Do not drop or rack to cause permanent twist in joists. Joists dropped or damaged during erection are subject to rejection. B. Welding: Field weld in compliance with SJI and AWS specifications. No welding to joist web members in the field will be allowed. C. Minimum Bearing: Extend ends of joists minimum four inches over concrete or masonry supports unless indicated otherwise and anchor to steel bearing plate. Bear joists minimum 2-1/2" on steel supports. D. Securing Joists at Bearing 1. Secure joists in accordance with SJI standard specifications and as required for erection stability and construction safety. Complete bearing connections after joists are straightened and plumbed and all bridging and bracing is installed and anchored. 2. Welding: Unless noted otherwise, weld joists to steel bearing. Weld two sides of joist bearing ends with two 3/16 inch by 1'/2 inch long fillet welds. 3. Bolting: Bolt joists to steel supports at column lines to provide lateral stability during construction to steel frames where columns are not framed in at least two directions VF 2001-59 05213-3 with structural steel members and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. Install bolts snug tight. Provide two 1 /2 inch diameter bolts at each joist end. E. Joist Bridging: - 1. Adjustment of bridging location will be permitted for clearance of ducts, mechanical equipment, recessed lighting fixtures, etc. subject to acceptance of Architect. 2. Complete bridging and sidewall anchors before any loads are applied. 3. Install lateral bracing sequentially after each individual joist is placed. 4. Do not slacken or release hoisting cables until bolted diagonal bridging required for erection stability has been completely installed. F. Suspended Loads: General Contractor shall coordinate hanging of equipment from joists. All suspended equipment loads shall be hung from joists at panel points or properly stiffened points on joist chord. 3.04 TOUCH-UP Touch-up damaged areas of prime coat. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Sections 01450 and 05120. B. Testing Agency: Will visually inspect to verify that joists and joist girders have been properly installed. 1. inspection: Testing agency will test all field welds; 100% visual. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 05213-4 SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel roof deck. 2. Steel deck accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 2. Steel Joists: Section 05213 Open Web Steel Joists. 3. Structural Steel Studs and C Joists: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 4. Steel Opening Frames in Metal Deck Roofs: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 5. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Materials, Design, and Erection: Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution. 2. Materials and Computation of Structural Properties: AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. 3. Welding: ANSI/AWSD1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit two copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature and installation instructions for each product specified under this Section. Include manufacturers certification as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. Furnish a copy of each instruction to the installer. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and erection drawings as specified under Section 01330. 1. Indicate decking plan, deck profile, dimensions, gages, supports, projections, openings and reinforcement, finishes, applicable details and accessories, deck fastening types and spacings. 2. All shop drawings shall be original drawings prepared by the subcontractor or supplier and shall not be reproductions of the Contract Documents. 3. Coordinate with structural steel and steel joist shop drawings to establish consistent deck support layout dimensions. V F 2001-59 05310-1 D. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01600. Steel deck design is based on manufacturers and deck types specified in this Section and as indicated on the Structural Drawings. _ Suppliers submitting substitute products of other acceptable manufacturers shall certify that proposed product is equal or better than the specified product(s) in load carrying capacity for indicated spans, stiffness, and in diaphragm shear resistance for the fastening types and spacings indicated, and shall attach product data corroborating such certification to the substitution request. If, in the judgement of the Structural Engineer and the Architect, the proposed product does not have equal or better y structural capacities to that specified, the supplier may resubmit his substitution request with a thicker gage of decking, an increase in fastening, or both, as may be required to satisfy the Structural Engineer and the Architect that the structural design requirements have been satisfied. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Continuously engaged in production of metal decking for a period of at least 10 years. 2. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience in erection of metal — decking for projects of similar size and difficulty. Subject to approval of Owner. 3. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently qualified according to AWS D1.3. B. Regulatory Requirements: All steel deck and mechanical fasteners supplied under this Section shall have current published ICBO Evaluation Report indicating ICBO approval as acceptable method of construction under the UBC. Comply with all limitations on use of deck and fasteners stipulated in Evaluation Report. C. Testing Agency: Testing and inspection will be made by an approved testing laboratory as specified in Section 01450 Quality Control. Contractor shall furnish testing agency _ access to work, facilities and incidental labor required for testing and inspection. Retention by the Owner of an independent testing agency shall in no way relieve the -• Contractor of responsibility for performing all work in accordance with the contract requirements. �- 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage and handling. ' B. Inspection: Inspect metal deck upon delivery to site. Reject and obtain new deck meeting these Specifications as required to replace damaged deck. — C. Storage: 1. Store metal deck at site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports with one _ end elevated for drainage. Cover deck until needed with waterproof covering, vented to prevent condensation. — 2. Check deck bundles periodically for tightness. Retighten as necessary to prevent wind loosening sheets. VF 2001-59 05310-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Steel Deck: 1. Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corporation. 2. Verco Manufacturing Company. 3. Tomen Building Components, Inc. 4. Wheeling Corrugating Company. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Mechanical Fasteners for Steel Deck: 1. ITW Buildex. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 STEEL ROOF DECK A. Steel for Roof Deck Units: Conform to Section A3 of the AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members. 1. Prime Painted Sheet Steel: ASTM A61 1, Grade C, D or E. 2. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi. B. Roof Deck: 1. Type B: Wide Rib Deck Type WR as defined by SDI. 1-1/2 inch depth. 2. Canopy Roof Deck Type: Deep Rib Deck Type 3DR as defined by SDI. 3 inch depth. 3. Side Seam Type: Nestable for screwed side seam fastening. 4. Manufacturer and Type: Vulcraft. Type as indicated on Structural Drawings. 5. Substitutions: See Paragraph 1.03D. C. Gages: As indicated on Drawings. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked on, rust inhibitive paint applied to chemically cleaned, phosphate coated surface. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Accessory Standard: Provide accessories of types required by SDI specifications. B. Roof Deck Accessories: Provide following accessories as indicated or as required by SDI specifications. 1. Filler Sheets: 20 gage minimum, galvanized units to match deck profile and depth. 7 inch minimum width. 2. Inside or Outside Metal Closures: Fabricate of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel of some quality as deck units. Match deck depth. Bend to provide tight fitting closures at open ends and sides of decking. 3. Ridge and Valley Plates: 20 gage minimum, galvanized sheets. Bend to fit indicated roof slopes. Length of each leg adequate to lap deck ribs minimum one inch each side. 4. Flat Plates: 20 gage minimum, galvanized sheets. 9 inch minimum width. Provide at changes of deck direction. VF2001-59 05310-3 C. Fasteners: 1. Side Lap Fasteners: No. 10 self drilling TEK screws. 2.04 FABRICATION - A. Length of Units: Fabricate deck units in length to span three or more spacings unless — indicated otherwise. with flush, telescoped or nested 2" end laps and nested side laps. l . Do not fabricate until final approval of structural steel, steel joist, and steel deck shop drawings have been obtained. _ 2. Fabricate lengths to provide end bearing lengths over supports indicated, and in no case less than minimum 1-1/2 inches bearing. 3. Roof Deck: Fabricate lengths to provide minimum 2 inch lap at end joints, unless indicated otherwise. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Panel Length: Plus or minus''/] inch. 2. Thickness: Not less than 95 percent of design thickness. 3. Panel Cover Width: Minus 3/8 inch, plus'/4 inch. 4. Panel Camber: Maximum '/4 inch in 10 foot length. 5. Panel Sweep: Maximum '/4 inch in 10 foot length. 6. Panel End Out of Square: Maximum 1 /8 inch per foot of panel width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Existing Conditions: Before beginning installation, examine supporting members for correct layout. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 DECK INSTALLATION IN GENERAL — A. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, SDI specifications, and accepted shop drawings. B. Placing Deck Units: Position deck units on supporting members and adjust to final position with ends bearing on support and accurately aligned end to end before being permanently fastened. 1. Minimum End Bearing: 1-1/2 inches unless indicated otherwise. 2. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. " 3. Place deck units flat and square, and secure to adjacent framing without warp or _ deflection. C. Fastening Deck Units to Supports: Secure to supporting members as indicated on — Drawings. 1. Welds: Comply with ANSI/AWS D1.3. _ VF 2001-59 05310-4 a. Employ only skilled, certified welding operators. b. Welding Procedures and Material Selection: Responsibility of installer. Exercise care in the selection of electrodes and amperage to provide a positive weld and to prevent high amperage blow holes. c. Welds for Deck Units with Thickness Equal to or Greater Than 22 Gage: 5/8 inch minimum visible diameter arc spot puddle welds with attachment pattern indicated on Drawings. d. Welds for Deck Units with Thickness Less Than 22 Gage: Weld deck through minimum 16 gage welding washers with nominal 3/8 inch hole. Weld pattern as indicated on Drawings. D. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit deck units and accessories around openings and projections through decking. Make cuts neat, square and trim. Cut openings true to dimensions using metal saws, drills or shears. Db not torch cut. E. Reinforcement at Openings: 1. Provide reinforcing for openings through metal deck as indicated on drawings. 2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on drawings, such as those required for vents, risers, conduits, etc. shall be cut and reinforced, if necessary, by trade requiring opening. 3.03 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. End Joints: Provide roof deck end laps of not less than 2 inches. B. Roof Deck Fastening to Supports: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, secure to supporting members at 12 inches on center at supports. C. Fastening Deck Unit Side Seams: Fasten side laps as indicated on Drawings. 1. Spacing: As indicated. 2. Fastening Method: Self -drilling screws. D. Closure Strips: Install at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. 1. Install flexible closure strips in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Roof Insulation Support: Provide metal closure srrips for support of roof insulation adjacent to edges and openings. Fastening Roof Deck Accessories: Fasten to supporting members by arc spot welds or self drilling screws at 12 inches maximum intervals unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Inspect deck for tears, dents, or other damage. 1. Roof Deck: Inspect roof deck before placement of roof insulation and roof covering. 2. Need for repair of damaged deck shall be determined by Architect. V F 2001-59 05310-5 B. Inspect supporting structure for damage due to deck welding operations. Repair or replacement of supporting structural members burned through or otherwise damaged by deck welding shall be determined by the Architect. The cost of repair or replacement shall be the responsibility of the deck installer. C. Touch-up Painting: Touch-up galvanized finishes and painted finishes on floor decking. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Deck Units: 1. Do not use for storage or as working platform until permanently secured in position. 2. Do not damage by use as runway, storage of materials or subsequent work. Do not allow construction loads which exceed safe carrying capacity of deck. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: See Sections 01450 and 05120. B. Testing Agency: Will visually inspect deck to verify that material is in acceptable condition and has been properly installed. 1. Inspection: Include deck welds and side lap connections. END OF SECTION VF2001-59 05310-6 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I . Exterior wall steel studs and other locations where "structural studs" are indicated. 2. Channel tracks and bracing. 3. Metal joist framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 2. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 3. Drywall Partition Studs: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. 2. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 3. ASTM C955-96a Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Erection Drawings: Submit erection drawings as required by Section 01330 Submittal Procedures for all metal stud and joist systems defined on the Structural Drawings. 1. Indicate all member sizes including special framing at openings. a. Subcontractor shall design head lintels at openings. b. Submit jamb and head framing at openings to Structural Engineer for review. 2. Detail all connections and attachment to supporting structure including connectors, fasteners and accessories. Indicate all welds using standard AWS symbols. B. Product Data: Prior to starting erection of studs, submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials to be used with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: Minimum three years experience in erection of cold formed metal framing for projects of similar size and difficulty. B. Welder Qualifications: Currently qualified in accordance with AWS D1.3. VF 2001-59 05400-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Studco. 2. Cemco. 3. Dale/Incor. 4. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 5. Marino Industries Corp. 6. Unimast, Inc. 7. Western Metal Lath Co. 8. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Steel Mechanical Properties: Conform to requirements of AISI Specification, Section A3. 1. Minimum yield point for material 14 gage to 10 gage in thickness: 50,000 psi. " 2. Minimum yield point for material 16 gage and less in thickness: 33,000 psi. C. Steel Sectional Properties and Design: Computed in accordance with AISI Specification. D. Steel Studs, Tracks, Bracing, Bridging and Related Metal: ASTM C955. 1. Provide type and size of structural studs, track, bridging, and fasteners as indicated _ on Drawings and specified in this section. 2. Studs: Sizes and locations as indicated on Drawings. -- a. Head and Sill Track and Header Members: Unpunched track, same gage as studs or one gage heavier. b. Minimum flange Width: 1-5/8 inch. c. Provide two studs at opening jambs. 3. Stud Bridging: 16 gage channel bridging where not sheathed both sides. — 4. Slip Clips: See Structural Drawings. E. Cold Formed Steel Joists and Related Metal: l . Provide type and size of joist framing members, bridging, and fasteners as indicated on drawings and specified in this section. `- 2. Joists: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Joist Web Stiffeners: Match joist size and gage. F. Finish: Corrosion resistant galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A653, G60 minimum. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Self -Drilling, Self -Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A90, hot -dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated; drilled expansion bolts; screws with sleeves. 2.03 WELDING A. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.3. VF 2001-59 05400-2 SECTION 00300 BID FORM • PROJECT: TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684 Place_ Purchasing Division Date M,.rch 22 2002 1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated March 22, 2002 and subject to all conditions thereof, the undersigned Drahota Construction Co. a "(Corporation, Limited Liability Company, Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor)" authorized to do business in the State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules. 2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other ,,. person or persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned. 3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum of 57 of Total Bid, See Attached ($ Instructions to Bidders. in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and - 4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and "a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date when the written .notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder Proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment bonds is as follows: Employers Mutual Casualty Company P.O. Box 441098, Aurora, 5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list. 6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents. 7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. 1 through 2 7/96 Section 00300 Page 1 B. Welding Electrodes: Conform to SMAW AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E60XX or E70XX. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. General: Install framing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Framing may be prefabricated into panels at Contractor's option. B. Connections: 1. At Structural Steel: Welded, except as noted otherwise. 2. Other: Unless otherwise indicated, screwed. C. Wall Framing: 1. Track: a. Anchor stud track to concrete as noted on Drawings. b. Anchor stud deflection track to structural steel with power driven or powder actuated fasteners at 24 inches maximum spacing. 2. Studs: a. Place studs 16" on center and not more than 2" from abutting walls and at each side of openings. b. Connect studs to tracks with two # 10 TEK screws. c. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Double studs at door, window and sidelite jambs. d. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. e. Provide deflection allowance below supported horizontal building framing in ceiling or head track for non -loading -bearing framing. Remove temporary top track to deflection track screws at time of sheathing installation. f. Erect load -bearing studs one piece full length. g. Splicing or wire tying of framing components is not permitted. h. Refer to Drawings for location of partitions extended to ceiling only and partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. D. Joists: Set roof or ceiling joists parallel and level with end bearing, lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. Weld all joints and connections in accordance with drawings and manufacturer's recommendations. E. Bridging and Diagonal Bracing: Install bridging and bracing of types and in locations indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, attach all bridging and diagonal bracing by welding capable of resisting a force of 500lbs. minimum. Miscellaneous Framing and Furring: Provide for special framing at recesses, specialty items and as required. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 05400-3 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Steel railings. 2. Steel ladders including roof ladder. 3 Gratings. 4 Overhead door steel frames. 5. Steel opening frames in metal deck floors and roofs. 6. Steel support for counters. 7. All other miscellaneous angles, channels, tubes and plates as indicated and required. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchor bolts and weld plates for anchoring metal fabrications installed under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories and Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 2. Steel angle lintels installed under Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 3. Steel bollards installed under Section 02750 Rigid Pavement. C. Related Sections: l . Structural Steel and Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Trusses for Canopy: Section 05120 Structural Steel. 2. Field Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Detailing, Fabrication and Erection of Steel: AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 1989 Edition. 2. Fabrication, Delivery and Erection of Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 1992 Edition, Sections 5 through 7. 3. Fabrication, Erection, and Dimensional Tolerances for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, Section 10. 4. Welding: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code -Steel. 5. Painting: SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1 Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Steel surfaces and connections fabricated under this Section which will remain exposed and subject to normal view by the public or occupants of the completed structure shall be considered Architecturally Exposed VF 2001-59 05500-1 Structural Steel as defined by the AISC Code of Standard Practice, and shall be subject to all requirements for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel specified in Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals in General: Comply with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit product data for all manufactured stock items specified under this , Section, including the following. 1. Gratings. - C. Shop Drawings: Submit for all custom fabricated items under this Section. Include steel .. lintels and steel ladders and railings. 1. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the following: a. Profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of members. b. Connections, attachments, and anchorages. _. c. Size and type of fasteners d. Finishes, coatings and shop painting. �. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable. 3. Indicate weld lengths and sizes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by certified welding operators currently qualified in accordance with the testing procedures of AWS D1.1 for the weld types and positions required for the fabrications and installations indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600 1. Store metals above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports. Protect metals from corrosion. 2. Store other materials in weatherfight and dry place, until ready for use. B. Materials to be Installed by Others: 1. Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast -in - place concrete or masonry construction to project site in time to be installed before start of cast -in -place concrete operations and masonry work. 2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Bars and Plates: ASTM AX B. Steel Pipe and Tubing: ASTM A53, Grade B, or A500, Grade B, minimum wall thickness 1 I gage. _ VF 2001-59 05500-2 C. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Bolts: ASTM A307. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563. 3. Washers: ASTM F436. 4. Hooked Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rod Anchors: ASTM A36. D. Welding Materials for Steel 1. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1. a. Strength level: In accordance with AISC and AWS specifications for base metals joined, weld type, and direction of applied load to weld. 2. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.1 or A 5.5. E. Headed Anchor Stud Connectors: Conform to ASTM A108. Studs shall be manufactured by Nelson Division of TRW, or approved substitute. 2.02 PIPE BOLLARDS A. Bollards: ASTM A53, Grade B Steel Pipe, Extra Strong. 1. Concrete Base and Fill: Supplied under Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete and installed with concrete rounded at top under Division 2 Site Construction. 2. Size, Height and Embedment: As indicated on Drawings. 2.03 STEEL LINTELS A. Steel Lintels: All masonry openings 16" in width and over shall have lintels. Provide loose steel lintels except where masonry lintels are indicated on Drawings. 1. Sizes and Bearing Lengths: See Lintel Schedule on Structural Drawings. 2. Weld or bolt members together where indicated to form complete assembly. Where welds will be exposed in the completed installation, provide continuous welds and grind flush. 3. Field Finish: Painted under Section 09900. B. Masonry Lintels: See Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2.04 STEEL OPENING FRAMES A. Steel Opening Frames: Support all openings in metal roof deck greater than 19' in any direction on all four sides by a steel frame spanning between steel joists, beams, purlins or other structural deck supports. 1. Steel Member Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Weld members as indicated to form complete and rigid assembly. 3. Coordinate with Section 05120 Structural Steel and Section 05213 Open Web Steel Joists. Fabricate members based on dimensions indicated on structural steel and steel joist shop drawings that have been approved for construction. Provide adequate length to allow for normal sweep and installation tolerances of supporting members. 4. Steel Opening Frames for Mechanical Units: Coordinate with Division 15 Mechanical. Do not fabricate frames until final mechanical unit size and configuration has been provided. VF 2001-59 05500-3 2.05 GRATINGS A. Roof Ladder Grating: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: - a. Reliance Steel Products, Co. b. IKG Industries (Irving Grating) c. McNichols Company. d. Approved Substitute. - 2. Type: McNichols Grip Strut or accepted substitute, span as indicated on Drawings. .- Design by manufacturer to carry 100 psf live load. 3. Finish: Galvanized for field painting under section 09900. `- 4. Fastening Devices: Universal clips or saddle clips. 5. Supports: Provide support angles under bearing bars if required. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate custom metal fabrications as indicated, scheduled or listed in Article 1.01. 1. Fabricate in accordance with details and accepted shop drawings. -- 2. Provide miscellaneous items of metal work indicated or as necessary to complete work. 3. Materials: New stock of types and sizes indicated. _ 4. Make cuts clean and sharp with wire edges ground smooth. Provide straight, rigid, and tight work, free from defects. 5. Close exposed ends of steel pipe or tubing with welded caps. 6. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 7. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. 8. Fit and shop assemble, in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 9. Exposed mechanical fastenings shall be flush, countersunk screws or bolts, unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise. 10. Make exposed joints flush butt -type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened. 11. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified or detailed. 12. Welding: AWS D1.1. Miter and cope intersections and weld all around. Remove .. splatter, grind exposed welds to blend and contour surfaces to match those adjacent. 13. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not available, secure Architect's acceptance of suitable sizes prior to proceeding. B. Steel Railings: 1. Material: 1-1/2" o.d. round pipe unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fabricate to lines, levels and patterns as indicated. 3. Joints: Cut, miter and weld all joints. Fill and grind smooth. 4. Insert into steel sleeves or epoxy mortar at Contractor's option. C. Steel Ladders: 1. Comply with ANSI 14.3. VF 2001-59 05500-4 2. Provide 1 /2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges spaced 18" apart. Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs with non -slip finish, spaced 12" o.c. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points not over 5' o.c. with welded steel brackets with minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs. Extend rails 42" above top rung or maximum surrounding structure allows and return rails to wall. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate. D. Steel Section Door Frames: Fabricate of shapes indicated, fully welded, uniform, square and true. Grind exposed welds smooth. Securely and rigidly anchor to masonry and concrete as indicated. 2.07 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Priming: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust, loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: a. Surfaces to be Concealed in the Completed Structure: SP-3 power tool cleaning. b. Surfaces to be Exposed in the Completed Structure: SP-6 commercial blast cleaning. 2. Paint Application: Shop coat fabricated items with shop paint in accordance with SSPC-PA-I. a. Omit shop paint on surfaces to be enclosed in concrete and surfaces to be field welded. b. Shop Paint Thickness: 2.5 dry film mils. 3. Primer: One of the following. a. Tnemec Series 10 modified alkyd primer. b. Society for Protective Coatings Specification SSPC Paint 25 lead and chromate free primer. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A653, G90 Class minimum. Provide corrosion resistant galvanized coating on indicated or specified steel items after fabrication and shop assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Weldor bolt items securely in place or otherwise fasten as indicated on the Drawings or accepted shop drawings. Include items indicated, scheduled or listed in Article 1.01. B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects. C. Field Welds: Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Painted Fabrications: Grind smooth and touch up with compatible primer. 2. Galvanized Fabrications: After installation, grind and touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged galvanized surfaces. Use a primer recommended for galvanized surfaces. VF 2001-59 05500-5 D Drilled -In Anchors and Inserts: Install drilled -in anchors and inserts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. 1. Adhesive Anchors: Thoroughly clean drill hole of all debris and drill dust prior to installation of insert and adhesive. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until material has achieved full design strength. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Repair of Defective Work: Remove stained or otherwise defective work. Replace with new material. B. Touch -Up Painting: 1. Following grinding of field welded connections to exposed steel work, field apply primer of some type and thickness as shop primer. 2. Touch up all primer removed or damaged during erection. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 05500-6 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood sheathing panels. 2. Miscellaneous blocking. 3. Rough hardware. 4. Blocking in walls for support of toilet and shower accessories, door stops, wall cabinets and other accessory items. 5. Weather resistant barrier. 6. All other rough carpentry work not specified elsewhere. B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: l . Anchors Cast into Concrete or Masonry for Anchorage of Wood: Install under Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories or Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Related Sections: 1. Finish Carpentry: Section 06200. 2. Wood Door Frames, Custom Cabinets and Reception Desk: Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Blockouts: Division 15 Mechanical and Division 16 Electrical 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards. See Section 01423. 1. Lumber: Comply with Grading Rules for Lumber, latest edition, as published by Western Wood Products Association. 2. Plywood: Comply with the following. a. APA Plywood Design Specification PDS 1986. b. US Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 1-95 Construction and Industrial Plywood. 3. Performance Rated Wood Sheathing Panels: Comply with the following. a. APA PRP-108 Performance Standards and Policies for Structural - Use Panels. b. US Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 2-92 Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade Stamps: 1. Lumber: Each piece shall be WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped. VF 2001-59 06100-1 2. Wood Sheathing: Each panel shall be identified with the grade trademark of the APA. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Stack all materials minimum of 6 above ground to ensure proper ventilation and cover with waterproofing covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General Requirements: Sound, thoroughly seasoned, surfaced four sides, well — manufactured and free from warp not correctable by bridging, blocking or nailing. l . Moisture Content: Maximum of 19%. B. Blocking and Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: Douglas Fir -Larch or Hem -Fir, Standard Grade or Better. 1. Blocking in Contact with Roofing Membrane: Pressure treated with wood salt -- preservative. Use Koppers Wolmanized pressure -treated wood or other similar material. Pentachlorophenol or creosote is not acceptable. 2. Interior Blocking: Fire retardant treated with chloride salts. _ 2.02 SHEATHING A. Roof Sheathing: APA Rated OSB Sheathing EXP 1 or APA C-D plywood, interior with exterior glue. Thickness and roof span rating as indicated. B. Wall Sheathing: APA Rated OSB Sheathing EXP 1 or APA plywood CD interior with exterior glue. Thickness and span rating as indicated. 2.03 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Timber Engineering Co. 2. Simpson Strong -Tie Co. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. General: Provide with nails and bolts according to manufacturer's requirements. ^ C. Types: As indicated on Drawings. 2.04 ROUGH HARDWARE ^ A. General: Provide necessary bolts, screws, nails, clips, plates, straps, hangers, etc. necessary for completion of rough carpentry. Provide correct material of proper size and strength for purpose intended conforming to Specifications, Drawings and applicable building codes. Supply anchors to be cast into concrete and masonry for anchorage of wood for installation under other Sections. VF 2001-59 06100-2 B. Nails: Common wire nail length and diameters. Do not use box nails. 1. Threaded hardened steel nails may be substituted for common size nails of corresponding size. 2. Exterior Applications: Provide nails hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. C. Bolts and Lag Screws: common bolts and screws, ASTM A307. Exterior shall be hot dip galvanized. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, with suitable nuts and plain washers unless otherwise indicated. 5/8 inch diameter by 9 inch, hooked, unless otherwise indicated. E. Staples: Allowed for weather resistant barrier only. F. Screws: Corrosion resistant. 2.05 POWDER DRIVEN ANCHORS A. Fasteners: Ramset or equivalent low or standard velocity driven fasteners, minimum 1 /8" shank diameter. Length as required to penetrate steel or wood member and 1-1 /4" into concrete or masonry. 2.06 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER ASTM D266-95, No. 30 asphalt -saturated organic felt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry are prepared to required grades and dimensions. 3.02 DIMENSION LUMBER INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Perform in substantial manner consistent with accepted standards of carpentry trade. 2. Framing: Erect plumb, level and true and rigidly anchor in place. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels. 3. Nail or spike members in accordance with UBC and General Structural Notes on drawings. 4. Framing: 16" o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 5. Shims: Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use steel shims with full bearing on masonry or concrete. 6. Metal Framing Anchors: Install where required for proper connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, bolt plates firmly to concrete or masonry with 3/9' x 12" (3" horizontal leg) anchor bolts, 2'-0" o.c. or use powder -actuated fastening system. V F 2001-59 06100-3 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00410Bid Bond 00420Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 00430Schedule of Subcontractors Size and Spacing: Accepted by Architect. 3.03 SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Roof Sheathing: l . Install panels continuous over two or more spans with face grain perpendicular to -- joists and all end joints supported. Stagger ends of adjacent sheets 4'-0" where possible. - 2. Screw at 6" o.c. along all edges and 12" o.c. along all intermediate supports unless indicated otherwise. _ 3. Panel Edge Clips: Install at sheathing joints without tongue -and -groove or edge blocking. Provide at 16 inches on center maximum. B. Wall Sheathing: Install panels vertically with all edges supported. Screw 6" o.c. along all edges and 10" o.c. along all intermediate supports unless indicated otherwise. 3.04 WOOD BLOCKING AND FRAMING REQUIRED FOR WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. General: Cooperate with other trades. Provide required grounds, blocking, wood backing and framing. Perform necessary cutting and patching of rough carpentry work as required. B. Interior Blocking: Install blocking of size required for support of toilet accessories, wall - mounted door stops, wall cabinets and other wall -mounted accessory items. Set true to —. line, level or plumb well secured in stud wall and flush with back of drywall or other wall finish. C. Exterior Blocking: 1. Install blocking of size required for exterior wall finish materials, exterior handrails, -- exterior wall mounted equipment, roof edge details and other locations as indicated. 2. Roof Blocking: Anchor at 3 feet o.c. to resist force of 75 lbs. per lineal foot. 3.05 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER INSTALLATION - A. Staple to wood sheathing as indicated. B. Apply to sheathing from bottom to top of wall 1. Laps: a. Hortzontal Joints: 2 inches minimum b. Vertical Joints: 6 inches minimum ` END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 06100-4 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard pattern wood trim, sills, and other millwork. B. Related Sections: 1. Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Wood Door Frames, Counters, Cabinets and Casework: Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork. 3. Interior Wood Doors: Section 08210 Wood Doors. 4. Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with Custom Grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. l . Include conformance to required reference standard. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Humidity: Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and sufficiently dry to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content. Maintain wood material storage area relative humidity at between 25 percent and 55 percent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR MATERIALS A. General Requirements for Interior Wood Materials: 1. Solid Stock Lumber Grade: In accordance with AWI rules for Custom Grade construction with specified finish unless indicated otherwise. 2. Moisture Content: Minimum 5 percent, maximum 10 percent at delivery. B. Wood Trim, Wood Sills and Moulding Material: Maple, select, kiln -dried, clear. Mill as indicated. VF 2001-59 06200-1 Grade: AWI Grade I. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Blocking: Ensure proper blocking provided under Section 06100. 3. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. - 3.02 INTERIOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION A. General: All installations AWI Custom Grade unless otherwise specified. M B. Interior Finish: 1. Lengths: Wherever possible, provide single piece for each length of finish. Butt joints not allowed except for long pieces or room molds which may be in two or more sections. When butt joints are necessary, bevel joints. 2. General: Install interior finish level, plumb and true. 3. Securing: Tightly secure to bracing with nails, screws, glue, etc. Blind nail wherever possible. Where surface nailing is necessary, use finish nails carefully set with nail punch. 4. Trim Finishing Against Walls or Ceiling: Mill with extra width and scribe to wall or ceiling at job. — 5. Edges: Except where molded, mill trim with perfectly square edges. After erection, slightly round exposed edges by sanding as directed. 6. Interior Finish: Hand smooth ready for finish under Section 09902 free from machine or tool marks or any roughness. 7. Replacement: Replace any interior finish bearing hammer marks, splits, cracks, mars or defects of any nature. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 06200-2 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Custom standing and running trim. 2. Lavatory counters. 3. Custom cabinets and countertops. 4. Cabinet and shelf hardware. 5. Custom wood door frames. 6. Reception desk. B. Related Sections: l . Interior Standard Pattern Wood Trim: Section 06200 Finish Carpentry. 2. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 3. Door Hardware: Section 08710. 4. Resilient Base: Section 09650 Resilient Flooring. 5. Carpet Base: Section 09680 Carpet. 6. Job Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 7. Plumbing Fixtures: Division 15 Mechanical. 8. Electrical Service to Cabinet Fixtures: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. a. Comply with Custom Grade if not otherwise specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all countertop surfacing materials, countertop setting and grouting materials, shelving and shelving hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Desks, Cabinets and Casework: Submit dimensioned plans, elevations, component profiles and large scale details for each casework item. a. Indicated materials, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, location of hardware, and schedule of finishes for each casework item. V F 2001-59 06400-1 D. Samples: 1. Material Samples: a. Submit sample of each type and finish of cabinet and shelf hardware for approval before ordering hardware. b. Submit samples of plastic laminate for color selection or verification. c. Wood Veneer: 24 inch by 24 inch stepped finish sample. 2. Casework Sample: Submit three (3) 12" x 12" finished sample panels of each type and species of finish for approval as indicated. Remake panel as required. " E. Certificates: The manufacturer/fabricator shall furnish a certificate indicating that solid stock lumber used in architectural woodwork did not exceed 10 percent moisture - content at time of fabrication. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Humidity: Do not deliver material until building or storage area is enclosed and u sufficiently dry to prevent damage from excessive changes in moisture content. Maintain wood material storage area relative humidity at between 25 percent and 55 percent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID STOCK AND PANEL MATERIALS A. General Requirements for Interior Wood Materials: 1. Solid Stock Lumber Grade: In accordance with AWI rules for Premium Grade construction with specified finish unless indicated otherwise. 2. Moisture Content: Minimum 5 percent, maximum 10 percent at delivery. B. Standing and Running Trim and Casing: Hardwood, select, kiln -dried. _ 1. Species and Grade: a. Transparent or Stained Finish: Maple, AWI Grade I. Clear. b. Painted Finish: Poplar or Birch, AWI Grade IL 2. Millwork Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Finish: Section 09900. C. Reception Desk Kickboard: Maple, AWI Grade I. Clear. Kiln -dried. D. Plywood: 1. Transparent Finish: AWI Grade A, plain sliced, book matched Maple veneer over plywood core. 2. Painted Finish: AWI Grade B poplar veneer over plywood core. 3. Plastic Laminate Finish: U.S. Plywood Duraply, cabinet grade. E. Plastic Laminate: 1. Manufacturers: a. Formica Corp. ^w b. Wilsonart VF 2001-59 06400-2 c. Nevamar d. Pionite e. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Type: Formica General Purpose Grade 10/HGS. a. Vertical Surfaces: May be Vertical Grade 55VGS. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1 M2, matte formed wood particleboard, 40-45# density industrial grade with sealer and lacquer finish. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2. Cabinet Interiors: Willamette Industries Kortran II Cabinet Liner. acrylic coated 45- 47# density industrial particleboard. G. Hardboard: Tempered Grade. 2.02 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. Cabinet Hardware Manufacturers: 1. Hinges: a. Blum b. Hafele c. Grass d. Hettich e. Mepla f. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Pulls and Catches: a. Hafele b. Stanley c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 3. Drawer Glides: a. Knape & Vogt b. Grant c. Accuride d. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 4. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: a. Knape and Vogt b. Stanley c. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Cabinet Hardware: Furnished and installed by the cabinet supplier: 1. Schedule: T Manufacturer Catal No. Finish Hinges Stanley 1561 26D Pulls Hafele 137.98.320 Black Catches Hafele 244.20.102 28 Heavy Duty Drawer Glides Accuride No. 2832 full extension slide with latch (100 pounds/pair) Zinc VF 2001-59 06400-3 Type Manufacturer Catal a No. Finish Regular Drawer Glides Accuride No. 2632 full extension slide 50 pounds/pair) Zinc Brackets for Shelves Knape & Vo t 256 Zinc Standards for Shelves Knape & Vo t 255 Zinc 2. Locks: Provide disc tumbler cam type locks for all drawers and doors. Key alike or differently as selected by Architect, master keyed. Provide two keys per lock. 2.03 WOOD DOOR FRAMES A. Species: 1. Interior Frames and Jambs: Maple, AWI Grade I. Clear. B. Construction: AWI Premium Grade. Plant assembled with corners dadoed and glued. Finger jointing is not acceptable. C. Provide temporary shipping braces. 2.04 DESK, COUNTER AND CABINET FABRICATION A. AWI Grade: Construct desk, counters and cabinets as indicated on Drawings and as required for AWI Custom Grade work. B. Preparation: Obtain field measurements and verify dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings before fabricating casework. C. Coordination: 1. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical rough -in. D. Construction: Frame desk and counters in substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces, etc. 1. Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200# man without sagging. 2. Frames: Pinned, glued, or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom Grade standards. E. Countertops Faced with Plastic Laminate: At locations indicated on Drawings. Constructed of particleboard. Provide backsplashes and self -edge all exposed edges. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Comply with Section 1600 B, Laminate Clad Cabinets ~ of AWI Standards for Premium Grade. 1. Provide and install hardware as specified. 2. Construct plastic laminate faced shelving, counters, cabinets and casework with r. plastic laminate covered particleboard. Use Kortran at interiors. 3. Frame cabinets and casework in a substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces, bottoms, etc. -` a. Cross Supports Under Countertops: Sufficiently heavy to carry weight of 200# man without sagging. VF 2001-59 06400-4 b. Frames: Pinned, glued or screwed together in accordance with AWI Custom Grade Standards. 4. Construction Type: Flush overlay (not lipped). 5. Cabinet Doors: Types, sizes and thicknesses indicated. a. Doors: Flush with edges perfectly smooth. b. Particleboard Doors: Faced and self -edged with plastic laminate. 6. Cabinet Backs Not Exposed to View: Hardboard. G. Stained Finish Wood Reception Desk: AWI Premium Grade. 1. Veneer Faces: Glue spliced. Stitched faces not acceptable. a. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book matched and end matched as required. b. Matching Within Panel Face: Center, balance matched. c. Panel Matching Method: Sequence match panel sets. d. Veneer Matching: Continuous across panels. e. Provide balancing veneer on concealed face of panel similar to face veneer. 2. Construct counters plastic laminate faced Duraply plywood. a. Exposed Edges: Band with Maple as indicated. b. Provide steel supports as indicated. 3. Frame in a substantial manner with necessary blocking, braces, bottoms, etc. 4. Kickboard: 5/4 inch solid stock Maple as indicated. Stained finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Openings for Wood Frames: All openings for wood frames shall be prepared by others to the proper size, plumb, square and level before installation of frames is started. B. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with a copy to Architect. 4. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTALLATION A. Lengths: Wherever possible, provide single piece for each length of finish. Butt joints not allowed except for long pieces or room length moldings which may be in two or more sections. When butt joints are necessary, bevel joints. B. Install interior finish level, plumb and true. C. Securing: Tightly secure to bracing with nails, screws, glue etc. Blind nail wherever possible. Where surface nailing is necessary, use finish nails carefully set with nail punch. D Trim Finishing Against Walls or Ceiling: Mill with extra width and scribe to wall or ceiling at job. VF 2001-59 06400-5 E. Edges: Except where molded, mill trim with square edges. After erection, slightly round exposed edges by sanding as directed. F. Replacement: Replace any interior finish bearing hammer marks, splits, cracks, mars or defects of any nature. G. Touch-up shop finish after installation. — 3.03 DESK, COUNTER AND CABINET INSTALLATION — A. Desk and Counters: Construct supports for counters as indicated. 1. Securely attach counters to walls plumb and level. 2. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. B. Cabinets: 1. Bases: Construct cabinet bases for cabinets as indicated and securely anchor to "- floor. 2. Cabinets: Securely attach cabinets to bases and walls with cabinets plumb and level and hardware operating properly, ready for finish under Section 09900. 3. Base: Provided on base cabinets as scheduled after cabinets are set in place. 4. Sinks and Trim: Provided and installed under Division 15. 3.04 FRAME INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with AWI Premium Grade. B. Installation: l . Frames: Install square and plumb in the opening, wedge and nail with finish nails. 2. Trim: See Section 06200 for trim installation. — 3.05 PROTECTION Solid stock materials and fabrications specified under this Section shall be protected against excessive changes in moisture content during delivery, storage, handling and installation up to date of substantial completion of the project. Moisture content shall be _ maintained between 5 percent and 10 percent during this period and is subject to field checking by the Architect. Materials exceeding 10 percent moisture content are subject to rejection and replacement at the Contractor's expense. VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 4 06400-6 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07111 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dampproofing on outside of perimeter concrete foundation walls. Apply to exterior vertical face from bottom of wall to 6 inches below finish grade or intersection with bottom of exterior concrete or asphalt paving. 2. Dampproofing on high grade side of concrete retaining walls. Apply to exterior vertical face from bottom of wall to 6 inches below finish grade or intersection with bottom of exterior paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Backfilling: Section 02300 Earthwork. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver in manufacturers original unopened containers and store at a temperature of 500 F. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply if air temperature or surface temperature is below 400 F. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING A. Products: 1. Kamak No. 100. 2. Sonneborn-Contech Hydrocide 600. 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Primer: ASTM D41. C. Mastic: Heavy bodied bituminous compound. VF2001-59 07111-1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this 22nd day of March 2002 corporations have caused their cors are porate seals to be hereto affixed 0 and such of hand em a these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forte above. PR=C=PAL Name: Drahota Construction Co. Address: P.O. Box 272269 Fort Collins, CO 80527 By - Title - President / CEO ATTEST: By: (SEAL) 7/96 Li'i�7p Employers Mutual Casualty Company P.O. Box 441098 Aurora, CO 80044 By: Title: Attorney -in -Fact (SEAL) Section oo4lo Page 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: Verify substrate is smooth, free of major defects, cured and dry. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions by applicator. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to be Dampproofed: Clean and smooth. Brush down surfaces to remove loose scale, fins, dust, etc. 1. Prime surface and fill holes with mastic. 2. Penetrations Such as Pipes: Waterproof as follows: Y a. Pack space between pipe and pipe sleeve with mineral wool to within 1" of face of wall. b. Fill 1" space with mastic. " c. Place fiberglass membrane over opening and embed in suitable coating. _ Carefully cut to fit around pipe and extend at least 6" onto solid material. d. Trowel coat over membrane patch with dampproofing. -- 3. Construction and Expansion Joints: a. Apply heavy coating of dampproofing. b. Follow with two plies of waterproof fiberglass membrane extended 6' each side of joint with pronounced buckle or wrinkle in membrane over joint to permit movement without breaking membrane. c. Follow with two heavy coats of dampproofing. 3.03 APPLICATION _ A. Brush or spray two coats of dampproofing at rates and by methods as recommended by manufacturer to provide uninterrupted and impervious seal. B. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Review: Provide ample notice for Architect to review completed installation before covering. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07111-2 SECTION 07133 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Membrane waterproofing at the following locations: 1. Under canopy sheet metal roofing over plywood sheathing. Cover all surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Quality Assurance Submittals: l . Certificates: Submit manufacturer's written certification that applicator is approved by manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. a. Submit one copy for Architect's information. b. Maintain one copy on site until completion of waterproofing installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in waterproofing. 1. Applicator: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Continuously applied waterproofing in State of Colorado for three years. B. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall be certified to meet the following. 1. VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver materials to the site until ready for use. Deliver bonding adhesive and lap sealant in manufacturer's original unopened containers. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with the following: 1. Store membrane no more than two pallets high off the ground. Provide cover on top and sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 2. Store primer, mastic, protection board adhesive and liquid membrane in a dry area away from high heat, flames or spark. 3. Store protection board flat and off the ground, preferably on a wood platform. Provide tarpaulin cover on top and sides. 4. Store only as much material at point of use as required for each day's work. VF 2001-59 07133-1 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install membrane waterproofing when air and surface temperature is below 40 degrees F unless manufacturer's recommended special materials and methods are used. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering material and installation in — accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Include watertight condition. -- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Self -Adhered Modified Bitumen Roof Membrane Underlayment: ASTM D1970. — 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Systems: a. Grace Construction Products Vycor Ice and Water Shield System. b. Carlisle Corp., QSC-707. c. NEI AC Poly Ice & WaterSeal. d. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. _ 2. Membrane: a. Grace Construction Products Vycor Ice and Water Shield or approved substitute by acceptable manufacturer. b. Material: Composite laminated sheet of polyethylene film coated on one side with a factory applied rubberized asphalt and on other side with a removable protective release paper. c. Nominal Thickness: 40 mils minimum. — 3. Primer: W.R. Grace WP3000 primer or other VOC compliant primer by acceptable waterproofing manufacturer. a. Cold Weather Primer: W.R. Grace B2 Primer or accepted substitute as — recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 2. Surfaces: a. Sheathing: Verify sheathing is clean, dry and ready for waterproofing — installation. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. VF 2001-59 07133-2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove projections, concrete splatter, general surface dirt and other foreign materials to leave surfaces in clean condition suitable for application of membrane. 1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces with high pressure air to remove dust, loose stones and debris. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Priming: 1. Prime surface at coverage of 250 to 350 sq. ft. per gallon. Apply with lambswool roller. 2. Prime only area to be covered with membrane in one working day. 3. Allow primer to dry one hour or until tack free. 4. Reprime areas not covered with membrane within 24 hours. C. Corners: 1. Outside Comers: Double cover outside corners with initial strip of sheet membrane 1 1" minimum width centered on axis of corner. a. Completely cover this strip by regular application of sheet membrane. b. Outside Corners: Free of sharp edges. Inspect surfaces adjacent to corners and repair if necessary to provide smooth dense surface. 2. Inside Corners: Provide fillet formed with epoxy mortar or latex modified cement mortar and double coverage of membrane. Do not use fiber or wood cant strips. a. Alternate Method: Form fillet with liquid membrane Bituthene Liquid Membrane and apply layer of sheet membrane. 3. Apply Bituthene Mastic over membrane seams within 12" of corners. D. Horizontal and Roof Application: 1. Apply membrane from low points to high points across fall line so that laps shed water. Stagger end laps. 2. Roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible with linoleum roller or standard water -filled garden roller less than 30" wide. Protect face of roller with resilient material such as 1 /2" plastic foam or two wraps of indoor -outdoor carpet. 3. Seal end laps and T-joints at end of each work day. 4. Apply double thickness of membrane over properly sealed expansion, construction and control joints. E. Drains and Protrusions: 1. Projections: Apply double layer of membrane around projections at least 6" in all directions and seal terminations with Bituthene Mastic. 2. Drains: Apply double layer of membrane around drains and place bead of Bituthene Mastic between top layer and clamping rings and at terminations. Terminations: Terminate by pressing very firmly to wall and finish with troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic. V F 2001-59 07133-3 G. Sealing Seams: 1. Overlap seams at least 2-1 /2". Apply succeeding sheet with minimum 2-1 /2" overlap and roll entire membrane firmly and completely as soon as possible to minimize bubbles caused by outgassing of air or water vapor from concrete. 2. Fishmouths: Slit and overlap flaps, repair with patch, press or roll to make seal, and seal edges of patch with troweled bead of Bituthene Mastic. 3. Misaligned or Inadequately Lapped Seams: Patch with sheet membrane. 4. Seal laps within 12" of corner details with troweling of Bituthene Mastic. 5. For vertical applications, use heavy hand pressure and seam roller on laps. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Membranes: Do not allow waterproofing to remain exposed to sunlight for longer than recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07133-4 SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water repellent sealer on all exposed exterior face block. 2. Water repellent on all exposed exterior face brick. 3. Water repellent on all exposed exterior precast concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Walls: Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2. Block and Brick Masonry: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 3. Precast Concrete for Masonry Assemblies: Section 03453. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 manufacturer's product literature and specifications. B. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600. 1. Submit one copy for Architect's information. 2. Maintain one copy on site until completion of water repellent application. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports. See Article 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Certify application in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and specifications. 3. Proof of Purchase: Applicator shall submit copies of purchasing documents indicating products and quantities for application on this project. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Waterproofing contractor with minimum 2 years experience in waterproofing applications. B. Regulatory Requirements: Product shall be certified to meet the following. l . VOC compliant with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. C. Job Mock Ups: 1. Apply sealer to a selected 5 foot square area of concrete wall after cleaning. Confirm acceptable penetration on dense substrate surfaces. Obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. VF 2001-59 07190-1 2. Apply sealer to masonry mock-up panel installed under Section 04810. Test for water repellency and obtain Architect's approval before proceeding. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING - Deliver sealer materials in manufacturer's unopened containers and store at a temperature of at least 500 F. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply if air temperature or temperature of surface to receive sealer is below 40 degrees F or above 95 degrees F. 2. Do not apply in rainy conditions. B. Sequencing/Scheduling: No sealer shall be applied until cleaning work is completed and inspected and approved by the Architect. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Statement of Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Manufacturer shall warrant that product will prevent moisture penetration or seepage where applied in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. l . Warranty period: Minimum 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Okon, Inc., 800/237-0565. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent Sealer on all Exterior Face Block: Okon Plugger. 1. Clear, non -staining. 2. Active Substance: Modified acrylic with siloxane additive. 3. Total Solids and Active Ingredients by Weight: 20 percent. B. Water Repellent Sealer on all Exterior Face Brick and Precast Concrete: Okon W-1 1. Clear, non -staining. 2. Active Substance: Micro -acrylic siloxane emulsion. 3. Total Solids and Active Ingredients by Weight: 5 percent. C. VOC Content: Less than 600 grams per liter. VF 2001-59 07190-2 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Blanket insulation as indicated. 2. Foundation insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Masonry Wall Cavity Insulation: Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Vapor Retarder: Section 07263 Building Vapor Retarders. 3. Roof Insulation: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 4. Sound Insulation in Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Walls and Partitions. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Storage: Store insulation under cover to prevent weather damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID INSULATION A. Foundation Insulation: ASTM C578, Type IV Rigid Extruded Polystyrene Insulation: 1. Products: a. Dow Styrofoam SM b. UC Industries Foamular 250 c. DiversiFoam Products CertiFoam d. PACTIV Building Products GreenGuard. e. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2. Thickness:2" 3. Thermal Insulation Value: R-10 minimum. 4. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.02 BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Owens-Corning 2. Johns -Manville 3. CertainTeed Corp. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Insulation: Fiberglass blankets. l . Thickness and R-Value: As indicated. 2. Width: As required to fit framing. VF 2001-59 07210-1 3. Facing: Unfaced unless otherwise indicated in Systems Notes on Drawings. a. Exposed Insulation: Insulation not installed substantially against the inside face of finish materials shall not have combustible coverings. Exposed insulation shall be foil faced with flame spread rating of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: l . Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. _ 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Blanket or Batt Insulation: Install insulation according to manufacturer's ^ recommendations. Fit tight to adjoining work and adjoining insulation so that completely tight enclosure free from open joints, holes, cracks and voids is achieved. Attach insulation in place in manner insuring stability and to eliminate sagging. 1. Completely fill spaces between window and door frames and adjacent framing with unfaced batts. B. Rigid Insulation: Install insulation board in as large sections as possible in order to minimize joints. 1. Vertical Installation: Apply board to backing using adhesive methods recommended by manufacturer. VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 07210-2 r SECTION 07261 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Continuous vapor retarder under all new interior slabs on grade to receive adhered floor finish materials, tile, epoxy -based, urethane -based or acrylic terrazzo coatings, seamless flooring, wood flooring, or that will be in contact with moisture -sensitive equipment or product. 2. Compactible granular base over vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Subgrade Preparation and Compaction of Granular Base: Section 02300 Earthwork. 2. Concrete Floor Slabs -on -Grade: Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Vapor Retarder at Framed Walls and Ceilings: Section 07263. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following. 1. ASTM El643-98 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM El 745-97 - Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. Guide References and Standard Practices: 1. ACI 302.1 R-96 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature covering all materials and accessories. Include installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of two years experience on equivalent projects. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver vapor retarder in original unopened manufacturer's containers with labels intact. VF 2001-59 07261-1 11. Question: Please confirm that any adjustments in equipment sizing and electrical requirements per Note B/M1.0 will be handled by a proposal request/change order. Answer: Yes, if there is a change it will be addressed through the proposal request/change order process. 12. Question: Please clarify if the owner will provide the licensed professional engineer soils / pavement design reports required by Note 33 / C2. Answer: Yes, the Owner will provide. 13. Question: Please clarify if the owner will provide the Colorado licensed engineer stamped paving section design required to be submitted by Note 2/C3. Answer: Yes, the Owner will provide. 14. Question: Please confirm that if a complete street overlay is required per Note 6/C3, the cost will be addressed by a proposal request / change order. Answer: If required, the Owner will accomplish. 15. Question: Please confirm that if additional striping or signage is required by Note 14/C3, the cost will be addressed by a proposal request/ change order. Answer: Only if there is additional signage, will it be addressed through the proposal request/change order process, since the Owner is doing the striping. 16. Question: Please clarify if the owner will provide the registered engineer certification of drainage facilities required by Note 3/C3. Answer: Yes, the Owner will provide. 17. Question: Please clarify whether the "sidewalk to be constructed upon approval by C&S Railroad" is part of this contract. Answer: It is not. 18. Question: Please confirm that the owner will be solely responsible for the 50' x 20' construction easement and pavement utility easement on the south side of the project. The plan note /C6 also mentions the "contractor". Answer: The Owner will secure this easement. 19. Question: Please clarify whether the existing Excel gas line will require relocation by the installation of the new 15" PVC storm line per C9, and if so, whether this cost is to be included in the base bid. Since Excel will not allow contractors to relocate their gas line and this cost is therefore outside of the contractor's control, can the cost be handled 0 4. M116919 EMCASCO Insurance Company, an Illinois Corporation hereinafter referred to severally as "Company"and collectively as "Companies", each does by these presents, make, consfitute and appoint: CHR#S RICHMOND, RUSSELL MICHELS, DARLENE KRINGS, INDIVIDUALLY, FORT COLLINS, COLORADO I .................. its true and lawfulattorney-in-fact, with full power and authority conferred to sign, seal, and execute its lawful bonds, undertakings, and Other obligatory instruments of a similar nature as follows IN AN AMOUNT NOT EXCEEDING TEN MILLION DOLLARS.............................. ...... ,....................................... ($10,000000,00) and to bind each Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as d such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of each such Company, and all of ' tha ads of said attorney pursuant to the authority hereby given are hereby ratified and confirmed. The authority hereby granted shall expire April 1, 2003 unless sooner revoked. AUTHORITY FOR POWER OF ATTORNEY The Power -of -Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by the authority of the following resolution of the Boards of Directors of each of the Companies at a regularly scheduled meeting of each company duly called and held in 1999; RESOLVED; The President and Chief Executive Officer, any Vice President the Treasurer and the Secretary of Employers Mutual Casualty Company shall have power and authority to (1) appoint attorneys -in -fact -and authorize them to execute on behalf of each Company and attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and (2) to remove any such attorney=in-fact at any time and revoke the power and authority given to him or her. Attorneys-m-fact shall have power and authority, subject to the terms and limitations of the power -of -attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company, and to,attach the seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizancesl contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by any such attorney -in -fact shall be fully and n ail respects binding upon the Company, ". Certification as to the validity of any power -of -attorney authorized herein made by an officer of Employers Mutual Casualty Compahy shall be fully and in all respects' binding upon thus Company. The facsimile or mechanically reproduced, signature of such officer, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any pawer-ofadomey of the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and affect as though manually affixed. W NE55 WHEREOF, the (� m�anjes have caused thesegWrits to be signed for each by their officers as shown, and the Corporate seals to be hereto affixed this day of an ary /n •N rJ f.w W Seals Bruce G. Kelley, Chairman S. Birdsley Pscco ©; Ns y2 Q�NCE "I QF " s CA, , of Companies 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6; resident Assistant Secretary , O0004 P z ;�oa°o"qr 9 0 2oa°oa;r ° a of Company 1; Vice Chairman and SEAL $ 4 _; 1863 1953 CEO of Company 7 y av z: '? ��illNnhS# f lowP On thiph 'day of January AD 2000 before me a otNS`..... e° Q 15 '." 0 Qs�ciOA. cgs ; Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa personally appeared Bruce G. Kelley and Jeffrey S. Q° owv0"4°� Q ••oP°oAe, o : oe°aP f - Budsley, who, being by me duly sworn did say that they are,and are known to me' to be the 3 _ Chairman, President, Vice Chairman and CEO, and/or Assistant Secretsry, respectively,of SEAL = SEAL ; _' ? SEAL ; o each of The Companies above; that the seals affixed to this instrument arethe sals osaid corporations; that said instrument was signed and seated on behalf of each of the Companies 41o1NrsP,° by authority of their respective Boards of Directors; and that the said Bruce.G. Kelley and Jeffrey S. Birdslay, as such officers, acknowledge the execution of said Instrument to be the. 91- voluntary act and deed of each of the Companies. My Commission Expires September 30,2003. F*T,myc, tUTA KRUMINSmission Number 776255mm. Exp. Sept 30,200 Notary Public in and for the State of Iowa CERTIFICATE I, David L. Hixenbaugh Vice President of the Companies, do hereby certify that the foregoing resolution of the Boards of Directors by each of the Companies, d th P war of me rs nt therein en January27, 2000 on;tiehal#at � tc�Imond °uss I�I�i 9Ys,iiarleneiYnng arettue,and correct and are still in full force and effect.22nd March 2002 fnTestimonyWhereofIhave subscribed myname and affixedthe facsimile seat ofeach Company this —day of Vjce�President` C. Storage: Protect vapor retarder from damage and keep dry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: 1. Fortifiber Corporation, Moistop Plus, consisting of a nonwoven geotextile laminated to a polymer film. 2. Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn Type T-65 ply laminate consisting of two layers of polyethylene with a high strength cord grid reinforcement. 3. Stego Industries, LLC, www.stegoindustries.com, Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier, extruded _ 10 mil thickness polyolefin membrane manufactured with virgin resins. B. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.10 perms, measured in accordance with ASTM E96, Procedure A. C. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 475 grams when measured in accordance with ASTM D1709, Method B. — D. Joint Tape: As recommended by the manufacturer. 2.02 GRANULAR PROTECTION LAYER A. Compactible Granular Base Material For Placement Over Vapor Retarder. Clean, fine - graded crusher fines or manufactured sand, having a uniform distribution of particle sizes ranging from the No. 4 through the No. 200 sieve, with 10 percent to 30 percent of particles passing a No. 100 sieve, and not contaminated with clay, silt or organic material B. Moisture Content: Minimum moisture content to meet compaction requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Where vapor retarder is installed over grade, take care to obtain smooth level surface. B. If vapor barrier is to be placed over a rough granular soil or fill, place approximately''/2 inch thickness of fine -graded base material over subgrade. Roll or compact to provide _ smooth and level surface without jagged material protruding which could puncture vapor retarder. 3.02 INSTALLATION " A. Place vapor retarder under all new interior slabs on grade. Use widest practical width of film. B. Where laps are required, lap not less than 6", with top lap placed in direction of "- spreading of compactible granular base. VF 2001-59 07261-2 C. Carefully fit around service openings. Cut film around pipes and conduit piercing retarder, and apply pressure sensitive tape to insure maximum barrier effectiveness. D. Place pipes, conduits, etc. on top of vapor barrier, taking care to prevent film punctures. E. Repair any damage to film prior to placing granular base. Granular Base: Immediately prior to placement of concrete, cover vapor barrier with three inch thick uniform granular base for protection. Compact in accordance with requirements of Section 02300 for granular fill under floor slabs. Protect base from excessive moisture beyond minimum required for compaction until concrete is placed. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 07261-3 SECTION 07263 BUILDING VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Continuous vapor retarder covering unfaced blanket insulation on warm side of framed exterior walls. B. Related Sections: 1. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Section 07261. 2. Building Insulation: Section 07210. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following. 1. ASTM D4397-96 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's current catalog literature covering all materials and accessories. Include installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualification: Applicator shall have a minimum of two years experience on equivalent projects. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver vapor retarder in original unopened manufacturer's containers with labels intact. C. Storage: Protect vapor retarder from damage and keep dry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VAPOR RETARDER AT FRAMED WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Material: ASTM D4397. Clear polyethylene sheets, 6 mil thickness. Use at framed walls and ceilings except where fire retardant material is required. VF 2001-59 07263-1 B. Joint Tape: As recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine completed insulation prior to beginning application to assure that previous work is free from conditions that will adversely affect the execution and quality of work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and work which penetrates vapor retarder is complete. 3.02 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION AT FRAMED WALLS A. Completely cover unfaced blanket insulation on warm side. B. Take care to protect vapor barrier from puncture. C. Lap over framing and secure in place for leak free barrier. 1. Fastening to Wood Framing and Blocking: Staple to wood framing and blocking using minimum Yz inch long staples. Staple at 6 inches on center along structural members and blocking and at 3 inches in from sheet edge. Run long edge of sheet along structural members. D. Tape joints with vapor resistant tape recommended by Manufacturer for this purpose. E. Seal penetrations through vapor retarder immediately prior to installation of gypsum board. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07263-2 SECTION 07467 STEEL SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal siding. 2. Associated metal flashing and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Studs and Sheathing: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current published product data. 1. Include results indicating compliance with minimum requirements of the following performance tests: a. Air Infiltration ASTM E 283-84 b. Water Infiltration ASTM E 331-86 C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details, trim, flashing, and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work. D. Samples: Submit a sample of each type of siding supplied under this Section, complete with factory finish. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600 and the manufacturers recommendations. B. Delivery: Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for damage and completeness. C. Storage: Panels shall be stored in a clean, dry place. One end shall be elevated to allow moisture to run off. 1. Protect from staining. Protect finished surfaces from damage. Replace defective panels. 2. Panels with strippable film shall not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. 3. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation. VF 2001-59 07467-1 1.04 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide twenty year manufacturer's written warranty for finish against cracking, peeling and fade (not to exceed 5 N.B.S. units) in accordance with Section _ 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL SIDING _ A. Manufacturers: 1. Berridge Manufacturing Company. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Siding: Berridge Flush Seam Panels or accepted substitute. Panels to have flat, 3-7/8" wide, embossed textured face; 1 /2" depth; interlocking male -female side lap; and utilize concealed fasteners. v 1. Material: ASTM A653 and ASTM A924 hot dipped galvanized steel, rolled formed. 2. Provide in continuous lengths to maximum of 40 feet. C. Fasteners: Attachment to metal supports with #8 x 1 /2" TEKS screws as recommended by Manufacturer. _ D. Finish: Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating applied by the manufacturer on a continuous -- coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for _ adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. 1. Color: Selected by Architect from standard colors. 2. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the ^ finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation. r. E. Accessories: Provide associated flashing, caps, drips and other accessories compatible with panels in matching color. _ 1. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the panels. 2. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1 /2 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. a. Verify #30 unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt undetayment has been installed over solid sheathing and fastened in place. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. VF 2001-59 07467-2 B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's r standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a watertight installation. B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines are plumb. C. Install starter and edge trim before installing panels. D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of panels. E. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with accepted shop drawings. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials. G. Joint Sealing: Under Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 3.03 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful repair. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07467-3 SECTION 07538 FULLY ADHERED EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Rigid insulation. 2. Fully adhered EPDM single membrane roofing and base fleshings. 3. Bonding adhesives, lap sealants, fasteners and other accessories. 4. Roof walkways as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Roof Deck: Section 05310 Steel Deck. 2. Perimeter Nailer: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 3. Metal Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 4. Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610. 5. Roof Accessories: Section 07720. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with the following. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards: 1. ASTM C 1289 - Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. 2. ASTM D1079 - Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials. 3. ASTM D4637 - Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane. 4. ASTM E 108 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Reference Standards l . FM 4470 - Approval Standard - Class 1 Roof Covers. 2. Loss Prevention Data 1-28- Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement, June 1998 edition. 3. Loss Prevention Data 1-29 - Above -Deck Roof Components, June 1998 edition. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Reference Standards: 1. UL Standard Specification 790 - Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof -covering Materials. 2. Roof Materials and Systems Directory. E. Uniform Building Code Standards: l . UBC Standard 15-6 - Modified Bitumen, Thermoplastic and Thermoset Membranes Used for Roof Coverings. VF 2001-59 07538-1 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide watertight, leak free roofing system capable of withstanding thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure. B. Wind Uplift Resistance Capacity: Meet both of following criteria as a minimum. 1. Provide fully adhered system meeting FM windstorm Class 1-90. 2. Provide fully adhered system sufficient to resist wind uplift pressures calculated in accordance with the 1997 edition of the Uniform Building Code and Fort Collins _ amendments for 100 mph basic wind speed and Exposure C. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications covering roofing system materials and methods proposed. Include manufacturer's standard details for seaming and flashing. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of insulation boards, individual membrane sheets and fastener spacings. l . Include details of penetrations and perimeter. _ 2. Indicate flashing details. 3. Include tapered roof insulation thickness and layout. D. Samples: 1. Submit 1'-0" x V-0 minimum size sample of membrane. 2. Submit sample of each type of fastener proposed for installation. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Credentials: Prior to starting the roofing, submit credentials from roofing manufacturer of applicator approval. 2. Wind Uplift Report: Submit copies of testing reports indicating roofing system has been tested and approved for wind uplift criteria specified. 3. Fastener Certification: Manufacturer's certification identifying maximum uplift pressure resisted by fastener when tested in accordance with FM 4470. 4. Design and Specification Approval: Submit Drawings, this Section, related Sections, and proposed roofing and insulation system to Manufacturer for review prior to submittal of shop drawings. Prior to starting roofing, submit a signed statement by — membrane manufacturer that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project. 5. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Submit one copy for Architect's information. Maintain one copy on site until completion of roofing system installation. F. Quality Control Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01450. 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: a. Submit written report from manufacturer's representative after inspection of roof deck to verify deck is satisfactory for installation of system. b. Submit additional report indicating roof has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. VF 2001-59 07538-2 G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Record of work: Submit written records indicating temperature and moisture conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations. 2. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing manufacturer licensed installer. B. Fire Resistance Requirements: 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. C. FM Listing: Membrane, base fleshings and other components of system shall meet FM 4470 as part of roofing system listed in FMRC Approval Guide for Class 1 for noncombustible construction, as applicable. 1. Wind Class: FM windstorm Class 1-90. D. Pre -Installation Conference: l . Before beginning roofing installation, hold conference with General Contractor's Superintendent, roofing contractor, roofing manufacturer's representative, and metal flashing contractor's foreman. Notify Architect of meeting at least 10 days in advance. 2. Discuss all matters pertaining to roof system installation, including detailing, preparation, coordination between trades, installation techniques and procedures, phasing and scheduling. 3. Take minutes and distribute to attending parties and Architect. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery 1. Membrane Sheets 20 Feet to 25 Feet in Width: Deliver non -reinforced membrane sheets to site with single fold. C. Handling: Handle insulation and rolled goods to prevent damage to edges or ends. D. Storage: 1. Store off the ground and keep covered with waterproof covering. Materials that become wet will be subject to rejection. 2. Store all materials in a dry area and at a temperature between 60 degrees and 80 degrees F. 3. Replace damaged materials. 4. Do not leave insulation exposed to weather. VF 2001-59 07538-3 SECTION 00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of Bidder: Drahota Construction Co. 2. Permanent main office address: 4700 Innovation Dr'., Bldg. C, Ft. Collins, CO 3. When organized: 1973 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: Colorado 5 11 7 E How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 23 Years Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the apppropriate anticipated dates of completion.) Collindale Clubhouse, Ft. Collins, CO 2.0 million Completion 11-02 I"I General character of Work performed by your company: General Contractor Services plus -self perform rough & finish carpentry, doors, frames, hardware, and commom labor. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you? No If so, where and why? Have your ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where, and why? 10. Are you debarred by any government agency? If yes list agency name. 7/96 No Section 00420 Page 1 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: l . Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180 degrees F. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations during cold weather. 3. Adhesive Application: Temperature shall be minimum 40 degrees F and rising. B. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil. solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a manufacturer's written total system warranty against defects in materials and workmanship in roofing system for a period of ten (10) years in accordance with Section 01780. _ B. Submit Contract Documents to Manufacturer for review and verification of Manufacturer's minimum warranty requirements, including extended wind uplift coverage, prior to submittal of shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable EPDM Sheet Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle SynTec, Inc. 2. Firestone Building Products Company. B. Acceptable Roofing Systems: 1. Carlisle SynTec Inc. Sure -Seal fully adhered EPDM system. 2. Firestone RubberGard EPDM Fully -Adhered System. 3. No substitutes are acceptable. ` 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. EPDM Sheet Material: ASTM D4637, Type 1. Vulcanized elastomeric terpolymer of ethylene, propylene and diene. 1. Thickness, Grade and Class: 60 mils, nominal, Grade 1 and Class U, unreinforced. _ 2. Non -Reinforced EPDM Sheet Size: 25 foot maximum width by 100 foot maximum length. -. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. B. Sure -Seal System and RubberGard System Materials: ^ 1. Membrane: Carlisle Sure -Seal Standard or Firestone RubberGard, non -reinforced, 0.060 inch minimum thickness, black EPDM rubber sheet. 2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water -based bonding adhesive. a. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): Maximum 50 grams VOC's per liter. ^ VF 2001-59 07538-4 3. Splice Cleaner, Lap Sealant, In -seam Sealant, Water Cut-offs and Miscellaneous Accessory Materials: Roof membrane Manufacturer's standard products. 4. Pre -cleaned Membrane: Contractor's option. 2.03 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide insulation board and fastening system approved and fully warrantable by roofing manufacturer for use with fully adhered single ply membrane system. B. System Description: See Systems Notes on Drawings. Roofing insulation system shall be two flat layers of rigid isocyanurate insulation as indicated, mechanically fastened to structural steel deck. 1. Provide factory -tapered rigid isocyanurate crickets over flat insulation to provide slopes indicated. C. Facers: Glass reinforced scrim. D. Thickness: 4 inches at thinnest point. 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Layer: 1-1 /2 inches. E. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered rigid isocyanurate crickets to provide consistent surface slopes indicated. 1. Minimum slope 1 /4 inch per foot and maximum '/2 inch per foot to drains. Insulation Fasteners: Fully coated with manufacturer's standard fluoropolymer paint for corrosion resistance. Provide type approved by FM 4470 and warrantable by manufacturer for roofing insulation and wind uplift criteria. G. Underlayment Board If Required by Roofing Manufacturer to Qualify System for Specified Wind Uplift Warranty: Oriented Strand Board (OSB) with a phenolic resin binder, supplied and warranted by roofing manufacturer. 1. Thickness: '/z inch unless indicated otherwise. 2.04 FLASHING A. Flashing: Carlisle Sure -Seal or Firestone RubberGard, 0.060" thick, or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. l . Walls, Parapets and Curbs: Cured EPDM membrane flashing with reinforced securement strip. 2. Metal Edging: Cured or semi -cured EPDM membrane flashing as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Penetrations, Comers and Other Locations Where Flashing Membrane Must Be Formed: Elastoform uncured neoprene. 4. Provide cured and uncured flashing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's standard flashing details. 2.05 ROOF WALKWAYS A. Roof Walkways: Manufacturer's standard walkway pads or rolls as indicated. V F 2001-59 07538-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that work of other trades which penetrates roof deck has been completed. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, drainage, foreign -- material, moisture and unevenness which would prevent the execution and quality of application of roofing system as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. _ B. Acceptance: Do not proceed until the surface to be covered is acceptable. Beginning of work means acceptance of substrate. ^ 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces: Dry and broom clean before beginning work. Clean roof drains and collection boxes as indicated and reset if drains and boxes are not at the proper level to drain the finished roof. B. Protection. Protect paving and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Lap suitable protective materials at least 6". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work. 3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install flat rigid boards in two layers with joints offset minimum 6 inches in each direction. B. Joints in insulation boards shall be 1 /4' or less in width. Install no more insulation at one time than will be protected from rain or snow by installation of roofing membrane on the same day or prior to storm. Install temporary water cutoffs at completion of each day's work and remove upon resumption of work. C. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered insulation crickets in accordance with accepted shop drawings. Attach to insulation layer with adhesive as required to prevent shifting or blow - off prior to placement of membrane. D. Underlayment Board: Cover insulation with underiayment board if required by roofing manufacturer to qualify roofing system for specified wind uplift warranty. E. Mechanically fasten insulation to structural deck as required to meet specified wind uplift requirements and in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.04 EPDM MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install membrane fully adhered over insulation. Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. B. Membrane Bonding: Install membrane in manner which allows temporary sealing on down -slope surface at end of each work day. V F 2001-59 07538-6 1. Unroll membrane and remove backing sheet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Position membrane with clean side down at location where it will be adhered. 3. Fold sheet back past factory seam to expose half of sheet. 4. Apply membrane bonding cement to substrate only at rate and using methods recommended by the manufacturer 5. Allow adhesive to dry to tacky stage and roll folded half of membrane evenly into adhesive. 6. Brush or roll bonded half of sheet to fully bond sheet to substrate. 7. Repeat bonding procedure with other half of sheet. C. Tape Splicing: Splice all seams by tape splicing method. 1. Clean and dry surfaces to be spliced with cleaning agents and wipes recommended by manufacturer. Apply primer. 2. Form splices in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply tape to bottom membrane sheet. Press tape onto sheet using hand pressure. 3. Overlap tape roll ends a minimum of 1 inch. 4. Roll splices to fully bond laps. 5. Install a 6 inch wide section of Pressure -Sensitive Flashing or Elastoform Flashing over all field splice intersections and overlapped tape ends and seal edges with Lap Sealant. D. Perimeter Attachment: Secure with manufacturer's recommended mechanical fasteners and rubber nailing strips at roof perimeter and roof penetration curbs and nailers. E. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods, materials and details recommended by the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details. Terminations: Make terminations according to manufacturers standard details and as indicated. G. Roof Walkways: Install as indicated on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to manufacturer's specifications and details. Record of Work: Keep a record indicating temperature and moisture conditions and the type and location of work being done during each day of roofing operations. Submit in accordance with submittals article in Part 1. VF 2001-59 07538-7 3.06 CLEANING Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07538-8 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Sections Includes: l . Flashing and counterflashing. 2. Parapet flashing cap. 3. Scuppers with downspouts and conductor heads. 4. Roof splash pans. 5. Overflow scupper flashing. 6. Pourable sealer pockets. 7. Other sheet metal flashing related to the above, indicated on the Drawings and not specified elsewhere. B. Related Sections: l . Wood Sheathing, Wood Blocking and Nailers: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Roofing and Filling Pourable Sealer Pockets: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 3. Sheet Metal in Contact with Roofing Membrane: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 4. Sheet Metal Roofing and Flashing Associated with Sheet Metal Roofing: Section 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing. C. Related Requirements: 1. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," 1993 edition, as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). 2. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Fourth Edition. 3. Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-28 for Class 1-90. 4. Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-49. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include: l . Overall layout of sheet metal work. 2. Type, thickness, and details of sheet metal components. 3. Joints, expansion joints, attachment and anchoring of sheet metal components. Closeout Submittals: l . Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. VF 2001-59 07600-1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Comply with: 1. Wind Resistance: Factory Mutual Class 1-90. B. Pre -Installation Conference: Attend conference with roofing installer, roofing -- manufacturer's representative, General Contractor and Architect in accordance with Sections 01600 and 07538. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. 1.06 WARRANTY R A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for sheet metal in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Include that system shall be watertight and weatherproof. 2. See Warranty in Section 07538. B. Finish: Provide manufacturer's warranty against cracking, peeling, chalking and fading for a period 20 years in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Galvanized Iron: ASTM A526 commercial quality sheet steel, ASTM A653, G90 commercial hot -dip galvanizing. Provide gages as indicated and specified, 24 gage minimum unless specified otherwise. 1. Prefinish: Coil stock coated with PPG Duranar fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar 500 resin. Finish and color as selected by Architect. Apply to the following: a. Parapet flashing cap. b. Flashing exposed on exterior walls. c. Scuppers with downspouts and conductor heads. d. Other items noted as prefinished on Drawings. 2. Other Flashing and Sheet Metal: Mill phosphatized for painted finish under Section 09900. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIAL A. Clips or Cleats: Some material and gage as sheet metal being installed. B. Nails and Fasteners: Same metal as metal being installed or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material — being fastened. C. Screws and Bolts: Round heads VF 2001-59 07600-2 D. Roofing Felt: ASTM D266, # 15 asphalt saturated felt. E. Building Paper: Resin sized unsaturated paper weighing six pounds per 100 square feet. Solder: ASTM 832, composition 50% tin and 50% lead. Use muriatic acid killed with zinc or soldering flux. G. Sealant: Approved type of polyurethane; see Section 07920. Roofers mastic is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Examine surfaces to receive flashing or sheet metal. Surfaces shall be smooth, sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections. Verify placement of wood blockings, inserts, nailing strips, cants, etc. Coordinate with Section 07538. B. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, workmanship and details shall comply with NRCA Manual, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, and FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. B. Edges: l . Edges: Hem all exposed edges, 1 /2" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Drips: Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drips. C. Joints: Make joints watertight and allow for expansion. l . Reinforce sheet metal corners as required. 2. Reinforcement: Conceal within finished assembly. D. Fastenings: Use concealed hook strips and fasteners. Exposed hook strips and fasteners not acceptable. VF 2001-59 07600-3 E. Expansion and Contraction 1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction and building movement in completed work. 2. Make watertight and weathertight throughout. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide expansion joints at maximum of 20 feet and not more than 4 feet from comers. Seal joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07920. 3.04 SHEET METAL A. Flashing and Counterflashing: As detailed of 24 gage galvanized iron. Lock and solder joints and hem exposed edges. B. Parapet Fascia: As detailed of 24 gage prefinished galvanized iron similar to SMACNA Figure 2-1. Cover blocking with roofing membrane. Miter, seam and seal corners. C. Scuppers With Downspouts: 1. Scuppers: As detailed of 24 gage galvanized iron. Similar to SMACNA Figure 1-26 and 1-27. Hem edges. Solder joints. Caulk around flanges with sealant. 2. Downspouts: As detailed of 20 gage galvanized iron similar to SMACNA Figure 1-32E with brackets similar to Figure 1-35B located 8'-0" max. o.c. 3. Conductor Heads: As detailed of 20 gage galvanized iron. Similar to SMACNA Figurel-25F. Hem edges. Solder joints. D. Overflow Scupper: As detailed of 24 gage galvanized iron similar to SMACNA Figure 1- 30. Hem edges. Solder joints. Calk around flanges with sealant. E. Pourable Sealer Pockets: Provide where several or irregular shaped items penetrate roofing membrane as required. Fabricate of 24 gage galvanized iron as indicated, approved by roofing manufacturer and similar to SMACNA Figure 4-16E. Seam and seal joints. Hem edges. Pocket filled under Section 07538. VF 2001-59 END OF SECTION 07600-4 SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing seam sheet metal canopy roofing. 2. All adjacent (lashings at eaves, gables, ridges, top of slope, etc. B. Related Section: l . Structural Metal Deck: Section 05310 Metal Deck. 2. Plywood Roof Sheathing, Wood Blocking and Nailers: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 3. Membrane Roofing: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 4. Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Sealants: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with the following. B. Factory Mutual Reference Standards: l . Loss Prevention Data 1-28 - Wind Loads to Roof Systems and Roof Deck Securement, June 1998 edition. 2. Loss Prevention Data 1-29 - Above -Deck Roof Components, June 1998 edition. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Reference Standards: 1. UL Standard Specification 790 - Test Standard for Determining the Fire Retardancy of Roof -covering Materials. 2. Roof Materials and Systems Directory. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide watertight, leak free roofing system capable of withstanding thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure. B. Wind Resistance Capacity: Provide system sufficient to resist wind pressures calculated in accordance with the 1997 edition of the Uniform Building Code or 100 mph basic wind speed and Exposure C. l . Fastening Details and Spacings: Designed by system manufacturer to meet specified wind speed criteria. C. Sheet Metal Roofing Subcontractor: Responsible for design and furnishing and installing the following components to comply with design criteria for wind speed and exposure specified: l . Sheet metal roofing and (lashings and proper attachment to plywood roof deck and structural supports. VF 2001-59 07610-1 11. List the.more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of construction. Centre Avenue Health & Rehab Center $8.6 million - complete 8-01 70,000 sf acute _care & rehab facility for Columbine Health Systems Bank of Colorado $2.0 million completed 4-01 15,000 sf 2-story office Bldg Boardwalk Office Bldg., $1.5 million, completed 11-01, 14,500 sf Office Bldg. 12. List your major equipment available for this contract. All terrain forklift CASE skidsteers laser levels and 2 ton dump truck 13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project: Osborn Hardware Supply , Ft. Collins, CO Ross Office Warehouse Building & Honeywell, Fort Collins CO Hercules Industries-0ffice & Warehouse Ft. Collins CO Corcoran Wyco Office & Warehouse Building, Fort Collins, CO 14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including officers: See Attached Resumes 15. Credit available: $ One Million Dollars 16. Bank reference: Bank of Colorado 17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the OWNER? Yes 18. Are you licensed as a General CONTRACTOR? Yes If yes, in what city, county and state? See Attached What class, license and numbers? B-91 19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract? Yes If yes, what percent of total contract? 807 and to whom? Pending Bidding Review 20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time? No If DETAIL yes, 7/96 Section 00420 Page 2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate panel layout, (lashings, accessories, and attachments. B. Samples: Submit color samples for selection and acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: _ 1. Design Calculations: Submit system design calculations stamped by professional engineer indicating compliance with specified wind speed criteria. Indicate fastener pull out strength and performance of clips, anchors and other accessories. 2. Certification: Submit written certification, stamped by some professional engineer .t who prepared design calculations indicating system design meets specified wind _. speed/exposure classification criteria. 3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: See Section 01600. Submit one copy for Architect's information. Maintain one copy on site until completion of roofing system installation. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in installation of metal roofs. 1. Installer: Manufacturer approved. 2. Experience: Company which has continuously installed metal roofing in State of _. Colorado for five years. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING _ A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver and store panels and accessories in dry place to avoid condensation and contact with materials which might cause staining, such as lime, cement, fresh concrete �. or chemicals. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide two year written warranty covering materials and installation for metal _ roofing system in accordance with Section 01780. B. Manufacturers Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's 20 year warranty that finish will not crack, peel, chalk, or fade in accordance with Section 01780. VF 2001-59 07610-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Berridge Manufacturing Company, www.berddge.com. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Standing Seam Roofing: Berridge Curved Tee -Panel snap -lock metal standing seam panels or accepted substitute. 1. Material: 24 gage hot -dipped galvanized steel. 2. Panels: One-piece form rolled. 3. Seams: 123/4 inch o.c. Snap -on seams shall be V in height and shall contain the Berridge factory -applied Extruded Vinyl Weather Seal Insert to prevent siphoning of moisture through the standing seam.. C. Finish: Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 finish supplier. l . Color: Selected by Architect from standard colors. 2. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation. D. Clips: Manufacturer's standard. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing Caps and Fascias: Match panel system. B. Sealant: Polyurethane in accordance with Section 07920. Roofers mastic is not allowed. 2.03 FABRICATION Panels shall be site -formed with the Berridge Model SS-14 Portable Roll Former in continuous lengths with radius as indicated and to conform to solid -sheathed curved substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine substrate before beginning installation. 3. Surfaces: Smooth, sound, clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. VF 2001-59 07610-3 4. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer: 3.02 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install standing seam metal roofing on plywood sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and accepted shop drawings. 1. Start erection of panels so sheets may be held true to line. Hold horizontal lines straight and level and vertical lines plumb. 2. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard clips and fasteners, spaced in accordance with approved shop drawings. a. Exposed fasteners not allowed. 3. Seal seams with sealant. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07610-4 SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof hatch. B. Related Sections: l . Membrane Roofing: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current catalog literature for each product supplied under this Section. Indicate details, accessories and attachments. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bilco. 2. Babcock Davis. 3. Inryco 4. O'Keeffe's Inc. 5. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Description: Bilco Type 5-20, 30 inch x 36 inch, paint bond galvanized steel. l . Safety Post: Bilco Ladder -Up Safety Post. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Roof Accessories: Securely install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce watertight assembly in coordination with roofing installer. l . Coordinate installation of components of this Section with installation of roofing materials and base flashings. 2. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cements with work of this section to ensure water tightness. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07720-1 SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Firestopping and Smokeseals as indicated on the Drawings as well as the following areas: a. All openings in fire -rated walls both empty and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, cable trays, conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. b. At tops of fire rated partitions abutting underside of roof decks. B. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Drywall Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Unit Masonry Assemblies: Section 04810. 3. Joint Sealants: Section 07920. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Division 15 and 16. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Types of firestop to be used for each condition shall be the responsibility of the installer and shall comply with all specified regulatory requirements. Firestop materials in exposed areas shall be compatible with specified finishes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's printed product data indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria for each product proposed for use. B. Installation Instructions: Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of firestop required by the project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firestopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Regulatory Requirements: Firestopping materials proposed for use on this project shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 fire tests. The F rating and T rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.03 inches of water column. VF2001-59 07840-1 C. Mockup: Prepare job mock-up of each system proposed for use in the project as directed by Architect. Approved mock-ups may be left in place as part of the finished project and will constitute the standard for remaining work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages fully identified with Manufacturer's U name, trade name and UL label. B. Materials shall be stored off the ground and protected from environmental conditions as required by Manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements. 1.07 WARRANTY Firestop Contractor shall warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements as herein specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: l . The Rector Seal Corp. (Metacaulk) 2. 3M Fire Protection Products 3. Tremco Tremstop 4. Hilti Firestop Systems _ 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Materials: _ 1. Materials shall be free of asbestos. 2. Materials shall provide a Flame (F) and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated, as tested per ASTM E-814. 3. Materials shall conform to all applicable governing codes. 4. Use pillow type firestopping or intumescent firestop blocks at cable trays and other large openings through fire -rated walls and floors. 5. All materials shall be compatible with the material penetrating the fire assembly. C. Accessories: Furnish all accessory materials such as fire sating batts, sleeves, sheet metal, _ sealants, etc. necessary to complete fire stopping systems unless furnished by others. VF 2001-59 07840-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: l . Contractor shall inspect and verify that the surface and condition of the substrates and all sleeves or blockouts furnished by others have no defects or errors that would interfere with the installation of the firestopping materials. 2. Notify Architect in writing of any defects or errors in workmanship. Do not proceed with work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Acceptance: Start of installation of firestopping shall constitute the Contractors acceptance of surfaces and conditions of substrates, sleeves and blockouts. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials which may affect the proper bond or installation of the firestops in strict accordance with Manufacturers written instructions. B. Provide primers as require which conform to Manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions. C. Do not apply firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer, curing compound, water repellant or other coating unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required in compliance with Manufacturer's instructions. D. Mask where necessary to protect adjoining surfaces. Remove excess material and stains on surfaces as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions to provide a Flame (F) and Temperature (T) rating of at least one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. B. Ensure that all accessories such as anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves, supports and other materials used in the actual fire test are installed. C. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure an effective smokeseal. D. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Firestop Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect if the firestopping systems herein specified cannot meet the requirements of the specification. VF 2001-59 07840-3 B. Firestop Contractor shall examine firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this specification. C. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code authorities. D. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost. 3.05 CLEANING A. When finished work will be visible, clean adjacent surfaces in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. B. If visible in the finished work, remove temporary dams after initial cure of firestops. C. Correct staining and discoloring on adjacent surfaces. D. Remove all debris and excess materials entirely from site and leave work in a neat and clean condition. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 07840-4 SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Providing all caulking and sealant indicated on Drawings, specified herein, and not specified under other sections. In general, seal all openings indicated on Drawings and at other locations requiring sealant to seal visually and against infiltration from air and water, including but not limited to following: 1. Expansion joints in concrete paving and sidewalks. 2. Expansion joints and control joints in exposed interior concrete floor slabs. 3. Flashing reglet and retainers. 4. Exterior wall joints. 5. Masonry control joints. 6. Isolation joints, between structure and other elements. 7. Joints at penetrations of non -fire rated walls, decks and floors by piping and other service and equipment. 8. Joints between items of equipment and other construction. 9. Joints between door and window frames and adjacent materials, exterior and interior. 10. Bedding for door thresholds. 11. Open joints between dissimilar materials as required to close and conceal jointing of the work. 12. Construction and expansion joints, joints between dissimilar materials; joints around windows, door frames, louvers, and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall; interior walls as detailed or specified. 13. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: 1. Semi -Rigid Sealant for Fab Shop Area Concrete Floor Slab: Section 03300 Cast -in - Place Concrete. 2. Sealants Related to Concrete Paving: Section 02750 Rigid Pavement and Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 3. Sealants Related to Roofing: Section 07538 Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane Roofing. 4. Sbalants Related to Flashing: Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Glazing Sealants: Section 08800 Glazing. 6. Acoustical Sealants: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each material and location of application. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 for each type of sealant for color selection. VF 2001-59 07920-1 C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in sealant application. l . Experience: Continuously installed sealants in State of Colorado for five years. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send qualified technical representative to project site, for purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver in original unopened containers and store in area not subject to extreme heat or cold. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply exterior sealants during wet weather or when outside temperature is below 40OF or apply interior sealants when inside temperature is below 60°F. - 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide three year written warranty covering materials and installation for sealants in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty: Require installer, at no cost to Owner, to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, color retention, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any manner not clearly specified as inherent quality of material by submitted - manufacturer's data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT BACKING MATERIAL A. General: Size joint backing material for minimum 30% compression when inserted in joint. _ Material: Round rod or semi -circular type. B. Manufacturers 1. Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam. 2. Sonneborn, Sonofoam. 3. Schlegel Manufacturing Company, Schlegelfoam. 4. Denver Foam. 5. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. V F 2001-59 07920-2 21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL See Attached What company? Canal Insurance Co. 22. What are your company's bonding limitations? No limits established 23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at 3:00 pm this 22nd day of March.. 2002. Drahota Construction Co. Name of Bidder By: Terry L. Drahota L� Title: President / CEO State of Colorado County of Larimer Terry L. Drahota being duly sworn deposes and says that he is President CEO of Drahota Construction Co. and that (name of organization) the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this 22nd day of March 200 o ry Public Jonna R. Allison My commission expires 7/96 10-27-03 Section 00420 Page 3 2.02 SEALANT MATERIAL A. Manufacturers: 1. DAP Incorporated. 2. Parr, Inc. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Sika Corporation 5. Sonneborn Building Products. 6. Tremco Manufacturing Company, 7. Mameco International. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Silicone Sealant Manufacturers: l . General Electric. 2. Dow Corning. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Acceptable Materials 1. Interior and Under Thresholds: Latex acrylic, ASTM C834. 2. Exterior: Two component polyurethane, FS TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A, non -sag. 3. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4. Sealant at Lavatories: Silicone tub sealant. 5. Sealant at Concrete Paving and Interior Floor Slabs: a. Fab Shop Area Floor: Semi -rigid epoxy in accordance with Section 03300. b. Other Interior Areas: Two -component self -leveling polyurethane, FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A, pourable type. c. Exterior Concrete Pavements: See Sections 02750 and 02776. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from standard colors. 2.03 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant -contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Inspect joints to be sealed to application of any work under this section. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of any joints which cannot be put into proper condition to receive sealants in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. VF 2001-59 07920-3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces: 1. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Mask edges, if required, to protect adjoining surfaces and produce a straight finish line. 3. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant. _ 4. Do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces which have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other - treatment of coating. Remove coating or treatment joint surfaces before installing _ sealant. 5. Etch concrete masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant -. manufacturer's printed instruction indicated that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid, neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation. B. Priming: If required, prime surfaces which are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended or standard primer, after surfaces have been prepared as specified. Before use, check primers for discoloration and dirt pick-up on adjacent surfaces. If staining occurs, after exposure, take adequate measures to prevent primer from being applied over face of adjacent porous materials by masking or other suitable measures. C. Joint Backing: 1. Joints: Depth necessary to provide for specified allowable thickness of sealant and also required backing where and as specified. Provide backing of extent and type as specified and required to provide for allowable depth of sealant. 2. Back-up Materials for Sealants: Non -staining, compatible with sealant and primer. resilient nature, and as recommended by manufacturer of sealant. a. Size and Shape: As required by width of joint and specified. _ b. Do not use materials impregnated with oil, solvents or bituminous materials. 3. Compress backing material minimum of 30%when inserted in joint. Backing material for upper portion of joints shall be round rod or semi -circular in cross-section where in _ contact with sealant. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Install where indicated and as required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that sealants will Deform properly. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Metal Window Sills: Set in full bed of polyurethane sealant. B. Exterior Thresholds: Set in full bed of latex acrylic sealant. C. Seal Joints: Apply sealants in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets, using ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun. VF 2001-59 07920-4 2. Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will not extrude from joints. 3. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean - adjoining surfaces. 4. In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry. 5. Use anti -tack agent where necessary to protect freshly applied sealant from public traffic and dirt. 6. Slightly recess joints to facilitate painter's line. Handtool and finish joints throughout construction. 7. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. D. Concrete Expansion and Control Joints: Blow clean with compressed air. Pour full but do not over -fill. E. Sinks and Lavatories: Fill joints between dissimilar materials with silicone sealant. Workmanship: Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete 'Wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. 2. Where horizontal joints are between horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. G. Joint Sizes: Install sealants to depths as indicated or, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within following general limitations: 1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not more than 1 /2" deep or less than 1 /4" deep. 2. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds. fill joints to depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint width. H. Spillage: I. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either primer/sealer or sealant. 2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. Do not damage adjoining surfaces or finishes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Samples: Where directed by Architect, cut out and remove total of three samples consisting of undisturbed sealant and back-up material from joint. Samples shall be 6" in length. Reseal cut out areas with same materials. V F 2001-59 07920-5 3.05 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Curing: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. B. Protection: 1. Advise General Contractor of procedures required for protection of sealants during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. 2. Protect surfaces from damage. Clean soiled surfaces immediately. Replace any damaged material which cannot be cleaned with new material. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07920-6 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow metal doors. 2. Hollow metal frames. 3. Hollow metal borrowed lights. 4. Hollow metal entrances. 5. Hollow metal window frames. 6. Hollow metal transom frames. 7. Hollow metal trash enclosure gates. 8. Other hollow metal items. B. Related Sections 1. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 2. Access Panels: Section 08310 Access Doors and Panels. 3. Aluminum Entrances: Section 08411 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. 4. Hardware including Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 5. Glazing: Section 08800. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: I. NAAMM Standard HMMA 861 or ANSI A250.8/SDI 100-1998. 2. ANSI A 115 Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metalwork shall be submitted under Section 08710 directly to hollow metal manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: l . Fire Rating: Provide fire rating label acceptable to local building code authority on doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. If any door or frame scheduled V F 2001-59 081 10-1 to be fire -rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect prior to submission of bids. 2. NFPA Standard No. 80. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Store frames in manner to prevent twisting. C. Doors with dimples or dents will be rejected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers 1. Amweld. 2. Curries Company. 3. Elco Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Gateway Metal Products, Inc. 5. North Central Supply, Inc. 6. Southwestern Hollow Metal Company. 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Frames for hollow metal and wood doors, entrances, windows and borrowed lights, etc. indicated to be hollow metal shall be of design sections as detailed and — assembled as indicated. B. Gages: — 1 . Frames on Exterior Walls: 14 gage steel. 2. Frames on Interior Walls: 16 gage steel. 3. Loose Glazing Beads: Not less than 20 gage steel, corners butted. C. Construction: Construct frames encompassing one or more doors with sidelights or transoms, and steel window walls, etc., in rigid units of as large size as practical to reduce to minimum number of job -fabricated joints. 1. Joints and Connections Including Job -Fabricated Joints: Welded and ground and entire assembly reinforced and braced as required to ensure absolute rigidity. 2. Provide expansion joints as indicated or required. 3. Where so indicated or as required, provide channel stiffening within and securely welded to frame member. — 4. Do not used exposed screws except where specifically accepted. D. Accessories: 1. Reinforcement for Hardware: Machine frames for attachment of hardware, including mortising, reinforcing, drilling and tapping for hinges. a. Butt Hinges: Seven gage, 12' long. V F 2001-59 08110-2 b. Closers: 10 gage, 12" long. c. Strikes, Flush Bolts and Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 12 gage or equivalent. 2. Anchors: Furnish anchors of type and number required for anchoring frames to structure, partitions, etc. as follows: a. Three jamb anchors on seven foot high jamb. b. Four jamb anchors on jambs over seven feet. Wire anchors will not be allowed. Provide such installation instructions as are necessary to ensure proper installation of anchors. 3. Silencers: Drill stop of lock jamb of each interior frame for installation of pneumatic rubber door silencers. Silencers shall be furnished under Section 08710, numbers as indicated on schedule. 4. Joints: Conceal welded joints in two-sided mullions or similar sections behind glazing stops. Continuous weld and grind smooth exposed joints. 5. Glazing Stops: Provide removable metal stops, screwed to frame, at borrowed lights and window walls. See Section 08800 for glazing clearance requirements. a. Unless indicated otherwise, glazing stops shall be 5/8" x 3/4' or 3/4" x 3/4" cold - rolled channel, shaped as required or detailed and hand fitted to each opening. b. Butt Joints: Square and true and tightly fitted. c. Fasten to frame with metal screws 18" o.c., flathead, countersunk. Do not over - tighten to cause indentations or puckering at screws. Use vandalproof screws at exterior stops. E. Hinges: Install mortar protection box behind each hinge cut. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Doors indicated to be hollow metal shall be hollow metal, flush, swing type doors of types indicated. B. Construction: Construct hollow metal doors from 16 gage steel, fully welded, ground smooth and completely sound and fire insulated. Provide thermal insulation in exterior doors. Manufacture hollow metal doors and panels with flush tops, sides and bottoms. Plastic inserts are not acceptable. All vertical seams shall be fully welded. Lock seams or epoxy filled seams are not acceptable. C. Labels: Provide fire rated construction and UL labels where listed in door schedule. D. Hardware: Mortise and reinforce doors to receive hardware. 1. Hinges: Seven gage steel plate, 9", welded to continuous 16 gage interior edge channels or equivalent. Drill and tap. Use of coined or extruded holes not acceptable. 2. Locks, Latches, Push/Pulls and Panic Devices: 12 gage steel spot welded to 16 gage interior edge channels or equivalent and designed to provide adequate support and reinforcement for required hardware. 3. Closers: Not less than 12 gage internal reinforcement. Provide special attention to reinforcing doors where closers are to be bolted through door. E. Insulation: Foam or batt type. Honeycomb core is not acceptable. VF 2001-59 081 10-3 2.04 FINISH •-- A. Cleaning and Primer: 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, rust and scale to insure paint adherence. - Apply filler to doors where required to produce a smooth surface. 2. Doors and Frames to be Painted: Apply one coat of factory primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Frames: 1. Set steel frames accurately in accordance with details, straight and free of twist with — head level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely -- brace until surrounding work is completed. Provide deflection clearances at frame heads where indicated. 2. Fire -Rated Openings: Place frames and provide clearances in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 3. Field Welds: Make welds full length of joints. Remove splatter and grind exposed — welds to match adjacent surfaces. Provide Architect with ample notice to review welds before finish operations begin. " 4. Wherever possible leave spreader bars in place until frames are securely anchored. 5. Jambs shall be filled with grout under Section 04810 where frames occur in concrete or masonry walls. B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 1. Clearance Tolerances: a. Head: 1 /8" maximum. b. Jamb: 1/8"maximum. c. Between Doors (Pair): 1 /8" maximum. d. Sill without Threshold: 1 /2" maximum. C. Miscellaneous Items: Install closures, panels, fillers, etc. as indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 081 10-4 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flush wood doors. 2. Glazed wood doors. 3. Factory prefitting and premachining. B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under This Section: l . Glazing stops. C. Related Sections: 1. Custom Wood Door Frames: Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork. 2. Welded Hollow Metal Frames: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 3. Glazing: Section 08800 Glazing. 4. Hardware: Section 08710 Door Hardware 5. Field Finish: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors. 2. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th edition, Version 1.2, 1999. 3. NWWDA "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate location, size, elevation, details of construction, hardware blocking, fire rating, factory preparation requirements for each door type. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on wood doors will be submitted under Section 08710 directly to wood door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide fire rating label acceptable to local building code authority for doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. V F 2001-59 08210-1 If any door or frame scheduled to be fire -rated cannot qualify for appropriate - labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect prior to submission of bids. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to building until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete work is completed and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of locality. C. Storage: Stack doors flat and off floor. Do not drag doors across one another. D. Protection: Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with "On -Site Care" recommendations of NW WDA Care and Finishing of Wood Doors and with manufacturers recommendations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Interior Door Warranty: Provide written warranty in accordance with Section 01780 for solid core doors for life of installation to include reasonable cost of rehanging and refinishing. 1. Warranty: Cover warping (bow, cup or twist). photographing of construction below -- face veneers. and tolerance limitations of NWWDA. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUSH DOORS — A. Manufacturers: 1. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. — 2. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 3. Eggers Industries. 4. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company (Fenestra Wood Doors). — 5 Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Interior Solid Core Flush Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4" unless otherwise indicated. 2. Faces: Plain sawn Maple with matching Maple edges for transparent finish. 3. AWI Quality Grade: Custom 4. Finish: Field finish under Section 09900. 5. Under Cutting: Preserve full bottom rail. 6. Solid Core Door AWI Construction Type: PC-5 or PC-7 particleboard core. a. Particleboard Core: 28 pound high density particleboard. Formaldehyde free. 7. Fire Rated Door AWI Construction Type: As indicated. a. Fire Rated Mineral Core Doors: Provide lock blocks. Provide panic blocks for panic hardware. b. Provide factory prefitting and premachining as required for fire rated labels. VF 2001-59 08210-2 SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over 15% of the contract. ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR Pending final bid results and scope review N/A No subcontractors over 15% 7/96 Section 00430 Page 1 2.02 GLASS STOPS A. Non -Fire Rated Wood Glass Stops: Match door veneer. 2.03 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory. 1. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. 3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings with hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. Tolerances: Comply with NW WDA tolerance requirements for prefitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Conditioning: Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not Previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware. brush apply exterior seal coat to all job site cut or planed surfaces. l . Sealer: Type recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. l . Fit to width by planing and fit to height. In no case shall doors be cut down to opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactured. 2. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions. VF 2001-59 08210-3 B. Clearance: 1. Non -Fire Rated Doors: a. Jamb: 1 /8", 1 /8" bevel in 2". b. Head: 1/8". c. Between Double Doors: 1 /8". d. Bottom at Decorative Floor Finish or Covering: 1 /2". e. Bottom at Threshold: 1 /4" between bottom of door and top of threshold. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Comply with applicable building code. C. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, - brush apply an exterior seal coat to job site cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended _ by door manufacturer. 2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. D. Glazing Stops: Temporarily factory installed. Permanent installation in field. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project. C. Replacement: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. 1. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges of veneer. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08210-4 SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Access doors into pipe and utility spaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Mechanical Equipment: Division 15 Mechanical. 2. Furnishing Access Doors as Specified in This Section for Electrical Equipment: Division 16 Electrical. 3. Installation of Access Doors: Appropriate sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Located in Masonry, Concrete, Gypsum Drywall: l . Milcor Style M 2. MM Systems Boico Style C 3. Karp Model DSC-214M 4. JL Industries Model TM 5. Nystrom Building Products NW 6. Williams Brothers WB-GP 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Fire -Rated Access: In fire rated walls or assemblies, provide access doors and panels with same rating as that indicated for the wall or assembly in which door is installed. 1. Milcor Fire -Rated Access Door 2. MM Systems Boico Fire Rated Access Door Series F 3. Karp Model KRP-150 FR 4. JL Industries Model FD 5. Nystrom Building Products IW 6. Williams Brothers WB-FR 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. C. Description: 1. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings or as required to properly service mechanical or electrical equipment. 2. Locking Devices: Key operated cam locks. 3. Finish: a. Toilet Rooms: Stainless steel. b. All Others: Prime for painted finish under Section 09900. VF 2001-59 08310-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mechanical or Electrical Access: Access doors required for access to mechanical or electrical equipment shall be provided under Division 15 or Division 16 and installed by the trade responsible for the material in which door is located. B. General Access: Furnish access door indicated on Drawings for general access to be installed by trade responsible for material in which door is located. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08310-2 SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overhead sectional doors. B. Related Sections: l . Steel Frame: Section 05500 Metal Fabrications. 2. Electric Power: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OVERHEAD DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Overhead Door Corp.. 2. Raynor Manufacturing Co. 3. Crawford Door 4. McKee Door 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Manufacturer and Type: Raynor ThermaSeal Standard insulated steel sectional overhead doors. l . Wind Load: Reinforce doors to withstand 25 psf wind load with maximum deflection of door in horizontal position of 1/120 of door width. C. Door Sections: Sandwich construction, 1 % inch thick sections. 1. Insulation: Injected polyurethane foam insulating core type with an R-value of 16.4 based on ASTM C-518. 2. Interior and Exterior Steel Facing Panels: Roll formed from commercial quality hot - dipped galvanized steel, Class G60, in accordance with ASTM A924 and A653. a. Exterior Sheet Thickness: Minimum 25 gage. b. Interior Sheet Thickness: Minimum 26 gage. c. Texture: Stucco embossed. d. Finish: Factory painted White. D. Track: Two inch galvanized steel. Provide standard lift type. l . Support: Provide necessary supplemental framing for support of tracks. VF 2001-59 08361-1 E. Hardware: Counterbalance doors with torsion springs and galvanized lift cable. Provide standard hardware for inside latching. No cylinders required. F. Weatherstripping: l . Weatherstrip doors with perimeter seal system consisting of material at which infiltration, at 25 miles per hour approach velocity, will not exceed when door is closed. a. 2.4 cfm per foot at jamb, 4.2 ctm at head and 0.6 at floor. b. 0.6 cfm per foot between sections. 2. Floor: U-type vinyl. G. Operation: Power hoist operated. Provide size motors as manufacturer recommends for type and size doors. Locate jackshafts as indicated. Provide in 120 volt single phase. Provide chain hoists for emergency operation. Electrically interlock chain hoist to electric operator with 24 volt control. H. Controls: Provide and locate controls as indicated including: l . Three button interior wall mounted controls. 2. Provide hand held radio controls with wall mounted interior switch for closing. Supply one hand held controller for each door. 3. Provide door bottoms with four -wire, fail-safe electric sensing edge operating external reversing device. _ I. Vision Panels: Provide fully glazed sash section with aluminum stiles and rails and double pane clear insulating glass panels as indicated. _ J. Support: Provide necessary supplemental framing for support of tracks. _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install overhead doors according to manufacturer's recommendations and accepted shop drawings. B. Electrical: Provide electrical motor operators and controls. Conduit, wiring and connections are provided under Division 16. C. Adjustment: Adjust to work freely with hardware functioning properly. Re -adjust at completion of job if directed by Architect. END OF SECTION VF2001-59 08361-2 SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum entrance framing. 2. Aluminum doors. 3. Aluminum door hardware. 4. Aluminum window framing system. 5. Operable vents. B. Products Installed but not Furnished Under This Section: l . Cylinders: Section 08710 Finish Hardware C. Related Sections: 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Section 01741 Final Cleaning. 2. Sealing Joints: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 3. Glazing: Section 08800. 4. Steel Doors and Frames: Section 081 10. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Wind load: Fabricate and install framing systems to withstand wind forces calculated in accordance with UBC, 1997 edition for basic wind speed of 100 mph, Exposure C, with maximum deflection of 1 /175 of span. Reinforce framing systems as required to meet criteria. 2. Air Infiltration: Not exceed 0.06 CFM/sq. ft. of fixed area in accordance with ASTM E283. 3. Water Infiltration: No water penetration at test pressure of 6.24 psf in accordance with ASTM E331. 4. Fabricate door and frame system to withstand 40 years of 4,000 open/close cycles per day. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Calculations: Include calculations for review indicating framing meets design criteria. 2. Include special glazing stop and other associated components. Indicate anchors, joint system, expansion provisions and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. VF2001-59 08411-1 C. Samples: Submit three samples of aluminum finish for acceptance in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Make samples on 12" long extrusions or 6" square sheets of alloy to be used for system. 2. Architect's Review: For color and texture only: D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. E. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted in aluminum doors and frames shall be submitted under Section 08710 directly to aluminum door and frame supplier -- immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in aluminum entrance and storefront fabrication and installations. 1. Experience: Continuously fabricated and installed entrances and storefront for five _ years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Store frames and doors in positions necessary to prevent twisting. Do not install frames or doors with dimples or dents. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide five year written warranty covering materials and installation for entrances and storefront in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty to include watertight condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Storefront System Manufacturers 1. Kawneer -- 2. Tubelite 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. The Specifications for _ exterior aluminum frames are based on Kawneer. Another manufacturer may be considered as a Request for Substitution, but only if all of the types of frames and - glazing options that are specified are available from that manufacturer, and only if _ that manufacturer offers a finish color similar to Kawneer anodized color selected by Architect: Requests for substitutions are to be submitted per Section 01600. Note par. ] A 0, Contractor Representation. Requests will not be considered unless product data for all types of specified frames and glazing options are included and physical samples of finishes are included. V F 2001-59 �1. 1l2bl 2.02 DOOR AND FRAMES A. Framing System: Kawneer Trifab VG 451 T thermally broken framing system or accepted substitute. - 1. Exterior Frames: Kawneer Trifab VG 451 T thermally broken framing system or accepted substitute. a. Glazing: Inside glaze with one inch insulating glass as indicated on Drawings. See Section 08800. 2. Interior Frames: Kawneer Trifab VG 451 framing system or accepted substitute. a. Glazing: Y4 inch tempered glass as indicated on Drawings. See Section 08800. 3. Provide aluminum frame sections in sizes and shapes indicated. B. Framing System Thicknesses, Reinforcement and Accessories: 1. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.093' 2. Reinforcement: If required as determined by manufacturer, add concealed steel reinforcement to meet design requirements. 3. Hardware Reinforcement: Provide 3/16" concealed steel reinforcement for hardware including door hinges, closers, panic devices, etc. 4. Accessories: Provide necessary fittings and accessories for a complete, functional and watertight frame installation. Provide matching aluminum break metal, closures, etc. where detailed or required. C. Exterior Window Glazing: 1 inch insulating glass in accordance with Section 08800. Tempered where indicated. D. Glazed Doors: Kawneer 500 Wide Stile with '/4 inch tempered glass or one inch insulating, tempered glass as indicated. See Section 08800. Equip with Paneline Exit Device where indicated. E. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating based on Kynar 500. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.03 OPERABLE VENTS A. Operable Windows: Kawneer Sealair Series GLASSvent Project -Out awning units or accepted substitute suitable for installation in storefront framing system supplied under this Section. 1. Frame Depth: 2 3/4 inches. 2. Glazing: Structural silicone glazed to match fixed windows. See Section 08800. 3. Grade: ANSI/AAMA 101, Class and Grade P-C70. B. Window Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware. l . Cast white bronze cam locking handles. 2. Steel4-bar hinges. C. Insect Screens: Provide for all operable vents. 1. Aluminum Frames: Finished to match window frames. 2. Screen: Aluminum screen cloth. 3. Splines: Extruded vinyl. V F 2001-59 0841 1-3 1 000C .c:a�c[a A. Cylinders: Furnished under Section 08710 and installed under this section. B. Exit Devices: See Drawings for types required. 1. Kawneer Poneline II CR-90 concealed rod exit device where indicated. — 2. Cross Rail Finish: Color to match door. C. Other Hardware: Provide Hardware as Follows: Each Door to Have: - Pivots 2 offset type _ Closer Kawneer SAM II concealed overhead Push/Pull Kawneer CP II/CO-9 Lock: Adams Rite MS 1850 a Deadlock with #4089 - Exit Indicator and #4066 Thumbtum Threshold 1 Pemko No. 157-A Weathering Kawneer Sealair D. Hardware Finish: US26D unless indicated otherwise. ` PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine openings for aluminum framing to determine that they are proper size, plumb, square and level before installation of frames is started, 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. — B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Frames: Securely install frames according to manufacturer's recommendations and accepted shop drawings. Coat ferrous metals in direct contact with aluminum with zinc chromate primer as electrical insulator. B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and recommendations. C. Adjustment: Hang and adjust doors to work freely with hardware functioning properly. Re -adjust at completion of project if directed by Architect. V F 2001-59 08411-4 TERRYL. DRAHOTA 12 Forest Hills Lane Fort Collins, CO 80524 POSITION: President and C.E.O. WORK HISTORY: 1979 - Present: C.E.O. and President - Drahota Construction Co., Fort Collins, CO Associated General Contractors of America Board of Directors Responsibilities include overall decision making, involved with estimating, field activities, and financial planning, setting company goals and policy. 1972 - 1979: President - Wild Rose Builders, Ft. Collins, CO Responsibilities included overall decision making and field supervision. 1969 - 1972: Construction supervisor and carpenter for various construction companies in the Fort Collins area (Wood Bros. Bartran Homes, W.D. Smith Construction) EDUCATION: INTERESTS: 1965-1969: Colorado State University B.S. Degree in Finance Attended seminars and classes in Colorado relating to construction uniform building codes, construction scheduling, and construction law. Skiing, biking, fly fishing, sailing, jogging and reading 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Tests: Water test entrance and storefront system upon completion in presence of Architect. Conduct test using hose without nozzle and thoroughly wet entire glass surface. Retest until watertight. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protection: Cover aluminum doors and framing during spray painting, drywalling or other construction operations that might cause damage. Complete cleandown of masonry prior to installation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave aluminum doors and framing in clean condition. l . Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 01741. B. Touch Up: Touch up damaged finished surfaces. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08411-5 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Door hardware. 2. Security key card reader locks. B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under This Section: l . Cylinders for Aluminum Doors and Entrances: Section 08411. C. Related Sections: l . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Wood Doors: Section 08210. 3. Threshold Sealant: Section 07920 Joint Sealants. 4. Cabinet Hardware: Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork. 5. Automatic Door Operators: Section 08744. 6. Key Storage and Control Equipment: Section 08771. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Templates: Within 10 days after receipt of accepted hardware schedule, submit four sets of templates and schedules to: 1. Hollow metal door and frame supplier. 2. Wood door supplier. 3. Aluminum door and frame supplier. Wiring and Riser Diagrams: Equipment supplier shall furnish General Contractor, electrical wiring and riser diagrams for low voltage security equipment specified in this Section. Provide elevation drawings indicating door numbers, associated electronic security equipment such as power supplies and interconnections between door system components, control wiring for electric locks, control panels, indicator signal lights and sounding devices which are contained in the approved hardware Submittals. Elevations shall indicate standard electrical enclosures detailing the manufacturer's space and attaching requirements. C. Contract Closeout Submittals l . Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Include printed sheets from manufacturer covering hardware furnished. Include following information: a. Name, address and telephone number of hardware suppliers. b. Maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of operating hardware including: (1) Locks (2) Exit Devices VF 2001-59 08710-1 (3) Closers 2. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Hardware supplier shall have in his employ regular member, in good standing, of American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. B. Regulatory Requirements: l . Provide Underwriters Laboratory listed hardware for fire or accident hazard where scheduled or required to maintain rating of opening. 2. Conform with ADA and ANSI handicapped accessibility requirements. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver hardware to job site only after proper provision for storage have been made. C. Labels: Properly package and label each item to indicate exact location for which intended. D. Check -In: Hardware supplier shall authorize his representative to be present when finish hardware is delivered to site and shall check in each item and turn over to Contractor for ' storage in secure place under lock and key. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide following written warranties covering hardware in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Warranty against mechanical failure of door closers for five year period. 2. Warranty against failure of parts for hardware except door closers for two year period. Warranty shall include cylinder locks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS .- 2.01 KEYING, KEYS AND MASTER KEYS A. Keying Schedule: Key all cylinders alike or different as directed by Owner. Be responsible to schedule meeting with Owner to obtain Owner's keying requirements. B. Construction Keys: All exterior cylinders shall be construction master keyed. At time of Owner occupancy, make construction keys inoperative. Provide six extractor keys. C. Master Key: Cylinders shall be master keyed. Provide total of six building master keys. D. Keys: Provide two keys for each interior cylinder keyed. Stamp keys and cylinders with door number. VF 2001-59 08710-2 E. Key Delivery: l . Master Keys and Submaster Keys and Identified Change Keys: Delivery direct from factory by registered mail in safety envelopes directly to Owner 2. Other Keys: Mail other keys to General Contractor at his office. - 2.02 SECURITY KEY CARD READER LOCKS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: l . Soundcraft, Inc., 818/882-0020 2. LeFebure Corporation, 800/562-5889 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Key Card Reader: LeFebure Door Gard 234 Keypad/Card Reader System or approved substitute. Fully programmable from keypad. C. Electronic Locks: Division 16 Electrical 2.03 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws and bolts for proper installation. Provide suitable sizes, type and finish to harmonize with hardware. l . Hardware Attached to Metal: Templated and fastened with machine screws long enough to penetrate 1 /2" thick reinforcing. B. Silencers: Provide rubber silencers for doors installed in interior metal frames. Provide three silencers for each door and two for each pair of doors. C. Cylinders: Furnish cylinders of same keyway unless otherwise specified. D. Stops: Provide wall mounted stops where possible. E. Locksets: Grade 1. Closers: Comply with ADA criteria. l . Automatic Door Operators: Section 08744. G. Door Hardware Finish: US26D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide factory hardware technician to be present to assist and instruct those applying finish hardware. B. Fastening: Furnish items of hardware with attachment screws, bolts, nuts, etc. as required to attach hardware to type of material involved and with finish to match adjacent hardware. 1. Make attachments to metal by template machine screws. VF 2001-59 08710-3 2. Through -bolt hardware such as door closers, forearm shoes of closers, holding devices and panic hardware mounted on doors or panels. 3. Attach hardware to masonry or concrete with expansion bolts or similar drilled anchors to develop full strength of attached device. Set expansion anchors in solid masonry not mortar joints. C. Weatherstripping and Thresholds: 1. Weatherstripping and Soundstripping: Run full height of both jambs and full width of " head. 2. Thresholds and Door Bottoms: Run full width of opening. Install thresholds with continuous threshold anchors cast into slab and set in sealant under Section 07920. D. Mounting Heights (Unless Otherwise Indicated): Dimensions given are from floor to center line of hardware item. _. 1. Door Knobs: Standard - 38 Inches 2. Pushplates: Standard - 46 Inches �- 3. Pullplates: Standard - 46 Inches Note: a. Mount pull on opposite side of panic device to coincide with exit device template. b. Install pushplate to conceal through bolts of pull. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Painting: Do not install door silencers, kickplates, pushplates, door bottoms and wall stops until after painting is complete. Loosen locksets and panic hardware prior to painting and retighten after painting is complete. Mask hardware or otherwise protect during painting operation. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND DEMONSTRATION A. Adjusting by Hardware Manufacturer's Representative: Prior to final inspection, inspect and adjust door closers, locks and items requiring close adjustment and regulation and check keying. B. Testing and Demonstration: The Contractor shall provide as part of the system start-up responsibilities a complete data base with respect to electro-mechanical security hardware items functions and features. Testing shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, demonstration in the operational use of all electronic security hardware. Electrical circuits for each locking system opening shall be tested by the representative of the ^ security hardwaremanufacturer or supplier and shall be certified as having compatible voltage, protection against overload and duty cycle capability consistent with the operation and installation. 3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE See Hardware Schedule attached. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08710-4 2/07/02 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE SCHEDULED FOR 02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY FT. COLLINS, CO BASED ON PLANS DATED SUBMITTAL DATE 2/07/02 SCHEDULED BY: ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR NAUGHT/FRYE ARCHITECTS 401 W. MOUNTAIN FT. COLLINS, CO 80524 APM Sof [ware M A N U F A C T U R E R S U S E D I N T H I S P R 0 .7 E C T PROJECT NUMBER: 02TRAFFI _. DATE: 2/07/02 MFGR AHBRV MANUFACTURER'S COMPLETE NAME ADDRESS CITY ST ZIP CODE TELEPHONE FAX ABHM ARCHITECTURAL BLDRS HARDWARE MFG 690 LUNT ST. ELK GROVE VILLAGE IL 60007 (708)427-9901 (708)42719890 CRAH CORBIN RUSSWIN ARCHITECTURAL HONE. 225 EPISCOPAL ROAD H6ALIN CT 06017-4004 ;303J225-7411 (203)829-7266 HHC HAGER HINGE COMPANY 139 VICTOR STREET ST. LOUIS MO 63104 (800)325-9995 (800)782-0149 NDC NORTON DOOR CONTROLS, DIV OF YALE P.O. BOX 25288 CHARLOTTE NC 28229 (704)283-2101 (800)541-7101 PREC PRECISION RE REESE ENTERPRISES P.O. BOX 459 ROSEMOUNT MN SS068 (800)328-0953 (612)421-2662 I _ MANUFACTURERS. USED PAGE: APM Software 11 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I_. 1; 1 1 1 I 1 I t I 1 1 1: 1 11 1 1: 1 '. 1 PROJECT:02TRAFFI D 0 0 R I N D E X R E P O R T 2/07/02 TRAFFIC OPERATIONE FACILITY SCHEDULED 9Y DOOR NUMBER KEYING LOCATION HEADING HOWE 101A 1.0 1 1018 1.0 1 102 5.0 5 103 104 105 106 lOT 5.0 5 108 109 112A 1 1129 1 1 1 5.0 1 5 i I 2A 1 2 1 115A- 8.0 8 115B 116 - 117A 117E 6.0 6 118 120A 0 120B 0 T 121A 10.0 10 121B 10.0 10 124A 12.0 12 1249 14.0 14 -- DOOR INDEX PAGE- 1 APM Software ?RO.IECT:02TRAFFI D O O R I N D E X R E P O R T 2/07/02 ;TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY SCHEDULED BY:11 DOOR NUMBER KEYING LOCATION HEADING NONE 124C 17.0 13 126 11.0 11 126 11.0 11 120A 16 .0 16 127B i6 .0 16 130A 130E 13.0 16 130C 14.0 19 131 3.0 3 132 3.0 3 133 3.0 3 TOTAL OPENINGS: 36 I DOOR INDEX PACE: 2jj APM SCEcwa-e PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY HEADING: 1.0 HARDWARE:1 SGL DR 101A 1/ x x SGL DR 101B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 1 EA CYLINDER VERIFY TYPE US26D NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. HEADING: 2.0 HARDWARE.-2 SGL DR 114 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE SGL DR SGL DR SGL DR FHS #: 1 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 131 132 133 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA HINGE BB1279 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 LOCK CL3355 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA CLOSER P7501 WALL STOP 236W SWEEP 323C 36" WEATHERSTRIP 807A 1/36, 2/84 THRESHOLD S424A 36" HEADING: 3.0 HARDWARE:3 1/ x x 1/ x x 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE HINGE BB1279 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 EXIT DEVICE 1108 X 39LA CYLINDER 3000-200-6 CLOSER P7501 WALL STOP 236W SWEEP 323C 36" HEADING: 3.0 CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE US26D US26D AL US32D AL AL AL US26D US26D US26D AL US32D AL HHC CRAH NDC HHC RE RE RE HHC PREC CRAH NDC HHC RE 2/07/02 08710 D0UGLAS R. McCAR THY 4531 Seaway Circle Fort Collins, CO 80525 POSITION: Project Manager/Estimator WORK HISTORY: 1999 — Present Project Manager/Estimator — Drahota Construction Co., Ft. Collins, CO Responsibilities include estimating, scheduling, and project management for commercial projects. 1999-1999 Project Manager & Team Leader — The Neenan Company, Ft. Collins, CO Responsible for Team Management and construction of two core and shell office facilities along with tenant finishes. Team management consisted of coordinating and supervising architectural staff, interior finish staff and site construction staff. Daily activities included subcontractor negotiations and contracting, construction/architectural cost management, time management scheduling from schematic design to final project completion, with construction project management and document control. 1996 - 1999: Project Manager — FCI Constructors, Inc., Longmont, CO Managed an annual volume of $9 — 13 million with an emphasis on new postal facilities, new schools, and major school facility remodels. Responsibilities included initial job set-up, staffing, critical path scheduling and monitoring/updating, job cost control accounting/budget analysis, variance reporting, monthly margin reviews, architectural submittals, change order implementation, invoicing, weekly jobsite organizational meetings with owner and architect's representative, jobsite safety compliance, final project close-out. 1994 - 1996: Production Manager —Point Five Windows, Fort Collins, CO Production Manager for a custom window manufacturer. Personally managed nine separate departments with responsibility for 40 — 45 employees. Implemented critical path scheduling, responsible for departmental coordination. 1990 - 1994: Project Manager/Estimator — Cornerstone Builders, Inc., Greeley, CO Responsible for estimating, project procurement, project management through project completion and close out. Seventy-five percent commercial, including office buildings, banks, schools, hospitals, retail outlets, and fast food facilities. Twenty-five percent condominium projects. 1980 — 1990: Project Manager/Estimator — Jerald Construction Co., Fort Collins, CO 1977 — 1979: Project Superintendent — Wellshire Diversified, San Diego, CA EDUCATION: Bachelor of Science Construction Management Colorado State University - 1975 PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY HEADING: 3.0 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 807A 1/36, 2/84 AL RE 1 EA THRESHOLD S424A 36" AL RE HEADING: 4.0 HARDWARE:4 SGL DR 117A 1/ x x SGL DR 130A 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3355 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA CLOSER CLP7501 AL NDC 1 EA KICKPLATE 190S 12 X 34 US26D HHC 1 EA SWEEP 323C 36" AL RE 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 807A 1/36, 2/84 AL RE 1 EA THRESHOLD S424A 36" AL RE HEADING: 5.0 HARDWARE:S SGL DR 102 1/ x x SGL DR 103 1/ x x SGL DR 104 1/ x x SGL DR 105 1/ x x SGL DR 106 1/ x x SGL DR 107 1/ x x SGL DR 108 1/ x x SGL DR 109 1/ x x SGL DR 112A 1/ x x SGL DR 112B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE 1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA WALL STOP 23GW US32D HHC 2/07/02 FHS #: 2 08710 PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY HEADING: 6.0 HARDWARE:6 SGL DR 117B 1/ x x SGL DR 118 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3357 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA CLOSER P8501 AL NDC 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US32D HHC 3 EA SILENCERS 307D GR HHC HEADING: 7.0 HARDWARE:7 SGL DR 120A 1/ x x SGL DR 120B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1. EA CLOSER 8501 AL NDC 1 EA KICKPLATE 1905 12 X 34 US26D HHC 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US32D HHC HEADING: 8.0 HARDWARE:8 SGL DR 115A 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA CLOSER P8501 X 2018S AL NDC 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 9024 US26D ABHM 2/07/02 FHS 4: 3 08710 PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY HEADING: 9.0 HARDWARE:9 SGL DR 115B 1/ x x SGL DR 116 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA CLOSER 8501 AL NDC 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 9024 US26D ABHM HEADING: 10.0 HARDWARE:10 SGL DR 121A 1/ x x SGL DR 121B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA PASSAGE CL3310 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US32D HHC HEADING: 11.0 HARDWARE:11 SGL DR 125 1/ x x SGL DR 126 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D HHC 1 EA PULL 33E 4 X 16 US32D HHC 1 EA CLOSER 8501 AL NDC 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US32D HHC 3 EA SILENCERS 307D GR HHC FHS #: 4 2/07/02 08710 [ ) L ) !, ) ( .I ! I i I ! 3 ; 1 1 1 ; 1 ': I ` ) ! I ! ) ! I : ) I � ) PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY HEADING: 12.0 HARDWARE:12 PR DRS 124A 2/ x x EACH PAIR TO HAVE 6 EA HINGE BB1279 NRP 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 2 EA FLUSHBOLT 282D 12" US26D HHC 2 EA CLOSER CLP7501T AL NDC 2 EA KICKPLATE 1905 12 X 34 US26D HHC 1 EA DUSTPROOF STRK 280X US26D HHC 2 EA SWEEP 323C 36" AL RE 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 807A 1/72, 2/84 AL RE 1 EA THRESHOLD S424A 72" AL RE HEADING: 13.0 HARDWARE:13 PR DRS 124C 2/ x x EACH PAIR TO HAVE 3,EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 2 EA FLUSHBOLT 282D 12" US26D HHC 2 EA KICKPLATE 1905 12 X 34 US26D HHC 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 9024 US26D ABHM 1 EA DUSTPROOF STRK 280X US26D HHC 2 EA SILENCERS 307D GR HHC HEADING: 14.0 HARDWARE:14 SGL DR 124B 1/ x x SGL DR 130C 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC HEADING: 14.0 CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE 2/07/02 FHS #: 5 08710 PROJECT NO:02TRAFFI TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY 2/07/02 HEADING: 14.0 CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE 1 EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA CLOSER 8501 AL NDC 1 EA KICKPLATE 1905 12 X 34 US26D HHC 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US32D HHC 1 EA SMOKESEAL 797B 17' BR RE HEADING: 15.0 HARDWARE:15 SGL DR 130B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE NOTE; ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER HEADING: 16.0 HARDWARE:16 SGL DR 127A 1/ x x SGL DR 127B 1/ x x EACH DOOR TO HAVE 3 EA HINGE BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 US26D HHC 1.EA LOCK CL3351 NZD 2 3/4 BS ASA US26D CRAH 1 EA WALL STOP 236W US26D HHC FHS #: 6 08710 SECTION 08744 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Power door operators and controls at main entry, interior and exterior doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Door Hardware: Section 08710. 2. Aluminum Entrances: Section 08411 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. 3. Electrical Wiring: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate all elements including electrical requirements. B. Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1.04 WARRANTY Power door package shall be warranted for two years against material and manufacturing defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER DOOR OPERATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Horton Automatics; www.hortondoors.com. 2. Stanley Magic Swing 3. Dor-O-Matic. 4. Approved substitute B. Description: Horton Automatics Heavy Duty Series 4800 overhead concealed electro- mechanical swinging door operator and electrical control, aluminum header, connecting hardware, actuating controls, guide rails and power on/off switches l . Aluminum Header Finish: Painted to match door frame finish. 2. Manual Use: Operator shall function as a manual door closer with or without electrical power. VF 2001-59 08744-1 3. Automatic Push Pad Operation: Wall mounted switches where indicated. 4. Door Swing: As indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory for installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor. B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION Coordinate size and location of electrical rough -in. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The swinging door operator package shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and according to approved shop drawings. Coordinate installation with adjacent frames. B. Apply protective coating to separate aluminum from galvanically incompatible materials. C. Instruct Owner's representative in proper operation of units. D. Make necessary electrical and control connections for full operation of doors. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust moveable units to operate smoothly and to be weathertight when closed. B. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. C. Clean aluminum surfaces. D. Leave units in closed position. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08744-2 SECTION 08771 KEY STORAGE AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY { A. Section Includes: 1. Key cabinet. 2. Key box. B. Related Sections: 1. Keying: Section 08710 Door Hardware. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current catalog literature in accordance with Section 01330. Include installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 KEY CABINET A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Telkee. 2. Lund. 3. Aladdin. B. Provide one Telkee, Inc. Key Control Cabinet, Aristocrat AWC 1505. 2.02 KEY BOX A. Key Box: Provide one Knox Company, Model 3200 Knox Box, recessed mount with alarm tamper switch. 1. Finish: Black 2. Provide location stickers as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in locations directed by the Poudre Fire Authority. - B. Properly tag and install keys in key cabinet. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08771-1 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Glass and Glazing For: a. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors: Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. b. Wood Doors: Section 08210. c. Aluminum Entrances and Window Frames: Section 08411 Aluminum -Framed Storefronts. 2. Frameless mirrors. B. Related Sections: l . Metal Framed Mirrors: Section 10810 Toilet Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards -See Section 01423. Comply with: 1. Glazing Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual, 1997 edition. 2. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Sealing Systems Manual, 1990 edition. 3. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturing Association (SIGMA) Glazing Guidelines, 1997 edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass in accordance with Section 01330. Cut glass sizes as requested by Architect. Include full range of tints for Architect's selection. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements; 1. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. 2. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated in contract documents are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat -treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch). b. Tinted and heat -absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same throughout Project. VF 2001-59 08800-1 C. Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat - treated glass, are selected so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: 1) 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 150 off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM E1300-00. For other than monolithic annealed glass, — determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis including applying adjustment factors to ASTM El300-00 based on type of glass. 3. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass -framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg' (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg.° (100 deg. C), material surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: — 1. Fire Rated Glass: UL approved. 2. Safety Glass and Glazing: Comply with State Statutes, UBC and ANSI Z97.1. B. Certifications: l . Insulating Glass: IGCC certified to Level A. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. C. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry. D. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field measured products. 1.08 WARRANTY A. All insulated glass in the vertical positions shall be warranted against seal failure for a period of ten years. VF 2001-59 08800-'2 JAMES L. BRANNAMAN 1306 Cypress Fort Collins, CO 80521 POSITION: Field Superintendent WORK HISTORY: 1992 - Present: Field Superintendent - Drahota Construction Co., Fort Collins, CO Responsibilities include estimating, scheduling and supervision of residential and commercial projects. 1989 - 1992: Carpenter - Drahota Construction Co., Fort Collins, CO Part-time while attending college. 1984 - 1989: Carpenter - Miller Development, Fort Collins, CO Responsibilities included: concrete work, framing, roofing, insulation, drywall, exterior trim and siding, painting and landscaping. 1983 - 1984: Laborer - States Construction Company, Des Moines, L4 Responsibilities: tied steel, placed concrete, worked with jackhammers, cranes, torches and heavy equipment. 1981 - 1982: Salesman/Yardworker - Franks & Sons Lumber, Lisbon, 14 1980: Laborer - Rural Electric Cooperative, Marion, 14 EDUCATION: PERSONAL: INTERESTS: Responsibilities included helping electricians maintain old lines and services as well as install new lines and services overhead and underground. 1992: Colorado State University B.S. Degree in Construction Management Honors: Com Laude 38 years old, Married Fishing, hunting, archery and camping B. All glass with Low E coating shall be warranted against hazing of the coating for a period of ten years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS A. Manufacturers: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. AFG Industries, Inc. 3 Libby -Owens -Ford Co. 4. General Glass Corporation. 5. Guardian Industries. 6. Viracon. 7. Visteon Float Glass Operations. 8. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Labels: Each Individual Piece of Glass: Bear label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until reviewed by Architect. C. Glass Types: Provide glass of following types as indicated: TYPE DESCRIPTION SG -A One inch nominal thickness double sealed insulating glass. 1 /2 inch air space. Inside face 1 /4 inch clear. Outside face 1 /4 inch heat strengthened with tint as selected by Architect. Low E coating on surface no. 3. Use in clerestory windows and in other exterior aluminum window frames as indicated. SG-B One inch nominal thickness double sealed insulating glass. 1 /2 inch air space. Inside face 1 /4 inch fully tempered clear. Outside face 1 /4 inch fully tempered with tint as selected by Architect. Low E coating on surface no. 3. Use in exterior aluminum window and entrance frames at safety locations and as indicated. SG-C 114 inch tempered clear safety glass. Use in interior entry doors and frames at vestibule, at all non -fire rated interior doors and at all other non -fire rated interior window and door glazing. FG-A 1 /4 inch thickness Hordis Polished Baroque or Pilkington Georgian Polished Wire Glass, clear, UL approved, (vertical and horizontal wire only). Use at interior fire rated locations as indicated. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Gaskets: Aluminum framing system manufacturer's standard EPDM or neoprene extrusions. B. Setting Blocks, Shims and Glazing Clips: Size and type as recommended by glass manufacturer. VF 2001-59 08800-3 C. Preshimmed Glazing Tape 1. Acceptable Products: a. Bostik Chem -Tape 60. b. Pecora Shim -Seal Tape. c. Tremco Preshimmed 440 Tape. d. Approved substitute. 2. Description: Preformed, adhesive, elastomeric butyl/polyisobutylene glazing tape with continuous built-in EPDM shim, designed for pressure sealing of glazing units in framing system. _ 3. Sealant Compatibility: Provide tape compatible with silicone glazing sealant and curtain wall or window wall perimeter sealants. D. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant gasket manufacturer. E. Silicone Glazing Compound: GE Silglaze N or accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.03 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: 1 /4 inch thickness polished plate, mirror glazing quality with polished edges. l . Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by Mirror Glass Manufacturer. _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: 1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. — 2. Existing Conditions: Before glazing, verify that frames are plumb and square with metals stops set for proper glass -to -stop face clearance. ` 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with _ copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction operations that might cause damage to glass. l . Cleandown of Masonry: Completed prior to glass installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stops: 1. Hold glass with wood or metal stops as detailed. a. Stops: Furnished under other sections. 2. Carefully remove any stop already in place as necessary to permit glazing. 3. Handle stops carefully and install to avoid damage. B. Glazing in Wood or Metal Frames: 1. Tape entire opening to prevent glass from touching frame in any direction. 2. Center glass in glazing rabbet to maintain recommended clearances at all four sides, inside and out. 3. Rest glass on setting blocks as recommended by the glass manufacturer. 4. Install shims or use shim tape as recommended to maintain clearance between stops and face of glass. 5. Install glazing tape and stop in with specified stops. 6. Cover top of tape with silicone sealant on both sides of frame. 7. Cut all glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by the openings. Edge clearances shall comply with flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. 8. Leave sealant smooth and clean. Remove sealant from adjoining surfaces without damaging the finish. C. Glazing in Aluminum Windows and Doors: Install glass on setting blocks as recommended by the window or door manufacturer. Dry glaze using glass retainers providing resilient clamping grip on glass or glaze with elastic glazing compound as required. D. Allowable Tolerances: Maintain glazing tolerances between glass and frame or stops as recommended by the FGMA. 1. 1 /4 Inch Thickness Glass: Maintain 1 /8 inch clearance between glass face and metal stops. 3.04 MIRRORS Install with approved adhesive. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave glass in job clean condition with glazing compound and putty carefully removed from glass and adjoining surfaces. l . Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 0 174 1. B. Breakage: Unless responsibility can be assessed to another contractor, be responsible for glass broken during shipment, storage and installation. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 08800-5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09263 GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS AND WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal stud and gypsum board partitions. 2. Metal furring and gypsum board. 3. Structural metal studs and gypsum board as indicated. 4. Sound insulation and sealants. 5. Deflection channels. 6. Accessories and finishing. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: l . Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: 1. Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits: Section 09264. 2. Blanket Insulation: Section 07210 Building Insulation. 3. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 4. Structural Metal Studs: Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. 5. Fireproofing Material for Deflection Channels: Section 07840 Firestopping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01423. Comply with following: l . ASTM C645-95 - Standard Specification for Non -Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Board. 3. GA 216-96 - Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 4. GA 214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 5. AISI Specifications for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members, 1986 edition. 6. Fire Rated Construction: GA-600-2000 - Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturers specifications covering all materials with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Samples: Submit 2'x2' sample of texture for Architect's approval. VF 2001-59 09263-1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Steel studs, runners and accessories shall be certified by manufacturer of gypsum board as acceptable integral components of its gypsum board system. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Rated Assemblies: a. Where UL design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volume 2, _ 1998 edition. See Sections 01423 and 01600. b. Where GA design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with GA-600-2000 - Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual. _ c. Gypsum Board Partitions: Partitions listed and labeled for fire protective ratings where indicated. _. C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and `- identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. _ C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with ASTM C840 and Manufacturer's recommendations. During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain — temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD FOR DRYWALL PARTITIONS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: l . United States Gypsum (USG) 2. Georgia-Pacific (ToughRock) 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. BPB Celotex. 5. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. VF 2001-59 09263-2 r B. Faceboards: 1. Size: 5/8 inch thick unless specifically indicated otherwise. 48 inch wide x length to allow for vertical installation without cross joints. 2. Type: USG tapered edge Firecode (Type X) or Regular Gypsum Panels as required. 3. Water Resistant: USG W/R tapered edge Firecode (Type X) Gypsum Panels. 2.02 DRYWALL STUDS AND RUNNERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Unimast Incorporated. 2. American Studco, Inc. 3. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 4. Dale Industries, Inc. 5. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 6. Harrison Manufacturing Co. 7. National Gypsum Co. 8. Marino\Ware. 9. Western Metal. 10. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Interior Non -Load Bearing Steel Studs: 3-5/8 inch depth unless otherwise indicated. l . Steel Stud Gages: Comply with the following table for non -load bearing interior steel studs and limiting heights: Stud spacing is assumed at 16" o.c. with allowable deflection of L/360 with single layer of drywall on both sides. Stud Gage Depth Limiting Unsupported Height 25 gage 1-5/8 inches 8'-3" max. 2-1/2 inches 10'-9" max. 3-5/8 inches 14'-0" max. 4 inches 15'-0" max. 6 inches 20'-0" max. 22 gage 2-1/2 inches 1 V-6" max. 3-5/8 inches 15'-0" max. 4 inches 16'-3" max. 6 inches 22'-0" max. 20 gage 2-1/2 inches 12'-0" max. 3-5/8 inches 15'-7" max. 4 inches 16'-10" max. 6 inches 22'-10" max. 2. Use 20 gage studs both sides of door frames, at all fire rated partitions and at all partitions supporting wall hung casework, fixtures and equipment. a. Verify gages required for support of wall hung equipment with equipment manufacturer's recommendations. VF 2001-59 09263-3 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. United States Gypsum Company (USG). 2. Beadex. 3. Dale Industries. 4. Georgia Pacific. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. Unimast Incorporated. 7. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002. One inch Type S drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of stud. C. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: 2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations of Fig. 1 in ASTM C ^ 1047: a. USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur-A-Bead, 1-1 /4" x 1-1 /4', unless otherwise indicated. 3. One -Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip. D. Finishing Materials: 1. Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. 2. Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond Joint Compound. 3. Texture: USG Texture. E. Laminating Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond. F. Sound Isolation Materials: 1. Sound Attenuation Blankets: USG Thermofiber Sound Attenuation Blankets. Three inches thick unless otherwise indicated. - 2. Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. 3. Ductwork Penetrations Packing: Low density fiberglass. G. Furring Channels 1. Hat Shape: USG DWC-25 Metal Furring Channels. 2. Z-Shape: Sheetrock Z-Furring Channels, depth as indicated on Drawings. 3. Channels: 16 gage cold -rolled steel channels, 1 1/z inch or 2 inch depth as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION OF DRYWALL STUD PARTITIONS A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C754. B. Layouts: Align partition studs accurately according to partition layout. VF 2001-59 09263-4 C. Anchoring: Anchor runner channels to concrete slabs with concrete stub nails or power - driven anchors at 24 inches o.c. Anchor runner channels to ceiling grid where applicable with stove bolts. Install headers where required to receive runners where studs extend above ceiling system. - D. Studs: Position studs vertically in runners. Anchor studs located adjacent to openings or partition intersections and corners to runners with USG metal lock fastener or with 1 /2 inch Type S pan head screws. l . Space studs 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated, and not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 2. Corners and Intersections: Locate studs no more than two inches from abutting partitions, corners, etc. 3. Openings: Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Locate studs not more than two inches from opening frames. Anchor studs to frame anchor clips by bolt or screw attachment. Install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. Install headers over openings as recommended by the manufacturer. a. Doors: Provide two studs at jambs. 4. Wood Blocking: See Section 06100. 5. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. a. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. 6. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1 /8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. 7. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 8. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. 9. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange. 10. Position studs vertically with open sides facing in some direction and engaging floor and ceiling runners. Begin and end each arc with a stud and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. 11. Attach studs to runners with 3/8-inch long pan head framing screws. On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. with last stud left free standing. E. Bracing: Provide diagonal bracing at head of studs that terminate above the ceiling level. Bracing shall consist of metal studs bent to V-shape and extending at 45 degrees from partition head to structure above. Locate bracing 48 inches maximum o.c. Deflection Channels: l . Provide long leg runners for slip joint at structure above for partitions where indicated. a. Firestopping Installation: Under Section 07840. VF 2001-59 09263-5 3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND FURRING A. General: Provide necessary framing, and furring for special framing at recesses; specialty -' items; wall mounted casework, shelving and equipment; etc. Frame around columns as indicated. Provide necessary framing and suspension for offsets, verticals, recessed and all other gypsum drywall surfaces. B. Furring: Install furring channels over back-up material. Position channels vertically at 24 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise. Use powder -activated fasteners or stub nails at 24 inches o.c. along alternating flanges. Shim channels level as required. Coordinate with installation of insulation. — 3.03 INSULATION _ A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Place in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. 1. Ductwork Penetrations: Provide one inch wide clearance around ductwork and pack with fiberglass ready for calking. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Reference Standard: Apply and finish gypsum board in accordance with GA 216. B. Layout: Apply gypsum wallboard panels vertically with abutting ends and edges occurring over stud flanges or furring. l . Joints on Opposite Sides of Partitions: Shall not occur over same stud. 2. Two Layer Construction: Stagger joints between layers. 3. Locate exposed end -butt joints as for from center of walls as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. _ 4. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end -butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. 5. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. C. Fasteners: Apply board to studs or furring with drywall screws spaced 12 inches o.c. in field of board and eight inches o.c. staggered along vertical abutting edges. 1. Use Type 5-12 screws for attaching to structural studs. — D. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or y damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1 / 16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. E. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill -cut or field -cut ends against mill -cut or field -cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. VF 2001-59 09263-6 Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first. G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which are braced internally. J. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 114 inch to 1 /2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. K. Layers: Install multiple layer drywall as indicated. L. Water Resistant: Use at toilet rooms and elsewhere as indicated. M. Corner Bead: Apply as recommended by manufacturer at exposed out corners. N. Trim: Apply as recommended by manufacturer, where gypsum board abuts other materials, and as indicated. O. Tolerances: Gypsum board surface plane within +/- 1 /g' in 10'. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at horizontal and vertical joints, comer bead, trim, penetrations and fastener dimples as recommended by manufacturer. l . Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except at trim accessories. 3. Drywall: GA Level 4 finish. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting -type joint compound. b. Fill coat: Setting -type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready -mix drying -type all-purpose or topping compound. Q. Texture: Apply texture to match approved sample following application of prime coat by painting subcontractor. R. Acoustical Sealant: Apply at perimeter and at all penetrations of gypsum board in single bead. 1. Locations: Apply at partitions with sound attenuation blankets. 2. Caulk ductwork penetrations. 3. Caulk both sides of partitions edges with continuous bead. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 09263-7 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed SECTION 09264 GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND SOFFITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Metal suspension and gypsum board ceilings and soffits. 2. Exterior gypsum board soffits. 3. Accessories and finishing. B. Products Installed but not Furnished Under This Section. 1. Access Doors and Panels: Section 08310. C. Related Sections: l . Drywall Partitions: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 2. Painting: Section 09900 Paints and Coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards - See Section 01423. Comply with following: 1. ASTM C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Wallboard. 2. GA 216 Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: l . Fire Rated Assemblies: All gypsum board ceilings that are part of a rated floor/ceiling or roof/ceiling assembly shall comply with all requirements of that assembly. a. Where UL design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire Resistance Directory, Volume 2, 1998 edition. See Sections 01423 and 01600. b. Where GA design numbers are referenced on Drawings, assemblies shall comply with GA 600-97 - Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design Manual. 2. Gypsum board ceilings and soffits that are suspended below rated assemblies are unrested. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications covering all materials to be used with all materials and accessories plainly identified. See Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Samples: Submit 2 foot x 2 foot sample of texture for Architect's approval. VF 2001-59 09264-1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver all material in original, unopened containers and store in a clean, dry area until ready to use. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS — A. Environmental Requirements: During gypsum panel application and finishing, maintain `- temperatures within building within range of 55 degrees to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Drywall, Metal Suspension System, and Accessories: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Georgia-Pacific 4 3. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond) 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 METALS — A. Main Tees: USG DGL-26 or accepted substitute, 1-1/2" depth, heavy duty, fire rated tees with 15/16 inch width, black asphaltum painted. B. Cross Tees: USG DGL-424 or accepted substitute, 1-1 /2" depth, heavy duty, fire rated _ tees with 15/16 inch width, black asphaltum painted. C. Furring Channels: USG resilient furring channels. D. Steel Studs: Unimast ST 25 gage. Size as indicated. — E. Hanger Wire: No. 9 gage galvanized wire. F. Tie Wire: No. 16 gage galvanized wire. G. Suspension System for Vaulted Ceiling: USG Drywall Suspension System for Curved Ceilings. 1. Main Tees: USG VT Series vaulted tees, 1'/2 inch depth, 15/16 inch width, sized for radius of vaulted ceiling as indicated on Drawings. Hot dipped galvanized finish. 2.03 DRYWALL AND RELATED MATERIALS A. Faceboards: _ 1. Size: 5/8" thick unless specifically indicated otherwise 48" wide x length to minimize cross joints. 2. Type: USG Firecode tapered edge gypsum panels. V F 2001-59 09264-2 B. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002. One inch Type S drywall screws. Use proper type for gage of stud. C. Accessories: 1. Corner Bead: USG Sheetrock No. 103 Dur-A-Bead, 1-1 /4" x 1-1 /4" 2. Metal Trim: USG Sheetrock No. 200B. 3. Control Joint: USG Sheetrock Zinc Control Joint No. 093. 4. Adhesives: a. USG Durabond multi -purpose adhesive. b. USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond. D. Finishing Materials: l . Joint Tape: USG Sheetrock Joint Tape. 2. Adhesive: USG Sheetrock Setting Type Durabond Joint Compound. 3. Texture: USG Texture. E. Sound Isolation Materials: 1. Sound Attenuation Blankets: USG Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blankets. Thickness as indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: USG Acoustical Sealant. 3. Ductwork Penetrations Packing: Low density fiberglass. 2.04 EXTERIOR SOFFIT MATERIAL A. Faceboards: USG 1 Hour Fire Rated Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board, 5/8" thickness. B. Fasteners: USG Type S drywall screws or equal. C. Metal Trim: USG No. Sheetrock 200C or equal of acceptable manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRILLAGE ERECTION A. Reference Standard: Erect steel framing in accordance with ASTM C574. B. Hangers: Install wire hangers spaced not over 48" o.c. in direction of 1-1 /2" main runner channels and within 6" of ends of main runners or interruptions of ceiling continuity. Hang from structure above. Install hangers 24" o.c. at gypsum drywall ceilings supporting wood or metal ceilings or other secondary ceiling systems. C. At light troffers or other openings, reinforce grillage with 3/4" cold rolled channels wired atop and parallel to main runner channels. D. Erect grillage as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary framing and suspension for offsets, verticals and decorative recesses, etc. Use drywall studs where indicated or required. See Section 09261 for type. Install 1- 1/2" main runner channels 24" o.c. at ceilings supporting wood or metal ceilings or other secondary ceiling systems. VF 2001-59 09264-3 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL A. Apply gypsum board of maximum practical length with long dimensions at right angles to furring channels and fasten with drywall screws spaced 12' o.c. in the field of the board and 8" o.c. along abutting edges. All end and edge joints shall occur over furring channels with end joints staggered. Properly support gypsum board around cutouts and — openings. B. Apply metal trim as recommended by the manufacturer and wherever gypsum drywall _ abuts other materials. C. Arched Ceilings: Apply panels with long dimension perpendicular to suspension _ channels and with face and back paper thoroughly moistened. D. Finishing: Apply joint treatment at side and end joints, trim, penetrations and fastener dimples as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting -type joint _ compound. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except at trim accessories. — 3. Drywall: GA Level 4 finish. Apply joint compounds in 3 coats. Sand smooth between coats and after last coat. a. Embedding and first coat: Setting -type joint compound. _ b. Fill coat: Setting -type joint compound. c. Finish coat: Ready -mix drying -type all-purpose or topping compound. E. Texture: Apply texture to match approved sample. 3.03 INSULATION A. Sound Insulation: Completely cover ceiling area of rooms indicated on Drawings to receive insulation. Loose lay over ceiling, fitting tight to adjoining work and adjoining insulation so that completely tight enclosure free from open joints, holes, cracks and — voids is achieved. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SOFFITS Apply soffit boards using methods specified for interior ceilings and with minimum of joints. Finish joints, trim, fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. Finish smooth with no texture. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 09264-4 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic floor tile. 2. Ceramic wall tile. 3. Ceramic tile base. 4. Porcelain floor tile. 5. Porcelain tile base. 6. Tile mortar and grout. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following standards: l . Installation Specifications: ANSI A108.5-1999 Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A108.10-1999 Installation of Grout in Tilework 2. Material Specifications: ANSI A118.4-1999 Latex -Portland Cement Mortar ANSI Al 18.6-1999 Ceramic Tile Grouts ANSI A137.1-1988 Ceramic Tile 3. Tile Council of America, Inc. jTCAj: 2001 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for all setting, grouting and miscellaneous materials in accordance with Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the patterns, colors, locations, and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished the surfaces. l . Locate precisely each joint and crack in the substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with file joint locations. 2. Submit jointing layout based on field dimensions of existing conditions. C. Samples: Submit complete samples of the and grout to Architect for color and texture selection or verification in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least one full size sample for each tile specified. 2. Trim for Ceramic Tile: 6' long. 3. Provide samples keyed according to specifications. VF 2001-59 09300-1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Flooring subcontractor must have at least five (5) years experience in the installation of ceramic tile flooring projects. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: .r 1. Deliver the in unopened, grade sealed packages. 2. Deliver mortar mixes and grouts in unopened containers. Store materials in a clean, dry area. C. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area. 1. Store cementitious materials off the ground and under cover. 2. Store admixtures in original unopened containers. _ 3. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS n A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install the set in Portland cement mortar when the ambient temperature is below 50°F. Comply with minimum temperature requirements of bonding and grouting materials manufacturers. B. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before the work begins. 1.07 MAINTENANCE - A. Maintenance Materials: Provide the Owner at completion of the job 37o of each size and color used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile and Base: l . American Olean Tile Company 2. Dal -Tile Corp. 3. Florida Tile _ 4. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. 5. United States Ceramic Tile Company. _ 6. Approved Substitute. B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Porcelain Tile: 1. Crossville Porcelain Stone, USA. 2. MagicoGres. .._ C. Acceptable Manufacturers - Setting and Grouting Materials: 1. Bostik/Hydroment. VF 2001-59 2. C-Cure Chemical Co., Inc. 3. Custom Building Products 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mapei. 6. Approved Substitute 2.02 TILE A. Ceramic Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1 buff body, approximately 5/16" thickness, cushion edges with bright glaze or matte glaze finish as selected. 1. Size: 4-1 /4" x 4-1 /4" 2. Manufacturer and Colors: As selected by Architect. a. Accent Trim: As selected from Price Group 1, 2 or 3. b. Field Tile Colors: As selected from the entire range of colors in Price Group 1. B. Ceramic Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, approximately 1/4" thickness, unglazed, factory mounted sheets. 1. Size: 2 inch by 2 inch. 2. Cove Base: To match wall tile. Extend 4' up the wall. Where no wall file is present, provide bullnose at top of base. 3. Manufacturer and Colors: As selected by Architect. a. Accent Trim: As selected from Price Group 1, 2 or 3. b. Field Tile Colors: As selected from the entire range of colors in Price Group 1. C. PorceiainTile: ANSI A137.1 1. Size: 12 inch by 12 inch. 2. Manufacturer and Type: One of the following. a. Crossville Porcelain Stone, Veranda Stone Collection, Strong Series. b. MagicoGres, Santa Fe Collection, Asia Series. 3. Cove Base: To match floor tile. D. Accessory Pieces: Provide bullnose ceramic tile pieces at all outside corners or exposed edges. 2.02 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin -Set): ANSI 118.4. C-Cure Crete and C-Cure Crete Powder. B. Grout: C-Cure M-P Grout. Mix as recommended by manufacturer. Color as selected by Architect. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT A. Floors: Two component self -leveling sealant complying with FS TT-S-00227E. Color to match floor grout. B. Walls: Silicone to match grout. VF 2001-59 09300-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION — A. Verification of Conditions: Before proceeding, examine surfaces to receive tile, setting beds or accessories for defects or conditions adversely affecting quality and execution of the installation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to Architect. Verify locations of all expansion and control joints in substrate for compliance with Article 3.04. _ B. Acceptance: Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Clean concrete base slab to receive thin set file to remove dust, dirt and loose material. Remove curing compounds and sealers and test for absorption using water or acid methods. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. rile Floors - Thin Set Installation On Concrete Slabs on Grade: Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method F113-2K and ANSI A108.5 using latex -Portland cement mortar. Slab shall be free of curing compound or other contaminates before proceeding. - B. Wall Tile and Base - Installation Over Gypsum Board: Install wall the using the thin set — method. Install, grout, clean, protect and cure in conformance with TCA Handbook Method W243-2K and ANSI A108.5 using latex Portland cement mortar. 3.04 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Comply all with requirement of TCA Handbook Method EJ 171. B. Locations: 1. Ceramic Floor Tile: At intersection of all ceramic floor the and cove base, install and calk 1 /4" wide expansion joint. 2. Porcelain Tile: At intersection of all the and base and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings, install and calk 3/8" wide expansion joint. 3. Other Locations: Directly over all expansion and control joints in concrete slab below and all other locations required by EJ 171. 3.05 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Just prior to occupancy of the building, clean unglazed ceramic the with sulfamic acid - and flush with clean water. When the and joints are completely clean of cement, scum and dirt, apply manufacturer approved sealer to floors only. Do not apply sealer to floors in showers or other wet areas. VF 2001-59 09300-4 B. Apply sealer according to manufacturer's recommendations in sufficient coats to produce an even glaze over entire floor area. Exercise care to avoid damage to adjoining surfaces. C. Clean all other floor and wall tile according to the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 09300-5 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Suspended acoustical grid. 2. Lay -in panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Drywall Ceilings: Section 09264 Gypsum Board Ceilings and Soffits. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards, see Section 01423. Comply with: 1. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Acoustical: a. Lay -in panels shall have a minimum noise reduction coefficient (NRC) as indicated in Article 2.01. b. The completed suspended acoustical grid ceiling system shall have a sound transmission class (STC) rating as indicated in Article 2.01. 2. Fire: Fire rating not required. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data indicating all systems proposed for installation. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of lay -in panel and ceiling grid meeting the requirements of this specification to the Architect. 1.05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver in manufacturer's original unopened containers and store in a clean, dry area until ready for use. VF2001-59 09510-1 SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD Date: April 3, 2002 TO: Drahota Construction Company PROJECT: TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684 OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") You are hereby notified that your Bid dated March 22, 2002 for the above project has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684. The Price of your Agreement is One Million One Hundred Ninety-seven Thousand Dollars (1,197,000.00). Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by April 18, 2002. 1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the page. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and Supplementary Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully -signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. Cit of Fort Collins NE BY: J me B. O'Neill II, CPPO, FNIGP Dir cto of Purchasing and Risk Mana ement t1e 9/12/01 Section 00510 Page 1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until dust generating activities are completed, wet work has dried and overhead mechanical work is completed. 2. Maintain minimum of 60 degrees F during and after installation of acoustical ceilings. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide Owner with I % of gross area installed, maximum of two cases, of each type of ceiling panel used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. BPB Celotex. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. -- 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Acoustical Lay -In Panels for Ceiling Type C 1: ASTM El264, Type III, Form 2, Pattern E. Armstrong Ultima, No. 1912 very fine texture. 2. Size: 5/8" x 2'-0" x 2'-0". — 3. Edge Detail: Beveled tegular. 4. NRC: 0.70 5. CAC: 35 minimum 6. Color: White. 7. Fire Resistance: Class A 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation _ 3. Donn/USG 4. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Suspension Systems: 1. System: Armstrong Suprafine. _ a. Width: 9/16 inch, exposed. b. Color: White. c. Grid: 2 x 2. d. Fire rating: Not required. 2. Edge Molding: Standard with specified grid system, color to match grid. VF 2001-59 09510-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General: Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturers recommendations. 1. Install metal edge molding wherever the suspended grid abuts walls, columns and other vertical surfaces. 2. Frame around openings as required. 3. Suspend grid with hanger wires from structure above. Install hanger wires at all four corners of lay -in light fixtures and as required to provide maximum deflection of 1 /360 of span and level within 1 /8" in 12'. B. Exposed Grid Suspension System: 1. Install main T-runner on 48" centers. 2. To complete a 24" x 48" grid, install 48" cross T-splines 24" o.c. at right angles to main T-runners. Install additional cross T-splines to form 24" grid. 3. Lock T-spline intersecting moldings in place. All main T-runners and cross T-splines shall be straight in alignment and flush at intersections. 4. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders. 5. Install edge molding at all intersections with dissimilar vertical surfaces. End joints for edge moldings shall occur only at T-Runners or Cross T-splines and shall have riveted connections. 6. Set edge moldings in thin bed of latex acrylic sealant to completely seal joint between edge molding and wall. Where wall irregularities occur, shim edge molding to a straight line. C. Reflected Ceiling Plan: Follow reflected ceiling plan on drawings in layout of grid. Any deviation must be accepted by Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF LAY -IN PANELS A. Panels: Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required, cut units to fit. 1. Lay -In Panels: a. Install panels flush in grid. 3.03 FINAL APPEARANCE A. Panels: On completion, acoustical panels shall be free from defects, clean and lying flat in metal grid. Remove and replace dirty, defaced, scarred or otherwise defective panels,, Touch up of scarred panels not acceptable. END OF SECTION VF2001-59 09510-3 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition tile flooring (VCT). 2. Rubber base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 manufacturer's current catalog literature and installation instructions for each type of flooring and base supplied under this Section. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Indicate flooring layout and joint locations. c. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330, a full set of samples of the brand of floor the and base to be used. Samples shall be complete and up to date. Colors will not be selected until samples are received. At the option of the Architect, full size samples may be required. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Temperature: Store materials in original containers at not less than 700 F for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in space to receive the between 700 F and 900 F for not less than 24 hours before and 48 hours after installation. Following 48 hour period maintain minimum temperature of 550 F until completion of building. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide the Owner at the completion of the project the following items: l . Floor the in the amount of 1 % of each color used. 2. One case base of each type and color used. 3. One gallon of each type of adhesive used. VF 2001-59 09650-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR TILE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries -- 2. Auock Floor Products 3. Kentile Floor Inc. 4. Approved Substitute B. Tile (VCT): 12" x 12" x 1 /8" Armstrong Excelon; Colors as selected by Architect. 2.02 RUBBER BASE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Azrock Floor Products 2. Flexco Division of Textile Rubber Co., Inc. 3. Johnson Rubber Company 4. R. C. Musson Rubber Company 5. Roppe Rubber Corporation 6. Burke Industries 7. VPI 8. Approved Substitute B. Base: l /8" thickness x 4" high unless other sizes are indicated. Provide pre -formed external comers. Job -formed internal corners may be used at Contractor's option. Use straight carpet base at all carpet and demountable partitions. Use topset cove base at all other locations. Colors as selected by Architect. C. Vinyl Edging: Furnish at exposed edges of resilient floor tile, vinyl edging 1"wide, 1/8" thick. Colors as selected by Architect. ^ 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: As recommended by the manufacturer of the material being installed. _ Adhesive for vinyl edging and base shall be a type not affected by heat. B. Leveling Compound: Ardex Feather Finish or accepted substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness which would prevent execution and quality of resilient flooring as specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of resilient flooring until defects have been corrected except where correction is indicated under Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. VF 2001-59 09650-2 .. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Leveling: Level major uneven concrete floor joints or other irregularities by bush hammering or grinding and filling with latex type underlayment. Leveled areas shall be sanded to provide a surface level +1 /4" in 10'. Leveled areas shall be inspected by the Architect before flooring work may proceed. B. Cleaning, Patching and Priming: Thoroughly clean concrete floors before applying floor coverings. Remove rough spots and any foreign matter that might be evident through the floor covering. Patch minor rough areas, voids and defects with compatible leveling compound. Prime concrete floors as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring. 3.03 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. General: Mix and apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Cover only that amount of area which can be covered by flooring material within the recommended working time of the adhesive. B. Application: Apply adhesive uniformly over surfaces with notched trowel or other suitable tool. Clean trowel and rework notches as necessary to insure proper application of adhesive. C. Cleaning: Remove any adhesive which dries or films over. Do not soil walls. bases, or adjacent areas with adhesives. Promptly remove spillage. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Tile Flooring: 1. General: Install in accordance with the recommendations and specifications of the tile manufacturer. Make joints straight, tight, and flush. Tightly cement to floor. 2. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, layout each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a the on the center line of the area each direction. Where the with a directional pattern is used, confer with Architect for direction of pattern. 3. Layout: Work out patterns for each floor area and cuts against walls so cuts on opposite sides of the area are of same width. In order to eliminate small cuts against walls, lay out each area to determine whether pattern should start with a joint or center of a the on the center line of the floor. B. Base: Tightly cement base to wall with butt joints 1 /16" or less in width. Install base in toe space of cabinets. Install base in carpeted areas, after carpet has been installed. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion, remove loose, cracked, chipped, stained or otherwise defective tile, or base and replace in a satisfactory manner. Clean surfaces using only cleaners approved by the manufacturer. VF 2001-59 09650-3 C. Remove mastic cement from adjoining work with particular care to not damage such work. D. Buffing: Dry mop and buff flooring. - 3.06 PROTECTION Protect finished work from damage by subsequent construction operations. Where possible, lock rooms following installation and cleaning. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 09650-4 SECTION 09680 CARPET PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Direct glue down carpet. 2. Carpet base. 3. Accessories. B. Carpet Allowance: Section 01210 Allowances. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Seaming Diagram: Before starting installation, submit a layout indicating all seams in accordance with Section 01330. B. Installation Instructions: Before beginning installation, submit manufacturer's written recommended installation procedures for particular carpet and installation conditions. l . Submit two copies for Architect's and Owner's information. 2. Maintain one copy on site until completion of carpet installation. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. 1. Maintenance Instructions: Provide the Owner, through the Architect, 3 copies of a complete manual of the manufacturer's maintenance recommendations for each type of carpet provided. 2. Warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: l . Carpet installer must have a minimum of five years experience on installations of similar size and complexity. 2. The installation crew must be fully qualified to install the type of carpet to be furnished. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in original factory wrappings; labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name and dye lot number. C. Storage: Store under cover in well ventilated spaces as soon as delivered. 1. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and moisture. 2. Protect adhesives from freezing. VF 2001-59 09680-1 3. Stand carpet rolls vertically with continuous blocking on ground protected from weather and moisture. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Carefully check dimensions and other conditions and be responsible for proper fitting of carpet in areas designated. B. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate shall be not more than 3 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 degrees F. 1.06 SEQUENCING Do not begin installation until all wet work in space is completed and dry work above ~ ceiling is completed. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01780. Warranty shall be executed by .. carpet manufacturer and installer agreeing to repair and replace carpet that does not meet requirements within the special warranty period. 1. Special Warranty Period: 15 years, non -prorated. 2. Include coverage against excessive wear, delamination, edge ravel, zippering, loss -� of resiliency, and static. PART 2-PRODUCTS — 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet: Supplied under material allowance. See Section 01210. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application and .. expected service. C. Edging: 1. Approved Manufacturers: -- a. Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. b. Johnson Rubber Co. (Johnsonite) c. Roppe Rubber Corp. d. Approved Substitute 2. Exposed Carpet Edge: Mercer Imperial sized for carpet thickness. 3. Carpet/Vinyl Tile Transition: Mercer file and carpet joiner. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect. D. Trowelable Underiayments, Patching Compounds, and Concrete Slab Primer: Non- staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. VF 2001-59 09680-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Subfloor shall be prepared and clean and meet manufacturer's approval to warrant installation. Examine with installer present. 1. Examine substrate for excessive moisture content and unevenness which would prevent execution and quality carpeting as specified. 2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the General Contractor with copy to the Architect. B. Acceptance: Do not proceed with installation of carpet until defects have been corrected except where correction is indicated under Article 3.02 Preparation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Patch substrate as required to form a level, stable surface. B. Clean floors of dust, dirt solvents, oil, grease, paint and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to dry thoroughly. C. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1 /4 inch in 10 feet, non- cumulative. D. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity. E. Use approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. Prime substrate as required to assure adherence of new carpet. 3.03 GLUE DOWN CARPET INSTALLATION A. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set. B. Lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile in some direction of anticipated traffic. C. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening. D. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. E. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces leaving no gaps. VF 2001-59 09680-3 F. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24 - hours or until adhesive is set. G. Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to subfloor well fastened at edges and is to present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. H. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Where splicing �. cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Take adequate care to protect all adjacent work from damage or marring as a result of the work of this section. B. Clean the carpet of all spots with a spot remover as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Cut all loose threads with a sharp scissors. D. Carefully and thoroughly vacuum clean the entire floor surface with an upright beater bar type vacuum cleaner. E. Remove all debris resulting from the work of this section from the site. F. In addition to extra materials in Article 1.06, leave all usable pieces of carpet not necessary to complete the work on the job site and place in an orderly manner in an _ area designated by the Owner. G. Cover with non -staining paper or polyethylene. Leave cover in place until final inspection. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 09680-4 either directly by the owner or by change order? Answer: The gas line will not have to be relocated. 20. Question: Please clarify whether the 3 existing evergreen trees / L1 must be salvaged, or if they may be demo'd. Answer: The Owner will have the trees relocated or removed. 21. Please confirm that the "sculpture", near the buildings south entrance, /LI is being provided by the Owner. Answer: The Owner is providing the "sculpture" 22. Question: Please clarify the requirements for the planter retaining wall /C5 to the west of the building at the intersection of the sidewalks. Answer: This planter retaining wall has been deleted per CD-1 of this Addendum. 23. Question: Please confirm that the irrigation water meter mentioned by the General Description /11 will be provided by the owner. This meter is not shown on the plumbing or irrigation drawings. Answer: This meter is not required. 24. Question: Please confirm that the intent of 00520-6.3 is not to put the risk of subsurface conditions not mentioned in the geotechnical report on the contractor, and that unexpected subsurface conditions will be addressed by proposal request / change order. Answer: If there are unforeseen subsurface conditions they will be addressed through the proposal request/change order process. 25. Question: Please confirm that cost of Stabilization Material and Ground Water Barriers per spec 02221-2.1 and 0221-2.3, if required, will be covered by a proposal request I change order. Answer: If these items are required and are outside of the scope of the Contract Documents, they will be addressed through the proposal request/change order process. 26. Question: Please confirm that the contractor is only responsible for the "building permit", "plan review fee", and "tap fee" portions of the building permit, and that any development fees, easement fees, etc. will be paid by the owner. Answer: The Contractor is only responsible for the Building Permit and Plan Check fees. The Owner will pay for the Tap, Development, Easement, etc. fees. 5 SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the 3rd day of April in the year of 2002 and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and Drahota Construction Company (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of an approximately 9,600 square foot building, located on Lot 5A of the East Vine Streets Facility development, at the southeast corner of East Vine Drive and Linden Street. The Work will include sitework, utilities, landscaping and an underground irrigation system, on approximately 3.25 acres. The building is a steel -framed structure, with concrete foundations and slab -on -grade floor system. Exterior to be brick and CMU veneer over metal stud or CMU back-up. Interior finishes will include painted gypsum board partitions, carpet, VCT, suspended acoustical board ceilings, wood and hollow metal doors and frames. and is generally described in Section 01100. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by Vaught -Frye, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within 150 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within 160 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2. _Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 1 SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Paint all exterior surfaces not specifically excluded. 2. Paint or natural finish interior surfaces not specifically excluded. B. Exclusions: In addition to material obviously not requiring paint such as glass, floor, tile, etc. do not paint or finish: l . Surfaces indicated by the finish schedule to remain unfinished. 2. Factory finished surfaces. 3. Brick masonry. 4. Integrally colored masonry. C. Related Sections: 1. Project Sign: Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Pavement Markings: Section 02765. 3. Piping Identification: Division 15 Mechanical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Color Schedule: The Architect will provide a color schedule listing paint colors selected. Color selections will be made by the Architect from color systems of recognized paint company. If materials of other manufacturers are used, colors must match those selected. B. Paint Samples: If requested by Architect, prepare and submit paint samples. Remake samples until accepted. C. Material List: Immediately after award of the contract submit a letter listing the manufacture and product name of each different material for use on the project. Materials list shall be accepted by the Architect before ordering materials. D. Substitutions: See Section 01600. Requests for substitutions must be on company letterhead and signed by an authorized representative of the of the manufacturer. Letters from sales representatives or retailers will not be acceptable. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Paint and coating materials shall not exceed VOC content limitations of all applicable regulations, when thinned to manufacturer's maximum recommendation. VF 2001-59 09900-1 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand and name of manufacturer. Order materials sufficiently in advance to be on the job when needed and deliver at the building in sufficient quantities so the work will not be delayed. No claim by the Contractor concerning unsuitability of any material specified or his inability to produce first-class work with the some, will be entertained unless such ^ claim is made, in writing, with the material list submittal. C. Storage and Mixing: Painter will be assigned a room or space in which to mix or store material. Provide galvanized mixing pans for this paint room or space in which paints shall be mixed. No mixing of paint shall be done except in these pans. Empty containers bearing the name or brand of any manufacturer shall not be brought upon the premises for mixing of paint unless labels are canceled and containers are closely marked as to contents. D. Inspection: The paint storage area shall be open for periodic inspection by the Architect to insure only approved materials are being used. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. Do not finish rooms or spaces where rubbish has accumulated or while rubbish is being removed. Finishing Will not be allowed in dusty rooms. Do not remove rubbish while finish is fresh. Surfaces to which finish is to be applied shall be dry and clean. B. Environmental Requirements: Do not finish outside surfaces in extreme cold, frosty, foggy, or. damp weather. Finish only when temperature is 5011F or over and surface is absolutely dry. Exterior painting not allowed while dust is blowing. r. 1.06 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Paint: At the completion of painting, deliver to the Owner one full gallon of each ^ paint color and type used along with the color number or formula for each type. 1. High Performance and Epoxy Coatings: Not included. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ^ 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The best quality materials as manufactured by any of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: (Paint Only): 1. For Brush, Roller or Spray work: _ a. ICI Dulux b. Pittsburgh c. Sherwin-Williams d. Benjamin Moore f. Kelly -Moore VF 2001-59 ^ g. Diamond Vogel h. Wellborn/Dunn-Edwards L Kwal Howells j. Sophir Morris k. Approved Substitute 2. Interior Stain: Sherwin Williams, Pittsburgh or approved substitute. 3. Epoxy Coating: a. Pittsburgh b. ICI Devoe c. approved substitute. 4. For High Performance Coatings: a. Sherwin-Williams b. Tnemec Company Inc. c. Approved Substitute Quality: All products not specified by name shall be "best grade" or "first line" products or acceptable manufacturers. See Part 3 Execution for materials required for this project. Where possible, materials shall be of a single manufacturer. C. Bacterial Resistance: No growth, ASTM G22. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included under Preparation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to the Architect. B. Primer for High Performance Coating: Inspect surfaces to receive high performance coatings to ensure proper primer has been applied. C. Acceptance: Beginning of application means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Sand finishes on wood and metal surfaces between coats to assure smoothness and adhesion of subsequent coats. Use extra fine sandpaper to avoid cutting the edges when sanding. Apply putty or spackling compound after surfaces are primed and primer is dry. Bring material flush with adjoining surfaces. 2. Surfaces shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting work. Fill cracks, holes or checks full and make smooth before finish is applied to surfaces. Fill any cracks, etc., which occur after walls are sized. V F 2001-59 09900-3 B. Wood: 1. Interior Wood Surfaces to be Painted: Remove sap on surface by solvent -wiping. Touch-up resinous areas and knots with two coats of shellac. Fill voids with a high quality, lead-free paste wood filler after primer is dry. 2. Interior Wood to be Clear Finished: Sand smooth and free of marks. Fill voids and nail holes after first coat is dry using a filler compatible with the finish system and matching color. C. Metals: 1. Ferrous Metal: Remove foreign material, rust and mill scale from unprimed metal. a. Wire brush or sand damaged or rusted areas to bright metal. b. Remove grease and other foreign materials with mineral spirits. c. Dust clean. 2. Shop Primed Metals: Touch-up shop primed metals with a primer similar to the existing. Sand shop primer on hollow metal work immediately before painting to remove grease and dirt film from surfaces. 3. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Solvent clean with mineral spirits or other acceptable solvent in accordance with SSPC-SPl to remove all residue oil, grease or other contamination. Prime as specified. ^ 4. Non-ferrous Metals: Clean with lacquer thinner. D. Protection: 1. Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where finishing is being done to protect floors and other work from damage during the execution of work. -- 2. Remove items which are not to be coated from surfaces which are to be coated. Reinstall items after completion of coating application. Include mechanical grilles -' and factory finished items. 3. Where it becomes necessary to remove temporary coverings placed by others, replace some in proper manner. 4. Remove empty cans, oily rags and waste from the building every night. Do not allow to accumulate. E. Damage to Work of Others: Be responsible for any damage done to the work of other trades, repairing same to the satisfaction of the Architect. Replace any materials -- damaged to such an extent that they cannot be restored to their original condition. _ 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Existing Surfaces: If the surfaces are not in proper shape for painting, repair, rebuild or ^ refinish before proceeding with the work. Be responsible for any poor work caused by improper surfaces. The application of the first coat does not relieve the responsibility for the base. Do not apply any coats on either damp or wet surfaces and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard. B. Primer: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended coverage rate. 1. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 2. Sand primer with 100 grit or finer sandpaper. Remove dust. VF 2001-59 09900-4 C. Application: Apply with equipment recommended by coating manufacturer. Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials and thoroughly brush out. 1. Sand work between coats. 2. Dry Film Thickness for Interior Coatings: Apply to following total dry film thicknesses unless otherwise recommended by paint manufacturer. a. Semi -gloss Paints: 1.4 mils. D. Colors: Finish coat shall be colors selected by Architect. 1. Tint primers to match finish coat. E. Roller Application: Where paint or enamel is rolled on, use a fine nap roller so a nearly flat or orange peel texture is obtained. Dry Time: l . Semi -Gloss: 8 hours. 3.04 COATING SYSTEM - INTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Woodwork - Stained First Coat Stain as selected by Architect or Owner Second Coat Polyurethane Varnish Third Coat Polyurethane Varnish Sand with No. 100 sandpaper between coats. B. Woodwork - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi -Gloss Enamel C. Ferrous, Zinc Coated or Factory -Primed Metals - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer or Factory -Prime Coat Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi -Gloss Enamel D. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Painted: First Coat Factory -Prime Coat (Sanded) Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi -Gloss Enamel E. Drywall - Latex Painted: First Coat Second Coat Third Coat Block - Latex Painted: First Coat Second Coat Third Coat Suitable Primer Latex Enamel, Eggshell Latex Enamel, Eggshell Block Filler Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel, Semi -Gloss V F 2001-59 09900-5 G. Epoxy Walls: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Pittsburgh Pitt -Glaze Water Based Acrylic Epoxy Enamel, Semi -Gloss Third Coat Pittsburgh Pitt -Glaze Water Based Acrylic Epoxy Enamel, y Semi -Gloss 3.05 COATING SYSTEM - EXTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Metal Doors, Frames and Ferrous Metals - Pointed: N First Coat Factory Prime Coat or Suitable Primer r. Second Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior B. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized) - Painted: First Coat Galvanized Iron Primer u Second Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior -- Third Coat Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, Exterior C. Exposed Steel as Scheduled - High Performance Coating First Coat (Mandatory) Sherwin-Williams Kern Bond HS Universal Primer, 3.0 to 4.5 dry film mils - Second Coat Sherwin-Williams Steel Master 9500 Silicone Alkyd, 1.5 to 2.0 dry films mils Third Coat Sherwin-Williams Steel Master 9500 Silicone Alkyd, 1.5 to 2.0 dry films mils D. Block - Painted: First Coat Flood coat of Okon W-2 Waterproof Sealer Second Coat Exterior Acrylic Latex Mixed with Okon Paint Booster ., Third Coat Exterior Acrylic Latex Mixed with Okon Paint Booster 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS _ A. Mechanical Piping and Ductwork: Wherever insulated pipe or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished, cover canvas jacket with one coat sealer and two coats flat wall paint. Wherever uninsulated piping or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished or elsewhere as called for, finish pipes as called for under ferrous zinc coated, or factory primed metals. See Division 15 for identification markings. B. Grilles, Registers and Louvers: Prime coated grilles, registers and louvers, except those built permanently into masonry, will be delivered to this contractor by the party furnishing same. They shall be spray painted in colors as directed thoroughly covering all surfaces _ visible after installation and returned to the supplier for installation. After installation, do such touch up of screws and scuffed spots or repainting as required to achieve a uniform - paint job. VF 2001-59 09900-6 C. Objects on Roof: Paint all metal objects on the roof including, but not limited to, rooftop mechanical units, (lashings, roof drains, vents, exhaust fans, air intake hoods, roof hatches, etc. as specified under ferrous, zinc coated metals. D. Prime Coated Hardware: Paint all door closers, removable mullions and prime coated hardware as specified under ferrous, zinc coated or factory primed metal - painted. E. Electrical Wiremold: Paint to match wall on which installed. 3.07 SPECIAL AREAS A. Exposed Ceiling Structure - Painted. Scheduled areas without suspended ceilings: Spray paint all exposed elements which are not prefinished, including deck, joists, beams, conduit, ducts, mechanical elements, piping, insulation light fixture hangers, etc. at ceilings as follows: l . One (1) spray coat Tnemec Uni-Bond. 3.08 CLEAN UP A. Final Clean -Up: At the completion of work, remove all surplus materials, staging, rubbish; clean off all paint, varnish, stains from floors, glass, walls, hardware; and leave the premises in clean condition. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 09900-7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet partitions. B. Related Sections: 1. Toilet Accessories: Section 10810 Toilet Accessories. 2. Grab Bars: Section 10810 Toilet Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. Include color selection charts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Sanymetal Products Company, Inc. 2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 3. Weis/Robart Partitions Inc. 4. Accurate Partition, Inc. 5. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 6. Global Steel Products 7. Knickerbockers Partition Corp. 8. Metpar Steel Products Corp. 9. All American 10. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 11. Accepted Substitute B. Manufacturer and Type: Sanymetal Academy Flush type or equal partitions of other acceptable manufacturers. C. Construction: 1. Doors and Partitions: - a. Fabricate doors 1" thick, of two sheets of 20 gauge cold -rolled steel assembled over and cemented under pressure to a 7/8" thick sound - deadening fiber core. b. Provide the two face plates on doors and partitions with formed edges and sealed together with continuous drawn oval crown locking strips; interlocking strips on doors and partition mitered and welded at corners. VF 2001-59 10160-1 C. 22 gauge steel may be used for door construction. d. Reinforce partitions for support of grab bars. e. Factory cut and reinforce openings for feminine napkin disposal units. See Section 10810 for type. - 2. Pilasters: 1-1 /,V thick of two sheets No. 20 gauge cold -rolled steel; interlocking strips mitered and welded at corners. 3. Headrail: Tubular anti -grip type aluminum attached and bolted through top pilasters. Tubular bracing to extend full length of installation and over end compartment and be fastened into wall bracket. Aluminum head rails other than anti -grip type not allowed. D. Hardware and Fittings: 1. Provide dividing partitions attached to pilasters and wall with steel or aluminum stirrup brackets. 2. Provide base of pilasters and floor anchorage concealed by 3' high stainless steel plinth. 3. Provide doors equipped with gravity hinges. 4. Provide hinges adjustable for holding door in open or closed position when not latched. 5. Provide each door equipped with one cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper; one cast alloy chrome -plated latch, and one heavy cast alloy chrome - plated combination doorstop and latch keeper. 6. Provide door pulls for out -swinging doors. E. Finish: Factory finished, baked -on enamel. F. Colors: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Colors selected may vary from room to room. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect plumb, level and true and securely attach to walls and floors. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to the finished partitions, walls or floors. B. Touch up: Touch up scratches on partitions with spray enamel to match partitions. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 10160-2 SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flagpole. 2. Flag. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Bases: Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete and Section 02776 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAGPOLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. American Flagpole 2. Babcock -David 3. Baartol Company, Inc. 4. Eder Flag Pole Co. 5. Concord Industries 6. Accepted Substitute B. Description 1. Flagpoles: 25 ft. exposed length cone tapered aluminum, light bronze anodized finish. 2. Overall Pole Length: 28 ft. with setting depth of 3 ft. Wall thickness shall be .188", butt 6' diameter. 3. Accessories: Standard revolving truck with one aluminum sheave and one wire cable, one set chrome -plated snap hooks, 6" aluminum ball, and steel setting tube. Provide ground rod as detailed. Provide black anodized flashing collar. 4. Halyard System: Interior system with removable handle and key operated door. 5. Flag: 5 ft. x 8 ft. nylon American flag. V F 2001-59 10350-1 on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion: One Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($1,500 00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the One Hundred Fifty (150) calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially Complete. 2) Final Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, One Hundred ($100.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the Ten (10) calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 with the Millic 00300, OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR Contract Documents in current ne Hundred Ninety-seven Thous attached and incorporated hereir ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES for performance of the Work in accordance funds as follows: ($1,197,00.00), One and Dollars, in accordance with Section by this reference. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be in the amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. 900 of the value of Work completed until the Work has been 50o completed as determined by ENGINEER, when the retainage equals 5% of the Contract Price, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 90o of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install pole in foundation tube with self -centering bottom plate and lightning protector ground spike. Provide pole with standard flashing collar. See base detail on the Drawings END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 10350-2 SECTION 10440 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior door signs as required by code. B. Related Sections: 1. Lighted Exit Signs: Division 16 Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Products Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Include installation instructions and mounting details. 2. Signage contractor to prepare a sign location plan and specification package for review and approval by Architect and Owner. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Color Chart: Submit color samples for selection by Architect. 2. Submit full size sign samples for review. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provisions for Users with Disabilities: Comply with all applicable provisions of ADAAG guidelines. All room numbers, restroom identification, and other permanent identifying devices shall have tactile type and symbols integral with Signage. B. Single Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source from single manufacturer. C. Pre -installation Meetings: 1. Schedule a pre -installation meeting for interior signage. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling: In accordance with sign manufacturer's instructions. B. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and installation. C. Maintain protective coverings in place and in good repair until removal is necessary. D. Storage: Store products in dry condition inside enclosed facilities. VF 2001-59 10440-1 1.05 SCHEDULING Deliver signs when mounting services are ready for installation work to proceed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS } 2.01 INTERIOR SIGNS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI Sign Systems. 2. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Types 1. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms Identification: Surface mounted on wall adjacent to doors of each mechanical room and electrical room opening to a public corridor. 2. Public Restroom Identification: Surface mount on wall adjacent to doors at each _ public toilet indicating "Men' or "Women". Braille and Universal Pictorial Symbols in conformance to ADAAG guidelines. C. Description: 1. Type: ASI Intac, applied tactile graphics. 2. Material: Acrylic, one piece. 3. Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Lettering Style: Optima, upper case fonts. Centered. Provide normal spacing between Jeffers. Variation of letter forms is not acceptable. 5. Letter Size: One inch or best fit. 6. Sizes: a. Room Identification: 6 inch by 12 inch. 7. Graphics: a. Toilet Rooms: Universal symbol with Braille. Handicap accessible symbol. 8. Mounting: Permanent adhesive. .. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a minimum material temperature range of 100 degrees F without buckling, excessive opening of joints or overstressing of adhesives or fasteners. B. Form work to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines and angles. Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of units. C. Contact surfaces of connected members shall be true. Assemble so joints will be tight and unnoticeable without use of filling compound. " D. Signs shall have flat, even texture and be flat and sound. Lines and miters shall be sharp, arises unbroken, profiles accurate and ornament true to pattern. Plane surfaces shall be smooth, flat and without oil -canning, free of rack and twist. Maximum variation from plane of surface shall be plus or minus 0.015 inch. Restore texture to filled or cut areas. VF 2001-59 10440-2 E. Level or straighten wrought work. Extruded Members: Free from extrusion marks. Square turns and corners sharp. Curves true. G. Conceal fasteners where possible. Exposed ends and edges shall be mill smooth, with comers slightly rounded. H. Shop fabricate as far as practicable and pre -assemble items to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. Installed Dimensional Tolerance: Plus/minus 1 /16 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR SIGNS A. Locations: Mount permanent signage on walls in accordance with ADAAG guidelines. B. Mount at locations as indicated or as directed by the Architect and in compliance with all applicable codes. Attach by means of concealed theft -resistant adhesive mounts. Attach in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using only the mounting materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer for the surface upon which the items are to be mounted.. C. Signs: Install straight level and plumb according to details. After installation, remove protective coverings, marks and finger prints and leave signs and adjacent surfaces clean. D. Cooperate with other trades for installation of sign units to finish surfaces. Repair and replace damaged units as directed by the Architect. E. Protection: Protect units from damage until final acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION V F 2001-59 10440-3 SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 2. Fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 Rough Carpentry. 2. Drywall Openings: Section 09263 Gypsum Board Partitions and Walls. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. Indicate types and locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Larsen' Manufacturing Company 2. J.L. Industries 3. Norris Industries 4. Seco Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Standard Fire Hose Company 6. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company 7. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation 8. Alenco 9. Potter -Roemer 10. Accepted Substitute B. Cabinets: Larsen Model 2409-6R duo -panel door with semi -recessed 18 gage steel box. Pull handle to open door. Provide fire rated cabinets where located in fire rated partitions. C. Extinguishers: 10# multi -purpose A-B-C type with pressure gage. Furnish wall bracket for wall hung extinguishers. VF 2001-59 10520-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets: Install cabinets according to manufacturer's instructions. Provide necessary wood blocking. B. Extinguishers: Install in cabinets or on wall brackets and leave fully charged. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 10520-2 SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART t - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet accessories as indicated and specified. 2. Wrap for exposed pipes under lavatories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Grab Bars, Accessories and Lavatory Pipe Wrap: Comply with standards of ADAAG. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories 2. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI) 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation 5. General Accessory Mfg. Co. (Gamco). 6. McKinney/Parker 7. Accepted Substitute B. Accessory Type Schedule: Provide and install the accessories indicated in the Toilet Accessories Schedule on the Drawings or equal items by other acceptable manufacturers. 2.02 LAVATORY PIPE WRAP A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brocar Products, Inc. 2. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 3. Truebro, Inc. 4. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01600. B. Wrap For Exposed Pipes Under Lavatories: Brocar Products TrapWrap or accepted substitute. VF 2001-59 10810-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Accessories: Fasten accessories rigidly and securely to walls using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Pipe Wrap: Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Insulate all hot water and drain pipes under lavatories unless otherwise configured to protect against contact with users. 2. Sharp or Abrasive Surfaces: Not allowed under lavatories. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT Before final inspection, inspect each accessory installation for rigid and secure installation. Take action necessary for rigid and secure installations. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 10810-2 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Motorized projection screen for Conference Room. 2. Recessed ceiling enclosure for projection screen. B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under This Section. 1. Control Switch: Install under Section 16 Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for all items under this section as specified under Section 01330 Submittal Procedures. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01780 Closeout Submittals. l . Operation and maintenance data. 2. Warranty. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. B. Deliver and store in original crates and under cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Da -Life Screen Co., Inc. 2. Draper. 3. Approved substitute in accordance with Section 01600. 2.02 PROJECTION SCREENS A. Da -Life Board Room Electrol or equal of other acceptable manufacturer. Electrically operated, ceiling recess mounted as indicated. Provide three position limit switch with box and cover plate. Screen shall be glass beaded with no borders. 1. Provide all standard accessories. 2. Provide recessed ceiling enclosure as indicated. VF 2001-59 11132-1 B. Size: 84" x 84" unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install screens according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 ELECTRICAL HOOK UP Electrical subcontractor shall connect motorized screens to power source, install switch and relay equipment and provide and install all wiring required for proper operation. Adjust limit switches for proper travel. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures to Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 11132-2 paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application for payment. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 950 of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 3 DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS SECTION 12481 FLOOR MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor mats. B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under This Sections: 1. Mat Frame for Section 03320 Concrete Slabs -on -Grade. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATS AND FRAMES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Construction Specialties Pedimat 2. Balco Inc. 3. Reese 4. Accepted Substitute B. Type: C/S Pedimat Model PM375RM. 1. Mat Frame: C/S extruded aluminum, clear anodized. Sizes as indicated. 2. Mat: C/S Carpet Pedimat. Color as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mat Frame: Deliver for installation under Section 03300. Coordinate installation for correct elevation with adjacent flooring. B. Mat: Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 12481-1 SECTION 12497 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vertical window blinds in locations as indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330 Submittals. B. Samples: Submit complete set of color samples for Architect's selection. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01600. Deliver and store in original crates undercover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hunter Douglas. 2. Levolor 3. Louver Drape 4. Accepted substitute. B. Description: Hunter Douglas vertical blinds, fabric vanes, tilt rod tilting control, locknit polyester cord loop traverse control. 1. Styles and Colors: As selected by Architect form manufacturer's standards. 2. Valance not required. 3. Sizes: To fit windows. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Ceiling mount blinds with brackets at all windows in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 12497-1 SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATION TO DIVISION 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. Engineer shall decide which is most stringent. 1.02 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall be thoroughly experienced in the design and installation of heating, cooling and plumbing equipment and systems specified herein. All work performed by the Contractor shall be of the highest quality. The Contractor shall be responsible for his Subcontractors to see that the systems are installed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 1.03 COORDINATION WITHIN DIVISION 15 A. Contract Documents: 1. General: The Contract Documents are diagrammatic, showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the mechanical work and its interface with other work. Such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Supplemental Instructions: The exact location for some items in this Specification may not be shown on the Drawings. The location of such items shall be established by the Engineer during the progress of the work. 3. Discrepancies: a. Examine Drawings and Specifications. b. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer and obtain written instructions before proceeding. C. Should there be a conflict within or between the Specifications or Drawings, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. d. Items called for in either specifications or drawings shall be required as if called for in both. B. Coordination Drawings: For places where clearances are limited, and for places where several elements of mechanical work (or combinations of mechanical and other work) must be located with precision in order to fit into available space, prepare Coordination Drawings (Shop Drawings) at a suitable scale, showing the required dimensions, and submit this drawing for approval. tCEg-01055 15010-1 C. Utility Connections: 1. Coordinate the connection of mechanical system with utilities and services. 2. Comply with regulations of utility suppliers. 3. The Contract Documents indicate the available information on existing utilities and services, and on new services (if any) to be provided to the project by utility companies and agencies. a. Notify Engineer immediately if discrepancies are found. 4. Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility Company. a. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. 1.04 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule: Set In Power Control Furnished Place Wiring Wiring Under Under Under Under ITEM Division Division Division Division Equipment Motors 15 15 16 15 Starters/Contractors: Separate 16 16 16. 15 Factory Mounted 15 15 16 15 Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16 Manual Operating Switches 16 16 16 Control Relays - Separate 15 15 16 15 24V/120V Control Wiring 15 15 15 Control Relays - in Packaged Equipment 15 15 16 15 Control Transformers - in Packaged Equipment 15 15 16 15 Time Switches 15 15 16 15 Thermostats - Separate 15 15 16 15 Thermostat and Controls: Integral with Equipment 15 15 16 15 tCEg-01055 15010 - 2 Set In Power Control Furnished Place Wiring Wiring Under Under Under Under ITEM Division Division Division Division Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16 Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control 16 16 16 15 Water Heaters 15 15 16 15 B. Control Wiring: 1. Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contractors, starters, relays etc., and wiring for valve and damper operators that is not a part of Division 15. 2. For single phase devices where power current passes through controller, wiring between controller and device shall be considered control wiring; wiring to device from electric panel shall be considered power wiring. 1.05 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL OPENINGS A. General: 1. Coordinate all mechanical openings with the appropriate structural contractor. 2. Transmit all information relating to mechanical openings in a timely manner to avoid construction delays. 1.06 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS A. General: 1. Coordinate the mechanical work to the progress of the work of other trades. 2. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. B. Cutting and Patching: Refer to Section 15050. C. Chases, Inserts and Openings: 1. Provide measurements, drawings, and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses. 2. Check sizes and locations of openings provided. 3. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Support Dimensions: Provide dimensions and drawings so that concrete bases and other equipment supports to be provided under other Sections of the Specifications can be built at the proper time. tCEg-01055 15010 - 3 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Codes: Comply with the following: l . Uniform Building Code - 1997 Edition. 2. Uniform Mechanical Code - 1997 Edition. 3. Uniform Plumbing Code - 1997 Edition. 4. National Electric Code - Current Edition. 5. Local Modifications to above Codes. 6. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 7. Applicable NFPA Pamphlets. B. Other Regulations: Comply with the following: l . U. S. and State Department of Labor Safety Regulations pertaining to the completed. project. 2. Requirements of Utilities serving the project. 3. Requirements of Fire Departments serving the project. 4. Regulations of the Health Department having jurisdiction. " 5. ASHRAE Energy Conservation Standard 90. _ 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). C. Additional Regulations: Follow additional regulations which appear in individual `+ Sections of these Specifications. D. Contradictions: Where Codes are contradictory, follow the most stringent, unless otherwise indicated in Plans or Specifications. Engineer shall determine which is ^ most stringent. E. Contract Documents Not in Compliance: 1. Where the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the Codes, either notify the Engineer in writing during the " Bidding Period of the revisions required to meet Code requirements, or _ provide an installation which complies with the Code requirements. 2. Follow Drawings and Specifications where they are superior to Code requirements. F. Permits 1. Obtain and pay for all permits required by authorities and agencies having jurisdiction for the work of this Division. 2. Post permits as required. G. Tap and Connection Fees: 1. Fees charged by Utilities for making connections, bringing service to property line or to meter and similar services will be paid by the owner. -. 2. Investment fees or plant development fees, which are charges levied by utilities to cover the cost of the utility system to be born by this project, are not part of the work of this Division and will be paid by the owner if applicable tCEg-01055 15010 - 4 Inspections and Tests: 1. Arrange for all required inspections and tests. 2. Pay all charges. 3. Notify Engineer 48 hours before tests. 4. Submit six copies for Owners records of permits, licenses, inspection reports and test reports. 1.08 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General Recording Procedure: 1. Maintain a white -print set of Mechanical Contract Drawings in clean, undamaged condition, for mark-up of installations which vary substantially from the Contract Drawings. 2. Record changes drawn to scale and fully dimensioned, in the following: a. Work concealed behind or within other work, in an inaccessible arrangement. b. Mains and branches of piping systems: (1) with valves and control devices located and numbered. (2) with concealed unions located. (3) with items requiring maintenance located traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc. C. Underground piping and ducts, both exterior and interior. d. Ductwork layouts, including locations of coils, dampers, filters, boxes and similar units. e. Concealed control system devices and sensors. B. Corrected Drawings: 1. Transmit corrected drawings in AutoCAD version 14 or 2000 format as a submittal to the Engineer for Owner's use and record. 2. Contractor shall purchase AutoCAD files from the Engineer to use in preparing the record drawings. Fees to be negotiated with the engineer. 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submission: 1. Submit three typed and bound copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals prior to scheduling systems demonstration for the Owner. 2. Bind each Maintenance Manual in one or more vinyl covered, 3-ring binders, with pockets for folded drawings. a. Mark the back spine and outside front cover of each binder with system identification and volume number. Requirement Contents: 1. Manuals shall have index with tab dividers for each major equipment section to facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment. 2. Identify data within each section with drawing code numbers as they appear on Drawings and Specifications. Include as a minimum the following data: a. Alphabetical list of system components, with the name, address and 24 hour telephone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation. tCEg-01055 15010 - 5 b. Operating instructions for complete system including: (1) Major start, operation and shut -down procedures. C. Maintenance Instructions for each piece of equipment including: (1) Equipment lists. (2) Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. — (3) Necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. " (4) Product Data. (5) Installation instructions. (6) Parts lists. (7) Complete wiring diagrams. d. Temperature control diagrams for package equipment (as -built). "- e. Marked or changed prints locating concealed parts and variations from the original system design. f. Balancing Report. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. The warranty period shall begin in accordance with General Conditions. 1. During this period, provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. 1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Refer to Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities for specific requirements regarding — temporary gas, water, sanitary, storm, heating, cooling and utilities during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY CONTROL — A. Qualification of Products: When products are specified by manufacturer and model number, equivalent products by other manufacturers listed may be provided. _ B. Products by manufacturers not listed in this Specification may be submitted to Engineer during Bidding Period in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. — C. Coordination of Options and Substitutions: Where Contract Documents permit selection from several options, or where substitutions are authorized, coordinate clearance and other interface requirements with mechanical and other work. 1. Provide necessary additional items so that selected or substituted item operates properly and properly fits in the available space. D. Concrete for Mechanical Work: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of Division 3 Sections for whatever concrete work is necessary or shown specifically for installation of the mechanical work. tCEg-01055 15010 - 6 .� 2.02 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Sequencing: 1. Coordinate submittals so that work will not be delayed by submittals. 2. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals. 3. Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance with requirements of Contract Documents has been confirmed by Contractor. 4. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. B. Preparation of Submittals: 1. Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify specification, section number, use, project, date, Contractor, Subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. 2. Indicate any portions of work which deviate from the Contract Documents. a. Explain the reasons for the deviations. b. Show how such deviations coordinate with interfacing portions of other work. 3. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking. 4. Provide space for Engineer's "Action" marking. 5. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned "Without Action". C. Quantities: Except as otherwise indicated, submit six copies. 1. Multiple System Items: Where a required submittal relates to an operational item of equipment used in more than one system, increase the number of final copies as necessary to complete the Maintenance Manuals for each system. 2. Preliminary Submittal: Provide a preliminary, two -copy submittal for automatic temperature controls and when product data is required (or desired by Contractor) for selection of options by Engineer. 3. General Distribution: a. Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing copy submittal requirements) to Subcontractors, Suppliers, Fabricators, Installers, Governing Authorities and others as necessary for proper performance of the work. b. Include such additional copies in transmittal to Engineer where required to receive "Action" marking before final distribution. (1) Show such distributions on transmittal forms. D. Response to Submittals: Where standard product data have been submitted, it is recognized: 1. That the Submitter has determined that the products fulfill the specified requirements. 2. That the submittal is for the Engineer's information only, but will be returned with appropriate action where observed to be not in compliance with the requirements. tCEg-01055 15010 - 7 2.03 SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Data 1. Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct product, size, type, material, trim, accessory group or other variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. — 2. Delete or mark -out significant portions of pre-printed data which are not applicable. 3. Where operating ranges are shown, mark data to show portion of range required for project application. 4. For each product, include the following: - a. Sizes. b. Weights. C. Speeds. d. Capacities. e. Piping connection sizes and locations. f. Statements of compliance with the required standards and regulations. g. Performance data. — h. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: l . Prepare Mechanical Shop Drawings, except diagrams, to accurate scale. a. Show clearance dimensions at critical locations. _. b. Show dimensions of spaces required for operation and maintenance. C. Show interfaces with other work, including structural support. C. Test Reports 1. Submit test reports which have been signed and dated by the firm performing the test. - 2. Prepare test reports in the manner specified in the standard or regulation governing the test procedure (if any) as indicated. 2.04 COMPATIBILITY A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work. B. Altitude Ratings: Except where noted otherwise, all ratings and capacities stated in the Contract Documents are at the altitude of the project not sea level. — C. Fuel Characteristics: 1. Review fuel characteristics with the Fuel Supplier designated by the Owner. 2. Determine burner or combustion equipment provisions needed for _ optimum performance. a. Provide equipment accordingly. tCEg-01055 15010 - 8 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of "Contract Documents" in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate 7.2. 6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets with the following general title: Architectural - AC, AS.1 to AS.2, A1.1 to A9.1, Structural - Sl.l to 52.2, Mechanical - MPO to MPO.l, M1.0 to M2.0, Plumbing - P1.0 to P2.0, Electrical - E1.1 to E4.1, Civil - Cl to C12, Landscape - Ll, Irrigation - 1 to 3. The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers 1 to 2, inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 4 D. Power Characteristics: Where power characteristics are not stated in Division 15 Sections, refer to the Sections of Division 16 and the Electrical Drawings for the power characteristics of each power driven item of mechanical equipment. 2.05 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Equipment Nameplates: Provide power -operated mechanical equipment with a permanent nameplate attached by the manufacturer, indicating: l . The manufacturer. 2. Product name. 3. Model number. 4. Serial number. 5. Speed. 6. Capacity. 7. Power characteristics. 8. Labels of testing, listing, or inspecting agencies. 9. Other similar data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATION. A. Inspection and Preparation: 1. Examine the work interfacing with mechanical work, and the conditions under which the work will be performed and notify the Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. 2. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Layout: 1. Layout the mechanical work in conformity with the Contract Drawings, Coordination Drawings and other Shop Drawings, product data and similar requirements so that the entire mechanical plant will perform as an integrated system, properly interfaced with other work, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. 2. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, comply with the or Engineer's decision on resolution of the conflict. 3. Take necessary field measurements to determine space and connection requirements. 4. Provide sizes and shapes of equipment so the final installation conforms to the intent of the Contract Documents. C. Integrate mechanical work in ceiling spaces with suspension system, light fixtures and other work so that required performances of each will be achieved. 3.02 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. tCEg-01055 15010 - 9 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment: ~ 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed _ or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Clearances: 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. ^ b. Aligned with other work. C. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. - 2. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 3. Give the right-of-way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). D. Access l . Provide for removal, without damage to other parts, of: a. Coils. b. Tube bundles. C. Tubes. d. Shafts. e. Fan wheels. f. Drives. g. Filters. h. Strainers. i. Bearings. — j. Other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. 2. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other work. 3. Provide unions where required. 4. Locate operating and control equipment and devices for easy access. 5. Provide all required access panels in inaccessible construction where mechanical equipment is concealed by finishes and similar work. 6. Installation of access panels shall be by others. 7. Access panels in fire rated assemblies shall also be fire rated in a like manner. E. Protection of Work: 1. All pipe ends, valves, ducts and equipment left unconnected shall be capped, plugged or otherwise properly protected to prevent damage or the intrusion of foreign matter. I tCEg-01055 15010 - 10 2. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Conduct a one day walk-through of the project. 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. B. Date and time of walk-through will be determined by Owner. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15010 - 1 1 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. Engineer shall decide which is most stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturers 1. BAR -CO. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor Division, Inryco, Inc. 4. Wilkenson Co., Inc. 5. Zurn. B. Model: 1. Bar-500 for drywall (non -rated). 2. FIR for 1 1 /2 hour'B' label. C. Construction: 1. Doors: 14 gauge steel. 2. Frames: 16 gauge steel. 3. Finish: Smooth, ready for paint. 4. Latch: Screw driver operated. 5. Rating: Suitable for fire rated walls and ceilings where applicable. 6. Hinge: Continuous, piano type PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Quality Coordination: Where excavation and backfill for mechanical work passes through or occurs in the same area as work specified in Division 2, comply with both the requirements of Division 2 and the requirements of this Section, or whichever is the more stringent (as determined by the Engineer in cases of conflicting requirements). B. Inspection: l . Examine the areas to be excavated and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. 2. Notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. 3. Do not proceed with excavating until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. tCEg-01055 15050 - 1 C. General: l . Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, so that the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum. 2. Remove all rock and boulders from excavation before installing mechanical work. 3. Slope sides of excavations as required for stability, or provide necessary shoring. 4. Remove shoring during backfilling. 5. Excavate near large trees (within the drip line) by hand. a. Protect the root system from damage or drying to the greatest extent possible. b. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots _ with burlap. C. Paint root cuts of 1" diameter and larger with asphaltic tree paint. 6. Saw -cut asphalt and concrete surfaces. D. Existing Utilities: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in a manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. E. Depth of Excavation: ^ 1. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water -bearing piping (water, steam condensate, drainage) so that the top of piping will not be less than 5'0"/4'0" vertical distance below finished grade. 2. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: a. Where directed, because of unsatisfactory soil condition at bottom of excavation, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil -bearing condition. Backfill with 1-1/2 inch washed rock, or other approved subbase material, compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth. b. Where piping crosses over an area more than 50" wide, which has been previously excavated to a greater depth than required for the piping installation: .- (1) Excavate to undisturbed soil in a width equal to the pipe diameter plus 2'0". (2) Install 1-1/2 inch washed rock, or 8" courses of approved subbase material; each course compacted to 95% of maximum density, as required to fill excavation and support piping. _. Protection: 1. Provide temporary covering or enclosure and temporary heat as necessary to protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install mechanical work on frozen excavation bases or subbases. 2. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions, to minimize the possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages and hazards. ^ 3. Allow no more than 100 feet between pipe laying and point of complete .. backfilling. T tCEg-01055 15050 - 2 4. Maintain dry excavations for mechanical work by removing water. a. Protect excavations from inflow of surface water. b. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations. C. Protect excavations from major inflow of ground water by installing temporary sheeting and waterproofing. d. Provide adequate barriers which will protect other excavations and below -grade property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through mechanical work excavations. 5. Provide signs, illumination and barricades as necessary to prevent accidents at excavations. 6. Install and operate a well -point dewatering system to maintain ground water at a level approximately 2'0" below mechanical work excavations, until backfilling is completed. G. Excavated Material: 1. Store excavated material (temporarily) near the excavation, in a manner which will not interfere with or damage the excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within the drip line). 2. Retain excavated material which complies with the requirements for backfill material. 3. Remove excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material from project site, and dispose of in a lawful manner. H. Bedding: l . Where indicated below, install as bedding material graded sand with 100% passing through a 3/8" sieve, and 0% passing through No. 100 sieve. a. Compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. b. Install bedding from six inches below bottom of pipe to six inches above top of pipe. C. Provide bedding for: (1) Wrapped, coated or plastic pipe and tanks. (2) Piping over six inches, horizontal cylindrical tanks and similar work. (a) Shape the subbase to fit the shape of the bottom 90 degrees of the cylinder, for uniform continuous support. (3) All water and sewer pipe. 2. Where rock is used as subbase, place 8 mil polyethylene between rock and bedding. 3. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flange connections, valves and similar enlargements in the piping systems. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2'6" below surface of roadway: l . Provide 4" base slab of concrete to support piping. 2. After piping is installed and tested, provide 4" thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. 3. Provide 2500 psi concrete for encasement and slab. tCEg-01055 15050 - 3 J. Backfilling 1. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing is indicated. 2. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. 3. Do not backfill with frozen soil materials. 4. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of mechanical work and compact r, simultaneously. 5. Do not dislocate the work from installed positions. 6. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at the time of backfilling excavations for mechanical work. 7. Backfill with finely -graded subbase material to 6" above wrapped, coated, plastic piping and tanks, and to centerline of other tanks. 8. Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the densities indicated in Division 2 using power -driven, hand -operated compaction equipment. " 9. If densities are not indicated in Division 2, compact to the following percent of maximum per ASTM D 1557: a. Lawn/Landscaped Areas: 85%. -- b. Paved Areas, Other Than Roadways: 90%. C. Roadways:95%. d. Floors:95%. 10. Where compaction tests indicate lower densities of backfill than specified, continue compaction (and re -excavation and backfilling where necessary). a. Provide additional testing as directed by the Engineer. b. The allowable density tolerance is not more than one -test -out -of -five falling more than two percentage points below the specified density. _ C. Initial testing is/is not work of this Section. 11. Where subsidence is measurable or observable at mechanical work excavations during the guarantee period: a. Remove the surface (pavement, lawn or other finish). b. Add backfill material, compact and replace the surface treatment. C. Restore the appearance, quality and condition of the surface or finish to match adjacent work. d. Eliminate evidence of the restoration to the greatest extent possible. _ K. Landscape Restoration: 1. Where excavation and backfill for mechanical work passes through or occurs in a landscaped area, repair or replace the landscape work to match the original condition and quality of the work. 2. Comply with the requirements of Division 2 for repair or replacement of work and for follow-up maintenance on lawns and planting to ensure satisfactory recovery. L. Pavement Restoration: Where excavation and backfill for mechanical work passes through or occurs in an area of paving or flooring, replace and restore the construction and finish of the paving or flooring to match the original condition and quality of the work. tCEg-01055 15050 - 4 M. Surface Repairs: The repairing and replacing of previously installed landscape development work, paving, floor slabs and similar finishes occurring in excavated areas is/is not included in work of Division 15. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Openings for mechanical work which do not require patching or painting, such as, holes drilled in existing construction for pipe and finished with escutcheons is included in Division 15. B. Provide measurements, drawings and layouts to installers of other work, so that required openings may be provided as construction progresses. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide this information shall be done at no increase in the contract amount. C. All cutting and patching of existing work required for work of Division 15 shall be included in Division 15. D. Where possible, mark openings to be cut on existing construction. Otherwise, provide measurements, drawings and layouts to the trade doing the cutting so that openings may be provided as construction progresses. E. Structural Limitations: Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors, decks and other members intended to withstand stress, except with Engineer's written authorization. 1. Provide lintels, columns, braces and other temporary and permanent supports made necessary by cutting. 2. Submit shop drawings of permanent supports. Cutting Concrete: 1. Where authorized, cut openings through concrete for pipe penetration and similar services by core drilling or sawing. Coordinate all openings with Precast Concrete Contractor prior to cutting, sawing and core drilling. Use x- ray or other means to determine location of steel within slabs and panels. 2. Do not cut by hammer -driven chisel or drill. G. Cutting: 1. Do not endanger or damage other work through the procedures and processes of cutting to accommodate mechanical work. 2. Review the proposed cutting with the Installer of the work to be cut, and comply with his recommendations to minimize damage. 3. Where necessary, engage the original Installer or other specialists to execute the cutting in the recommended manner. H. Patching: l . Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or other damage inflicted during the installation of mechanical work, engage experienced craftsmen to complete the patching of the other work. 2. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in exposed finishes. tCEg-01055 15050 - 5 I. Painting: Paint all surfaces marred by cutting and/or patching to match existing. 1. Engage experience painters. 2. Painting of mechanical systems and equipment shall be done by others except factory finishes and where painting is specifically called for in Division 15. 3.03 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels where indicated and at locations where required for access to: l . Concealed valves. 2. Dampers. 3. Control devices. 4. Equipment servicing. B. Deliver access panels for installation by the trade responsible for surface in which installed. " 1. Provide instructions for location. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Housekeeping Pads 1. Concrete pads for mechanical equipment, including anchor bolts and inserts, as may be required will be provided under Division 3- Concrete Work, in accordance with setting diagrams, locations and sizes furnished by the equipment installer. 3.05 DRIP PANS A. Drip Pans: Where possible to run mechanical piping elsewhere, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) work which is sensitive to _ moisture; otherwise, provide drip pans under mechanical piping, sufficient to protect electrical work from dripping. l . Locate pan immediately below piping, and extend a minimum of 6' on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment being protected. 2. Fabricate pans 2 deep of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 22 gauge galvanized steel. 3. Provide properly sized copper drainage piping from pan to nearest floor .: drain or similar suitable point of discharge and terminate pipe as an open -sight drainage connection. - 4. Provide permanent support and anchorage to prevent displacement of drip pans. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15050 - 6 SECTION 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. Provide factory -fabricated pipe, tubing and fittings of the type, materials, grade, class and pressure rating indicated. 2. Provide fittings of sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection. 3. Use factory -fabricated fittings for all branches and changes of size and direction, except where noted otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices, which will achieve permanently -leak proof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. 2. Install each run with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly, maintenance or replacement of valves and equipment. 3. Reduce sizes by use of reducing fittings. 4. Install piping without springing or forcing. 5. Support piping independently at equipment so its weight will not be supported by the equipment. 6. Furnish all devices necessary for final connection, including but not limited to tail pieces, stops and supplies. B. Location: Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain). a. Avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. b. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. tCEg-01055 15055 - 1 ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 5 2. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent -enclosure elements of the building. a. Limit clearance to 0.5' where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. _ b. Where possible, locate insulated piping for 1.0" clearance outside insulation. 3. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or ' above suspended ceilings. A. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. B. Dielectric Unions: Install dielectric unions to prevent galvanic action between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Gaskets shall be suitable for intended service. 3.02 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING " A. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings or insulation, if any. - B. Flush out piping systems with clean water before proceeding with required tests. 3.03 PIPING TESTS _ A. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. B. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible C. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. D. Fill each section of water, steam, drain or vent piping with water and pressurize for two hours at 150% of operating pressure, but not less than 50 psig for pressure piping and ten feet for drain and vent piping. E. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. F. Repair piping systems sections which fail by disassembly and re -installations, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. 1. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics or other temporary repair methods. G. After testing and repair work have been completed, drain test water from piping systems. tCEg-01055 15055 - 2 3.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DISENFECTION A. Disinfection: 1. Fill all domestic water lines with a chlorine water solution of 50 parts per million, minimum. 2. Hold solution in pipe for at least 24 hours. 3. Open and close all valves 3 times during chlorination. 4. Waste chlorine solution from each outlet. 5. Measure solution at end. If not 10 ppm, repeat. Domestic Water Systems Disinfection: 1. All new potable water systems shall be cleaned as herein specified prior to testing or application of insulation. Testing must be witnessed by Owner's representative and State Department of Health personnel and report filed with the Owner to receive final payment. 2. Notify State Department of Health in writing, 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the cleaning process. 3. The cleaning process will not be deemed acceptable unless witnessed and approved by the State Department of Health's representative. 4. Comply with City of Fort Collins standards or Colorado State Department of Health requirements, whichever is more stringent. 5. The report shall contain the following and be submitted to the Owner within 24 hours of the cleaning: a. Date, time and place of cleaning b. Duration C. Person responsible d. Solutions concentration and temperature e. Signature of State Department of Health representative END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15055 - 3 SECTION 15100-VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the more stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including: i. Dimensions. ii. Sizes. iii. End Connections. iv. Weights. V. Installation instructions. vi. Instructions on repacking and repairing valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE TYPES AND SIZES B. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide valve with pressure class selected from MSS or ANSI standards, based on the maximum pressure and temperature in the piping system. C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valve of same size as connecting pipe size. 2.02 BALL VALVES A. Services: i. Domestic Water. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco. 2. Apollo. 3. Grinnell. 4. Milwaukee. 5. Shortline. ' C. Valves 2 1 /2" and Smaller. 1. Models: b. Nibco T585-70 (threaded ends). C. Nibco 5585-70 (soldered ends). tCEg-01055 15100- 1 2. Descriptions: Rated 150 psi SWP non -shock WOG and have 2-pc. cast bronze bodies, TFE seats, anti -blowout stems and chrome -plated brass/bronze ball. Valve ends shall have full depth ANSI threads or extended solder connections and be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP 110. 2.03 CHECK VALVES A. Services: 1. Domestic Water. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco. 2. Apollo. 3. Grinnell. 4. Milwaukee. C. Valves 2'/a" and Smaller: 1. Models: a. Nibco T413-Y (threaded ends). b. Nibco 5413-Y (soldered ends). 2. Description: Y-pattern swing -type manufactured in accordance with MSS- SP80, Class 125, bronze ASTM B-62 body with TFE seat disc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with the following requirements: a. Install valves with stems pointing up, and as close to vertical as possible. b. Install valves at each piece of equipment, fixture or appliance so that the supply and return services can be shut off to remove the item without disturbing the piping systems. c. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines to isolate sections of piping where branch flow is more than 10% of the total flow. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15100- 2 SECTION 15120 -PIPING ACCESSORIES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data - Piping Accessories: following piping accessories: l . Sealing compound for sleeves. 2. Fire -stopping material. 3. Expansion compensators. 4. Flexible pipe connections. 5. Guides. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Escutcheon Plates Submit manufacturer's data on the 1. Type: Split ring. 2. Construction: Brass. 3. Finish: a. At Painted Surfaces: Prime coat. b. At Other Surfaces: Nickel or Chrome plate. 4. For Floor Sleeves: Where sleeves extend above floor surface, provide depth to cover sleeve. B. Fire -Stopping Material. 1. Manufacturer: a. Design Basis: Dow Corning. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: C. 3M. 2. Model: a. RTV Foam or RTV Silicone. b. Fire -stop sealant. 2.02 FABRICATED ACCESSORIES A. Steel -Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. Remove burrs. B. PVC Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 PVC pipe. Remove burrs. C. Iron -Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from service weight cast-iron pipe. Remove burrs. tCEg-01055 15120-1 D. Sheet -Metal Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from galvanized sheet -metal, closed with lock -seam joints. ^ 1. For following pipe sizes, provide gauge indicated: a. Three Inch Pipe and Smaller: 20 gauge. b. Four Inch to Six Inch Pipe: 16 gauge. C. Over Six Inch Pipe: 14 gauge. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pipe Sleeves 1. Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls, floors, ceilings, roofs and structural members, except soil pipe penetrations through concrete slab 4 on grade. ^ 2. Provide sleeves of adequate size, accurately centered on pipe runs, so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in the sleeve. 3. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except extend floor sleeves 0.25" above floor finish and where floor surface drains to a floor drain, extend floor sleeve 0.75" above floor finish. 4. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves. 5. Provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering pipe sleeves. 6. Except as otherwise indicated, install steel or PVC pipe sleeves. ^ 7. At interior partitions and ceilings, install sheet metal sleeves. 8. At exterior penetrations below grade, install iron pipe sleeves. �. B. Caulking 1. Where water seal or sound seal, but not fire seal, is needed, (foundation walls, slab on grade): Fiberglass backing and heavy bead of silicone caulking compound. Thunderline link -seal model LS. 2. Where sleeve pierces a fire separation wall or floor: Fire stop material. C. Install escutcheon plates at pipe sleeves where piping is exposed to view in "^ occupied spaces of the building, on the exterior, and elsewhere as indicated. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15120-2 SECTION 15140 - PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Comply with MSS Standard Practice SP-69, published by Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry for type and size. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: 1. Hangers other than clevis type. 2. Anchors. 3. Pipe stands. B. Submit structural calculations on trapeze type supports and pipe stands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Use adjustable pipe hangers on suspended pipe. 2. Chain or wire strap hangers will not be permitted. 3. Isolate hangers coming in contact with bare copper pipe with dielectric hanger liners. 4. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying. 5. Provide di -electric isolation between bare copper pipe and steel studs in all walls. B. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. C. Hangers 1. General: Adjustable wrought steel clevis. 2. Multiple or Trapeze: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 3. Hanger Sizes and Spacing: a. For gas, domestic water and drain piping, conform to the Uniform Plumbing Code for spacing and the following table for hanger rod sizes. b. For steam and hydronic piping, conform to the following table. tCEg-01055 15140- 1 MINIMUM MAXIMUM HANGER PIPE TYPE PIPE SIZE SPACING ROD SIZE Copper Pipe 1 /2" thru 1" 8'-0" 3/8" 1-1/4" thru 2" 10'-0" 3/8" 2-1/2" thru 3" 10'-0" 1 /2" Cast Iron Soil 2" 3/8" Pipe 3" to 5" 1 /2" 6" 5/8" D. Insulated Pipe Supports: 1. Size pipe supports for outside diameter of pipe insulation. 4,e E. Wall Supports: —. 1. 1 /2" through 3": Unistrut type channel and steel clamp. a. Use Hydrosorb cushions or other di -electric isolation between r bare copper pipe and steel studs. 2. 4" and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Cast iron pipe shall have at least one hanger per section and one per fitting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS A. Adequately support piping from the building structure with adjustable hangers to maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. 1. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying. 2. Do not support pipe from other pipe. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 / 1 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent work. 1. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. 2. Space hangers as called for in 2.01. C. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1 /2 / 1 /2 inches minimum after piping is erected. ._ D. Provisions for Movement: Install hangers and supports: l . To allow controlled movement of piping systems. 2. To permit proper movement between pipe anchors. 3. To facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, bends and offsets. 4. To isolate force due to weight or expansion from equipment connections. E. In general, attach hangers to upper chord of roof trusses and floor joists, using long rods to facilitate pipe movement. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15140 - 2 SECTION 15170 - MOTORS AND STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SCOPE -OF -WORK A. Provide all motors for mechanical equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. 1. Motors: Identify by unit served. Include: a. Frame. b. Insulation class. C. Efficiency. d. Power factor. e. Index number. f. Speed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. Manufacturers 1. Design Basis: Century. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General Electric. b. Westinghouse. C. U. S. Motor. d. Allis Chalmers. e. Louis Allis. 3. Factory installed motors may be by equipment manufacturer's standard supplier. B. Bearings: Ball bearings, grease lubricated with grease fittings or factory packed and sealed. C. Enclosure: As required by location. D. Service Factor: 1.15. E. Full -Load Operation: At 40 degrees C and altitude of project. tCEg-01055 15170 - 1 F. Insulation: l . Constant Speed: Class B. G. Efficiency Ratings: l . All motors one horsepower and larger shall be ultra -high efficiency motors, in accordance with IEEE Test Method I I2A, Method B, and NEMA Standard MGI-12.536. 2. The nominal efficiency shall be in accordance with, or better than, the following: HP NOMINAL EFFICIENCY 1 82.1 1-1/2 83.5 2 84.6 3 86.3 5 87.4 7-1/2 89.0 10 89.5 15 90.5 20 91.1 25 91.8 30 92.2 40 92.8 H. Electrical Characteristics: l . Motors 3/4 hp and larger shall be of voltage and phase indicated on the Contract Documents, squirrel cage induction normal starting torque, unless otherwise noted. 2. Motors 1/2 hp and smaller shall be 115 volt single phase, permanent split capacitor start. I. Multispeed Motors l . Type: Motors may be one of the following: a. Two speed, two winding 1800/900 rpm. b. Two speed, one winding 1800/900 rpm. J. Motor Types: 1. Open drip proof (ODP) for all indoor locations. 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for all outdoor locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTORS A. Install motors on motor mounting systems so coupling or belt drive is properly aligned. Provide proper belt tension. Dowel direct coupled motors. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15170 - 2 OWNER: C/IITYQOF FO�RQT C�O//�LLINS JOHN F. FISCHBACC,H/,, CITY pMANAGER BY: `I./`� �.X.�C, w— JAME B O'NEILL II, CPPO, FNIGP CTOR OF PURCHASING AND RIK MA/�7AGEMENT Date: �' Attest: Address Fort Collins, CO 80522 Approved as to Form 06 11 k Assis ant ity Attorney CONTRACTOR: Drahota Construction Co. B y : J-�— �n� 1�i21fI�1 Title:�o�-� Date: Ly jS10L (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest: Address for giving notices: 0�-lion Dr BIa�9. G Ff. CT d i ns, 8d5�7 LICENSE NO.: L9-- 9 Section 00520 Page 6 SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products. B. Where more than a single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide a single selection for each application. 2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi -rigid, permanent, color -coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. B. For Pipes Less Than Six Inches (including insulation if any): Provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: l . Snap -on application of pre -tensioned semi-(gid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Taped to pipe for insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1 /2". C. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed wording which best describes piping system. 2.03 ENGRAVED PLASTIC -LAMINATE SIGNS A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/ 16" thick, black with white core (letter color). B. Fastening: 1. Screws. 2. Rivets. 3. Permanent Adhesive. tCEg-01055 15190 - 1 C. Lettering and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in the mechanical identification work, with the corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. 2. In addition, for heating or cooling units, identify are served. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. 3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. General: Install pipe markers on piping of the following systems and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: 1. Domestic water piping (hot, hot circulating and cold). 2. Natural Gas piping. 3. Storm drain piping. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, accessible maintenance spaces: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where there could be a question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. 4. Near majorequipment items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run. 3.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install an engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1. Provide signs for the following operational devices: a. Roof Top Units. b. Computer Room Units. C. Condensing Units. d. Exhaust Fans. e. Domestic Water Heaters. f. Circulation Pumps. g. Infra Red Heating Units. general categories of equipment and END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15190 - 2 C. Foster. d. Owens Corning. e. Knauf. f. IMCOA. B. Materials l . Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Schuller MicroLok 850, heavy density pipe insulation with APT jacket. 2. Fiberglass Pipe Fitting Insulation: Schuller'Zeston" fitting covers with factory cut fiberglass insulation insert. 3. Flexible Unicellular Pipe Insulation: Rubatex, Armaflex or Imcolock. C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Fiberglass pipe insulation above ground inside buildings. D. Thickness l . Domestic Cold Water Piping (Below Grade): a. All Sizes: '/2" Rubatex. 2. Domestic Hot Water Piping (Above Grade): a. 1-1/4"and Smaller: I"Fiberglass. b. 1-1 /4" - 2": I"Fiberglass. C. Run -outs up to 2": 1 /2" Fiberglass. 3. Domestic Cold Water Piping (Above Grade): a. All sizes: 1 /2" Fiberglass. 4. Roof Drains and Bowls (Not Overflow Drains): C. All sizes: 1" Fiberglass. 5. Copper Cooling Condensate Drains: a. All sizes: 1 /2" Fiberglass. 7. Refrigerant Suction Piping: a. All sizes: 1 " Flexible Unicellular E. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Fiberglass pipe insulation above ground inside buildings. 2. Flexible unicellular pipe insulation under ground. 2.03 DUCT INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Design Basis: Schuller. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Certainteed. b. Knauf. C. Owens Corning. B. Materials: Flexible Faced Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: Schuller Microlite, .75 Ib/cu ft, 1" thick with FSK factory applied foil kraft facing. C. Application: Externally insulate all supply air ductwork with minimum 1 " thick fiberglass with foil facing. Intemally insulate main return air duct. See drawings. tCEg-01055 15250-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSULATION A. Installation: l . Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. 2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. a. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. b. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 3. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. a. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 4. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 5. Install protective sheetmetal shield around bottom half of pipe insulation at each pipe support sufficient to prevent crushing of the insulation. 6. Except as noted, cover valves, flanges, fittings, and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. a. Install factory molded, pre-cut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option), except where a specific form or type is indicated. b. Do not cover: (1) Valve operators. (2) Threaded or solder joint strainers. 7. Mark location of unions and flanges covered by insulation with permanent paint or ink, painted stencil or approved label. 8. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on insulation of cold pipes, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. 9. Insulate between pipe and pipe saddles. 10. Seal ends of sections with vapor barrier cement at: a. 21 ft. intervals. b. Valves and fittings. 3.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. B. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. l . Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. C. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through interior walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. D. Except as otherwise indicated, do not insulate lined ducts. tCEg-01055 15250-3 E. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on insulation of ducts carrying cold air and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. 3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturation. B. Protection: The insulation Installer shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15250-4 SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Complete non -freeze (wet) fire sprinkler system throughout the building except in the Traffic Computer Room which shall have a separate and independent Chemtron FM 200 liquified system complete with its own control panel and alarms. B. Backflow Preventor. 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. The automatic fire sprinkler system shall consist of approved backflow preventor, piping, valves, alarm and floor valve assemblies, fire department connection, sprinkler heads and other equipment herein specified. The entire system shall be designed and installed in accordance with all codes and requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Work shall be performed by a Contractor regularly engaged in the design and installation of fire protection systems in accordance with NFPA requirements and having at least five years continuous experience in this type of work. B. Contractor shall be licensed in the State of Colorado for the design and installation of the type of fire protection system specified. C. Contractor shall be capable of providing full service maintenance, inspection and testing program in accordance with NFPA. D. System design shall be by an experienced NICET level III designer. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Criteria: Comply with all requirements of NFPA 13, NFPA-24, Owner's Insurance Underwriter, the State Fire Marshall and local codes. B. Provide fire protection systems of types, pressure, flow and densities required by Owner's insurance underwriter and NFPA-13. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Total system shall be acceptable upon completion and testing to the following: l . Local Building Code. 2. Local Fire Department. 3. Local Water Department tCEg-01055 15300 - 1 4. Owners Insurance Underwriter. D. Coordinate the sprinkler installation with the building structure and all other trades. E. Sprinkler shop drawings shall show light and diffuser locations. Also indicate design areas and hydraulic reference points on the drawings. F. Contractor shall obtain the available water pressure and flow at the site from the " local water department. The contractors bid price shall incorporate the appropriate design based on the available pressure and flow. G. The system shall be 10 percent below the available water supply curve. Velocity pressure may be neglected in the hydraulic calculations. This may involve submitting auxiliary hydraulic calculations to prove that the most remote and demanding area was calculated. H. Hydraulic calculation submittals shall clearly define all devices which will cause friction loss with equivalent lengths of pipe. This includes vane type electronic water flow switches. ^ I. Velocity limits- 16 FPS underground, 32 FPS maximum FPS above ground. J. Maintain fire resistive ratings at all penetrations of fire rated surfaces and assemblies. K. Contractor shall conduct water supply flow test. The tests shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 13 and 291. The local fire department and the Engineer will witness the test. Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements with the fire department. L. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection work, stating that the work has been completed and tested in accordance with the - specified standards, that there are no defects in the system and it is fully operational. 1.06 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: l . All equipment and material submitted shall bear evidence of UL listing and FM approval for use in fire sprinkler systems. 2. Do not cut any piping until shop drawings are reviewed and approved by all parties. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish preliminary shop drawing to Architect for review showing all sprinkler head, light fixtures, air inlets/outlets and ceiling material. Incorporate these corrections into the final shop drawing. 2. Furnish final shop drawings and hydraulic calculations showing piping and heads simultaneously to Owner's Insurance Carrier and local code authority. Show elevations where necessary to clear ductwork, lights, structural elements, etc. 3. Incorporate comments from Owner's Insurance Carrier and local code authority into completed shop drawing and submit to Engineer for review. This shop drawing shall bear the approval stamp of the Owner's Insurance W tCEg-01055 15300 - 2 Carrier and local code authority. 4. Include certifications, calculations and anchoring details. Indicate required water supply information on the site plan per NFPA 13. C. Submit Manufacturer's Data for the following 1. Sprinkler system: a. Sprinkler heads and devices. b. Valves. C. Fire Department connections. d. Specialties. e. Alarm devices. f. Flow detectors. g. Supervisory devices. h. Shop fabricated fittings and joints. i. Backflow preventer. D. Provide as -built drawings showing the system as installed. Include revised hydraulic calculations for those portions of the system that are shop drawings. Calculations will not be required for changes which the engineer deems as minor. 1.07 TESTING A. General: l . Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect or his designated representative. Equipment, materials and instruments for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Automatic Sprinkler Piping: l . The automatic sprinkler systems shall be hydrostatically tested in their entirety or in zones defined by shut-off valves. The piping shall be tested at a pressure of 200 psig, measured at the low point in the system or zone and shall be proved tight at this pressure for a period of not less than one hour. Leaks detected shall be repaired by tightening, rewelding joints or replacing damaged pipe or fittings. C. Testing shall be accomplished in conjunction with the building fire alarm and testing system. If system fails a test, retest in accordance with specified test requirements. D. Acceptance tests: 1. Ensure that damage to the facility will not result as a consequence of testing including the failure of the systems being tested. 2. Repair all damage which results from testing. 3. Record test results and provide certifications of testing to the owner in accordance with NFPA 13. 4. Test as follows: a. Complete a separate test record for each test. b. Prior to testing sprinkler and standpipe systems, flush piping to remove foreign matter which might have entered the system during installation. C. Provide functional tests on all valves and manual operating devices. E. Piping systems: l . All piping, including all supply pipe to the fire department connection, shall tCEg-01055 15300 - 3 be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 PSI or at 50 PSI in excess of the maximum pressure when the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system is in excess of 150 PSI, for a minimum of two hours with no visible leaks. This test shall be conducted prior to concealing any piping. a. If visible signs of leakage occur or the system loses any pressure within the two-hour test period, the test shall be considered as failed and shall require re -testing. A complete installation inspection shall be conducted in conjunction with the hydrostatic test while all piping is exposed. b. Perform a final inspection when the installation is complete. Inspection shall include functional tests of all system components and of all alarms. Manual tripping of alarm activating devices is not acceptable. 1,08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions, printed and bound in hard cover, three ring, loose leaf notebooks shall be provided for each item of equipment listed below, 3 separate copies shall be provided. Each notebook shall be provided within an identifying label under a clear plastic cover shield on the front cover which shall identify the Project, Engineer, Contractor and Date. 1. Wet pipe riser assemblies. 2. Approved Shop Drawings. 3. Approved Submittals. -- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Above Ground Piping 1. Pipe: Schedule 10 black steel thinwall pipe ASTM 135. 2. Grooved joint mechanical fittings with maximum working pressure rating of at least 300 PSIG. a. Design basis: Victaulic. -- 3. Mains and branches located in the open ceiling area where exposed ductwork and structure is part of the aesthetics shall be galvanized piping and fittings to match the ductwork. Check Valves: 1. Check valves 1-1 /2 inches and smaller shall be all bronze with screwed ends. Check valves 2 inches and larger shall be iron or brass body, flanged. Check valve in the fire department connection piping shall have a ball drip which is piped to the outside of the building. C. Butterfly Valves 1. Cast iron, lug pattern body with threaded lugs compatible with ANSI 125/150 flanges. 2. One piece, solid, stainless steel shaft keyed to the disk. 3. Upper and lower corrosion resistant stem bearings. Shaft seals shall protect bearings from both internal and external corrosion. 4. Corrosion resistant bronze or semi -steel with nickel edge disk. 5. Resilient seat shall be of Nordel or equal and have a working pressure of 175 r tCEg-01055 15300 - 4 PSI. 6. Equipped with gear operator with crank or wheel handle and position indicating vane. Operator shall be furnished with tapped hole for tamper switch. D. Miscellaneous Valves: 1. Ball drip valves shall be brass with 1/2-inch MNPT-rated for 175 PSI or higher where necessary. 2. Inspector's test valves shall be 1-inch brass, gate valves. 3. Main and sectional drain valves, and test valves shall be all -bronze gate valves. E. Fire Sprinklers 1. Manufacturers: a. Automatic Sprinkler. b. Central. C. Grinnell. d. Grunau. e. Reliable. f. Viking. 2. Type: '/2 inch orifice, 165 degrees F except as noted, pendent, sidewall or upright. 3. Finish: a. Low profile recessed/concealed type, chrome plated brass. 4. Cover Plate: a. For Permanent Ceilings: Solid, adjustable, white painted finish. Fire Department Connections 1. Manufacturers: a. Design Basis: Potter -Roemer. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Edwards. 2. Elkhart. 3. Grunau. 4. Croker-Standard. 2. Exposed Wall Type: a. Model: 5720, self closing, double clapper, 4" x 2-1/2" x 2-1/2". b. Material: Polished brass. C. Lettering:"Auto Sprinkler ,""Standpipe;'or"Auto Sprinkler -Standpipe" as required. d. Hose Threads: Local Fire Department standard. e. Escutcheon: Polished brass, series 5960. f. Caps: Brass. G. Water Flow Indicators: 1. Manufacturers: a. Design Basis: Notifier. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Grunau. 2. Potter -Roemer. 3. Reliable. 4. System Sensor. tCEg-01055 15300 - 5 SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684 To: This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement( calendar days from Dated this day of 20_ The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be and , 20_, respectively. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of 20 CONTRACTOR By. Title: 7/96 Section 00530 Page 1 2. Tamper -proof, electronic, vane -type, designed for vertical or horizontal piping. a. Provide instantly recycling retard element, adjustable 0 to 60 seconds. b. Provide weatherproof, dust -tight enclosure with red enamel finish. C. Automatic reset type with (2) sets of contacts. H. Water Flow Alarm: 1. Manufacturers: _ a. Design Basis: Automatic Fire-Trols. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Aames Security. 2. Grunau. 3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler. 2. Model: Farr-Larm. 3. Features: Electric, weatherproof, horn and light, approved for hard -of - hearing areas. I. Pressure Gauges: 1. Manufacturers: a. Marsh. b. Ernst. " C. Potter -Roemer. 2. Type: 3-1 /2" diameter, Bourdon -type with brass case and ring. J. Supervisory Switch: 1. UL, FM and IRI approval. 2. On each shut-off valve. 3. Tamper proof. 4. Minimum contract ratings: a. 10 amps at 120 volts AC b. 0.25 amps at 24 volts DC 5. Auto reset. K. Backflow Preventor 1. General: a. Backflow preventor shall be a double check detector backflow preventer with ductile cast iron bodies, stainless steel spring assemblies, OS&Y gate valves and metered bypass. Backflow preventor shall be a UL listed, FM approved assembly. _ 2. Design basis: Febco. 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Watts. b. Claval. C. Zurn. - -- d. Wilkins. 4. Model: _ a. 806YD-DCDA [Double Check type]. ". L. Combination electric audible bell and visual strobe signal meeting the requirements of the fire department. Minimum sound pressure level of 85 decibels at 10 feet. tCEg-01055 15300 - 6 ., PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Identification: 1. Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their purpose and function. 2. Provide lettering size and style selected by Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. Flushing: Prior to connecting risers, flush water feed mains and lead-in connections. 3.02 SPRINKLER LAYOUT A. Sprinkler layout is not shown on drawings. l . Provide complete sprinkler layout with shop drawing submittal. 2. Coordinate with ceiling layout, plumbing, electrical, ductwork and structural. 3.03 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Wet piping may be sloped to drain or installed level. B. Clean piping, and keep clean and free of foreign matter before and during installation. Carefully remove dirt, scale, welding icicles or beads, and cutting burrs. Flush piping with clear water. C. Piping with screwed construction shall be made up with as few joints as possible. Screwed joints shall have clean machine -cut threads and shall be made up with a piping compound or teflon pipe thread tape. The threads shall be cleaned and piping compound or teflon pipe thread tape applied before making the joint. D. Tighten flange bolts with wrenches. 1. In tightening joints, take care to ensure uniform pressure on the gasket and to avoid over -stressing the bolts or dishing or breaking the flanges. 2. Flanged joints that have been made up and broken shall be remade with new gaskets. E. The end of each cross main shall be equipped with a minimum of 1-1 /4 inch threaded and capped connection to facilitate flushing. Where circular openings are cut into pipes at the job site, the circular pipe sections shall be removed from the pipe and shall be hung from the pipe for inspection. G. Ream and remove burrs and sharp edges from pipe outlets. H. System risers shall not be attached to the supply connection until the underground piping has been flushed and tested and approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. Conceal piping to the maximum extent practical. tCEg-01055 15300 - 7 3.04 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORT A. Piping shall be hung in accordance with NFPA 13. 3,05 VALVES A. All valves shall be accessible and operable from the floor. B. Provide labels on ceiling tiles indicating location of above -ceiling valves. C. Riser control valves: 1. Provide a hydraulic nameplate on each system riser. 2. As a minimum, provide water pressure gauges on the supply side and on the system side at main control and check valves. 3.06 DRAIN AND TEST VALVES A. If fire protection piping is installed at a lower elevation than the adjoining building grade, provide an outside drain to conduct main drain test, and a system auxiliary drain connected to a floor drain. Provide a valve on the system drain piping to isolate the system drain during test of the main drain. _ B. Provide sight glasses on all drain lines and inspector's test connections where the drain discharge is not visible from the drain valve location. C. Terminate inspector's test connections discharging to the building exterior or at grade level with a 45 degree elbow and a sprinkler head with the frame and strut assembly removed. Terminate with a union with a restricting orifice if discharging to a drain line. Orifice size shall be same size as the sprinkler heads. D. All drains and inspector's test connections located inside the building shall be piped to the outside of the building, terminating with a 45 degree elbow. This includes the drain for the fire department connection piping. Provide concrete splash block to direct the drain or test discharge so as not to disturb the landscape. Splash block shall be a minimum of 4 feet long. E. Provide signs identifying the locations of all concealed drains and test valves. F. Drain and test connections, except auxiliary drains, shall be piped to the outside of the building. Terminate at a location which will not result in water damage to building, landscape, or equipment. 3.07 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Ensure that sprinkler heads are not painted, sprayed with fireproofing, or are not otherwise damaged. Replace damaged or impaired sprinkler heads. B. Provide approved guards on heads subject to damage and on heads located below 7 feet 6 inches AFF. Upright heads may be installed in lieu of guards upon approval by the w engineer. tCEg-01055 15300 - 8 3.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Install check valve and ball drip valve where they will not be subject to freezing temperatures. - B. Exact location of connections shall be in accordance with fire department requirements. 3.09 HYDRANTS A. By Others 3.10 EXTERIOR ALARM SIGNALS A. Provide an alarm signal for each system. Exact location shall be 10-15 feet above fire department connection or in accordance with fire department requirements. B. Coordinate wiring with Division 16, Fire Detection and Alarm System. 3.11 TRAINING A. Conduct one training session to familiarize the building maintenance personnel with the fire protection systems. Instructions shall include information regarding system features, operations, maintenance, repairs and emergency procedures END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15300 - 9 SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on the following: 1. Pressure reducing valves. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water hammer arresters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING A. Above Ground: Size 8" and Smaller l . Pipe: Copper tube, hard temper, type L. 2. Fittings: Wrought copper, or cast bronze. 3. Joints: Soldered with antimony free and lead free solder or brazed with Sil- Fos. Below Ground, Size 2 and Smaller: l . Pipe: Copper tube, annealed, type K. 2. Fittings: Wrought copper. 3. Joints: Brazed. C. Below Ground, 3" and Larger i . Ductile iron pressure pipe, tar coated, cement lined: a. Pipe: ANSI A21.51, Class 50. b. Fittings: ANSI21.10. C. Rubber Gaskets: ANSI 2 1.11. 2. Provide concrete backing block or other devices to resist resultant forces. 2.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Pressure Reducing Valve l . Body: Bronze, or coated cast iron 2. Strainer: Bronze, or cast iron 3. Seat: Renewable, stainless steel. 4. Strainer Screen: Stainless steel 5. Diaphragm: High temperature resistant tCEg-01055 1541 1 - 1 B. Backflow Preventer under six inches 1. Type: Reduced pressure zone. 2. Construction: Bronze body, stainless steel trim, complete with test cocks, resilient seat, shut-off valves, and air gap fitting. C. Water Hammer Arrester 1. Type: Bellows 2. Compression Chamber: Pre -charged. 3. Material: Stainless steel 4. Standards: PDIWH2O1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Testing: Test in accordance with Section 15055 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. B. Connections to Equipment Furnished Under Other Sections: 1. Make final connections to all equipment shown on drawings as connected to supply and/or drain piping. 2. Furnish all devices necessary for final connection, including: a. Stops. b. Supplies. C. Vacuum breakers. d. Shock absorbers. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND PRODUCTS A. Fixture Connection Sizes: Follow Appendix A of Uniform Plumbing Code. B. Disinfection: 1. Fill all domestic water lines with a chlorine -water solution of 50 parts per million, minimum. 2. Hold solution in pipe for at least 24 hours. 3. Open and close all valves 1 time during chlorination. 4. Waste chlorine solution from each outlet. 5. Measure solution at end. If not 10 ppm, repeat. C. Drop Ear Elbows: Secure drop ear elbows to in -wall backing plates where domestic water piping penetrates finished wall surfaces such as shower heads, tub diverters, flush valve water closets, flush valve, urinals and other similar fixtures. B. Backf low Preventer: 1. Install where indicated on contract documents 2. Pipe air gap to nearest drain E. Water Hammer Arresters: Install unit at top of each riser and elsewhere as required to comply with PDI Standard WH-201. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15411 -2 SECTION 15412 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SCOPE -OF -WORK A. The scope -of -work under this section shall include the furnishing, setting -in -place, start-up and warranty of all refrigeration piping. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES A. Safety: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, and ANSI B9.1 Safety Codes for Mechanical Refrigeration. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data, including: l . Drawings showing: a. Piping materials. 1.05 REFRIGERANTS A. The following refrigerants shall be considered acceptable: 1. Refrigerant HCFC-22. B. The following refrigerants shall be considered unacceptable: l . Refrigerant CFC-11. 2. Refrigerant CFC-12. 3. Refrigerant CFC-500. 4. Refrigerant HFC-134a. 5. Refrigerant HCFC-123. 1.06 CAPACITY A. Reference Schedule on the contract documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Pipe: Type L, ACR hard copper, dehydrated and sealed. tCEg-01055 15412-1 B. Fittings: Long radius wrought copper or forged brass. C. Joints: 1. Braze type with silver solder for suction and liquid lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install all refrigeration equipment according to the manufacturers instructions. B. Trap suction and hot gas at base of riser. C. Properly dehydrate and change all refrigeration systems. D. Add or bleed refrigerant to the system to obtain the proper pressure readings. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15412-2 SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on the following: 1. Roof drains. 2. Downspout nozzles. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL, VENT AND STROM DRAIN PIPING A. Above Ground: 1. Cast iron No -Hub, neoprene gasket and stainless steel sleeve. 2. DWV copper with DWV fittings, solderjoint. B. Underground: 1. Schedule 40 PVC with solvent -glued fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Testing: Test in accordance with Section 15055 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods. B. Connections to Equipment Furnished Under Other Sections: 1. Make final connections to all equipment shown on drawings as connected to supply and/or drain piping. 2. Furnish all devices necessary for final connection, including: a. Tail pieces. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SOIL AND VENT PIPING A. Gaskets: Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. B. Joint Adapters: Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast iron adapters and fittings. C. Cleaning Piping: l . Clear the interior of pipe of dirt and other superfluous material as the work tCEg-01020 15420 - 1 progresses. 2. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted pipe at the end of the day or whenever work stops. D. Test Plugs: l . Provide test plugs in floor drains and roof drains at the time of installation. y 2. Leave test plugs in place for the duration of construction. E. Vent Flashing: ^ l . Provide 4 lb sheet lead (24"x 24" minimum). 2. Extend lead 5" above the vent and turned down into vent pipe. 3. Or flash vents in accordance with instructions of the roofing manufacturer. F. Vent Location: Do not install vents within 2 feet of roof edge, parapet, wall line or any "on -the -roof structure". 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STORM DRAINAGE PIPING A. Gaskets: Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. B. Joint Adapters: Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast iron adapters and fittings. LL C. Cleaning Piping: 1. Clear the interior of pipe of dirt and other superfluous material as the work _ progresses. 2. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted pipe at the end of uncompleted - pipe at the end of the day or whenever work stops. y D. Roof Drains: l . Install drains on the center line of sheet lead pan. 2. Clamp flashing into drain flashing collar. " 3. Install domes immediately after completion of roof installation. E. Expansion: 1. Provide a vertical expansion joint at each connection to roof drain unless an offset is provided. 2. Where piping crosses building expansion joints, provide swing or expansion joints to allow for building movement. F. Downspout Nozzles: Install with flange secured to wall at base of concealed storm leaders that discharge through the building wall above grade. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY SEWER AND STORM SEWER PIPING A. Lay conduit true to the grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. B. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. -- tCEg-01020 15420 - 2 .. SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate C. Install cast iron pipe minimum 4' under roads and paved areas or encase cast-iron between 2' and 4' piping in 12" of 2500 psig concrete if cover is less. D. Clear the interior of conduit of dirt and other superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain a swab or drag in the line and pull past each joint as it is completed. E. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted conduit at the end of the day or whenever work stops. F. Flush lines if required to remove collected debris. G. If the inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other defects, take whatever steps are necessary to correct such defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. H. Set grade cleanouts located in unpaved and asphalt paved areas in 24"x 24"x 4" concrete pad. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15420 - 3 SECTION 15440 -PLUMBING FIXTURES PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for all plumbing fixtures and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide factory fabricated fixtures. B. Provide trim, carriers, valves and accessories as required for complete installation. C. All carriers are floor mounted unless otherwise noted. 2.02 WATER CLOSETS A. Design Basis: As shown on Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Fixture Manufacturers: l . American Standard. 2. Crane. 3. Eljer. 4. Kohler. C. Trim Manufacturers: 1. American Standard. 2. Crane. 3. Delaney. 4. Eljer. 5 Kohler. 6. Sloan. D. Seat Manufacturers: 1. Bemis. 2. Church. 3. Olsonite. tCEg-01055 15440 - 1 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL WASHDOWN SINKS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Fixture Manufacturers: 1. Universal. 2. Lambertson. C. Trim Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucet. 2. Delta. 2.04 LAVATORIES A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Fixture Manufacturers: l . American Standard. 2. Crane. 3. Eljer. 4. Kohler. C. Trim Manufacturers: 1. American Standard. 2. Delta. 3. Moen 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Fixture Manufacturers: 1. Elkay. 2. Just C. Trim Manufacturers: 1. Delta. 2. Moen. 2.06 SERVICE SINKS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Fixture Manufacturers: 1. Kohler. 2. Stern Williams. tCEg-01055 15440 - 2 C. Trim Manufacturers: 1. Kohler. 2. Stern Williams 2.07 GARBAGE DISPOSAL A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Manufacturers: 1. In-Sink-Erator. 2. Kitchenaid. 3. Maytag. 4. Waste King. 2.08 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Manufacturers: l . JR Smith. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Zurn. 2.09 HOSE BIBBS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco. 2. Chicago. 3. Kohler. 2.10 NON -FREEZE WALL HYDRANTS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Manufacturers: 1. JR Smith. 2. Woodford. 3. Josam. 4. Zurn. 2.11 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Design Basis: As shown on the Plumbing Fixture Schedule. B. Manufacturers: 1. Elkay. 2. Cordley. 3. Halsey Taylor. tCEg-01055 15440 - 3 4. Haws. 5. Oasis. b. Sunroc. 2.12 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Provide all materials necessary to make final connections to equipment furnished under other Sections of these Specifications including: 1. Tail pieces. 2. Stops. 3. Supplies. 2.13 FINISHES A. All exposed tailpieces, stops and supplies for plumbing fixtures shall be chrome plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated, rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers and escutcheons. C. Finish wall and floor penetrations when exposed to view in finished areas with set screw type, chrome plated brass escutcheons. D. Set plumbing fixtures level and plumb, spaced in accordance with dimensioned Drawings, and securely install to be rigid. Caulk junction between fixture and wall or floor with white silicone caulking in a neat, workmanlike manner. E. Install wall mounted lavatories and urinals with wall carriers. F. Solidly attach floor mounted water closets and closet flange to floor with log screws/bolts. G. Cover fixture bolts with china bolt caps of the some color as the fixture and set in place with plaster of Paris. H. Securely anchor flush valves behind or within walls to be rigid and not subject to movement due to push or pull action on the valve. tCEg-01055 15440 - 4 3.02 3.03 I. Fixture Mounting Heights: l . Refer to Architectural drawings. 2. Where heights are not shown, mount fixtures at the following heights above finish floor: a. Water Closet: (1) Standard: 15" to top of seat. (2) Handicapped: 19" to top of seat. C. Lavatory: (1) Standard: 31"to top of basin rim. (2) Handicapped: 32" to top of basin rim. d. Drinking Fountain: (1) Standard: 40" to top of basin rim. (2) Handicapped: 33" to top of basin rim. J. Floor Drains: 1. Install floor drains with P-traps and vent as required. 2. Install shower drains on the center line of sheet lead pan in waterproofed areas and in floors above lowest floor. 3. Clamp pan into drain flashing collar. 4. Install strainers immediately after completion of finish floor installation. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand and dirt. 2. At completion, thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. Adjusting: 1. Adjusting: After cleaning and flushing operations are accomplished, adjust flush valves, faucets, showers, bubblers for proper flow. PROTECTION A. Protect fixtures and related components installation to date of Final Acceptance coverings or other protection as required. Ga C from damage before, during and after or Owner move -in. Provide protective Inspect each installed unit for damage to finish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. Feasibility and match to be judged by Engineer. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15440 - 5 SECTION 15450 -PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Domestic water heaters. 2. Circulating pumps. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Water Heater: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty for years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: State 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Rheem. b. Rudd. C. National. d. A.O. Smith. B. Model: As scheduled. C: Type: Vertical D. Construction: 1. Shell: Steel. 2. Lining: Glass. 3. Insulation: Fiberglass per ASHRAE 90. 4. Jacket: Steel. 5. Finish: Baked enamel. 6. Working Pressure: 150 psig. 7. Working Temperature: 180 degrees. tCEg-01055 15450 - 1 E. Accessories: 1. Tank drain. 2. Thermometer with range from 30 degrees F. to 200 degrees F. 3. Temperature pressure relief valve. 2.02 IN -LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Taco. ._ 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Armstrong. b. Bell & Gossett. ^ C. Amtrol. B. Description: 1. Type: In -line circulating pumps. 2. Casing: Bronze for 125 psi working pressure. 3. Impeller: Bronze. 4. Shaft: Steel with copper sleeve or stainless steel. 5. Bearings: Oil lubricated, bronze, sleeve. 6. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, rated for 225°F. 7. Coupling: Rigid. ^ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER A. Installation 1. Make connections between water heaters and domestic water piping system with dielectric unions. 2. Install ball/shut off valves at both cold water and hot water connections to water heater. 3. Furnish and install copper drain piping from temperature and pressure relief valve for water heater. 4. Furnish drain full size of relief valve opening and extend as indicated. B. Adjusting: 1. Upon completion of water heater installation, verify satisfactory control operation under maximum demand conditions as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Adjust discharge water temperature as required. tCEg-01055 15450 - 2 3.02 IN -LINE CIRCULATING PUMPS A. Install pumps to allow complete removal without dismantling connecting piping. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. B. Provide line sized ball valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and globe valve on discharge. C. Support piping adjacent to pump so that weight of pipe is not carried on pump casing. D. Provide manual switch. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15450 - 3 SECTION 15481 - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and Install: 1. Compressed air main piping from compressor to refrigerated air dryer and down stream of air dryer. 2. Valves and specialties. 3. Compressor, Air Dryer and Coalescing Filter assemblies shall be furnished and installed by the owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for: l . Oil Coalescing filters. 2. Quick connect couplings. 3. Valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING A. Above Ground: l . Two Inch and Smaller: a. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel. b. Fittings: 150lb malleable iron, threaded. 2. Over Two Inch: a. Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel, plain end. a. Fittings: Standard weight, butt weld. 3. Contractor shall submit and alternate to provide type "L" copper piping with brazed joints in lieu of black steel. 2.03 COMPRESSED AIR VALVES A. Description: Ball valve with bronze body, full port, teflon seals, two piece construction with blowout proof stem, lever operator. tCEg-01055 15481 - 1 SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT TITLE: TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort INCLUDE: Collins, Colorado OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DATE: NMI The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project specified part of the project, as indicated above) (or is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance With the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. CONTRACTOR By: AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substan- tially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on The responsi heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Docuumentsllity shallfbe as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE REMARKS: 7/96 Section 00635 Page 1 2.04 AIR LINE FILTERS A. Provide air line filters with metal body and bowl, sight glass, mounting bracket and threaded end connections. B. Unit shall be rated for 175 psig at 1200 F. C. Air line filters shall be as manufactured by Lincoln, Model 600108A (for 1/7' pipe), 6001 12A (for 3/4' pipe) or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. B. Do not install defective piping or fittings. 1. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged. C. Use teflon tape on male pipe threads. D. Plug each Compressed air outlet, including valves with a threaded plug or cap, immediately after installation, and retain until continuing piping or equipment connection is completed. 3.02 TEST A. After rough -in or prior to initial operation, test and purge compressed air piping in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code. l . Test at 150 psig. 2. Repair or replace piping as required to eliminate leaks, and re -test. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15481 -2 SECTION 15486 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and Install: l . Natural Gas piping. 2. Valves and specialties. 3. Meter. 4. Pressure reducing valves outside building. 5. Emergency shut-off valves. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit for: 1. Pressure reducing valves. 2. Emergency gas shut-off valves and relays. 3. Valves and specialties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING A. Above Ground: l . Two Inch and Smaller: a. Piper Schedule 40 black steel. b. Fittings: 150 Ib malleable iron, threaded. B. Underground: 1. Pipe: Polyethylene, ASTM - 2513. 2. Fittings: Standard weight, butt weld. 2.02 GAS COCKS AND EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF VALVES A. Description: Corrosion -resistant plug, permanently lubricated, corrosion -resistant bearings, suitable seals for intended service, lever operator. tCEg-01055 15486-1 2.03 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES A. Size of gas distribution piping system is based on a gas supply pressure of 5 psig. Provide gas fired equipment with gas pressure regulators of size and capacity required to reduce gas pressure to proper operating pressure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping. B. Do not install defective piping or fittings. l . Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped, stripped or damaged. C. Use teflon tape on male pipe threads. D. Plug each gas outlet, including valves with a threaded plug or cap, immediately after installation, and retain until continuing piping or equipment connection is completed. E. Comply with chapter 54 of the National Fuel Gas Code. 3.02 BURIED PIPE A. Coated Pipe: Follow IAPMO Standard IS 13-84. B. Buried piping shall be buried 24" minimum. 1. All buried joints shall be welded and left exposed until testing has been completed. 3.03 EMERGENCY SHUT -OFFS A. Furnish and install emergency shut-off valves for gas systems where shown. B. Deliver switches and relays to Installer of electrical work. C. Vent all pressure regulating valves directly to the exterior of the building. D. Do not reduce vent size of regulator or install valves in vent piping. 3.04 TEST A. After rough -in or prior to initial operation, test and purge fuel gas piping in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code. 1. Test at 100 psig. 2. Repair or replace piping as required to eliminate leaks, and re -test. B. After equipment installation, test all piping and valves up to gas regulator with a "U" tube manometer at 10 PSIG. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15486-2 SECTION 15575 - FLUE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on: 1. Double wall vent pipe. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOUBLE WALL GAS VENT A. Manufacturers: l . American Metal Products Company. 2. Hart and Cooley. 3. Metalbestos. 4. Stacks, Inc. 5. Venting Systems, Inc. B. UMC Type B. 1. Material: a. Outer Wall: Galvanized steel. b. Inner Wall: Aluminum. C. Fittings 1. Use factory -made fittings for all changes in direction and connections. D. Accessories: Provide necessary: 1. Thimbles. 2. Flashings. 3. Caps. 4. Accessories recommended by manufacturer for complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: A. Use all double wall vent pipe from appliance connection to vent cap. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15575-1 SECTION 15670 - PACKAGE ROOFTOP UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SCOPE -OF -WORK A. The scope -of -work under this section shall include the furnishings, setting -in -place, start-up and warranty of all package rooftop units. B. The scope -of -work under this section shall not include the installation of electrical power wiring. 1.03 APPLICABLE CODES A. Safety: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, and ANSI B9.1 Safety Codes for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards pertaining to chiller motors, starters and controls. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data, including: l . Drawings showing: a. Overall dimensions of complete assembly. b. Operating weights. C. Sizes and locations of connections. d. Auxiliary support requirements. 2. Performance. 3. Wiring diagrams showing: a. Electrical components. b. Safety devices. C. Indicator lights. 4. Written instructions for installation and assembly. 5. Written operating instructions, including: a. Start-up. b. Routine and normal operations. C. Regulation and control. d. Shut -down for emergency. tCEg-01055 15670-1 6. Written service instructions, including manufacturer's recommendation on stocking of spare parts. 7. Parts lists. 1.05 REFRIGERANTS A. The following refrigerants shall be considered acceptable: 1. Refrigerant HCFC-22. B. The following refrigerants shall be considered unacceptable: 1. Refrigerant CFC-11. 2. Refrigerant CFC-12. 3. Refrigerant CFC-500. 4. Refrigerant HFC-134a. 5. Refrigerant HCFC-123. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HEATING/COOLING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier. 2. Trane. 3. Lennox. 4. York. 5. McQuoy. B. Model: As scheduled. C. Capacity: As scheduled. D. Type: Gas heating with electric cooling. E. Mounting: Rooftop. F. Enclosure: 1. Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish and insulated throughout. Panels shall be easily removable for service. G. Compressor: 1. Heavy duty, hermetic or semi -hermetic as dictated by the base design. Compressors) shall have positive pressure lubrication, crankcase heater and be suitable for operation down to 40 degrees F. H. Furnace: 1. Aluminized steel, ribbon bumer, gas fired, indirect type. I. Condenser: 1. Aluminum fins of non-ferrous tubing with hail guards. tCEg-01055 15670-2 J. Evap. Fan: 1. Centrifugal, belt driven, permanently lubricated bearings. K. Cond. Fan: 1. Propeller, belt or direct driven, permanently lubricated bearings. L. Evap. Coil: 1. Aluminum fins on copper tubes. M. Filters: 1. Farr 30/30 with one extra set for installation after Final Inspection. N. Accessories: As scheduled. O. Controls: As scheduled. P. Warranty: 1. One year parts and labor, four additional years compressor parts only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install all equipment according to the manufacturers instructions. B. Coordinate all roof, wall and floor openings to meet the project schedule. C. Seal all roof penetrations to make watertight. D. Check all belts for proper tension. E. Check all bearings for proper lubrication. F. Check all fans for proper rotation. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15670-3 SECTION 15785 - COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 FLAME -SMOKE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide air -handling unit thermal insulation with flame -spread rating of 25 or less, fuel -contributed of 50 or less, and smoke -developed rating of 50 or less. 1.03 ARI CERTIFICATION A. Provide equipment rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210, and bearing ARI certification label. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data, including: 1. Capacity. 2. Drawings showing overall dimensions of complete assembly. 3. Operating weights. 4. Equipment support requirements. 5. Sizes and locations of connections. 6. Accessories. 7. Auxiliary support requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR COOLED COMPUTER ROOM UNIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Liebert. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Data Aire. b. Hiross. B. Enclosure l . Material: Steel, zinc coated. 2. Finish: a. Baked enamel. 3. Insulation: a. Material: Fiberglass. tCEg-01055 15785-1 C. 7 E. C G. H. J b. Thickness: One-half inch. C. Protection: Mat or foil faced. 4. Configuration: Suitable for installation in standard T bar ceiling. Filters 1. Type: Throw -away. 2. Manufacturer and Model: a. Farr, 30/30. b. AAF, Amair. 3. Thickness: One inch. Evaporator Fan l . Type: Forward curve, centrifugal. 2. Drive: Direct. 3. Balancing: Static and dynamic. Humidifier 1. Type: Electric with steam distributor. 2. Water Container: Disposable canister. 3. Capacity Control: Solid state. 4. Water Supply: Tap water. Reheat 1. Type: Electric. 2. Construction: 304 S.S. finned tubular. 3. Safety Controls: Thermal safety switches. Compressor 1. Type: Hermetic. 2. Mounting: Vibration isolators. Coils 1. Material: a. Tubes: Copper. b. Fins: Aluminum. Condenser Fan 1. Type: Centrifugal. 2. Drive: Direct. 3. Air flow: 1500 cfm. 4. External SP: 1 /2". 5. Motor: 1 /2 hp, 3 speed. Controls 1. Manufacturer's standard, factory -wired. tCEg-01055 15785-2 K. Accessories 1. Condensate Pump: a. Packaged unit. - b. Automatic control. 2. Liqui-tect liquid detector: a. Solid state water sensor and alarm. 2.04 CEILING MOUNTED COMPUTER ROOM UNIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Liebert. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Data Aire. b. Hiross. B. Model: As scheduled. C. Capacity: As scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Provide necessary auxiliary supporting steel. C. Refer to reflected ceiling plan for exact location. 3.02 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust drive for speed shown in submittal. B. Mount motors and drives so belts run true. C. Check motor amps. 1. Do not overload motor. D. Check for unusual noise or vibration. E. Provide necessary lubrication. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15785-3 SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE TO: Gentlemen: M You are hereby notified that on the Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted thedWorkay fc20 the City of ompleted by --- or - OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO.f5684. City of Fort Collins project, TRAFFIC A check is attached hereto in the amount of all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contra— c Documents which Paymentas Final aredated In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date: _ Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: 7/96 Section 00640 Page 1 SECTION 15830 - HEATING TERMINAL UNITS PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data: l . Performance data. 2. Drawings. a. Dimensions. b. Support requirements. C. Size and location of connections. 3. Accessories. 4. Parts lists. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Installation, operating and maintenance instructions. 7. UL Listing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products as indicated by published product information, and as required for a complete installation. 2.02 ELECTRIC WALL MOUNTED UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Berko 2. Airtherm. 3. Trane 4. Markel. 5. Dayton. B. Construction l . Recessed Casing: a. Material: 16 gauge zinc coated steel. b. Heating Element Supports: Adjustable. C. Gaskets: Between front panel and enclosure. 2. Grilles: Heavy duty welded steel louver. 3. Heating Element: Finned steel sheaths providing extended surface. 4. Motor: Shaded poles permanently lubricated. tCEg-01055 15830-1 5. Controls: a. Integral stat to energize heating coil. b. High temperature limit switch. b. Disconnect: Built-in. 2.03 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Berko 2. Airtherm. 3. American Air Filter. 4. Chromolux. 5. Trane B. Construction 1. Casing: a. Material: Steel. b. Finish: Baked -on enamel. C. Heating Element Supports: Adjustable. d. Gaskets: Between front panel and enclosure. 2. Grilles: Louver: Adjustable. 3. Heating Element: Finned steel sheaths providing extended surface. 4. Thermostat: Unit mounted. •C. Performance At Altitude 1. Provide manufacturer's written certification that unit is suitable for use at altitude of the project. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Locate units so clearance is provided for: l . Service and maintenance. 2. Enclosure removal. B. Touch-up finish after final adjustment. C. Replace damaged enclosures. D. Replace severely damaged elements. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15830-2 SECTION 15870 - POWER VENTILATORS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 AMCA CERTIFICATION A. Provide fans with AMCA performance certification and label. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including: 1. Performance. 2. Size. 3. Type. 4. Options provided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acme. 2. Carnes. 3. Cook. 4. Greenheck. 5. Jenn Air. 6. Penn. 7. Powerline. B. Features: 1. Galvanized steel housing. 2. Aluminum Wheel. 3. Rubber vibration isolators. 4. Ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Insure that fans are properly supported on vibration isolators. B. Insure that flexible duct connections are properly made. tCEg-01055 15870 - 1 C. Check fan for improper balance. 1. Re -balance if necessary. D. Check for proper rotation. 3.02 ACCESS A. Provide for proper access to all parts of fan needing inspection or service with access doors in fan or ductwork. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15870 - 2 SECTION 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: l . Duct lining. 2. Duct lining adhesive. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel, complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with ASTM A 525 G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 2.02 ROUND DUCT A. Construction 1. Galvanized steel spiral lock formed. 2. Elbows: a. 6" Diameter and Less: Die formed. b. Above 6" Diameter: 5 piece. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes indicated, and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated with the following additional construction features: 1. Blades: 2" radius galvanized steel for up to and including 18" ducts. 2. Blades: 4-1/2" radius galvanized steel for ducts over 18". 3. Construction: Single thickness with trailing edge, except as noted. tCEg-01055 15891-1 C. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide galvanized _ steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. D. Duct Liner 1. Manufacturers: a. Design Basis: Johns Manville. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Certainteed. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Knauf. 2. Model: Microlite. — 3. Compliances: a. FSHH-1-545, Type I. b. NFPA 90-A. 4. Roughness: 0.0008 feet. 5. Thickness: 1" unless noted otherwise. E. Duct Liner Adhesive: 1. Comply with Adhesive Sealant Council ASC-A-7001. y F. Duct Sealant 1. Manufacturers: a. Design Basis: Hardcast. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: .. 1. 3M. 2. Design poylmetrics. 2. Model: No.601. Fire Rating: UL listed. The use of pressure sensitive tape will not be acceptable. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate ductwork with gauges, joints, seams and reinforcements, complying with HVAC Duct Construction Standards, published by SMACNA. _ B. All medium pressure ductwork shall be static pressure class "B" for 2" to 3" SP. C. All low-pressure ductwork shall be static pressure class "C" for'/;' to 2" SP. D. Use square elbows with turning vanes, except where otherwise noted. E. Fabricate transition elbows with turning vanes at correct angle so entering and leaving edges are parallel or tangent to air flow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air -tight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. B. Install each run with a minimum of joints. C. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. tCEg-01055 15891-2 ,. D. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of the type which will hold ducts true -to -shape to prevent buckling. E. Seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA requirements for pressure class indicated. l . Indoor Ducts: Use liquid or mastic sealant, or Hardcast tape system. 2. Outdoor Ducts: Use Hardcast tape system suitable for exterior use. F. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. G. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of the building. l . Limit clearance to 0.5" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. 2. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1.0" clearance outside of insulation. H. In finished spaces, conceal ductwork by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. I. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. J. Install access doors where necessary for inspection and maintenance. 1. Provide additional 12"xl2" access door at each low leakage damper. 2. Arrange access doors so that: a. They open against the system air pressure, wherever feasible. b. Their latches are operable from either side, except where the duct is too small to be entered. K. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions below ceiling and exterior walls: 1. Conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct -plus -insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gauge as the duct. 2. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1 /2". 3.02 DAMPER INSTALLATION A. Install dampers called for in this Section and dampers called for in Section 15950. 1. Caulk damper frames to ductwork. 2. Make sure dampers are free to operate properly. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: l . Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of paint. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15891-3 SECTION 15910- DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's produc) data on the following: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Balancing dampers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLEXIBLE DUCT, LOW PRESSURE A. Manufacturers l . Design Basis: Owens-Corning. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster. b. Thermoflex. C. Genflex. B. Construction: l . Core: Continuous, resilient inner air barrier of vinyl covered steel wire helix. 2. Insulation: a. Material: Fiberglass. b. Conductance: 0.23. C. Thickness: 1 ". 3. Jacket: Scrim reinforced vapor barrier. C. Fire Rating: Class 1, UL 181. D. Pressure Rating: +4" WC. tCEg-01055 15910-1 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Duct Access Doors: Provide duct access doors with gaskets, and with insulation where ductwork is indicated to be insulated. 1. Manufacturer: a. Design Basis: Cesco. b. Model: #HAD-10 hinged and caromed, 1" thick. B. Flexible Connectors: Fireproof glass cloth, Vent -Fab or approved equal. 1. Manufacturers: a. Design Basis: Vent -Fab. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) Duro-Dyne. 2. Material: Fireproof glass cloth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install fire dampers and combination fire/smoke in accordance with manufacturers instructions and SMACNA standards B. Install access doors where necessary for inspection and maintenance. l . Arrange access doors so that: a. They open against the system air pressure, wherever feasible. b. Their latches are operable from either side, except where the duct is too small to be entered. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15910-2 SECTION 15935 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART] GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 CEILING CONSTRUCTION A. Provide products compatible with ceiling construction. 1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Provide products tested in accordance with Air Diffusion Council test codes and bearing the ADC seal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat. 2. Barber -Colman. 3. Metalaire. 4. Tempmaster. 5. Titus. 6. Krueger. B. Type: As Scheduled C. Material: Sfeel or aluminum except: 1. Aluminum only in high moisture areas. 2. Where required otherwise for fire rating. D. Finish: As indicated on schedule. E. Damper: Opposed blade (Where scheduled). tCEg-01055 15935 - 1 If you have any questions please contact John Stephen, CPPB, Senior Buyer, at 970- 221-6777. RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BY A WRITTEN STATEMENT ENCLOSED WITH THE BID/QUOTE STATING THAT THIS ADDENDUM HAS BEEN RECEIVED m SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of above described project. the 2• In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the work, labor, skill claim or assert for all and any or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction,. design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result Of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above 7/96 Section 00650 Page 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate diffuser locations with lighting layout shown on electrical documents. C. Exposed mounting screws. 1. Use flat head screws in countersunk holes. 2. Paint screws to match frame. D. Install all grilles, registers and diffusers square with the adjacent surface. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15935 - 2 SECTION 15990 - TEST -ADJUST -BALANCE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATION TO DIVISION 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. Engineer shall decide which is more stringent. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification: Work shall be done by a firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). B. Industry Standards: Comply with one or all of the following: 1. HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusting, Balancing published by Sheet metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). 2. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems published by National Environmental Balancing Bureau, (NEBB). 3. Procedural Standards for Certified Testing of Cleanrooms published by National Environmental Balancing Bureau, (NEBB). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test -Adjust -Balance Report: 1. Submit to Engineer prior to balancing, a written description of procedures proposed for all air and hydronics balancing. a. Do not proceed with balancing until authorized by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examine the installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed cleaned and is operable. B. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test -adjust -balance work. l., Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Adjust flows to within 5% of values shown. D. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommended by the original Installer. tCEg-01055 15990- 1 E. Make all final readings for each system at the same time, and after all adjustments ^ have been made. F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control settings and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of test -adjust -balance work. 1. Mark with paint or other suitable permanent identification material. G. Check all new thermal overloads. 1. Identify improperly protected equipment in report. H. If design flows cannot be obtained within specified limits: — 1. Measure and record major pressure drops in the system. -- 2. Re -balance after corrections are made. 3.02 AIR SYSTEMS A. Before any adjustments are made, check for l . Dirty filters. 2. Duct leakage. 3. Filter leakage. 4. Damper leakage. 5. Equipment vibrations. 6. Correct damper operation. B. Simulate a pressure drop across filters equal to that when 50% loaded with dust. 1. Check fan motor amps with clean filters. C. Adjust distribution system for uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system. 1. Provide dampers where required. _ D. Exchange sheaves and belts as required to adjust the rpm of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. — E. Set minimum outside air quantities. 3.04 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS A. Measure, adjust and report the following 1. Fans: a. Air flow. b. Fan speed. _ C. Motor amps and KW. 2. Ductwork Systems: - a. Air flow at each inlet and outlet. b. Outside air percentage at minimum setting. 3. Packaged Air Conditioning Units: _ a. Air flow and static pressure at supply and return. b. Fan speed. — tCEg-01055 15990 - 2 C. Fan motor amps and KW. d. At full heat: 1. EAT. 2. LAT. - e. At full cooling: 1. EAT (DB/WB) 2. LAT (DB/WB) 3. Ambient temperature. 4. Suction and discharge pressures. 5. Compressor amps and KW. 3.05 REPORT A. Provide a general information sheet listing: l . Instruments used. a. Most recent calibration date. 2. Method of balancing. 3. Altitude correction. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Grille. b. Register. C. Diffuser. B. Provide data sheets for all equipment, including motors and drives, listing: 1. Make. 2. Size. 3. Serial number. 4. Rating. 5. Etc. C. Include design and final values for all items listed in Detailed Requirements, and totals for each system. D. Provide data sheets showing: l . Air flow at each inlet and outlet. 2. Instrument used. 3. Velocity reading. 4. Manufacturer's free area factors. E. Provide a set of prints with inlet and outlets marked to correspond to data sheets. END OF SECTION tCEg-01055 15990 - 3 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 in addition to Division 1 provisions. B. All work as required to provide complete, operating systems; including completion of all details and items of work not specifically shown on the Drawings or within these Specifications. 1.02 FUTURE WORK A. Provide for future expansion of the facility or electrical system as specified and shown on the design Drawings. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work specified in this Division with the work of other trades. B. Order the progress of the electrical work so as to conform with the progress of the other trades. C. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the other work within the facility will permit. D. Any cost resulting from ill-timed work performed under this Division shall be borne by the Electrical Contractor. E. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the project to ascertain and establish all conditions affecting the proposed electrical work. Make provisions within the bid amount for the cost of such conditions and factors. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code (NEC). C. NECA - Standard of Installation. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain and pay for all permits and licenses required. B. Furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from the Local Code Authority having jurisdiction over the electrical installation/Conform to all aspects of ANSI/NFPA 70 (NEC). Traffic Operations Facility 16010-1 C. Conform to applicable building codes plus Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC). 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit inspection and permit certificates through the General Contractor. B. Include certificates of final inspection and acceptance from the local jurisdictional authority. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended. B. All materials shall be new and conform to the industry standards of Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association (IPCEA). Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired in a manner meeting approval of the Engineer or Architect. Such work shall be performed prior to final acceptance by the Owner. C. Equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be permitted on this project. Equipment containing PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl), including transformers, ballasts, capacitors, etc., shall not be allowed for use on the project. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. Install all electrical systems and perform all work using procedures defined in the NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise indicated within these Specifications or on the _ Drawings. B. The Work shall also include completion of all such details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems as defined -- within these Contract Documents. C. The Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence when they are more stringent than _ applicable codes, ordinances, standards or statutes in effect. 3.02 SITE UTILITY AND SERVICE COORDINATION A. Coordinate the electrical, telephone, cable television, etc. services to the site with the respective Utility Companies. _ B. The installation shall meet all of the requirements of all the Utility Companies. 3.03 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER A. Provide complete 120/240 volt 1-phase construction power to the construction site at ^ locations to follow the progress of the Work of other trades. Traffic Operations Facility 16010-2 B. Temporary construction power facilities shall include, but not be limited to, all overcurrent protection, branch circuit distribution (including required ground fault circuit interruption), outlets, lighting, etc., required for a complete, operating system. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc., as required to install or remove any electrical equipment or materials in areas of remodel. Where installed in new construction, order the work so as to minimize such methods and use only where inadvertent omissions have been made during the construction process. B. Provide all cutting, core drilling, patching, etc. as required to conceal conduits; except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or within these Specifications. C. Perform all such work in a manner to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces or the structure, which are not being demolished, refinished, etc. D. Provide refinish, resurface and repair of finishes damaged during electrical construction, E. All openings made in fire walls or ceilings shall be made and patched so as not to affect the fire rating. F. All penetrations in concrete or masonry shall be by use of core drill or saw cutting, except as otherwise permitted on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16010-3 SECTION 16020 ELECTRICAL SHOP DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 PRE -BID SUBMITTALS A. Submit on all equipment other than as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. B. Including all light fixtures of different manufacturer and model than as indicated in the Fixture Schedule or in these Specifications C. See 1.03 Submittal Requirements below. 1.02 SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO ORDERING A. Maximum of thirty (30) days after award of contract. See Sections within this division for specific equipment submittals that will be required. B. Allow fourteen (14) days for review of such Submittals. C. Where shorter review periods are required to keep delivery times within the Project Schedule, submit a separate written request for such shorter periods and list equipment for which such shorter review times are requested. 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit seven (7) copies for each item requested or other number of copies as specified within the previous Divisions of these Specifications. B. Electrical submittals shall be 8-1/2" wide by 11" long or foldable to that size. Electronic Facsimile (FAX) transmission of submittals not permitted. C. Electrical submittals shall have a cover sheet for each group of submittals for a given system (e.g. Light Fixtures, Distribution Gear, Fire Alarm, etc.). Cover sheet shall include Project Name, Owner's Name, Electrical Contractor, System Supplier or Distributor and Engineer's Name. Leave a minimum of six inches (6") square for Engineer's Shop Drawing Review Stamp and additional comments. D. Each set of electrical submittals shall be stapled or bound into individual sets. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16020-1 SECTION 16080 SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SECONDARY SERVICE A. Voltage: Derived at the secondary terminals of the transformer. B. Provide service conductors from transformer to service equipment. C. Metering: See Section 16430 - METERING. 1.02 UTILIZATION VOLTAGES A. Lighting Fixtures: 120 volt and/or 208 volt, 1-phase unless noted otherwise. B. Convenience Outlets: 120 volt, 1-phase Power Outlets: 120 and/or 208 volt, 1-phase or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Motors (unless shown otherwise on Drawings) 1. 3/4 HP and smaller: 120 volt, 1-phase. 2. 1 HP and larger: 208 volt, 3-phase. D. Special Equipment. 1. As shown on the Drawings. 1.03 UTILITY COORDINATION A. Coordinate the entire service installation with the Electric Utility Company and meet all of their requirements. B. Verify meter equipment location and configuration with the Utility Company prior to start of construction. C. Utility Company serving this facility: Fort Collins Power and Light , PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment shall be acceptable to the Utility Company and the authority having jurisdiction for the Project. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All materials for the secondary service shall meet the requirements of the other sections of this Division. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16080-1 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. B. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. D. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. E. Liquidtight flexible conduit and fittings. F. Non-metallic conduits and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 — Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc -coated. C. ANSUNEMA FB 1 - Fittings and supports for Conduit and cable assemblies. D. FS WW-C-563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing. E. FS WW-C-566 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit. F. FS WW-C-581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit. G. NEMA RN 1 - PVC Externally -Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing. H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRC) AND FITTINGS A. Hot dipped galvanized with interior surface coated with baked enamel. B. Fittings shall be threaded type with material to match conduit. 2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS A. Same specifications for conduit and fittings as rigid conduit in 2.01 above. B. Threads on conduit shall be made with die specifically intended for IMC. Traffic Operations Facility 16111-1 CONTRACTOR: PROJECT: CONTRACT DATE: SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY; BID NO. 5684 In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for (Surety) on bond of +.v y approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, -and that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto- set its hand this of _ day (Surety Company) M ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney (s) -in-Fact. 7/96 Section 00660 Page 1 2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS A. Galvanized on outside surface with a coating of lacquer, varnish or enamel on inside. — B. Fittings shall be steel or malleable iron compression gland or setscrew type. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Steel conduit with galvanized coating. " B. Fittings shall be steel only. 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Flexible metal conduit with a PVC jacket. B. Fittings shall be steel compression type watertight. F 2.06 PVC PLASTIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Heavy wall polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40. B. Fittings shall be solvent weld type of same material and manufacturer as the conduit. 2.07 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit clamps, straps and supports shall be steel or malleable iron with galvanized coating. B. Use of drive straps in wood or plumber's perforated straps is prohibited. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. Size conduit for conductor type installed with 1/2 inch minimum size, except that 3/8 inch size will be acceptable for factory -installed flex leads to light fixtures. — B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. All turns in conduit shall be made with symmetrical, concentric bends. C. Conceal raceways in all locations; except in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, surface cabinets, motor and equipment connections or as shown on the Drawings. Route exposed conduits parallel and perpendicular to building lines and adjacent piping. D. Maintain 4 inches clearance between conduit and other piping. Maintain 8 inches minimum _ clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. — Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. Traffic Operations Facility 16111-2 .. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit racks constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent future conduits. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire, drive straps or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction before conductors are pulled. H. Support conduit at a maximum of 8 feet on center. 3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of the fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Terminate rigid steel conduit with double locknuts and a bushing or into a cast box with locknut on exterior. D. Use conduit hubs or sealing type locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes in exterior, damp or wet locations. E. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. F. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, such as around beams. G. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 2 inches or larger in size. H. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. I. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. J. Provide #12 insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit (except where used as sleeves or nipples). K. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints. Equip with bonding conductor as required. L. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls, floors or other structural elements; seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. M. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible, otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket. N. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade shall be 1/2 inch. Do not route conduits to cross each other in such slabs. O. Use rigid steel conduit (GRC) with PVC jacket or tar coating for all riser conduits on underground systems. P. Use PVC jacketed or tar coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or having more than two bends regardless of length. Q. Wipe ends of plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply even coats of cement to the entire area within the fitting and conduit the will be inserted. Let joint cure for 20 minutes minimum. Traffic Operations Facility 16111-3 R. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions for passage of raceways including below grade service conduits. Waterproof all sleeved raceways where required. S. Lengths of flexible or plastic conduit shall contain separate grounding conductor. Provide duct seal in all conduits passing from a heated space to an unheated or exterior location. _ 3.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than five feet from the foundation wall: Schedule 40 PVC plastic conduit or PVC jacketed rigid steel conduit (GRC). B. Installations in or under concrete slab or within five feet of foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit (GRC) with tar coating or PVC jacketing. If underslab conduit is buried in sand or fill, plastic conduit will be acceptable if GRC elbows are used for risers. C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit (GRC) only. Use of EMT is expressly prohibited. D. Exposed outdoor or wet interior locations: Rigid steel (GRC) or intermediate metal (IMC) _ conduit. E. Concealed or exposed dry interior locations: Rigid steel (GRC) or intermediate metal (IMC) r conduits where subject to physical abuse or damage and where concrete embedding is used for concealment. Electrical metallic tubing in other locations. F. Motor or Equipment connections: Flexible metal conduit only in dry interior locations. Liquid - tight flexible conduit in all other locations. G. Hazardous locations: Rigid steel conduit with seal -off fittings and explosion proof enclosures. H. Raceway penetrations of refrigerated area walls or conduits passing through unheated spaces: Rigid steel conduit (GRC) with seat -off fittings to prohibit air flow. '- END OF SECTION W Traffic Operations Facility 16111-4 �" SECTION 16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Multi -outlet assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-C-582 - Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fitting; Surface. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include product data for surface metal raceways, multi -outlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters and accessories. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MULTI -OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. See plans for series required, all types by Wiremold. B. Multi -outlet Assembly: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, with pre -wired receptacles spaced at 42 inches (or as shown on the Drawings), suitable for use as a multi -outlet assembly. C. Receptacles: Grounding type duplex mounted in cover space. D. Finish: Factory finished white enamel in all areas (confirm with architect prior to ordering). E. Fittings: Couplings, elbows, outlet boxes and connectors designed for use with multi -outlet system supplied. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - MULTI -OUTLET ASSEMBLY A. Use flat -head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level. B. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. C. Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components to provide a positive, direct grounding path. D. Fastener Option: Use clips and specialty straps suitable for the purpose and manufactured by the raceway manufacturer. E. Install only in locations as defined and shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16112-1 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND LESS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building Wire. B. Cable. C. Wiring connections and terminations. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber -Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. B. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic -insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Feeders larger than #6 AWG: Copper stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, Type XHHW or THWN. B. Feeders and branch circuits #6 AWG and smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, Type THW or THHN. Sizes #6 and #8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller than #8 AWG; solid conductor. C. Use Type THHN for supply connection wiring to ballasted light fixtures. D. In high temperature areas and within 10 feet of any heating plant, use insulation rated at 105 degrees C. E. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor with 600 volt insulation, Type THHN. F. Fire Alarm System circuits: Copper, solid conductor with 600 volt insulation, Type THHN. G. Wire sizing noted on the Drawings to be extended for the entire length of the circuit unless specifically noted otherwise. H. Aluminum conductor not allowed in any size or application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. Install all conductors in approved raceway system, regardless of voltage or application. B. Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG for line voltage power and lighting circuits and no smaller than #14 AWG for control wiring. Traffic Operations Facility 16120-1 C. Use #10 AWG for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet or as noted on drawings. D. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in the same raceway. E. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes. F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, cabinets, equipment and panelboards. 4 G. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 3.02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant (Equal to Ideal "Yellow") for pulling #4 AWG and larger wires. B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather, all concrete and plastering work is completed and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Do not install conductors in incomplete conduit runs. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only inaccessible junction boxes of proper size and volume. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for solid copper wire splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. Stranded conductors less than #8 AWG shall be connected using soldered joints using approved electrical tape with a minimum of 4 layers. LL C. For copper conductor #8 AWG and larger, use insulated type solderless compression connectors or split bolt connectors. If split bolt connectors are used, tape insulation shall be installed to 150% of insulation value of the conductor. D. Thoroughly clean all conductors before installing lugs or connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without creating " perceptible temperature rise at load. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape and insulated splice caps. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. C. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper -- phasing connections prior to energizing three-phase equipment. D. Provide megohm meter (i.e. Megger) testing of all feeders larger than #4 AWG and submit results of the tests to the Engineer. 4 Traffic Operations Facility 16120-2 E. Recheck all splices and terminations and make tight during a 15-day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work. F. Color -coding shall be per mechanical or special equipment diagrams or as required to indicate phases. Color coding of conductor size larger than #6 AWG shall be by color taping of entire exposed ends. Color coding for sizes #6 AWG and smaller shall be by factory color - coding of insulation. G. Conductors that are nicked during the process of insulation stripping shall be replaced at the discretion of the Engineer with no additional cost to the Owner. H. Bend conductors in a neat, consistent manner. Larger conductors shall be carefully bent to avoid stress points on the insulation where routed through bushings or other openings. Any insulation so stressed shall result in replacement of the entire conductor length at the Engineer's discretion. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16120-3 SECTION 16130 OUTLET BOXES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. B. NEMA 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet metal outlet boxes: Galvanized and cadmium plated steel with 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. Minimum 4 inch square or octagonal with suitable covers or extension rings, except that cut -in boxes are allowed in masonry walls. All outlets serving #8 AWG and larger wire shall be minimum 4-11/16 inch trade size. B. Cast boxes: Aluminum or cast feralloy deep type with gasketed cover and threaded hubs. 2.02 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes shall be type as noted on drawings. 2.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel. B. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension: hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 16160. C. Cast metal boxes for outdoor, damp, corrosive or wet locations installations: Type 4 and Type 6, flat flanged surface mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight. D. Cast metal box with ground flange, neoprene gasket, grounding stud or screw, proper metal cover and stainless steel cover screws. E. Fiberglass handholes for Underground Installations: Die -molded with pre-cut 6x6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side; reinforced fiberglass weatherproof cover with non- skid finish. Handholes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Traffic Operations Facility 16130-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, fixture and equipment connections, and code compliance. B. Electrical box locations shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate unless specifically -- dimensioned on the Drawings. Outlets shall be symmetrically located according to the room layout and so as to not interfere with other work or equipment. C. Exact locations of outlets shall be governed by structural conditions, obstructions and other -- equipment. D. Verify location of all floor outlets and boxes in all offices and work areas prior to rough -in. E. Locate and install boxes to allow access after all work of all trades is complete. Where installation will be inaccessible, coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with the General Contractor. F. Locate and install outlet boxes to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. 3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Do not install back-to-back boxes or through boxes in walls. Provide minimum of 8 inches separation between outlet boxes on opposite sides of a wall. B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to minimize cutting and to require cutting of corner of masonry -- unit only where possible. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. D. Support boxes independently of conduit, except that cast boxes may be supported by two _ rigid steel conduits that are supported within 12 inches of the box. r E. Use multiple gang boxes where more than one device is mounted within an outlet. Do not use sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. H. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on the Lighting and Reflected Ceiling Plans. I. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches of recessed luminaires, to be accessible through fixture opening in ceiling. J. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure the boxes to partition studs and the -- interior wall. K. Accurately position outlet to allow for thickness of surface finish. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush " ceiling outlet boxes. L. Align wall -mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. Traffic Operations Facility 16130-2 M. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations or areas exposed to the weather and in all wet locations. N. Outlet boxes in finished walls of ceilings shall be fitted with appropriate covers and set flush with finished surface. 3.03 FLOOR BOX LOCATIONS A. Set boxes level and flush with finished flooring material. B. Mount boxes so that trim will properly align with finished floor surface after the device is installed and the floor finish is installed. 3.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in finished areas. Shown pull boxes for feeders on Record Set Drawings. B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. 3.05 OUTLET MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Wall Switches: 4'-0". B. Convenience outlets: 16 inches except over counters, benches, special equipment, heating equipment, etc. where they shall be at a height to clear obstructions or as noted on the drawings. Mount outlets with long axis vertical and grounding pole on the top, except that horizontal outlet configuration shall be used in brick walls to minimize cutting. C. Com/Data outlets: 16 inches. D. Wall mounted telephone outlets: 44 inches. E. CATV outlets: 16 inches. F. Panelboards: 6'-3" to top of trim. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16130-3 SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Insert State certificate here. SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and box covers. D. Floor mounted service fittings. E. Wall box dimmers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet. B. FS W-S-896E - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD-1 - General -Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD-5 - Specific Purpose Wiring Devices. E. NEMA WD-2 - Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under the provisions of Section 16020. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions and manufacturer's instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell. B. Pass and Seymour. C. Arrow -Hart. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall switches for lighting circuits and motor loads less than 114 horsepower. Provide decora rocker style switches in finished areas and AC general use snap switch with toggle handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC in unfinished areas. Traffic Operations Facility 16141-1 B. Handle: ivory plastic, except that brown shall be used on dark wood surfaces. C. Pilot light type: Pilot strap in adjacent gang. D. Locator type: Lighted handle. E. Confirm exact finish with Architect prior to ordering. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -RECEPTACLE A. Hubbell. B. General Electric. C. Leviton. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and straight blade receptacles: Heavy duty specification grade only. Equal to Hubbell 5262 Convenience receptacle configuration: Duplex Type 5-20R with ivory plastic face, except that brown shall be used in dark wood surfaces. B. Specific -use receptacles: Type as indicated on the Drawings with black plastic face. C. Confirm exact finish with Architect prior to ordering. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -WALL BOX DIMMERS A. Lutron, see plans for catalog numbers. B. Leviton. C. Substitutions as approved. 2.06 WALL BOX DIMMERS A. Wall dimmers: Linear slide type. B. Provide specific type for incandescent or fluorescent loads as noted on the Drawings. C. Rating: 600 watts minimum or larger size to accommodate loads or as otherwise sized on the Drawings. D. Confirm exact finish with Architect prior to ordering. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -WALL PLATES A. Leviton. B. Sierra (P&S). Traffic Operations Facility 16141-2 C. Hubbell. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.8 WALL PLATES A. Device plates: One-piece nylon or polycarbonate type of suitable shape for devices to be covered. Sectional type plates not permitted. B. Decorative cover plate: Curved edge Nylon or polycarbonate device plate and matching screw; color to match device. Use smooth brushed stainless steel in kitchens, coffee bars, laboratories, and toilets. Plastic or Phenolic plates not allowed in any location. C. Weatherproof cover plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. D. Labeled plates: Smooth plate with black letters engraved on plate reading as shown on the Drawings. E. Confirm exact finish with Architect prior to ordering. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install light switches vertical with OFF position down. B. Install above counter devices so that box opening clears cabinet, counter top, or back splash surfaces adequately to allow plate installation of device plate with a minimum of 1 inch clearance. C. Install wall dimmers at switch height. Do not use any common neutral circuiting on any dimmed circuits. D. Install convenience outlets vertical with grounding pole at top. E. Drill opening for poke -through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Installation or removal of fittings shall not affect building fire rating. F. Corridor convenience outlets: Hospital grade. G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle and blank outlets in finished areas, using jumbo or intermediate plates for outlets installed on masonry walls. H. Install industrial steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above ceilings and in areas where surface conduit is normally allowed. I. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16141-3 SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts Maximum). B. ANSUNEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSUNEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSUNEMA ICS 6 -Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSUNEMA ICS 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: Type 1, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge type, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. D. Panel for mounting terminal blocks of electrical components: 14 gauge steel; white enamel finish. 2.02 CABINETS A. Cabinet boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls and size as required. Equip with 3/4 inch thick plywood terminal boards painted white for mounting of terminal blocks. B. Cabinet fronts: Steel surface type with screw cover front and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard locks; finish in gray baked enamel. Traffic Operations Facility 16160-1 2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Terminal blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed. B. Power terminals: Unit construction type, closed back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and control circuits: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide knockouts on enclosure for conduit routing. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb and true. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16160-2 SECTION 16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Electrical connection to equipment specified under other Sections of these Specifications or as furnished by the Owner. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet. B. NEMA WD 1 -General Purpose Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific -Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. See Section 01042 and apply as though contained within this Division and Section of these Specifications. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Use exterior type boxes, covers and fittings in making connections in exterior locations plus for all dishwashers and similar units where moisture conditions are encountered. 2.02 CONDUIT A. Use watertight flexible conduit with watertight fittings in making connections in exterior locations plus for all dishwashers and similar units where moisture conditions are encountered. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. B. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough -in. Location of outlet boxes, conduit, stubups and connection points are to be considered as typical only. Verify location, size, and type of connection from shop drawings or equipment supplier's rough -in drawings. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer. C. Confirm rating of each item of equipment with the equipment supplier prior to installing breakers or wiring. Traffic Operations Facility 16180-1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat -producing equipment. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using liquidtight flexible conduit. C. Install pre -finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain relief clamps. D. Provide suitable strain relief clamps or grips for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre -wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as required. Connect with conduit and wire. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16180-2 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Fastening hardware. 1.02 COORDINATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate size, shape and location of all necessary concrete pads with General Contractor prior to submitting bid. B. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring which they carry. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Support channels: Galvanized or painted steel. B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant plated or stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, preset inserts, beam clamps or spring steel clips and clamps. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self -drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. DO NOT use driven conduit straps or nails. C. Independently support all electrical items directly from the structure or structural components. Do not fasten supports to any piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment or conduit. D. Do not use powder -actuated anchors on concrete. E. Do not drill structural steel members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat, workmanlike appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with a minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall. Support conduits above and below such equipment with steel channel and route in a secure, neat manner. Traffic Operations Facility 16190-1 H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and -- panelboards in stud walls. I. Provide concrete pads for all floor mounted switchboards and equipment. 3.02 LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Support all luminaires from the structural elements capable of carrying the total weight, including wiring. Mount all light fixtures rigidly and securely, with no "rocking" action. Where fixtures are mounted to the surface of grid type ceiling, specialty clips may be used only if the use results in rigid attachment (provide additional materials as required to prevent 'rocking" movement). _ B. Luminaires in suspended accessible ceiling systems: Provide sheet metal screws or specialty -- clips to secure fixtures to grid system per the NEC. Where suspended ceilings are 24 inches or less below the structural components (e.g. bar joists, truss -joists, concrete, etc.), provide independent support from the structure for all raceways. For a space greater than 24 inches, - the ceiling suspending wires and hangers may be used for support of conduits 3/4 inch and M smaller. Provide independent support for conduits 1 inch trade size and larger. Mount all conduits a minimum of 8 inches above any lift -out type ceiling or with spacing to permit relocation of recessed lighting fixtures to any location. C. Surface mounted luminaires: Provide minimum of two supports at each end of the fixture, spaced 6 inches or more. Support fixtures from main ceiling tees only on suspended ceilings. ` Provide additional cross supports above ceiling to main tees or structure as required. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16190-2 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include schedule for nameplates and labels. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved, three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Wire and cable markers: Cloth or plastic tape markers, split sleeve or tubing type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment using screws, rivets or epoxy adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Embossed tape labels will not be permitted for any application. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or manufacturer's shop drawings for control and alarm wiring. Traffic Operations Facility 16195-1 DR 0172 (12t98) COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE DENVER (3M)232.2418 CO80281 CONTRACTOR APPLICATION (303)23 FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Pursuant to Statute Section 39-26.114(1)(a)(XIX) DO NOT WRITE IN The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building materials for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment, supplies, and materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become a part of the structure, highway, road, street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization. Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and otherpenalties provided by law. A separate certificate is required for each contract. Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime contractor to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side.) FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED. 0170-750 (999) $0.00 - ---- ----•• oumrwumTor your contract: Fax number. Business telephone number. $ ( I 1 Cobrado withholding tax account number. contact at exempt telephone number. .. - ---- ---- — w......,rny Pesf wnere project is located) Scheduled Month Day Year construction start date: Estimated Month Day Year �sti�.�.», :W ��..W.::,u.. _.. completion date: - ., ..-,: s•ry _Yiz M1.rF ,�pp x. :n"Y§`£ti#j r t wr�r�±. 1 declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made In this application are true and Complete to the best of my knowledge. Signature of owner, partner or corporate officer corporate officer. Date: 3.03 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, panelboards, switchboards, enclosed switches and loads served. Letters shall be 1/4 inch high. B. Provide engraved plates on all safety disconnects and magnetic motor starters, indicating the load served. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16195-2 SECTION 16430 METERING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Install meter socket and meter supplied by the Power Company. B. Provide V conduit from transformer mounted CT's to meter socket. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Work shall be governed by the National Electric Code (NEC), unless superseded by local ordinances, Supply Authority and other legal authority. B. Products of this Section shall be listed by UL. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under the provisions of Section 16020 and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16020. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METER SOCKET AND CABINETS A. Weatherproof meter socket: Jaw configuration suitable to Supply Authority. Purchase directly from Supply Authority. B. Transformer cabinet: Install CT's in the power company furnished padmounted transformer, confirm with power company. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install metering equipment and items in accordance with the manufacturer's and Supply Authority instructions. B. Meet all of the requirements of the Supply Authority. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16430-1 SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disconnect switches B. Fuses C. Enclosures D. Switch with thermal overload device E. Pilot Devices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/UL/ 198C - High -Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). D. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface Mounted. E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower and short circuit withstand ratings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Square-D B. General Electric C. ITE D. Substitutions as approved. Traffic Operations Facility 16440-1 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Fusible switch assemblies: Quick -make, quick -break, horsepower -rated load interrupter enclosed heavy duty knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle shall be lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: designed to accommodate Class R fuses. Lugs shall be rated minimum 75 degrees C. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, load interrupter - enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle shall be lockable in the OFF position. - C. Enclosures: Type 1 unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Weatherproof enclosures shall be NEMA Type 3R enclosures while corrosion resistant enclosures shall be NEMA Type 4X. D. Switch with thermal overload: Outlet box mounted switch with integral thermal overload device for all 120 volt, 1-phase motor loads. Size device heater at 115% of the full load current. Mount on or directly adjacent to motor, using flexible conduit. Equip with plate to - meet requirements of location. Switch/fuse combinations as shown on drawings, provide fuse size as required for load served. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES A. Bussman B. Cefco C. Shawmut D. Substitution as approved 2.04 FUSES A. Fuses, 600 amperes and less: Dual element, current limiting one-time fuse, 250 volt as required. B. Interrupting rating: 200,000 amperes, rms symmetrical. _. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the Drawings. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. C. Provide three spare fuses of each size. If more than six fuses are required, provide a spare fuse cabinet next to the main service equipment or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer. D. Make up all equipment connections using flexible liquidtight conduit. See Section 16111. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16440-2 SECTION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Power system grounding. B. Communication system grounding. C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at the service entrance equipment to metallic water service at the street side of the shutoff and bond to supplementary grounding electrodes. B. Provide a communications grounding conductor at the point of entrance and connect to the main electrical ground bus or the nearest effectively grounded water pipe or structural steel member. C. Bond together service equipment enclosures, exposed non -current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, separate grounding conductors in raceways or cables, receptacle ground connections and plumbing systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS' 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground rods: Copper encased steel, 3/4 inch diameter, 10 feet minimum length. B. Hardware: Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc. as required for a complete grounding system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and selected branch circuits as indicated on the Drawings. Terminate each on a grounding lug, bus or bushing. B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable clamp in a location that is readily accessible for inspection. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. C. Provide supplementary grounding electrode(s) as defined on the Drawings. Provide a recessed well for each ground rod to maintain accessibility to cable connection. Recessed well shall be a cast iron valve box with cast iron cover installed level with finished grade. D. Use #8 AWG copper insulated conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet of slack conductor at terminal board. Traffic Operations Facility 16450-1 E. Provide grounding and bonding at the Utility Company's metering equipment. F. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded on each side of all new raceways containing sections of flexible or plastic raceways. - G. Provide a grounding type bushing for all secondary feeder conduits that originate at the service equipment. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus at the service equipment. H. Provide a grounding type bushing for all feeder conduits at all panelboards. Bond these to the panelboard ground bus. I. Provide a separate grounding conductor on all feeder circuits and services and route inside conduit for same. J. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for all parallel feeders. ~ K. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each raceway for all branch circuits including switch legs. " L. Provide a green insulated wire -grounding jumper from the ground screw of all grounding devices to a box grounding screw or clip, or utilize self -grounding type devices. — 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect the grounding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Measure ground resistance from the service neutral connection at the service entrance to convenient ground reference point using a suitable megohm (e.g. Megger) or other approved ground testing equipment. With Megger equipment, use IEEE "Fall of Potential Method" to establish ground resistance. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16450-2 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS-W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service. B. FS W-P-115 - Power Distribution Panel. C. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. D. NEMA PB 1 — Panelboards. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. F. NEMA PB 1.2 - Application Guide for Ground -Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and/or fusible switch arrangement and sizes. 1.04 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish five each to the Owner. „ 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Spaces: Defined as unoccupied portions of the panelboard bus and trim components which may be used for installation of circuit breakers in the future. B. Spares: Defined as unused circuit breakers to be provided in the panelboard for future loads in addition to the connected complement of devices. PART2-PRODUCTS 2,01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PANELBOARDS A. General Electric. B. Seimens. C. Square D. Traffic Operations Facility 16470-1 D. Substitutions as approved. 2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch circuit panelboards: Circuit breaker type, dead front. B. Enclosures: NEMA Type 1.Cabinet: Sheet steel. C. Provide flush or surface trim as defined on the Drawings. Equip with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock with all panelboards keyed alike. Finish in standard ✓ manufacturer's enamel. D. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as shown on the Drawings and equip with copper ground bus. E. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208/240 volt panelboards. F. Molded case circuit breakers: Bolt -on thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers with common trip on multipole breakers. Tie handles to be used for manual operation only. Plug-in circuit -- breakers not permitted. Breaker handle shall indicate distinctive ON, OFF and TRIP positions. Provide UL listed SWD rated circuit breakers for all lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault circuit breakers with 5ma trip where scheduled on the Drawings. G. Current limiting molded case circuit breakers: Provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating: 100,000 amperes rms, symmetrical with let -through current and energy levels less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards plumb and true with flush mounted enclosures flush with wall surfaces and in conformance with NEMA PB 1. B. Height: 6-Y to top of trim. Provide filler plates for unused open spaces in panelboard dead front panels. C. Provide a neatly typed branch circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Panel schedules shall indicate load served and location of load for each branch circuit. Locations shall reflect Owners Room Numbers or room function and not the construction room designations. _ D. Carefully lay out conduit entries to avoid congested or overlapping arrays or incorrectly punched or removed knockouts. E. Serve cables neatly and lace with approved tie materials. _ Traffic Operations Facility 16470-2 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard exceed 20 percent, rearrange the circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads with 20 percent. Submit load tests and resulting circuit changes with the as -built drawings. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. B. Visual and mechanical inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness or connections for circuit breakers. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16470-3 0 SECTION 16475 SWITCHBOARDS PART1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low voltage power service switchboards. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Fuses). B. FS W-S-865 - Enclosed Knife Switch. C. IEEE C37.20.1 — Standard for Metal -Enclosed Low -Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. E. NEMA PB 2 — Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. F. NEMA PB 1.2 - Application Guide for Ground -Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. G. UL 98 — Enclosed and Dead Front Switches. H. UL 891 — Deadfront Switchboards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists, a single -line diagram show main and branch bus ratings, outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, fusible switch arrangement and sizes. 1.04 SPARE PARTS A. Fuses: Furnish to the Owner three spare fuses of each type, size and rating installed and mount in spare fuse cabinet. Locate said cabinet as directed by the Engineer. B. Fuse pullers: Furnish one fuse puller to the Owner and mount in spare fuse cabinet. Traffic Operations Facility 16475-1 SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Spaces: Defined as unoccupied portions of the switchboard bus and trim components which may be used for installation of fusible switch units in the future. B. Spares: Defined as unused fusible switch units to be provided in the switchboard for future loads in addition to the connected complement of devices. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -SWITCHBOARDS A. General Electric. B. Seimens. C. Square-D. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.02 MAIN SWITCHBOARDS, GENERAL A. Switchboards: Fusible switch type or as noted on the One -Line Diagram, front connected, front accessible only with fixed individually mounted main device and panel mounted branch .. devices. B. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 1 enclosure or as noted. Free standing and attached to concrete - pad. C. Barriers: Locate between adjacent switchboard sections. D. Label all main and feeder overcurrent devices with engraved nameplates. See Section 16195. -- 2.03 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust inhibiting primer with phosphatizing treated metal surface. Provide painted surfaces that conform to IEEE C37.20. B. Incoming Line Pull Sections: Where required to match and align with basic switchboard. Where top pull box is required, provide with adequate ventilation to keep temperatures same as switchboard limits. C. Hinged Front Panels: Provide to allow access to overcurrent protection, accessories and _ blank compartments. D. Busses and Connections: Three Phase, Four Wire except as indicated otherwise. Horizontal cross busses throughout shall be 100% rated. No tapered bus permitted. E. Equip ground bus with pressure connector terminations for feeder and branch circuit sizes. F. Supports and Bracing for Busses: Adequate strength for indicated short circuit currents. Bolted connections shall be accessible for future torque maintenance. Traffic Operations Facility 16475-2 ^ G. Bus Contact Surfaces: Silver plated. H. Neutral Busses: Minimum 100% ampacity of the phase bus. I. Future Extension: Provide for extension on east end by means of bolting or other approved methods and connecting links. 2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Fusible Switches: Quick -make, quick -break, heavy duty units. B. Rating: Load -breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch. C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let -through current permitted by uts fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000 amperes, rms symmetrical. D. Operation: By external handle. E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off' position. F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type where required. G. Padlocking Provision: Up to two padlocks in open or closed switch position, H. Contacts: NEMA rated 75 degrees C. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES A. Bussman. B. Cefco. C. Shawmut. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.06 FUSES A. Fuses, 600 amperes and less: Dual element, current limiting one-time fuse; 250 or 600 volt as required. UL Class RK 1. B. Fuses, 601 amperes and larger: Current -limiting time delay, fast acting one-time fuse, 600 volt UL Class L. C. Interrupting rating: 200,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 2.07 IDENTIFICATION A. See Section 16195 — Electrical Identification. B. Provide nameplates indicating switchboard designation and identification of each load being served by feeder overcurrent devices. Traffic Operations Facility 16475-3 C. Provide UL nameplate showing manufacturer, model number, serial number, plant location, ampere rating, voltage rating, wire, phase and short circuit bracing rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards on a level concrete pad and in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Anchor each switchboard to the concrete pad. Interior pads shall be 4 inches thick. C. Provide blank plates for unused open spaces in switchboard dead front panels. D. Carefully lay out conduit entries to avoid congested or overlapping arrays. E. Serve cables neatly and lace with approved tie materials. F. Operating Instructions: Include in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with applicable standards on the National Electrical Testing Association. Provide continuity tests. B. Visual and mechanical inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for fusible switches and fuses. C. Clean switchboard interior and exterior. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 164754 SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. General purpose contactors - as shown on the Electrical Drawings. B. Lighting contactors. C. Enclosures. 1.02 ENCLOSURES A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity and poles. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 16020. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -CONTACTORS A. Square D. B. Allen-Bradley. C. Cutler -Hammer. D. Substitutions as approved. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE AND LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Contactors: Electrically -held with 3-wire control. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz AC. C. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Contacts: 600 volt, 60 Hertz, number of poles as required. E. Enclosure: Type 1 or as noted on the Drawings. F. Provide solderless pressure wire terminals. Traffic Operations Facility 16485-1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide engraved nameplates defining load served and circuit(s) supplying power. C. See Section 16195. D. Equip with HOA switch to provide manual and automatic selection. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16485-2 SECTION 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Lamps. C. Ballasts. D. Exterior luminaires and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 - Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. B. ANSI C82.4 - Specifications for High -Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type). C. FS W-F-414 - Fixture, Lighting (Fluorescent, Alternating -Current, Pendant Mounting). D. NEMA LE 2 - HID Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC) Ratings. E. All fixtures UL approved and listed for location being installed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. I' B. Include outline drawings, lamps and ballast data, support points, weights and accessory information for each luminaire type. jC. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under the provisions of Section 16020. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect products in a dry, secured environment, except that poles may be stored in exterior fenced area. Storage shall be in a manner so as to avoid damage to the materials by stacking or moving of other materials in the area. B. Handle all metal poles carefully to prevent breakage and damage to the finish. 1.05 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a stock of extra parts and supplies as outlined below. Store in an area as designated by the Owner. B. Lamps: One spare case (24 lamps) of four foot fluorescent lamps, compact fluorescent, reflector and par type incandescent. Two (2) spare lamps for the HID types. Traffic Operations Facility 16510-1 C. Lenses: Three percent of quantity furnished for each fixture type or a minimum of two of each type. D. Ballasts: Two spare of each type of fluorescent furnished. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR FIXTURES A. Fluorescent luminaires: Provide with hinged frames with latches. Lenses shall be minimum 0.125 inches thickness, stabilized, ETL certified virgin acrylic only. Painted finishes shall have minimum 1.5 mils thickness and white finishes shall be 87% minimum reflectance. Ferrous metal surfaces protective finish shall be rust -inhibiting. B. Recessed incandescent luminaires: Prewired type with thermal protection to prevent lamping u with oversize lamps. C. Recessed fluorescent luminaires: Provide trim type and accessories required for installation in ceiling system installed. Maximum depth of luminaire, 8 inches including yokes and bridges. D. Exit signs: Stencil face LED fixture with 6 inch high green letters on white, aluminum or black background. Universal type mounting with arrows as shown on the Drawings. E. HID Luminaires: Pre -wired with integral fused ballast. F. Recessed fixtures in insulated ceiling spaces: Provide open top separation barrier around the fixture, constructed of non-combustible material as required to maintain 3 inch minimum clearance between insulation and the fixture. Insulation shall not be installed within or above the separation barrier. — 2.02 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly. B. Provide low temperature ballasts with reliable starting to -20 degrees F. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LAMPS A. General Electric. B. Osram/Sylvania. — C. Phillips. - — D. Venture E. Substitutions as approved. u 2.04 LAMPS A. General use incandescent: Inside frosted type rated 130 volts. B. Incandescent reflector lamps: 'HIR' Halogen type, Shape as scheduled, rated 130 volts. Traffic Operations Facility 16510-2 �" C. Fluorescent: T-8 or compact type, except as specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. D. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated. E. High Pressure Sodium (HPS): Clear, suitable for all burning positions. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. General Electric. B. Osram/Sylvania. C. Advance. D. Motorola. E. Substitutions as approved. 2.06 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Fluorescent ballasts: high power factor type with Class A noise rating. CBM/ETL certified. UL approved for Class P operation. B. Construction: High frequency electronic type with low harmonic distortion (THD<10%) and high power factor. Magnetic ballasts shall be provided only where specifically indicated by written note on the Drawings. Use of stated manufacturer's product number to indicate magnetic or hybrid ballast shall not be adequate without written note describing non -solid state assembly. C. Use a single ballast in 2-, 3- or 4-lamp fixtures, unless split switching or other functions require multiple ballasts. 2.07 HID BALLASTS A. HID Ballasts: Suitable for 122 degrees F ambient selected by the luminaire manufacturer. Ballasts shall have integral fuse and shall be high power factor (HPF) type ONLY. B. LS-NC Rating: Equal to or less than ratings listed in Table C-1 of NEMA LE 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set luminaires true and free of light leaks, dents or other irregularities. Provide proper fixture flanges, trims, mounting and suspensions. Install lamps in luminaires and Iampholders. B. Support surface mounted luminaires directly from building structure or ceiling grid T-bar system. See Section 16190. Coordinate installation of recessed fluorescent fixtures with the ceiling system installer to ensure that each corner of the lighting fixture opening is supported from the building structure by wires or other means of support. Traffic Operations Facility 16510-3 C. Coordinate the location of light fixtures with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan. Coordinate space requirements with General, Mechanical Contractors and other trades prior to delivery of the suspended ceiling system. Extra costs resulting from failure to coordinate space requirements shall be bome by the Electrical Contractor. Mount all outlets at position and height to clear ductwork, piping, etc. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Install grid clips or sheet metal screws as required to secure fixtures to ceiling system. D. HID luminaires: Use hangers capable of carrying a minimum of 500 pounds. Provide a separate safety on industrial type luminaires to secure the reflector assembly to the ballast housing. E. Relamp all fixtures which have failed lamps at the completion of the Work and prior to acceptance by the Owner. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at the completion of the Work. Clean all paint splatters, dirt, and debris from inside of enclosed luminaires. F. Any exterior luminaires with bugs in interior shall be removed from mounting, sealed using proper caulk and reinstalled. G. Touch up the finishes on pole and luminaires at completion of the work. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16510-4 SECTION 16535 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Emergency light equipment. B. Emergency exit signs. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS W-L-305 - Light set, General Illumination (Emergency or Auxiliary)NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. B. NEMA WD1 - General Purpose Wiring. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to local building codes and NFPA 101 for installation requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16020. B. Provideproduct data on emergency exit signs. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Chloride. B. Dual-Lite. C. Lithonia. D. Hubbell E. Substitutions as approved. 2.02 EXIT SIGN FIXTURES A. Type: Exit signs with green LED lighting sources and aluminum stencil face. Equip with arrows as required to indicate means of egress. Means of mounting exit fixtures shall be universal type to allow back, top or edge mounting. B. Equip with integral maintenance free battery with solid state charger and transfer equipment. Provide means for testing standby battery system. Traffic Operations Facility 16535-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS DOMM CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These GENERAL CONDITIONS have been developed by using the STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1990 Edition), as a base. Changes to that document are shown by underlining text that has been added and striking through text that has been deleted. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 2.03 BATTERY EGRESS LIGHTING EQUIPMENT A. Dual head adjustable emergency egress fixture with integral maintenance free ni-cad battery system. Unit shall deliver minimum of 90 minutes above battery standby capacity with all lamps and accessories attached. Provide with low level cut off to prevent total battery drain in extended outage conditions. Equip with test button and charge status indicating light or LED. B. Lamps shall be directional halogen lamp assemblies with minimum 12 watt lamp size. C. Fixture shall be architectural type with rectilinear lines and heads placed at ends of battery enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units plumb and level. B. Mount exit sign fixtures so that they are visible from the normal points of egress. Equip with arrows as indicated on the Drawings or as required to properly indicate the emergency egress path. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16535-2 SECTION 16722 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire alarm system. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. B. NFPA 71 - Central Station signaling systems - Protected premises unit. C. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. D. NFPA 72G - Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems. E. NFPA 72H - Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems. F. NFPA 72A - Local Protective Signaling Systems. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. System: UL and FM listed. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101 Conform to applicable standards and code for the location. C. Meet requirements of the local and state fire Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). D. Meet all applicable UL requirements. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Principal work in this section: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete automatic fire alarm system, as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. System shall include audible alarm devices, conduit and wiring system, control panel, power supply, signal initiating device, and all accessory devices required to provide a complete operating system. 3. System shall be U.L. listed for the applicable provisions of National Fire Protection Association Standard Number 72C for remote station systems. Automatic devices shall be installed per 72E 90A for fan shutdown, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall be U.L. listed for use with Manufacturer's control panel. Traffic Operations Facility 16722-1 1.05 REMOTE MONITORING A. Electrical Contractor shall notify Owner at beginning of project and not more than 15 days into project that: 1. Owner shall provide a dedicated telephone line for connection to the remote monitoring equipment. — 2. Owner shall contract with a remote monitoring company and remote receiving station that is approved by the local fire department. 3. The remote monitoring company shall provide cable and connect to the dedicated telephone line and to the fire alarm panels remote signal. '- 4. Remote monitor panel shall interface with the fire alarm panel. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems with a minimum of five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company with specialization in smoke and fire alarm systems providing documentation showing minimum of three years experience. Electrical contractor may serve as installer if evidence is submitted with shop drawings showing a minimum of three years experience and at least ten fire alarm installations during that period. — 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of 16020. B. Provide wiring diagrams, data sheets, equipment ratings, layout, dimensions and finishes. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of 16020. — D. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data including operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures. B. Include manufacturer representative's letter stating that system is operational. J PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS _ A. Notifier. B. Simplex. C. EST. D. Substitutions as approved. — Traffic Operations Facility 16722-2 2.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Component assemblies: based on Notifier product line. Provide as shown or equivalent from approved manufacturer. B. Control panel: Notifier SFP-1024 or equivalent with ten zones and surface wall mounted enclosure. 2.03 INITIATING DEVICES A. Photoelectric Type Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E; with plug-in base, auxiliary relay contact and integral thermal element rated at 135 degrees F. Detector shall be low -profile type with visual indication of detector actuation and suitable for mounting on a 4 inch outlet box. Integral with the detector shall be a means of simulating an alarm condition for testing. The test shall be initiated at the detector. B. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector - NFPA 72E; Photoelectric type with two DPDT Form-C relay contacts, key operated remote test station and duct sampling tubes extending the width of the duct. C. Sprinkler Detection: Interface the flow and tamper switches (provided by sprinkler system installer) with the control panel to indicate alarm and trouble. 2.04 SIGNALING DEVICE A. Signaling device is supplied by others. 2.05 FIRE ALARM WIRING A. See Section 16120. All wiring shall be in conduit. All wiring shall be as suggested by the manufacturer. Fire alarm cable shall be run in a separate raceway system with a minimum of 2 inches separation from electrical circuits. Do not run in conduits or gutters with wiring of other systems. B. Fire alarm power branch circuits: Type THHN solid copper building wire in an approved raceway system. C. Signal Circuits: Type THHN solid copper building wire in an approved raceway system. Signal circuits: #12 AWG D. Avoid splices in wiring and make all splices required in accessible boxes only. E. Provide positive wire markers for all fire alarm wiring. See Section 16195. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install all wiring in approved raceway systems. C. Label each zone on the control panel. Traffic Operations Facility 16722-3 D. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches and duct smoke detectors. E. Locate remote test and reset stations for duct detectors next to the fire alarm control panel: 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE AND QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's field services including services of a qualified certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections to the control and annunciator panels and system testing. B. Test the system in accordance with NFPA 72H and the local fire department requirements. C. Provide six month and one year inspections by the factory authorized representative with a full system operational check. D. Provide to the Owner an option for a maintenance contract on the system. 3.03 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with permanent color coded insulation as follows: 1. Power branch circuit conductors: Black, red and white. 2. Initiating device circuit: Black and red. 3. Remote station: Two orange. END OF SECTION Traffic Operations Facility 16722-4 REPORT OF A PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FOR NEW STREETS FACILITY 725 EAST VINE DRIVE FORT COLLINS, COLORADO LMAI 17 1991 --------------- VAUGHT FRYE ARCHITECTS FORT COLLINS, COLORADO ELI PROJECT NO. 8846-91 BY EMPIRE LABORATORIES, INC. 301 NORTH HOWES STREET FORT COLLINS, COLORADO 80521 TABLE OF CONTENTS Tableof Contents ............................................. i Letterof Transmittal .......................................... ii Report......................................................... 1 AppendixA .................................................... A-1 Test Boring Location Plan .................................... A-2 Keyto Borings ............................................... A-3 Logof Borings ............................................... A-4 AppendixB.................................................... B-1 Consolidation Test Data ...................................... B-2 Hveem Stabilometer Data ..................................... B-4 Summary of Test Results ..................................... B-6 AppendixC.................................................... C-1 Empire Laboratories, Inc. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & MATERIALS TESTING April 22, 1991 Vaught Frye Architects 2900 South College Avenue Fort Collins, Colorado 80525 Attention: Mr. Joe Frye Gentlemen: CORPORATE OFFICE P.O. Box 503 a 301 No. Howes Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 (303) 484-0359 FAX No. (303) 484-0454 We are pleased to submit our Report of a Preliminary Geotechnical Investigation prepared for the new streets facility to be located on Vine Drive between Linden Street and North Lemay Avenue, Fort Collins, Colorado. Based upon our findings in the subsurface, it is our opinion the site is suitable for the proposed construction, providing the design criteria and recommendations set forth in this report are met. The accompanying report presents our findings in the subsurface and our recommendations based upon the preliminary findings. Very truly yours, EMPIRE LABORAT IES INC. eN it R. errod Senior Engineering Geologist Reviewed by: Chester C. Smith, P.E. President cic cc: RBD, Inc. Brunch Oflicv9 P.O. Box 16859 P.O. Box 1135 P.O. Box 17" P.O. Box 5659 Colorado Springs, CO 80935 Longmont, CO 80502 Greeley, CO 80632 Cheyenne, wy 82003 (719) 597-2116 (303) 77"921 (303) 351-0460 (307) 632-9224 Member of Consulting Engineers Counal REPORT OF A PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION SCOPE This report presents the results of a preliminary geotechnical evaluation prepared for the proposed new streets facility consisting of remodelling of the existing buildings and construction of new buildings and parking and detention areas for the City of Fort Collins new streets facility to be located on Vine Drive in north Fort Collins, Colorado. The investigation included test borings and laboratory testing of samples obtained from these borings. The objectives of this study were to (1) determine the geologic characteristics of the site, (2) determine the soil and ground water conditions at the site, (3) determine the suitability of the site for the proposed construction, (4) make recommendations regarding parking areas and (5) make an evaluation of Linden Street and North Lemay Avenue adjacent to the site. SITE EXPLORATION The field exploration, carried out on April 10 and 11 , 1991, consisted of drilling, logging, and sampling seventeen (17) test borings and running six (6) percolation tests. The test borings were located by Empire Laboratories, Inc. from the existing buildings and fence lines using conventional chaining methods. The locations of the test borings are shown on the Test Boring Location Plan included in Appendix A of this report. Boring logs prepared from the field logs are included in Appendix A. These logs show soils encountered, location of sampling, and ground water at the time of the investigation. The borings were advanced with a four -inch diameter, continuous - type, power -flight auger drill. During the drilling operations, an engineering geologist from Empire Laboratories, Inc. was present and made continuous observations of the soils encountered. -1- SITE LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION The site is located south of East Vine Drive between Linden Street and North Lemay Avenue in northeast Fort Collins, Colorado. More particularly, the site is described as a tract of land situate in the North 112 of Section 12, Township 7 North, Range 69 West of the Sixth P.M., City of Fort Collins, Larimer County, Colorado. A portion of the site is occupied by several large brick and metal buildings. The brick buildings were part of the sugar factory which once occupied the site. Large amounts of PVC pipe are stacked west of the building, and debris is scattered throughout much of the eastern portion of the site. The southwest portion of the site is a grassed area used for grazing. The eastern portion of the site consists of a fenced, grassed area not currently used. A concrete retaining wall and chain -link fence are located southeast of the existing buildings. Abandoned railroad spurs traverse the northeast and northwest corners of the property. A gravel entrance road is located along the south property line off of Lemay Avenue. A large paved area is located along the northwest corner of the site, and an asphalt paved drive is located along the north property line. Asphalt paved areas are located north of the existing buildings. The property is bordered on the north by East Vine Drive,on the south by a fenced area and a large overhead power line, on the west by Linden Street and on the east by Lemay Avenue. The area is relatively flat and has minor drainage to the east-southeast. LABORATORY TESTS AND EVALUATION Samples obtained from the test borings were subjected to testing in the laboratory to provide a sound basis for evaluating the physical properties of the soils encountered. Moisture contents, dry unit weights, unconfined compressive strengths, water soluble sulfates, swelling potentials, and the Atterberg limits were determined. A summary of the test results is included in Appendix B. Consolidation -2- TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Title Number 1. DEFINITIONS......................................................1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS ................................ 3 1.1 Addenda.............................................1 2.1 Delivery of Bonds ............................. 3 1.2 Agreement..........................................1 2.2 Copies of Documents,.......................3 1.3 Application for Payment......................1 2.3 Commencement of Contract 1.4 Asbestos.............................................I Times; Notice to Proceed_,,,,.,,,,..,,. 3 1.5 Bid.....................................................1 2.4 Starting the Work ............................ 3 1.6 Bidding Documents .............................1, 2.5-2.7 Before Starting Construction; 1.7 Bidding Requirements, ..... ................... I CONTRACTOR'S Responsibility 1.8 Bonds.................................................I to Report; Preliminary Schediles; 1.9 Change Order......................................I Delivery of Certificates of 1.10 Contract Documents .............................I Insurance, .................................. 3-4 1.11 Contract Price ..................................... 1 2.8 Preconstruction Conference............, 4 1.12 Contract Times....................................1 2.9 Initially Acceptable Schedules, .......... 4 1.13 CONTRACTOR..................................1 1.14 defective.............................................1 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, 1.15 Drawings............................................1 AMENDING, REUSE......................................... 4 1.16 Effective Date of the Agreement ,,,,,,,,,,1 3.1-3.2 Intent ............................................. 4 1.17 ENGINEER ....................... * ,,.....1 3.3 Reference to Standards and Speci- 1.18 ENGINEER's Consultant .....................I fications of Technical Societies; 1.19 Field Order.........................................1 Reporting and Resolving Dis- 1.20 General Requirements .........................2 crepancies................................. 4-5 1.21 Hazardous Waste.................................2 3.4 Intent of Certain Terms or 1.22.a Laws and Regulations; Laws or Adjectives.....................................5 Regulations......................................2 3.5 Amending Contract Docunents......... 5 1.22.b Legal Holidays ................................... 2 3.6 Supplementing Contract 1.23 Liens..................................................2 Documents ................................... 5 1.24 Milestone............................................2 3.7 Reuse of Documents ......................... 5 1.25 Notice of Award.................................2 1.26 Notice to Proceed.................................2 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; 1.27 OWNER.............................................2 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; . 1.28 Partial Utilization ................................ REFERENCE POINTS ......................................... 5 1.29 PCBs ................................................. 2 4.1 Availability of Lands ..................... ?-6 1.30 Petroleum...........................................2 4.2 Subsurface and Physical 1.31 Project................................................7 Conditions .................................... 6 1.32.a Radioactive Material ............................2 4.2.1 Reports.and Drawings...................... 1.32.b Regular Working Hours..,,.,. ........2 4.2.2 Limited Reliance by CONTRAC- 1.33 Resident Project Representative...,,,,.,,., 2 TOR Authorized; Technical 1.34 Samples..............................................2 Data............................................6 1.35 Shop Drawings .................................... 4.2.3 Notice of Differing Subsurface 1.36 Specifications.....................................2 or Physical Conditions,.,.,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6 1.37 Subcontractor ..................................... 2 4.2.4 ENGINEER'S Review ....................... 1.38 Substantial Completion ....... .........2 4.2.5 Possible Contract Documents 1.39 Supplementary Conditions,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 2 Change ......................................... 6 1.40 Supplier ............................................... 4.2.6 Possible Price and Times 1.41 Underground Facilities .....................2-3 Adjustments ............................... 0-7 1.42 Unit Price Work .................................. 3 4.3 Physical Conditions --Underground 1.43 Work..................................................3 Facilities, ............. ....... ............. .....7 1.44 Work, Change Directive ........................3 4.3.1 Shown or Indicated .......................... 7 1.45 Written Amendment ........................... 4.3.2 Not Shown or Indicated .............. 7 4.4 Reference Points. ............................... 7 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) and Hveem stabilometer characteristics were also determined, and curves showing this data are included in Appendix B. SOIL AND GROUND WATER CONDITIONS The soil profile at the site consists of strata of materials arranged in different combinations. In order of increasing depths, they are as follows: (1) Silty Topsoil and Existing Pavement: A six (6) inch layer of silty topsoil was encountered at the surface of Borings 2, 10 and 11. The topsoil has been penetrated by root growth and organic matter and should not be used as a bearing soil or as a fill and/or backfill material. It is recommended that the topsoil be stripped and stockpiled for reuse in planted areas. Two (2) to two and one-half (2-1/2) inches of asphalt underlain by six (6) to eight (8) inches of base course were encountered in the three borings drilled in Linden Street, and five (5) to six (6) inches of asphalt underlain by six (6) to eight (8) inches of gravel base course were encountered in the three borings drilled through Lemay Avenue at the east edge of the site. Additional pavement is encountered throughout the central portion of the project area. It is recommended that all asphalt be removed and wasted from within the limits of the proposed new building construction. In our opinion, the existing asphalt in both Linden Street and Lemay Avenue is suitable for overlay. (2) Fill Material: A one-half (1/2) to four and one-half (4-1/2) foot layer of fill material was encountered below the surface and/or pavement in Borings 1, 3 through 9 and 12 through 17. The fill consists of varying mixtures of sand, gravel, and cobbles, and the fill within the limits of the property contains bricks, cinders, clay, and minor amounts of wood. It is not known whether the fill has been uniformly or properly compacted; therefore, the fill should not be used as a -3- foundation soil. Fill not containing wood, cinders or other unsuitable material is suitable for reuse as structural fill at the site. (3) Sandy Silty Clay: This stratum underlies the topsoil and/or fill in all but Boring 4 and extends to the sand and gravel below. The silty clay is plastic, contains varying amounts of sand, is dry to damp and exhibits generally moderate bearing characteristics. When wetted, the clay stratum exhibits very slight swell potential; and upon loading, consolidation occurs. (4) Sand, Gravel and Cobbles: The gravel stratum was encountered in all borings at depths of three (3) to nine (9) feet below the surface and extends beyond the depths explored. The sand and gravel is well graded, is loose to dense and exhibits generally moderate bearing characteristics in its moist to saturated condition. It is estimated that cobbles within the gravel stratum range in size up to twelve (12) inches in diameter. (5.) Ground Water: At the time of the investigation, free ground water was encountered in all borings at depths of five and one-half (5-1/2) to nine and one-half (9-1/2) feet below the surface. Water levels in this area are subject to change due to seasonal variations and irrigation demands on and/or adjacent to the property. GEOLOGY The proposed site is located within the Colorado Piedmont section of the Great Plains physiographic province. The Colorado Piedmont, formed during Late Tertiary and Early Quaternary time (approximately sixty-five million (65,000,000) years ago), is a broad, erosional trench which separates the Southern Rocky Mountains from the High Plains. Structurally, the property lies along the western flank of the Denver -4- Basin. During the Late Mesozoic and Early Cenozoic Periods (approximately seventy million (70,000,000) years ago), intense tectonic activity occurred, causing the uplifting of the Front Range and the associated downwarping of the Denver Basin to the east. Relatively flat uplands and broad valleys characterize the present-day topography of the Colorado Piedmont in this region. The property is underlain by the Cretaceous Pierre Shale Formation. The Pierre shale is overlain by alluvial sands and gravels and clays of Pleistocene and/or Recent Age. Bedrock was not encountered at the site at depths of fifteen (15) feet below the surface. However, it is anticipated that bedrock underlies the area at depths of twenty (20) to thirty (30) feet below the surface. The regional dip of the bedrock in this area is slight and in an easterly direction. In addition, seismic activity in the area is anticipated to be low; therefore, from a structural standpoint, the property should be relatively stable. Due to the relatively flat nature of the property, geologic hazards due to mass movement, such as landslides, muciflows, rockfalls, etc. ; are not anticipated. With proper site grading around the proposed structures, erosional problems at the site should be minimal. The property lies within the drainage basin of the Cache La Poudre River and does not appear to be located within the 100 year flood plain of this stream. However, this should be verified by a professional engineer and/or hydrogeologist. If it is determined that the site is located within the 100 year flood plain, proposed buildings should be elevated above the 100 year flood plain of the stream. RECOMMENDATIONS AND DISCUSSION It is our understanding that the some of existing buildings are to remain and be remodelled and that new structures are to be constructed at the site. The new buildings will consist of lightly loaded garage and office structures for the City Streets Department. A large paved parking area is planned along the west side of the site, and a detention pond is planned east of the existing buildings. -5- Site Grading, Excavation and Utilities Specifications pertaining to site grading are included below and in Appendix C of this report. It is recommended that the upper six (6) inches of topsoil penetrated by root growth and organic matter below building, filled and paved areas be stripped and stockpiled for reuse in planted areas or wasted from the site. All existing fill should be removed from within the limits of the proposed building areas, and the upper two (2) feet of existing fill should be removed from below proposed paved areas and stockpiled for reuse. All debris, organic matter and unsuitable material should be separated from the fill prior to its reuse. Concrete was encountered at a depth of two and one-half (2-1/2) feet in Boring 4. It is anticipated that additional building excavations will be uncovered during construction. It is not known whether these excavations have been properly backfilled and compacted. Therefore, it is recommended that all existing building excavations be thoroughly clean of all fill, debris, foundation concrete, and building materials. All materials from buildings to be razed should be removed and wasted from the site. The excavated areas should be inspected by the geotechnical engineer prior to backfilling. The backfill should consist of the on -site existing granular fill devoid of debris, on -site natural sands and gravels or imported granular materials approved by the geotechnical engineer. All backfill should be placed in uniform six (6) to eight (8) inch lifts and mechanically compacted at or near optimum moisture to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. The natural subgrade below building areas and the existing fill subgrade below paved areas should be scarified and recompacted at or near optimum moisture to at least ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. (See Appendix C.) Where this subgrade compaction cannot be obtained due to poorly compacted fill below, additional fill should be removed to such a point until proper compaction can be obtained. Finished subgrade below building and paved areas should be placed a minimum of three (3) feet above existing ground water. Additional fill placed at the site should consist of the existing fill devoid of debris, on -site natural soils or M imported granular materials approved by the geotechnical engineer. Fill should be placed in uniform six (6) to eight (8) inch lifts and mechanically compacted between optimum moisture and two percent (2%) wet of optimum moisture to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. In computing earthwork quantities, an estimated shrinkage factor of eighteen (18) to twenty-two (22) percent may be used for the on -site clays compacted to the above -recommended density. A shrinkage factor of fifteen (15) to twenty (20) percent may be used for the on -site granular fill and natural sands and gravels used as compacted fill. All excavations should be dug on safe and stable slopes. The slope of the sides of the excavations should comply with local codes or OSHA regulations. Where this is not practical, sheeting, shoring and/or bracing of the excavation will be required. The sheeting, shoring and bracing of the excavation should be done to prevent sliding or caving of the excavation walls and to protect construction workers and adjacent structures. The side slopes of the excavation or sheeting, shoring or bracing should be maintained under safe conditions until completion of backfilling. In addition, heavy construction equipment should be kept a safe distance from the edge of the excavation. All piping should be adequately bedded for proper load distribution. Backfill placed in utility trenches in open and planted areas should be compacted in uniform lifts at optimum moisture to at least ninety percent (90%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78 the full depth of the trench. Backfill placed in utility trenches under buildings and paved areas should be compacted at or near optimum moisture to at least ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. Addition of moisture to and/or drying of the subsoils may be needed for proper compaction. Stripping, grubbing, subgrade preparation, and fill and backfill placement should be accomplished under continuous observation of the geotechnical engineer. Field density tests should be taken daily in the compacted subgrade, fill, and backfill under the direction of the geotechnical engineer. -7- Fill in the detention pond should consist of the on -site clay material placed in accordance with the above recommendations. For ease of construction and maintenance, the top of any proposed detention basin berms should have a minimum width of ten (10) feet. All cut and fill slopes in detention basins should be placed on slopes of 3:1 or flatter. To minimize erosion, the slope and bottom of the detention basin should be seeded. Pipes or apertures through the detention basin should be surrounded by a minimum of two (2) feet of the clay soil compacted to ninety-eight percent (98%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. It is our understanding that the detention basins are to be designed to allow for seepage out the bottom of the pond. Soil percolation tests run in the clay soil indicate that the clay soil is relatively pervious, having percolation rates of 40 to 80 minutes per inch. If the basins are excavated to the sand and gravel, percolation rates would increase to between 5 and 10 minutes per inch. It should be noted that the gravel stratum is encountered at or near the ground water at the site. Foundations In view of the anticipated loads transmitted by the proposed construction and the soil conditions encountered at the site, it is recommended that the structures be supported by conventional -type spread footings. All footings should be founded on the original, undisturbed soil or on a structural fill extended to the undisturbed soil. All exterior footings should be placed a minimum of thirty (30) inches below :finished grade for frost protection. In no case should footings be founded on the existing fill encountered at the site. The structural fill should be constructed in accordance with the recommendations discussed in the "Site Grading, Excavation and Utilities" section of this report. The structural integrity of the fill as well as the identification and undisturbed nature of the soil should be verified by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement of any foundation concrete. Based on preliminary test results, footings founded at the above levels may be designed for a maximum allowable bearing capacity of two thousand (2000) pounds per square foot (dead load plus maximum live load). The predicted settlement under the above maximum loading, as determined by -8- laboratory consolidation tests, should be less than three -fourths (3/4) inch, generally considered to be within acceptable tolerances. Slabs on Grade Subgrade below slabs on grade should be prepared in accordance with the recommendations discussed in the "Site Grading, Excavation and Utilities" section of this report. Slabs on grade supporting heavy floor loads should be underlain by at least six (6) inches of crushed gravel base course, compacted at optimum moisture to at least ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. (See Appendix C.) Floor areas transmitting light floor loads should be underlain by a minimum of four (4) inches of clean gravel or crushed rock devoid of fines. The gravel base course and/or gravel should help to distribute floor loads and should act as a capillary break. Slabs on grade should be designed for the imposed loading, and it is suggested that they be designed structurally independent of bearing members. To minimize and control shrinkage cracks which may develop in slabs on grade, we suggest that control joints be placed every fifteen (15) to twenty (20) feet and that the total area contained within these joints be no greater than four hundred (400) square feet. In addition, if building construction is done during winter months, it is recommended that the slab on grade not be poured until the building has been enclosed and heat is available within the building area so that slab -on -grade concrete is not placed on frozen ground. This will also aid in proper curing of the slab concrete. Parking and Driveway Areas The required total thickness for the pavement structure is dependent primarily upon the foundation soil or subgrade and upon traffic conditions. Based on the soil conditions encountered at the site and the type and volume of traffic and using a group index of 7 as the criterion for pavement design, the following minimum pavement thicknesses should be provided for the pavement structure: lm Passenger Car Parkin Asphalt Concrete 2}" Crushed Aggregate Base Course 6" Total Pavement Thickness 81" Asphalt Concrete 2" Plant Mix Bituminous Base Course 2111 Total Pavement Thickness 4}" Driveways and Truck Loading and Truck Parking Areas Asphalt Concrete 3" Crushed Aggregate Base Course 8" Total Pavement Thickness 11" Asphalt Concrete 2" Plant Mix Bituminous Base Course 4" Total Pavement Thickness 6" Subgrade below proposed paved areas should be prepared in accordance with the recommendations discussed in the "Site Grading, Excavation and Utilities" section. The surface of the subgrade should be hard, uniform, smooth, and true to grade. To prevent the growth of weeds, it is suggested that all subgrade under parking areas be treated with a soil sterilant. The base course overlying the subgrade should consist of a hard, durable, crushed rock or stone and filler and should have a minimum "R" value of 80. The composite base course material should be free from organic matter and lumps or balls of clay and should meet the City of Fort Collins Class 5 or 6 Aggregate Base Course. The base course should be placed on the subgrade at or near optimum moisture and compacted to at least ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698-78. (See Appendix C.) It is important that the base course be shaped to grade so that proper drainage of the parking area is obtained. All asphalt concrete shall meet City of Fort Collins specifications and shall be placed in accordance with these specifications. -10- A reasonable pavement alternate would be nonreinforced concrete pavement. Using a modulus of subgrade reaction of one hundred twenty-five (125) pounds per square inch per inch, a design life of twenty (20) years, and concrete with a modulus of rupture of six hundred fifty (650) pounds per square inch, the following minimum pavement thicknesses are recommended: Passenger Car Parking Nonreinforced Concrete - 5" Driveways and Truck Loading and Parking Areas Nonreinforced Concrete - 6" Subgrade below the proposed pavement should be prepared in accordance with the recommendations discussed in the "Site Grading, Excavation and Utilities" section of this report. Concrete used in the pavement should meet ASTM specifications, and aggregate should conform to ASTM C-33 specifications. Concrete should be designed with a minimum modulus of rupture of six hundred fifty (650) pounds per square inch in twenty-eight (28) days. It is suggested that a minimum cement content of six (6) sacks be used for this mix. It is further recommended that laboratory mix designs be done to determine the proper proportions of aggregate, cement, and water to meet this requirement. It is essential that the concrete mix have a low water -cement ratio, an adequate cement factor, and sufficient quantities of entrained air. It is recommended that the subgrade be in a moist condition at the time the concrete is placed. The pavement surface should be free of depressions in which water may stand. Catch basins and manhole castings should be separated from the pavement with expansion joint material. The jointing plan should be prepared by the contractor and/or architect and approved by the geotechnical engineer prior to pavement. Longitudinal and transverse joint spacing should be at regular ten (10) to thirteen (13) foot intervals. Longitudinal and transverse contraction joints should have a depth approximately equivalent to one-fourth (1/4) the pavement thickness. The joints should be cut within twenty-four (24) hours of -11- pouring. Expansion joints should be full -depth and should only be used to isolate fixed objects abutting or within the pavement area. Joint openings wider than one-fourth (1/4) inch should be cleaned and sealed before opening to traffic. A uniform, gritty final surface texture should be provided. Curing should be obtained with uniform coverage with white membrane curing compound or by seven-day coverage with white polyethylene or waterproof paper. The completed pavement should be closed to automobile traffic for three (3) days and to truck traffic for seven (7) days. If paving is done during cold weather, cold weather procedures should be used. The concrete should be protected from freezing temperatures until it is at least ten (10) days old. Lemay Avenue and Linden Street At the time of the writing of this report, the traffic information was not available regarding the number of vehicles using Lemay Avenue and Linden Street due to the construction of the new street facility. The traffic data is an integral part of the pavement design. When this data becomes available, an addendum to our report will be prepared. The existing pavement on Lemay Avenue consists of five (5) to six (6) inches of asphalt underlain by six (6) to eight (8) inches of base course. The subgrade material below the pavement consists of fill consisting of sandy silty clay with minor amounts of gravel underlain by sandy silty clay. The combination of the fill and the natural sandy silty clay subgrade has an "R" value of 6. The existing pavement on Linden Street consists of two (2) to two and one-half (2-1/2) inches of asphalt underlain by six (6) to eight (8) inches of base .course. The base course is underlain by fill material which is underlain by natural sandy silty clay. The "R" value of the combination fill and sandy silty clay subgrade below the pavement is 17.9. After the traffic data becomes available, Empire Laboratories, Inc. will evaluate the existing pavement and make recommendations regarding overlay of the pavement if required. -12- Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Tide Number 4.5 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, 6.25 Submittal Proceedures; CON-.. Hazardous Waste or TRACTOR's Review Prior Radioactive Material....................7-8 to Shop Drawing or Sample Submittal 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,_„ 8 6.26 ....................................16 Shop Drawing & Sample Submit- 5.1-5.2 Performance, Payment and Other tals Review by ENGINEER ...... _.- 16-17 Bonds..............................................8 6.27 Responsibility for Variations 5.3 Licensed Sureties and Insurers; From Contract Documents17 Certificates of Insurance....................8 6.28 Related Work Performed Prior 5.4 CONTRACTOR's Liability to ENGINEER's Review and Insurance..........................................9 Approval of Required 5.5 OWNER's Liability Insurance,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9 Submittals 17 5.6 Property Insurance ..........................9-10 6.29 ................................... Continuing the Work.... 17 5.7 Boiler and Machinery or Addi- 6.30 CONTRACTOR'S General tional Property Insurance.................10 Warranty and Guarantee.,,,.,,,,..,,, 17 5.8 Notice of Cancellation Prousion......... 10 6.31-6.33 Indemnification,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„17-I8 5.9 CONTRACTOR'S Responsibility 6.34 Survival of Obligations ................... 38 for Deductible Amountk..................10 5.10 Other Special Insurance..................... . 10 7. OTHER WORK.................................................18 _ 5.11 Waiver of Rights................................11 7.1-7.3 Related Work at Site ....................... 18 5.12-5.13 Receipt and Application of 7.4 Coordination..................................18 Insurance Proceeds ..................... 10-11 5.14 Acceptance of Bonds and Insu- 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES .........................18 ance; Option to Replace...................11 8.1 Communications to CON- 5.15 Partial Utilization --Property TRACTOR ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,18 Insurance........................................11 8.2 Replacement ofENGINEER ............ 18 _ 8.3 Furnish Data andPay Promptly 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSB3II ITIES ...............1I When Due...18 -- 6.1-6.2 Supervision and Superintendencg....... 11 8.4 Lands and Easements; Reports 6.3-6.5 Labor, Materials and Equipmenl,,,11-12 and Tests...............................18-19 6.6 Progress Schedule..............................j2 8.5 Insurance ....................................... 19 6.7 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items; 8.6 Change Orders„ ............................. _ J9 CONTRACTOR'S Expense; 8.7 Inspections, Tests and Substitute Construction Approvals...................................19 _ Methods or Procedures; 8.8 Stop or Suspend Work; _ ENGINEER's Evaluation ,,,,,,,,.,.„12-13 Terminate CONTRACTOR's 6.8-6.11 Concerning Subcontractors, Services......................................19 Suppliers and Others; 8.9 Limitations on OWNER'S Waiver of Rights .........................J344 Responsibilities. ........................... 19 6.12 Patent Fees and Royalties...................14 8.10 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, r 6.13 Permits.............................................14 Hazardous Waste or 6.14 Laws and Regulations ........................14 Radioactive Material.................... J9 6.15 Taxes ,,,,,,,,,,14-15 8.11 Evidence of Financhl 6.16 Use of Premises . .................... 0........... 15 Arrangements ,........................ 0.... 19 6.17 Site Cleanlines$,,,,,...4....................... 15 6.18 Safe Structural Loading,,,,.„..............15 9. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING 6.19 Record Documents,,,,,,,,,,,, 15 CONSTRUCTION ............................................. 19 6.20 Safety and Protection ........15-16 9.1 OWNER's Representative „ 19 6.21 Safety Representative ................0........16 9.2 Visits to Site, .,,,,,,...0 19 6.22 Hazard Communication Program*., .... 16 9.3 ............ 4.4....... Project Representative,,,, 4 19-21 6.23 Emergencies. ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,0...... 4....... 16 9.4 Clarifications and Interpre- " 6.24 Shop Drawings and Samples.. ..... 4 ...... 16 tations............ 9.5 Authorized Variations in Wrk........ 21 r.: EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS (1) Laboratory test results indicate that water soluble sulfates in the soil are negligible, and a Type 1-11 cement may be used in concrete exposed to subsoils. Slabs on grade subjected to de-icing chemicals should be composed of a more durable concrete with low water -cement ratios and higher air contents. (2) Finished grade should be sloped away from the structures on all sides to give positive drainage. Five percent (5%) for the first ten (10) feet away from the structure is the suggested slope. (3) Gutters and downspouts should be designed to carry roof runoff water well beyond the backfill area. (4) Underground sprinkling systems should be designed such that piping is placed a minimum of five (5) feet outside the backfill of the structures. Heads should be designed so that irrigation water is not sprayed onto the foundation walls. These recommendations should be taken into account in the landscape planning. (5) Footing sizes should be proportioned to equalize the unit loads applied to the soil and thus minimize differential settlements. (6) It is recommended that compaction requirements in the project specifications be verified in the field with density tests performed under the direction of the geotechnical engineer. (7) It is recommended that a registered professional engineer design the substructures and that he take into account the findings and recommendations of this report. -13- GENERAL COMMENTS It should be noted that this was a preliminary investigation and that the bearing capacities recommended in this report are based on preliminary tests. Due to variations in soil conditions and swelling pressures encountered at the site, it is recommended that additional test borings be made prior to construction. Samples obtained from the borings should be tested in the laboratory to provide a basis for evaluating subsurface conditions. OUM L F 11 1, L I L I APPENDIX A NO.15 �0.17 V twvaA TEST BORING LOCATION PLAN Ht 9. 7\ � eul 1 � z S r, � o � j' Tl IMI�It-- i # 7\ tri D (Jo.9 4L D A- 2r-- - EMPIRE LABORATORIES, &-ffl Lt5t AY AA--}JE KEY T'O BORING LOGS TOPSOIL �. GRAVEL ® FILL .t��: SAND& GRAVEL SILT i� „i SILTY SAND & GRAVEL 7 CLAYEY SILT c p e COBBLES SANDY SILT '�?w SAND, GRAVEL & COBBLES ® CLAY ® WEATHERED BEDROCK / SILTY CLAY SILTSTONE BEDROCK SANDY CLAY ® CLAYSTONE BEDROCK Q SAND pq SANDSTONE BEDROCK SILTY SAND ® LIMESTONE CLAYEY SAND "' •" GRANITE SANDY SILTY CLAY ❑ ' SHELBY TUBE SAMPLE STANDARD PENETRATION DRIVE SAMPLER p WATER TABLE 24 hr5 AFTER DRILLING C HOLE CAVED T 5/12 Indicates that 5 blows of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches was required to penetrate 12 inches. A- 3 LOG OF BORINGS 4960 4955 4950 4945 4940 4935 4930 C 1 Cam-®:W V, ma w7,tit:- I'rye CRETE A-4 EMPIRE LABORATORIES, INC 4 950 4945 4940 4935 4930 LOG OF BORINGS rang L :opg05 �m=a.�liFa=� 4�. A-5 EMPIRE LABORATORIES, INC LOG OF BORINGS aENAgQj r4D.9 o. ID NO.I 4950 4945 4940 4935 4930 4925 txA -- rmrrn -� I A-6 EMPIRE LASORATORIES, INC E�Eyari�.l 4960 4955 4950 4945 4940 4935 4930 LOG OF BORINGS ova if•�9 �1 Boa -mama= -vsvc MIMI � o A-7 EMPIRE LASORATORIES, INC 4960 4955 4950 4945 [Ice' syyy EMPIRE LASORATORIES, INC. Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Title Number 9.6 Rejecting Defective Work..................21 9.7-9.9 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ................................... 21 9.10 Determinatims for Unit Priceg....., 21-22 9.11-9.12 Decisions on Disputes; ENGI- NEER as Initial Interpretel..............22 9.13 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilitie$..... 2-23 CHANGES IN THE WORK ....................................... 23 10.1 OWNER's Ordered Chan ge................73 10.2 Claim for Adjustment ........................23 10.3 Work Not Required by Contract Documents ..................................... 23 10.4 Change Orders ................................. 23 10.5 Notification of Surety... ......................23 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE .............................23 11.1-11.3 Contract Price; Claim for Adjustment; Value of the Work .................................... 23-24 11.4 Cost of the Work...........................24-25 11.5 Exclusions to Cost of the Work .........25 11.6 CONTRACTOR's Fee........................25 11.7 Cost Records,.._,...„.,.,.„.„.,,,,.,...,,25-26 11.8 Cash Allowances..............................26 11.9 Unit Price Work................................26 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ...........................26 12.1 Claim for Adjustment. ....................... 26 12.2 Time of the Essence ..........................26 12.3 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control ...................................... 26-27 12.4 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control...............27 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................. 27 13.1 Notice of Defects..............................27 13.2 Access to the Work ...........................27 13.3 Tests and Inspections; CONTRACTOR's Cooperation,,,,,,,,, 27 13.4 OWNER's Responsibilities; Independent Testing Laboratory.,.,.,. 27 13.5 CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities ............................... 27 13.6-13.7 Covering Work Prior to Inspec- tion, Testing or Approval................27 13.8-13.9 Uncovering Work at ENGI- NEER's Request .....................27-28 13.10 OWNER May Stop the Work..........28 13.11 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ..........................28 13.12 Correction Period„.........................78 13.13 Acceptance ofDefective Work ......... 28 13.14 OWNER May Correct Defective Work ..................................... 28-29 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ................................................. 29 14.1 Schedule of Values ........................29 14.2 Application for Progress Payment..................................... 29 14.3 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title .......................................... 29 14.4-14.7 Review of Applications for Progress Payments.................29-30 14.8-14.9 Substantial Completion .................. 30 14.10 Partial Utilization ....................... 30-31 14.11 Final Inspectioy ............................31 14.12 Final Application for Payment ........ 31 14.13-14.14 Final Payment and Acceptanc@....... 31 14.15 Waiver of Claims ......................31-32 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............................................... 32 15.1 OWNER May Suspend Work....,,.,,_ 32 15.2-15.4 OWNER May Terminate,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 32 15.5 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate ................. 32-33 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION..................................33 17. MISCELLANEOUS...........................................33 17.1 Giving Notice ................................ 33 17.2 Computation of Times, .... .............. 33 17.3 Notice of Claim ............................... 33 17A Cumulative Remedies33 17.5 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included ............................33 17.6 Applicable State Laws ............... 33-34 Intentionally left blank......................................35 EXHIBIT GC -A: (Optional) Dispute Resolution Agreement ..................... GC -Al 16.1-16.6 Arbitration,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,GC-Al 16.7 Mediation,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,GC-Al iv EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) APPENDIX B .55 .53 iJ .51 rai .49 .47 .45 .42' .41 SWELL - CONSOLIDnTlON TEST 4 C cl BOR'lNG NCI. DEFTH: IIEMSITY:10:3.9 P,--F tl(;JSTURE: cl Fi C, Cl- TT cl 7 0.1 0. 25 0.5 1 APPLIED PFIE'-=,--IUF.E - TSF 4.0 2 0 ro 0 -2 C, ij 47 4 .0 RTER RnDEo Cl. 5 1 . 0 5 1 cl APPLIED PRESSURE - T---F EMPIRE LFIBOF-,'F9TCP.IES IN, B-2 CONSOLIDATION TEST PRO. S:846 BOR.ING t-lf-1. : 7 11 EPTH : 3 . 0 DRY DENSITY:111G.0 P,--F rlr)ISTUF:E: Jaw TIE] 0.5 1.e 5 10 APPLIED PPESSURE - TSF 42 -j I Ld 2.0 -8.0 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.0 5 APPLIED PRESSURE - TSF EMPIRE LRBORATORIES INC. B-3 RESISTH14CE R-VHLUE AND EXPlIN51ON PRESSURE OF COMPACTED SOIL A_.TM - D 2644 CLIENT: VAUGHT-FP.YE PROJECT: NEW STREETS FACILITY LOCATION OF SAMPLE: BORING 14 @ 2.0'-5.0' SAMPLE DATA TEST SPECIMEN 1 COMPACTION PRESSURE - PSI Ci 50 DENSITY - PCF 106.7 111.7 MOISTURE - . 19.9 17.3 E„PANSION PRESSURE - PSI 0.00 C1.00 HORIZONTAL PRESSURE @ 160 psi 149 145 SAMPLE HEIGHT - in. 2.45 2.52 E„UDATION PRESSURE - PSI 175 226 UNCORRECTED R-VALUE 4.1 5.8 CORRECTED R-VALUE 4.1 5.8 R-VALUE AT 300 PSI EXUDATION PRESSURE = 5.0, 1 l_1 C_1 el Li F; l_1 J CL 4 Gl ell 00 300 4100 500 600 EXUDATION PRESSURE - psi — EMPIRE LABOF:ATOP.IES ItJC. B-4 . 0 115.1 1`.7 0.0o 141 2.48 402 7 . C. 7._ Cl0 80 0 N RESISTHNCE R-YHLUE HND EXPANSION PRESSURE OF COMPACTED SOIL RSTM — D 2844 CLIENT: HHiI,HT - FRYE PROJECT: NEW STREETS FACILITY LOCATION OF SAMPLE: BORING 17 @ O.8'-4.0' SAMPLE DATA TEST SPECIMEN 1 COMPACTION PRESSURE - PSI 60 100 340 DENSITY - PCF 106.2 112.5 116.2 MOISTURE - 19.2 16.4 13.9 EXPANSION PRESSURE - PSI 0.00 0.00 0.00 HORIZONTAL PRESSURE @ 160 psi 148 127 97 SAMPLE HEIGHT - in. 2.50 2.50 2.41 EXUDATION PRESSURE - PSI 127 239 466 UNCORRECTED R-VALUE 4.7 13.8 31.5 CORRECTED P.-VALUE 4.7 13.8 29.7 R-VALUE AT 300 PSI EXUDATION PRESSURE = 17.9 i ocl 0 W 60 J Q t LL 40 210 OG1 Sit 1_t 400 5O0 600 700 EXUDATION PRESSURE — psi EHFIFE L.RBORATORIE'= IP1f B-5 El. l t l_1 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS Boring Depth Wt.)No. Moisture Dry Density Compressive Strength Swell Pressure Soluble Sulfates pH Liquid Limit Plasticity Index G Classification AASH70 Resistivity Penetration t.I (yl (PCF) (PSF) (PSF) (%) (9t,( (ql,l Inroup dex USCS (OHM -CM) Blows/In. 1 0.0-1.0 13.2 13/12 1.0-2.0 13.2 3/12 3.0-4.0 15.1 115.5 3940 4.0-5.0 13.3 11/12 8.0-9.0 26.8 6/12 14.0-15.0 3.3 34/12 2 0.0-1.0 9.2 12/12 1.0-2.0 9.2 23/12 3.0-4.0 16.2 13/12 8.0-9.0 3.5 50/12 14.0-15.0 17.9 38/12 Cumpusite Sample 0.5-4.5 28.3 10.9 6.4 A-6(6); CL 3 0.0-1:0 19.3 14/12 1.0-2.0 19.3 14/12 2.5-3.5 20.8 103.9 3770 110 3.5-4.5 22.4 7/12 3.0-9.0 29.2 5/12 14.0-14.8 9.3 50/8 EMPIRE LABORATORIES. INC. SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS Boring Depth Moisture Dry Density Compressive Stren th Swell Pressure Soluble Sullates pH Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Group Indax Classification AASHTO Resistivity (OHM -CM) Penetration Blows/In. No. (Ft.) I%1 (PCFI IPSFI IPSFI 1%1 1%1 I%1 USCS 24/12 4 0.0-1.0 5.7 11/12 1.0-2.0 5.7 3/12 3.0-4.0 5.6 34/12 7.0-3.0 12.5 18/12 14.0-15.0 12.1 6/12 5 0.0-1.0 6/12 1.0-2.0 /1 2.0-3.0 19.6 23/12 3.0-4.0 2.5 3 /12 7.0-3.0 10.2 50 /6 14.0-14.5 9.5 1 /12 6 0.0-1.0 15.9 14/12 1.0-2.0 15.9 3.0-4.0 9.1 .0016 30/12 4.0-5.0 1.7 50/12 3.0-9.0 9.2 50/5 14.0-14.5 10.4 c •�oioc i nononrn o�ac mr W 1 w SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS Boring Depth Moisture Dry Density Compressive Strength Swell Pressure Soluble Sulfates PH Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Croup Classification AASHTO Resistivity Penetration No. IFt.I 1.I (PCF) 1PSF1 IPSFI 1X1 1%1 M Index LISCS IOHMLMI Blows/in. 7 0.0-1.0 24.2 29/12 1.0-2.0 24.2 17/12 3.0-4.0 15.0 119.6 4410 210 4.0-5.0 3.2 36/12 8.0-8.8 9.5 50/8 14.0-15.0, 15.9 38/12 8 0.0-1.0 15.9 12/12 1.0-2.0 15.9 12/12 3.0-4.0 15.9 4.0-5.0 20.4 6/12 8.0-9.0 10 A 35/12 14.0-15.0 9.6 44/12 If Cumpus to I ' Sample 3.0-5.0 32.9 12.7 6.7 A-6(7); CL 9 0.0-1.0 13.6 13/12 1.0-2.0 13.6 10/12 3.0-4.0 20.0 106.5 4400 4.0-5.0 26.7 16/12 8.0-9.0 10.2 39/12 14.0-15.0 10.5 41/12 EMYIHE LAHUHATDHIES. INC. SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS Boring Depth Moisture Dry Density Compressive Strength Swell Pressure Soluble Sulfates pH Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Grou p Index Classification AASHTO Resistivity (OHM CM) Penetration Blows/1 No. (Ft.) (%) (PCF) IPSFI IPSF) N I%1 I%) uses n. 13 1.0-2.5 19.6 14/12 4.0-5.0 23.6 3/12 9.0-10.0 12.2 39/12 14 1.0-2.5 20.1 12/12 4.0-5.0 21.2 4/12 9.0-10.0 18.6 30/12 Compos to Sample 0.5-4.0 39.8 20.4 7.6 A-6(8); CL 15 0.9-2.4 20.7 10/12 4.0-5.0 18.5 5/12 9.0-10.0 16.6 13/12 16 0.8-2.3 14.6 9/12 4.0-5.0 21.0 4/12 9.0-10.0 21.4 5/12 17 0.3-2.3 6/12 4.0-5.0 6/12 9.0-10.0 11112 Composi te Sample 0.5-4.0 33.1 14.1 3.3 A-6(3); SC SUMMARY OF PERCOLATION TEST RESULTS .. Percolation Rate. 11ole Depth to Depth to (Time required for water to No. Bedrock (ft) Ground Water (ft) fall one inch in Minute) 8 -- 7'1" 54 - 10 -- 51611 80 — 11 -- 515" 40 8 deep -- 711" 10 — 10 deep -- 5'6" 8 11 deep -- 5'5" 5 SUMMARY OF EXISTING PAVEMENT Boring No. Asphalt (in.) Base Course (in.) _ 12 6 a 13 5 6 -- 14 5 6 15 2 8 16 2', 7 17 2 6 B-11 INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Fort Collins modifications to the General Conditions of the Construction Contract are not shown in this index Article or Paragraph Number Acceptance of -- Bonds and Insurance........................................5.14 defective Work............................10.4.1, 13.5, 13.13 final payment.,,,,,,,, .......................9.12, 14.15 insurance.......................,.,.,.,.,.,.,........5..14 Other Work,.by..CONTA,.,.,,,,,,,,,7.3 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Item* ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,6.7.1 Work by OWNER..............................2.5, 6.30, 6.34 Access to the -- Lands, OWNER and CONTRACTOR responsibilities,,., ...... ..............4.1 site, related Work ......................... ...................... 7.2 Work...........................................13.2, 13.14, 14.9 Acts or Omissions--, Acts and Omissions-- CONTRACTOR...................................6.9.1, 9.13.3 ENGINEER..........................................6.20, 9.13.3 OWNER....................................................6.20, 8.9 Addenda --definition of (also see definition of Specifications) ....... (1.6, 1.10, 6.19), 1.1 Additional Property Insurances ................................. 5.7 Adjustments -- Contract Price or Contract Times ...........................1.5, 3.5, 4.1, 4.3.2, 4.5.2, .............................4.5.3, 9.4, 9.5, 10.2-10.4, ......................................... 11, 12, 14.8, 15.1 progress schedule .............................................. 6.6 Agreement -- definitionof......................................................1.2 "All -Risk" Insurance, policy form...........................5.6.2 Allowances, Cash....................................................11.8 Amending Contract Document4. 3.5 Amendment, Written -- in general................1.10, 1.45, 3.5, 5.10, 5.12, 6.6.2 ..........................6.8.2, 6.19, 10.1, 10.4, 11.2 ....................................12.1, 13.12.2, 14.7.2 Appeal, OWNER or CONTRACTOR intentto9.t0, 9.11, 10.4, 16.2, 16.5 Application for Payment -- definition of......................................................13 ENGINEER's Responsibility 9.9 final payment ................. 9.13.4, 9.13.5, 14.12-14.15 in general ..........................2.8, 2.9, 5.6.4, 9.10, 15.5 progress payment.....................................14.1-14.7 review of..................................................14.4-14.7 Arbitration....................................................16.1-16.6 Asbestos -- claims pursuant theretq..........................4.5.2, 4.5.3 CONTRACTOR authorized to stop Work.,,,,,,,,, 4.5.2 definition of .......................................................1.4 Article or Paragraph Number OWNER responsibility for.............................4.5.1, 8.10 possible price and times change ........................4.5.2 Authorized Variations in Work,,,,,,,,, 3.6, 6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Availability of Lands ......................................... 4.1, 8.4 Award, Notice of --defined, ...................................... 1.25 Before Starting Construction..............................2.5-2.8 Bid --definition of,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 1.5 (1.1, 1,10, 2.3, 3.3, ........................ 4.2.6.4, 6.13, 11.4.3, 11.9.1) Bidding Documents --definition of...................................................1.6 (6.8.2) Bidding Requirements --definition Of..........................................1.7 (1.1, 4.2.6.2) Bonds -- acceptance of ......................... .....................5.14 additional bonds..................................10.5, 11.4.5.9 Cost of the Work............................................11.5.4 definitionof ..................... .........................1.8 delivery of...................................................2.1, 5.1 final Application for Payment,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 14.12-14.14 general......................................1.10, 5.1-5.3, 5.13, ........................................9.13, 10.5, 14.7.6 Performance, Payment and Other...................5.1-5.2 Bonds and Insurance --in general.................................5 Builder's risk "all-risk" policy form ........................5.6.2 Cancellation Provisions, Insurance,,,,,,,, 5.4.11, 5.8, 5.15 Cash Allowances ........................... ................11.8 Certificate of Substantial Completion,,,,,,, 1.38, 6.30.2.3, ......................14.8, 14.10 Certificates of Inspection ...................q.13.4, 13.5, 14.12 Certificates of Insurance.............2.7, 5.3, 5.4,11, 5.4.13, .......................5.6.5, 5.8, 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12 Change in Contract Price -- Cash Allowances..............................................11.8 claim for price adjustment..,,,,,,,,,, 4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15, 6.8.2, 9.4 ...................9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 10.5, 11.2, 13.9, ....................... J 3.13, 13.14, 14.7, 15.1, 15.5 CONTRACTOR's fee.........................................11.6 Cost of the Work general...............................................11.4-11.7 Exclusions to..............................................11.5 Cost Records.....................................................11.7 in general.............).19, 1.44, 9.11, 10.4.2, 10.4.3, 11 Lump Sum Pricing..........................................11.3.2 Notification of Surety .........................................10.5 Scope of....................................................10.3-10.4 Testing and Inspection, Uncovering the Work..................................13.9 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION W/ CrrY OF FORT COLLINS MODIRCATIONS (REV 9/99) APPENDIX C APPENDIX C. Suggested Minimum Specifications for Placement of Compacted Earth Fill and/or Backfills GENERAL The geotechnical engineer shall be the owner's, architect's, engineer's or contractor's representative to observe placement of compacted fill and/or backfill on the project. The geotechnical engineer or his representative shall approve all earth materials prior to their use, the method of placement and the degree of compaction. MATERIALS Soils used for all compacted fill and backfill shall be approved by the geotechnical engineer or his representative prior to their use. Fill material shall be free from organic matter, frozen material and other unsuitable substance and shall not contain rocks or lumps having a diameter greater than six (6) inches. SUBGRADE PREPARATION All topsoil, vegetation, trees, brush, timber, debris, rubbish and all other unsuitable material shall be removed to a depth satisfactory to the geotechnical engineer or his representative. The material shall be disposed of by suitable means prior to beginning preparation of the subgrade. The subgrade shall be scarified a minimum depth of six (6) inches, moisture conditioned as necessary and compacted in a suitable manner prior to placement of fill material. Fill shall not be placed until approval by the geotechnical engineer or his representative; and in no case, shall fill material be placed on frozen or unstable ground. Subgrade which is not stable may require the use of imported granular material, geotextiles or other methods for stabilization as approved by the geotechnical engineer. FILL PLACEMENT Fill material shall not be placed during unfavorable weather conditions. Material proposed for use as fill shall. be approved by the geotechnical engineer or his representative prior to use. Proposed import material shall be approved by the geotechnical engineer or his representative prior to hauling to the project site. Fill material shall be C-2 uniformly mixed such as to preclude the formation of lenses of material -- differing from the surrounding material. All clods shall be broken into small pieces. The contractor shall construct the fill in approximately — horizontal lifts extending the entire length of the fill. The thickness of the layers before compaction shall not be greater than eight (8) inches. Fill being placed on slopes or hillsides shall be benched into the existing slope. A minimum two (2) foot horizontal bench shall be cut into the existing excavated slope for each four (4) feet vertical of fill, or each lift " should be benched slightly into the existing grade. MOISTURE CONTROL Prior to and during compaction operations, the fill material being placed shall be maintained within the range of optimum moisture specified. A general recommendation is to maintain the fill material within two percent (2%) plus or minus of optimum moisture so that proper compaction — to the specified density may be obtained with a minimal effort. In building pad and paved areas, material exhibiting swelling potential shall — be maintained between optimum moisture and two percent (2%) wet of optimum moisture content. The moisture content of the fill material shall be maintained uniform throughout the fill. The contractor may be — required to add necessary moisture to the fill material and to uniformly ,_ mix the water with the fill material if, in the. opinion of the geotechnical engineer, it is not possible to obtain uniform moisture content by adding water on the fill surface. If, in the opinion of the geotechnical engineer, the material proposed for use in the compactdd fill is too wet to permit — adequate compaction, it shall be dried in an acceptable manner prior to _ placement and compaction. Uniform mixing may require discing, blading or other 'methods approved by the geotechnical engineer or his representative. Adjustments of determinations of progresses. COMPACTION moisture content shall be made on the basis of moisture content by field tests as construction The contractor shall furnish and operate the necessary types and kinds of equipment to perform the operations required to obtain the — specified compaction. This equipment may include approved tamping rollers, rubber tired rollers, smooth wheeled rollers and vibratory rollers. If a sheepsfoot roller is used, it shall be provided with cleaner — bars so attached as to prevent the accumulation of material between the tamper feet. Fill areas which are not accessible to full-sized construction -- equipment shall be placed in maximum four (4) inch lifts and compacted with power tampers to the specified density. C-3 Compaction should meet the minimum percentages of maximum density as set forth in the project specifications or the recommendations of the report. The contract specifications supercede the recommendations given in this report. MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONSHIP DETERMINATION Samples of representative fill materials to be placed shall be furnished by the contractor to the geotechnical engineer for determination of maximum density and optimum moisture or relative density. Sufficient laboratory moisture density or relative density curves will be made to determine the optimum moisture content and maximum density for the various soils placed as fill. Tests for this determination will be made using the appropriate method conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor), ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor) or ASTM D 4253, D 4254 (Relative Density). The materials used for fill shall be classified in accordance with ASTM D 2487 in order to permit correlation between the moisture density relationship data and the material being placed and compacted. Copies of the results of these tests will be furnished to the client and others as directed by the client. These test results shall be the basis of control for all compaction effort. FIELD DENSITY AND MOISTURE TESTS The in -place density and moisture content of compacted fill will be determined by the geotechnical engineer or his representative in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2922, D 3017 (nuclear methods). Material not meeting the required compaction and/or moisture specifications shall be recompacted and/or, moisture conditioned until the required percent compaction and/or moisture content is obtained. Sufficient compaction tests shall be made and submitted to support the geotechnical engineer's or his representative's recommendations. The results of density tests will also be furnished to the client and others as directed. C-4 No Text c- CONT TRF ATFD �,u VAUGHT • FRYE Air ARCHITECTS 401 West ARCHITECTURE SwW200 F rtColbs,CO fan970.221.1662 pho 970/224.1191 www.vauvhefi 13 SEALANT TREATED Ix3 CONT. PRE -FINISHED METAL COPING T.O. UPPER PARAPET 124' -1) CONT. GALV. METAL CLEAT 6" SMOOTH -FACE CMU @ TOP COURSE TERMINATE INSULATION 9 BOTTOM OF TOP COURSE ROOF MEMBRANE RUN UP OVER TOP OF PLYWOOD & FACE OF 2x6 NAILER PARAPET DETAIL 4 SCALE: 11/2" = 1'-0" TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM # 2 Ref. Sheet # Mom EXHIBIT GC -A to General Conditions of the Construction Contract Between OWNER and CONTRACTOR DISPUTE RESOLUTION AGREEMENT OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereby agree that Article 16 of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR is amended to include the following agreement of the parties: 16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof (except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph 14.15) will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining, subject to the limitations of the Article 16. This agreement so to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into in accordance herewith as provided in this Article 16 will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. 16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter that is required to be referred to ENGINEER initially for decision in accordance with paragraph 9.11 will be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision or (b) the thirty-first day after the parties have presented their evidence to ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by ENGINEER before that date. No demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter will be made later than thirty days after the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance with paragraph 9.11; and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will result in ENGINEER's decision being final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand for arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER rendered in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than ten days after the party malting such demand has delivered written notice of intention to appeal as provided in paragraph 9.10. 16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the thirty -day or ten-day period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 16.4. Except as provided in paragraph 16.5 below, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner any other person or entity (including ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and the officers, directors, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this contract unless: 16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration, and 16A.2. such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings, and 16.4.3. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and of OWNER and CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. 16.5. Notwithstanding paragraph 16.4, if a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the Work of a Subcontractor, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such Subcontractor as a party to the arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts required by paragraph 6.11 a specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to being joined in an arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the Work of such Subcontractor. Nothing in this paragraph 16.5 nor in the provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall curate any claim, right or cause of action in favor of Subcontractor and against OWNER, ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. 16.6. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal. 16.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they shall fast submit any and all unsettled claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between them arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof ("disputes"), to mediation by the American Arbitration Association under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association prior to either of them initiating against the other a demand for arbitration pursuant to paragraphs 16.1 through 16.6, unless delay in initiating arbitration would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties. The respective thirty and ten day time limits within which to file a demand for arbitration as provided in paragraphs 16.2 and 16.3 above shall be suspended with respect to a dispute submitted to mediation within those same applicable time limits and shall remain suspended until ten days after the termination of the mediation. The mediator Of any dispute submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise agreed. GC -Al DIVISION 15 -MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods --------------- ............................................... 1-6 15055 Basic Piping Materials and Methods ...................... -................. ,..................................... 1-3 15100 Valves 1-2 15120 Piping Accessories------------------------------------------------•----••--•- ........ ..................... 1-2 — 15140 Pipe Supports and Anchors................................................................................ ....... 1-2 15170 Motors and Starters _ 1-2 15190 Mechanical Identification -------------------------- .. ........-------•------------------------------------------------- 1-2 — 15250 Mechanical insulation ---------------- •----------------------------- ----------------------- •----•------------•---•-------1-4 15300 Fire Protection Systems ------------------------------------------------ .-------------------------------------------------- 1-9 15411 Water Distribution Piping............................•----....------------------------------------.......................1-2 — 15412 Refrigerant Piping.... .................................................. ........... .............. .................... 1-2 15420 Drainage And Vent Systems ......................................................... I ---- ------------- ...1-3 15440 Plumbing Fixtures............................................................................................................ 1-5 15450 Plumbing Equipment, ...................................................... .................................. -1-3 15486 Compressed Air System 1-2 15486 Natural Gas Piping Systems .................. .......................................................................... 1-2 15575 Flue Systems.--.............................................................................................. I ...................... 1 — 15670 Packaged Roof Top Units ............................... ................................................................ 1-3 15785 Computer Room Units 1-3 _.. 15830 Heating Terminal Units, .............................................................................................. ....-1-2 _. 15870 Power Ventilators 1-2 15891 Metal Ductwork 1-3 15910 Ductwork Accessories 1-2 15935 Air Inlets and Outlets 1-2 15990 Test-Adjust-Balance........................................................................................................ 1-3 - DIVISION 16 -ELECTRICAL 16010 General Electrical Requirements ........................................... ........................................ 1-3 16020 Electrical Shop Drawings ................................................................................................... 16080 Secondary Electrical Service, ............................................................................................ 1 16111 Conduit ...- -- -•--- - 1-4 16112 Surface Raceways ---- _ .................................... •.....-•----------------........................-----1 _.. 16120 Wire and Cable - 600 Volt and Less ---------------------•-----•---------•--------------------------------------• 1-3 — 16130 Outlet Boxes - ... 1-3 16141 Wiring Devices--- -------------------------- -------------- --------- -------------------------------------------------------- 1-3 16160 Cabinets and Enclosures - - ------------------------------1-2 16180 Equipment Wring Systems ............................................................................. I ................ 1-2 ^ 16190 Supporting Devices ......................................................................................................... 1-2 -- 16195 Electrical Identification... 1-2 16430 Metering 1 -, 16440 ..................................................................... ........................................................ Disconnect Switches........... - 1 3 16450 Secondary Grounding ------- __.................................................................. I ........... 1-2 Y 16470 Ponelboards•................................................................................................................... 1-3 .. 16475 Switchboards 1-4 16485 Contactors. 1-2 u 16510 Lighting Fixtures......................................................................................... ............. 1-4 VF 2001-59 00010-4 .� 12. Coordination of separate contracts. 13. Other business as required. B. Agenda and Minutes: Contractor shall establish agenda, subject to Owner and Architect review, and keep and distribute minutes of progress meetings and lists of those present and others as directed. 1. Contractor: Advise Architect at least 24 hours in advance of meeting regarding items added to agenda. C. Persons Representing Contractor at Meetings: Have authority to commit Contractor to solutions agreed upon in meetings. To maximum extent possible, assign same person or persons to represent Contractor at meetings throughout progress of work. D. Coordination Meetings: Progress meetings shall in no way be considered substitute for Contractor/subcontractor coordination meetings. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 01312-2 E. Pipe shall not be installed under the following conditions: 1. When the trench water is entering the pipe being installed. 2. When weather conditions are unsuitable. - a. Temperature is less than -5 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Snowing heavily. c. Raining heavily. d. High winds. 3. When the trench bottom is unstable. F. Pipe and appurtenances shall be protected against dropping and damage. 1. Pipe and appurtenances shall not be used if they are damaged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANHOLES A. Reference Section 02605. 2.2 PLASTIC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE A. Reference Section 02622. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Pipe, fittings, and manholes, shall be free of dirt or other objects prior to installation. B. Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for cracks, dents, abrasions or other flaws prior to installation. 1. Defective pipe and fittings shall be marked and removed from the site. C. Manholes shall be inspected for cracks or other flaws prior to installation. 1. Damaged manholes shall be marked and removed form the site. 02722-2 8 WORK AREA ELEV. SCALE: VAUGHT • FRYE AVA7 A RC R I T E C T S TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY ADDENDUM # 2 C AD-1 AR Ref. Sheet# A6.1 m Unit Price Work..........................................11.9 Article or Paragraph Number Value of Work..................................................J 1.3 Change in Contract Times -- Claim for times adjustment ........ 4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15, ........... 6.8.2, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 10.5,12.1, ............... 13.9, 13.13, 13.14, 14.7, 15.1, 15.5 Contractual time limits.....................................12.2 Delays beyond CONTRACTOR's control.......................................................12.3 Delays beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR'S control.............................12.4 Notification of surety.........................................10.5 Scope of change.....................................:..10.3-10.4 Change Orders -- Acceptance of Defective Work ..........................13.13 Amending Contract Documents ..........................1.5 Cash Allowances..............................................11 8 Change of Contract Price....................................11 Change of Contract Times...................................12 Changes in the Work..........................................10 CONTRACTOR's fee........................................1 1.6 Cost of the Work.......................................11.4-11.7 Cost Records....................................................11.7 definition of......................................................1.9 emergencies.....................................................0.23 ENGINEER's responsibility....,., 9.8, 10.4, 11.2, 12.1 execution of.....................................................10.4 Indemnifictiorl.........................6.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 Insurance, Bonds and, ...................... 5.10,5.13, 10.5 OWNER may terminate . ............................ 15.2-15.4 OWNER's Responsibility .............................$.6, 10.4 Physical Conditions -- Subsurface and..............................................4.2 Underground Facilities--.............................4.3.2 Record Documents...........................................6.19 Scope of Change ................... .................... 10.3-10.4 Substitutes.............................................6.7.3, 6.8.2 Unit Price Work ............................................... J 1.9 value of Work, covered by ...............................„ 11.3 Changes in the Work.................................................JO Notification of surety ........................................ 10.5 OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's responsibilities, ............................................ 10.4 Right to an adjustment......................................10.2 Scope of change........................................10.3-10.4 Claims -- against CONTRACTOR....................................6.16 against ENGINEER ......................................... 6.32 against OWNER...............................................0.32 Change of Contract Price ........................... 9.4, 11.2 Change of Contract Times ...........................?.4, 12.1 CONTRACTOR's.............4, 7.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, ..........................11.2, 11.9, 12.1, 13.9, 14.8, ............................................15.1, 15.5, 17.3 CONTRACTOR's Fee.......................................11.6 Article or Paragraph Number CONTRACTOR's liability ........... 5.4, 6.12, 6.16, 6.31 Cost of the Work.......................................11.4, 11.5 Decisions on Dispute4...............................9.11, 9.12 Dispute Resolution............................................16.1 Dispute Resolution Agreement,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 16.1-16.6 ENGINEER as initial interpretor .......................9.11 Lump Sum Pricing.........................................11.3.2 Noticeof..........................................................17.3 OWNER's....................9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 11.2, 11.9 ........................ 12.1, 13.9, 13.13, 13.14, 17.3 OWNER's liability .............................................. 5.5 OWNER may refuse to make payment ................14.7 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included......................................................17.5 request for formal decision ot)............................9..11 Substitute Items,,,,,,,,,,,, ......... ........0.7.1.2 Time Extension.................................................12.1 Time requirements .................................. 9.11, 12.1 Unit Price Work ............................................. i l.9.3 Valueof...........................................................1.1.3 Waiver of --on Final Payment.................J4.14, 14.15 Work Change Directive....................................10.2 written notice required ......................9.11, 11.2, 12.1 Clarifications and Interpretationg ............ 3.6.3, 9.4, 9.11 CleanSite............................................................0,17 Codes of Technical Society, Organization or Association.................................................3.3.3 Commencement of Contract Timeg ...........................7.3 Communications -- general ..............................................0.2, 6.9.2, 8.1 Hazard Communication Programg ......................6.22 Completion -- Final Application for Payment ..........................14.12 Final Inspection .............................................. J 4.11 Final Payment and Acceptance ...............14.13-14.14 Partial Utilization ............................................ J4.10 Substantial Completion. .....................1.38, 14.8-14.9 Waiver of Claims ............................................ j4.15 Computation of Timeg...............................17.2.1-17.2.2 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others, ................................................. 6.8-6.11 Conferences -- initially acceptable scheduleq .............................. 2.9 preconstruction...................................................2.8 Conflict, Error, Ambiguity, Discrepancy-- CONTRACTOR to Report ..........................2.5, 3.3.2 Construction, before starting by CONTRACTOR ........................................... 2.5-2.7 Construction Machinery, Equipment, etc .................. 6.4 Continuing the Work ..................................... 6.29, 10.4 Contract Documents-- Amending..........................................................3.5 Bonds.............................................................5.1 EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600. 1. Examine wall surfaces following cleaning to assure conditions are satisfactory for application. 2. Existing Conditions: Examine before beginning installation. Verify that masonry joints found unsound, hollow or otherwise defective have been raked out and pointed with mortar. Verify that cracks which exceed 1 /64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar or sealant. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray. B. In hot, dry weather, apply light spray of water prior to application of Sealer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply using low pressure airless spray equipment. Apply using methods and coverage recommended by the Manufacturer. B. Apply material in flood coat to achieve a minimum 3 to 5 inch run-down. l . On Split Face Block: Apply in two coats. a. Application to Very Porous Block: When recommended by Manufacturer, apply second coat at twice coverage rate of first coat. 2. On Medium Weight and Normal Weight Regular Face and Ground Face Block: Apply single coat unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer. 3. On Brick and Precast Concrete Substrates: Apply in two coats. 4. Start application at top of wall and work downward, keeping flooding edge wet at all times. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall test completed application for water penetration resistance. In case of unsatisfactory test results, reapply Sealer in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Manufacturers certification and warranty are required before final acceptance of application. See Paragraph 1.02 B Quality Control Submittals. END OF SECTION VF 2001-59 07190-3 SECTION 15250 -MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: l . Insulation. 2. Jackets, coatings and protective finishes. 3. Sealers, mastics and adhesives. 4. Fitting covers. 1.03 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS A. Provide composite installation (insulation, jacket, covering, sealer, mastic and adhesive) complying with the following: l . Flame Spread: 25 or Less. 2. Smoke Developed: 50 or Less. 3. Method: ASTM E84 (NFPA 255). 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver insulation products in factory containers bearing manufacturer's label showing fire hazard rating, density and thickness. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Location: Located in mechanical rooms or other rooms. B. Concealed Location: Located in pipe chases, furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above suspended ceilings, or other locations not exposed to view. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Schuller. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Armstrong. b. Certainteed. tCEg-01055 15250-1 SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS Boring Depth Moisture Dry Density Compressive Strength Swell Pressure Soluble Sulfates pH Liquid Limit Plasticity Index Group Classification AASHTO Resistivity Penetration No. IFt.) (%) IPCF) IPSFI IPSF) 1%1 I%1 1%) Index USCS IOHM�CMI Blows/In. 10 0.0-1.0 13.8 16/12 1.0-2.0 13.8 12/12 4.0-5.0 21.2 106.5 770 5.0-6.0 8.7 16/12 3.0-9.0 11.1 21/12 14.0-15.0 7.0 37/12 11 0.0-1.0 16.3 8/12 1.0-2.0 16.3 16/12 4.0-5.0 6.2 5.0-6.0 4.9 6/12 8.0-9.0 10.6 46/12 14.0-15.0 13.3 46/12 Compos to Sample 0.5-4.0 30.0 12.3 0.9 A-b(1); SC 12 1.2-2.7 6.6 7/12 4.0-5.0 24.6 8/12 9.0-10.0 22.2 29/12 l l_ 1 L 1 I I I I L 1 L I i I i I I Cash Allowances..,,,,,, ........11.8 Article or Paragraph Number Change of Contract Pric@.................................... I I Change of Contract Times .................................. 12 Changes in the Work................................10.4-10.5 check and verify.................................................2.5 Clarifications and Interpretations ..........................3.2, 3.6, 9.4, 9.11 definition of..................................................... 1.10 ENGINEER as initial interpreter of..................9.I I ENGINEER as OWNER's representative,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.1 general3 Insurance ...................................: 3 Intent........................................................3.1-3.4 minor variations in the Work.............................3.6 OWNER's responsibility to furnish data,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 8.3 OWNER'S responsibility to make prompt payment ..........................$3, 14.4, 14.13 precedence ............... .........3.1, 3.3.3 Record Documents............................................0.19 Reference to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies...................................3.3 RelatedWork......................................................7.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies,,......2.5, 3.3 Reuseof............................................................3.7 Supplementing..................................................3.6 Termination of ENGINEERS Employment .......... 8.2 Unit Price Work...............................................11.9 variations..........................................3.6, 6.23, 6.27 Visits to Site, ENGINEER's ............................... 9.2 Contract Price -- adjustment of ............... 3.5, 4.1, 9.4, 10.3, 11.2-11.3 Changeof..........................................................11 Decision on Disputes........................................9.11 definition of.....................................................1.11 Contract Times -- adjustment of ..........................3.5, 4.1, 9.4, 10.3, 12 Change of ................................................12.1-12.4 Commencement of ............................................ 2.3 definition of,,,,,,... ............................................1.12 CONTRACTOR— Acceptance of Insurance ................................... 5.14 Communications ...................................... 6.2, 6.9.2 ork........................................6.29, Continue Work.... 10.4 coordination and scheduling ...................... 0..9.2 definition of.....................................................1.13 Limited Reliance on Technical Data Authorized.........................................4.2.2 May Stop Work or Terminate............................15.5 provide site access to others,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,7.2, 13.2 Safety and Protection ...................4.3.1.2, 6.16, 6.18, ...... ................................ 6.21-6.23, 7.2, 13.2 Shop Drawing and Sample Review Prior to Submittal ........................................6.25 Stop Work requirements CONTRACTOR's6 4.5.2 Article or.Paragraph Number Compensation .............................. .............. 11.1-11.2 Continuing Obligation.....................................14.15 Defective Work ............................... 9.6, 13.10-13.14 Duty to correct defective Work ..........................13.11 Duty to Report -- Changes in the Work caused by Emergency........................................... 6.23 Defects in Work of Others.............................7.3 Differing conditions...................................4.2.3 Discrepancy in Documents........2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Underground Facilities not indicated.,,,,,,,,, 4.3.2 Emergencies.....................................................0.23 Equipment and Machinery Rental, Cost of the Work...........................................11.4.5.3 Fee --Cost Plus..........................11.4.5.6, 11.5.1, 11.6 General Warranty and Guarante4 .......................0.30 Hazard Communication Programs, ..................... 6.22 Indemnification .........................0.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 Inspection of the Work ............................... 7.3, 13.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment ....................0.3-6.5 Laws and Regulations, Compliance by,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.14.1 Liability Insurance ............................ 5, Notice of Intent to Appeal .........................9.10, 10.4 obligation to perform and complete the Work .............................' .......0.30 Patent Fees and Royalties, paid for by,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.12 Performance and Other Bonds ............. .........5.1 Permits, obtained and paid for by.......................0.13 Progress Schedule ...........................2.6, 2.8, 2.9, 6.6, ........................................6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Request for formal decisionon disputes,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.11 Responsibilities — Changes in the Work...................................10.1 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others......................................6.8-6.11 Continuing the Work ..........................6.29, 10.4 CONTRACTOR's expense...........................0.7.1 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee ...................................... 6.30 CONTRACTOR s review prior to Shop Drawing or Sample submittal................6.25 Coordination of Work ................................ 6.9.2 Emergencies............................................... 6.23 ENGINEER's evaluation, Substitutes or "Or -Equal" Items..............................0.7.3 For Acts and Omissions of Others.............................0.9.1-6.9.2, 9.13 for deductible amounts, insurance..................5.9 general........................................6, 7.2, 7.3, 8.9 Hazardous Communication Programs.......... 6.22 Indemnification ................................... 6.31-6.33 v^i E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Labor, Materials and Equipment..............0.3-6.5 Laws and Regulations..................................6.14 Liability Insurance ........................................ 5.4 Article or Paragraph Number Notice of variation from Contract Documents ........................................... 6.27 Patent Fees and Royalties, ............................ 6. 12 Permits.......................................................6.13 Progress Schedule ......................................... 6.6 Record Documents ...................................... 6.19 related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's approval of required submittals .............................................. .28 safe structural loading.................................6.18 Safety and Protection ....................6.20, 7.2, 13.2 Safety Representative...................................6.21 Scheduling the Work..................................6.9.2 Shop Drawings and Samples ........................6.24 Shop Drawings and Samples Review by ENGINEER ..................................... 6.26 Site Cleanliness .......................................... 6.17 Submittal Procedures................................ ...6.25 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures .................................... 6.7.2 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items................6.7.1 Superintendence ........................................... 6.2 Supervision... ................................................ 0.1 Survival of Obligations................................6.34 Taxes......................................................... 6.15 Tests and Inspections, .... ... 4 ....................... 4.13.5 ToReport..... ......... ......... ........2 5 Use of Premises...:.................0.16-6.18, 6.30.2.4 Review Prior to Shop Drawing or Sample Submittal.......... 4............................. 6.25 Right to adjustment for changes in the Work ..... 10.2 right to claim,.........., A, 7.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2,11.2, .......... 11.9, 12.1, 13.9, 14.8, 15.1, 15.5, 17.3 Safety and Protection, ................. 6.20-6.22, 7.2, 13.2 Safety Representative ....................................... 6.21 Shop Drawings and Samples Submittal$,,,, 6.24-6.28 Special Consultants........................................11.4.4 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedure$„6.7 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items, Expense............ 4............................. 6.7.1, 6.7.2 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others .......... 6.8-6.11 Supervision and Superintendence ......... 6.1, 6.2, 6.21 Taxes, Payment by.................4.........................0.15 Use of Premises .................... 4................... .................... Warranties and guarantees ..........................6.5, 6.30 Warranty of Title...........................4..................14.3 Written Notice Required -- CONTRACTOR stop Work or terminate, ....... 15.5 Reports of Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions .......................4.2.3 Substantial Completion.. ....................... 4 ...... 14.8 CONTRACTORS --other .............................................. 7 Contractual Liability Insurance..............................5.4.10 Contractual Time Limits ..... ................................... j2.2 Article or Paragraph Number Coordination -- CONTRACTORS responsibility ......................... .9.2 Copies of Documents ............................................... 2.2 Correction Period, ................... : ............................. 13.12 Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work-- in general...................................10.4.1, 13.10-13.14 Acceptance ofDefective Work ..........................13.13 Correction or Removal of Defective Work.................................6.30, 13.11 Correction Period............................................13.12 OWNER May Correct Defective Work..............J3.14 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 Cost -- of Tests and Inspections ............................... Records11.7 Cost of the Work -- Bonds and insurance, additional,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Cash Discounts ............................................ CONTRACTORS Fee ................................. Employee Expenses ..................................... Exclusions to .............................................. General11.4-11.5 Home office and overhead expenses .............. Losses and damages .................................... Materials and equipment ............................ Minor expenses........................................... Payroll costs on changes performed by Subcontractors ........................ Records 11.7 Rentals of construction equipment and machinery ...................................... Royalty payments, permits and license fees ........................................... Site office and temporary facilities;,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Special Consultants, CONTRACTOR's......... Supplemental ............................................. Taxes related to the Work.„ ......................„ Tests and Inspection .................................... Trade Discounts ......................................... Utilities, fuel and sanitary facilitie$.............. Work after regular hours ............................. CoveringWork ................................................ Cumulative Remedies,,,,,,,;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Cutting, fitting and patching ............................ Data, to be furnished by OWNER ..................... Day --definition of. ........................................... Decisions on Disputes .................................... 9 defective --definition of .................................... defective Work-- Acceptance of:......................................10.4 13.4 11.4.5.9 J 1.4.2 11.6 11.4.5.1 ......11.5 11.4.5.3 11.4.5.5 11.4.5.2 11.4.4 ....11.4.5 .11.4.5.4 13.4 J 1.4.2 J1.4.5.7 11.4.1 13.6-13.7 17.4-17.5 ....... 7.2 ........$ 3 17.2.2 .11, 9.12 ......J.14 .1, 13.13 viii EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Correction or Removal of ..................... j0.4.1, 13.11 Correction Period ............................................ J 3.12 in general.........................................13, 14.7, 14.11 Article or Paragraph Number Observation by ENGINEER ................................ 9.2 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 Prompt Notice of Defects...................................13.1 Rejecting...........................................................9.6 Uncovering the Work.......................................13.8 Definitions......:........................................................I Delays ..................................... 4.1, 6.29, 12.3-12.4 Delivery of Bonds.....................................................�.1 Delivery of certificates of insurance ............................ ?.7 Determinations for Unit Prices ................................ 9.10 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions -- Noticeof........................................................4.2.3 ENGINEER's Review .....4.2.4 Possible Contract Documents Chan8e.............. 4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments,,,,,,,,,,,,, 4.2.6 Discrepancies -Reporting and Resolving................................2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Dispute Resolution— Agreement................................................16.1-16.6 Arbitration, ............... .............16.1-16.5 gencra116 Mediation.........................................................16.6 Dispute Resolution Agreement.........................16.1-16.6 Disputes, Decisions by ENGINEER ...................9.11-9.12 Documents -- Copiesof...........................................................7.2 Record 6.19 Reuseof............................................................3.7 Drawings --definition of..........................................j.15 Easements............c................................................4.1 Effective date of Agreement - definition Qf .............J.16 Emergencies...........................................................0.23 ENGINEER — as initial interpreter on disputes.................9.11-9.12 definition of ............ ................. ................ ........1.17 Limitations on authority and responsibilitie8,,,,,9.13 Replacement of .................................................. 8.2 Resident Project Representative ...........................9.3 ENGINEER's Consultant -- definition of..................1.18 ENGINEER's-- authority and responsibility, limitations on ........ 9.13 Authorized Variations in the Work.....................9.5 Change Orders, responsibility for,,,,,., 9.7, 10, 11, 12 Clarifications and Interpretations ...............3.6.3, 9.4 Decisions on Disputes .............................. 9.11-9.12 defective Work, notice of..................................13.1 Evaluation of Substitute Items,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,0.7.3 Liability ...................................................6.32, 9.12 Notice Work is Acceptable..............................J4.13 Observations...........................................6.30.2, 9.2 OWNER'S Representative. ................................... 9.1 Payments to the CONTRACTOR, Responsibility for.....................................9.9, 14 Recommendation of Payment ...................14.4, 14.13 Article or Paragraph Number Responsibilities --Limitations o4................9.11-9.13 Review of Reports on Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions.............................4.2.4 Shop Drawings and Samples, review responsibility .............................................. 6.26 Status During Construction— authorized variations in the Work .................9.5 Clarifications and Interpretations..................9.4 Decisions on Disputes..........................9.11-9.12 Determinations on Unit Price9:10 ENGINEER as Initial Interpreter .......... 9.11,9.12 ENGINEER's Responsibilities ................9.1-9.12 Limitations on ENGINEER'S Authority and Responsibilities..............................9.13 OWNER's Representative...:..........................9.1 Project Representative...................................9.3 Rejecting Defective Work..............................9.6 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................... 9.7-9.9 Visits to Site.................................................9.2 Unit Price determinations..................................9.10 Visits to Site ....... :........... ............. ....................... 9.2 Written consent required..............................7.2, 9.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and ........................0.3-6.5 Equipment rental, Cost of the Work .................. J 1.4.5.3 Equivalent Materials and Equipment ........................0.7 error or omissions,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Evidence of Financial Arrangements ....................... g.l l Explorations of physical conditions ........................4.2.1 Fee, CONTRACTOR's--Costs Plus ..................... :..... j 1.6 Field Order -- definition of.....................................................1.19 issued by ENGINEER ................................ 3.6.1, 9.5 Final Application for Payment..............................14.12 Final Inspection,................................................... J 4.11 Final Payment -- and Acceptance.....................................14.13-14.14 Prior to, for cash allovances...............................11.8 General Provisions..........................................17.3-17.4 General Requirements. - definition of.....................................................J.20 principal references tq..............z.6, 6.4, 6.6-6.7, 6.24 GivingNotice.........................................................17.1 Guarantee of Work —by CONTRACTOR......... .30, 14.12 Hazard Communication Programs ...........................0.22 Hazardous Waste — definition of.....................................................1.21 general............................................................. 4.5 OWNER'S responsibility for. .............................. g,10 ix EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) v Indemnification ..................... Initially Acceptable Schedules. Inspection -- Certificates of .................. Final........................... .........6. 12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 2.9 ............9.13.4, 13.5, 14.12 ................................14.11 Article or Paragraph Number Special, required by ENGINEER .........................9.6 Tests and Approval ....................... 8.7, 13.3-13.4 Insurance -- Acceptance of, by OWNER...............................5.14 Additional, required by changes in the Work...........................................11.4.5.9 Before starting the Work .................................... 2.7 Bonds and --in general..........................................5 Cancellation Provisions ..................................... 5.8 Certificates of ...................2.7, 5, 5.3, 5.4.11, 5.4.13, ...................... 5.6.5, 5.8, 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12 completed operations ................................... 5.4.13 CONTRACTOR'S Liability ..................................5.4 CONTRACTOR's objection to coverage.............5.14 Contractual Liability ..................................... 5.4.10 deductible amounts, CONTRACTOR'S 'responsibility................................................5.9 Final Applicaton for Payment .........................14.12 Licensed Insurers...............................................5.3 Notice requirements, material change; ........ 5.8, 10.5 Option to Replace.............................................5.14 other special insurances................................... 5.10 OWNER as -fiduciary for insureds ............5.12-5.13 OWNER's Liability ............................................5.5 OWNER's Responsibility .................................... 8.5 Partial Utilization, Property Insurancq...............5.15 Property.................................................... 5.6-5.10 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .............................................. 5.12-5.13 Special Insurance ............................................. 5.10 Waiver of Rights..............................................5.11 Intent of Contract Documents..............................3.1-3.4 Interpretations and Clarifications .....................3.6.3, 9.4 Investigations of physical conditions .........................4.2 Labor, Materials and Equipment...........................6.3-6.5 Lands -- and Easements...................................................$.4 Availability of.............................................4.1, 8.4 Reports and Tests...............................................$.4 Laws and Regulations --Laws or Regulations-- Bonds........................................................5.1-5.2 Changes in the Work........................................10.4 Contract Documents...........................................3.1 CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities .....................0.14 Correction Period,defective Work....................13.12 Cost of the Work, taxes ............................... 11.4.5.4 definition of.....................................................1.22 general6.14 Indemnificatioq 6.31-6.33 Insurance...........................................................5.3 Precedence................................................3.1, 3.3.3 Reference to....................................................3.3.1 Safety and Protection................................6.20, 13.2 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others ........... 6.8-6.11- Article or Paragraph Number Tests and Inspections - ............... Use of Premises 4 16 Visits to Site.......................................................9.2 Liability Insurance-- CONTRACTOR's............................................... 5.4 OWNERS ...........................................................5.5 Licensed Sureties and Insurers„ ............................... 5.3 Liens -- Application for Progress Payment .......................14.2 CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title....................14.3 Final Application for Payment .........................14.12 definition of......................................................1.23 Waiver of Claims............................................14.15 Limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibilities................................................. 9.13 Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized.......................................................4.2.2 Maintenance and Operating Manuals -- Final Application for Payment .........................1.4.12 Manuals (of others)-- Precedence....................................................3.3.3.1 Reference to in Contract Documents ..................3.3.1 Materials and equipment -- furnished by CONTRACTOR...............................0.3 not incorporated in Work...................................14.2 Materials or equipment —equivalent ...........................0.7 Mediation (Optional)..............................................16.7 Milestones --definition of .................. '.'..................... 1.24 Miscellaneous -- Computation of Times ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,17.2 Cumulative Remedies 17.4 Giving Notice....................................................17.1 Notice of Claim.................................................17.3 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included ......... 17.5 Multi -prime contracts ................................................. 7 Not Shown or Indicated .......................................... 4.3.2 Notice of -- Acceptability of Project....,,,-............................14.13 Award, definition of ......................................... J.25 Claim............................................................17.3 Defects,13.1 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditiong...... 4.2.3 Giving............................................................L7.1 Tests and Inspections,,,,,,,..„.............................13.3 Variation, Shop Drawing and Sample ............0.27 Notice to Proceed -- definition of......................................................1.26 givingof...........................................................2.3 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Notification to Surety ..............................................J0.5 Observations, by ENGINEER„..........................C>.30, 9.2 Occupancy of the Work,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 Omissions or acts by CONTRACTOR...............0.9, 9.13 Open Peril policy form, Insurance ..........................5.6.2 Option to Replace ................................................... 5.14 Article or Paragraph Number "Or Equal" Items......................................................0.7 Other work 7 Overtime Work --prohibition of„...............................6.3 OWNER — Acceptance ofdefective Work ..........................13.13 appoint an ENGINEER......................................8.2 as fiduciary...............................................5.12-5.13 Availability of Land,, responsibility ....................4.1 definition of.....................................................1.27 data,furnish......................................................8.3 May Correct Defective Work...........................13.14 May refuse to make payment.............................1.4.7 May Stop the Work.........................................13.10 May Suspend Work, Terminate . ........................... $.8, 13.10, 15.1-15.4 Payment, make prompt ....................0.3, 14.4, 14.13 performance of other work .................................. 7.1 permits and licenses, requiremenU....................0.13 purchased insurance requirements,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ............... OWNEWs-- Acceptance of the Work..............................0,30.2.5 Change Orders, obligation to execute..,,,,,,,, 8.6, 10A Communications ............................................... 8.1 Coordination of the Work .................................. 7.4 Disputes, request for decisiorl............................9.11 Inspections, tests and approval* .................. $.7, 13.4 Liability Insurance ............................................. 5.5 Notice of Defects..............................................13.1 Representative --During Construction, ENGINEER's Status......................................9.1 Responsibilities -- Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material$.10 Change Orders,,,,,.,,,, 8.6 Changes in the Work...................................10.1 communications............................................8.1 CONTRACTOR's responsibilities .................. 8.9 evidence of financial arrangements .............. $.l l inspections, tests and approval;.....................8.7 insurance ............................... lands and easements.....................................8.4 prompt payment by ...................................... 8.3 replacement of ENGINEER ...........................$.2 reports and tests............................................8.4 stop or suspend Work„...............8.8, 13.10, 15.1 terminate CONTRACTOR's services..........................................8.8, 15.2 separate representative at site..............................Q.3 testing, independent.........................................13.4 use or occupancy of the Work ..........................5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 written consent or approval required.........................................9.1, 6.3, 11.4 xi EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) r� w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) ' r� Article or Paragraph Number written notice required ........................7.1, 9.4, 9.11, ....................................11.2, 11.9, 14.7, 15.4 PCBs -- definition of .....................................................1.29 general..............................................................4.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................5.10 Partial Utilization -- definition of.....................................................1.28 general6.30.2.4, 14.10 Property Insurance ............................................ 5.15 Patent Fees and Royalties ..................................... .. 6.12 Payment Bonds .......................... ......................... 5.1-5.2 Payments, Recommendation of..............14.4-14.7, 14.13 Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion -- Application for ProgressPayments ......................14.2 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title ...................34.3 Final Application for Payment.........................14.12 Final Inspection..............................................14.11 Final Payment and Acceptance :............... 14.13-14.14 general......................................................... $.3, 14 Partial Utilization............................................14.10 Retainage.........................................................14.2 Review of Applications for Progress Payments...............................14.4-14.7 promptpayment............................:.....................$.3 Schedule of Values........................;._................14.1 Substantial Completion, .................... 1 .......... 14,8-14.9 Waiver of Claims ............................................ 14.15 when payments due .......................... ::..... 14.4, 14.13 withholding payment.........................................14.7 Performance Bonds............................................5.1-5.2 Permits.............................................................6.13 Petroleum -- definition of.....................................................1.30 general ...................:.......................... ................ 4.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................8.10 Physical Conditions -- Drawings of, in or relating to ........................ 4.2.1.2 ENGINEER's review. ....................................... 4.2.4 existing structures, ........................................... 4.2.2 general4.2.1.2.......................................................... Notice of Differing Subsurface or, .................... 4.2.3 Possible Contract Documents Changq...............4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments..............4.2.6 Reports and Drawings ...................................... 4.2.1 Subsurface and ................................................... 4.2 Subsurface Conditions...................................4.2.1.1 Technical Data, Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized ....................... 4.2.2 Underground Facilities -- general.........................................................4.3 Not Shown or Indicated ..............................4 3.2 Protection of ........................................ 4.3, 6.20 Article or Paragraph Number Shown or Indicated, ............................................... 4.3.1 Technical Data...............................................4.2.2 Preconstruction Conferencq.......................................2.8 Preliminary Matters ........................... ......... ....... ...... .... 2 Preliminary Schedule$..............................................2.6 Premises, Use of ............................................. 6.16-6.18 Price, Change of Contract..........................................I I Price, Contract --definition of .................................. 1.11 Progress Payment, Applications for ..........................14.2 Progress Payment--retainage..................................14.2 Progress schedule, CONTRACTOR's............ 2.6, 2.8, 2.9, ................................. 6.6, 6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Project --definition of...............................................1.31 Project Representative— ENGINEER's Status During Construction........... 9.3 Project Representative, Resident --definition of ......... 1.33 prompt payment by OWNER.....................................8.3 Property Insurance-- Additional.........................................................5.7 genera15.6-5.10 Partial Utilization................................5.15, 14.10.2 receipt and application of proceeds ............. 5.12-5.13 Protection, Safety and ............ .................. 6.20-6.21, 13.2 Punchlist..........................................................14.11 Radioactive Material— defintion of.....................................................1.32 genera14.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................$.10 Recommendation of Payment................14.4, 14.5, 14.13 Record Documents........................................6.19, 14.12 Records, procedures for maintaining ..........................7.8 Reference Points........................................................ 4.4 Reference to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies.........................................3.3 Regulations, Laws and(or)......................................6.14 Rejecting Defective Work ......................................... 9.6 Related Work -- atSite ....................................................... 7.1-7.3 Performed prior to Shop Drawings and Samples submittals review.....................6.28 Remedies, cumulative......................................17.4, 17.5 Removal or Correction ofDefective Work................13.11 rental agreements, OWNER approval required ..... 11.4.5.3 replacement of ENGINEER, by OWNER....................8.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies.................................2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Reports -- and Drawings.................................................4.2.1 and Tests, OWNER's responsibility .................. _0.4 Resident and Project Representative -- definition of....................................................1.33 provision for.............................................................9.3 xii EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Article or Paragraph Number Resident Superintendent, CONTRACTOR'$ ............... 6.2 Responsibilities— CONTRACTOR's-in general .................................. 6 ENGINEER'S -in general........................................9 Limitations On. ............................................ P. 13 OWNER's-in general............................................8 Retainage............................................................14.2 Reuse of Documents.................................................3.7 Review by CONTRACTOR: Shop Drawings and Samples Prior to Submittal ..........................6.25 Review of Applications for Progress Payment8.................................... 14.4-14.7 Right to an adjustment ............................... ......10.2 Rightsof Way..........................................................4.1 Royalties, Patent Fees and......................................6.12 Safe Structural Loading..........................................6.18 Safety -- and Protection................................4.3.2, 6.16, 6.18, ... ............. ......................6.20-6.21, 7.2, 13.2 general....................................................0.20-6.23 Representative, CONTRACTOR's.......................6.21 Samples -- definition of......................................................1.34 general ..................................................... .24-6.28 Review by CONTRACTOR ............................... 6.25 Review by ENGINEER..............................6.26, 6.27 relatedWork.....................................................0.28 submittal Of. ................................................... 0.24.2 submittal procedure.........................................0.25 Schedule of progress.............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 6.6, .........................................6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample Submittals..............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 6.24-6.28 Schedule of Values..............................z.6, 2.8-2.9, 14.1 Schedules -- Adherence to..................................................15.2.1 Adjusting...........................................................0..6 Change of Contract Timess................................10.4 Initially Acceptable.,,,,,,,,,, ........................... z.8, 2.9 Preliminary ........................................................2.6 Scope of Changes ..................................... 10.3-10A Subsurface Conditions,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,4.2.1.1 Shop Drawings -- and Samples, general ................................ 6.24-6.28 Change Orders & Applications for Payments, and.........................................9.7-9.9 definition of......................................................1.35 ENGINEER'S approval of................................3.6.2 ENGINEER'S responsibility for review ..................................... 9.7, 6.24-6.28 related Work.....................................................6.28 review procedures................................2.8, 6.24-6.28 Article or Paragraph Number submittal required .............................................. 5.24.1 Submittal Procedures ........................................ 6.25 use to approve substitution@..............................6.7.3 Shown or Indicated...............................................4.3.1 Site Access......................................................7.2, 13.2 Site Cleanliness ....................................................... 0.17 Site, Visits to -- by ENGINEER .......................................... 9.2, 13.2 byothers..........................................................13.2 "special causes of loss" policy form, insurance........................................................5.6.2 definition of....................................................1.36 Specifications— defination of....................................................1.36 of Technical Societies, reference tp ...................3.3.1 precedence ................................... ................... 3.3.3 Standards and Specifications of Technical Societieg........................................ 3.3 Starting Construction, Before..............................2,5-2.8 Starting the Work: .............................................. 7.4 Stop or Suspend Work -- by CONTRACTOR...........................................15.5 by OWNER ..................................... 8.8, 13.10, 15.1 Storage of materials and equipment .....................4.1, 7.2 Structural Loading, Safety ...................................... 6.18 Subcontractor-- Concerning ................................................ 0.8-6.11 definition of....................................................J.37 delays.............................................................12.3 waiver of rights................................................6.11 Subcontractors --in general6.8-6.11 Subcontracts --required provision$,.,.,.,,, 5.11, 6.11, 11.4.3 Submittals -- Applications for Payment.................................14.2 Maintenance and Operation Manual$ .............. 14.12 Procedures.......................................................0.25 Progress Schedules, ...................................... 2.6,2.9 Samples...................................................0.24-6.28 Schedule of Values.....................................2.6, 14.1 Schedule of Shop Drawings and Samples Submissions......................................2.6, 2.8-2.9 Shop Drawings ........................................ 6,24-6.28 Substantial Completion -- certification of............................6.30.2.3, 14.8-14.9 definition of..,,...,..,,................... .....................J.38 Substitute Construction Methods or Procedure$ ........ .7.2 Substitutes and "Or Equal" Item$...............................6.7 CONTRACTOR's Expense............................0.7.1.3 ENGINEER's Evaluation.................................6.7.3 "Or-Equal"...................................................6.7.1.1 Substitute Construction Methods xiii EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Article or Paragraph Number or Procedures.............................................6.7.2 Substitute -Items ............................................ 6.7.1.2 Subsurface and -Physical Conditions -- Drawings of, in or relatng to ........................ 4.2.1.2 ENGINEERS Review ...................................... 4.2.4 general............................................................. 4.2 Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized.................................................4.2.2 Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ......................................... 4.2.3 Physical Conditions ...................................... 4.2.1.2 Possible Contract Documents Change...............4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments..............4.2.6 Reports and Drawings ..................................... 4.2.1 Subsurface and ................................................... 4.2 Subsurface Conditions at the Site...................4.2.1.1 Technical Data, ............................................... 4.2.2 Supervision— CONTRACTORs responsibility ...........................6.1 OWNER shall not supervise................................8.9 ENGINEER shall not supervise................9.2, 9.13.2 Superintendence.......................................................6.2 Superintendent, CONTRACTORS resident...............6.2 Supplemental costs .............................................. 11.4.5 Supplementary Conditions -- definition of.....................................................1.39 principal references to.................1.10, 1.18, 2.2, 2.7, .......................4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 5.6-5.9, ................ 5.11, 6.8, 6.13, 7.4, 8.11, 9.3, 9. 10 Supplementing Contract Documents ......................... 3.6 Supplier -- definition of.....................................................1.40 principal references to ........... 3.7, 6.5, 6.8-6.11, 6.20, .......................................... 6.24, 9.13, 14.12 Waiver of Rights...............................................0.11 Surety -- consent to final paymenf.......................14.12, 14.14 ENGINEER has no duty to................................9.13 Notification of..................................10.1, 10.5, 15.2 qualification of.............................................5.1-5.3 Survivafi of Obligations ........................................... 6.34 Suspend Work, OWNER May ....................... 13.10, 15.1 Suspension.of Work and Termination--......................15 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate...............................................15.5 OWNER May Suspend Work..............................15.1 OWNER May Terminate . .......................... :.15.2-15.4 Taxes --Payment by CONTRACTOR .........................6.15 Technical Data -- Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR .................4.2.2 Possible Price and Times Adjustments..............4.2.6 Reports of Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions....................................4.2.3 Temporary construction facilities 4.1 Article or Paragraph Number Termination -- by CONTRACTOR...........................................15.5 by OWNER........................................8.8, 15.IA5.4 of ENGINEERS employment .............................. $.2 Suspension of Work-in general .............................15 Terms and Adjectives..............................................3.4 Tests and Inspections -- Access to the Work, by others............................13.2 CONTRACTOR's responsibilities ......................13.5 cost of 13.4 covering Work prior to..............................13.6-13.7 Laws and Regulations(or)................................ 13.5, Notice of Defects ............................................... - 13. i OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 OWNERS independent testing .......................... J3.4 special, required by ENGINEER ..........................9.6 timely notice required.......................................13.4 Uncovering the Work, at ENGINEERS request ................................................ 13.8-13.9 Times -- Adjusting........................................... '................ 0.6 Change of Contract.............................................12 Computation of................................................17.2 Contract Times --definition of ...........................1.12 day.........................................................17.2.2 Milestones..........................................................12 Requirements-- appeals..................................................9.10, 16 clarifications, claims and.disputes..................9.l 1, 11.2, 12 Commencement of Contract Times ................ 2.3 Preconstruction Conference ...........................2.8 schedules.........................................2.6, 2.9; 6.6 Starting the Work .::..................................... 2.4 Title, Warranty of...................................................14.3 Uncovering Work.............................................13.8-13.9 Underground Facilities, Physical Conditions -- definition of....................................................1.41 Not Shown or Indicated 4.3.2 protection of ........................ I.................. 4 3, 6.20 Shown or Indicated 4.3.1 Unit Price Work-- claims.........................................................11.9.3 definition of....................................................1.42 .... general11.9, 14.1, 14.5 Unit Prices-- genera111.3.1 Determination for ............................................ 9.10 Use of Premises................................6.16, 6.18, 6.30.2.4 Utility owners.............................¢.13, 6.20, 7.1-7.3, 13.2 Utilization, Partial...................1.28, 5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 Value of the Work...................................................11.3 Values, Schedule of..............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 14.1 xiv E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) Variations in Work --Minor Authorized ....................................... 6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Article or Paragraph Number Visits to Site --by ENGINEER,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ... 9.2 Waiver of Claims --on Final Payment ........... ..........14.15 Waiver of Rights by insured partiq..................5.11, 6.11 Warranty and Guarantee, General —by CONTRACTOR ............................................... 6.30 Warranty of Title, CONTRACTOR's........................14.3 Work -- Accessto..........................................................13.2 byothers............................................................... 7 Changes in the .......................................... ...........10 Continuing the..................................................0.29 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate...............................................15.5 Coordination of..................................................7.4 Cost of the.................................................11.4-11.5 definition of � ........................... neglected by CONTRACTOR,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,13.14 otherWork............................................................7 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 OWNER May Suspend Work...................J3.10, 15.1 Related, Work at Site,.................................... 7.1-7.3 Starting the........................................................2.4 Stopping by CONTRACTOR.............................15.5 Stopping by OWNER.................................15.1-15.4 Variation and deviation authorized, minor ........... 3.6 Work Change Directive — claims pursuant to.............................................10.2 definition of......................................................1.44 principal references to.......................3.5.3, 10.1-10.2 Written Amendment -- definition of......................................................1.45 principal references to ..............1.10, 3.5, 5.10,15,12, .........................0.6.2, 6.8.2, 6.19, 10.1, 10.4, ............................D.2, 12.1, 13.12.2, 14.7.2 Written Clarifications and Interpretations...................................3.6.3, 9.4, 9.11 Written Notice Required -- by CONTRACTOR............................7.1, 9.10-9.11, 10.4, 11.2, 12.1 byOW4i...................................... ....................Q,10-9.11, 10.4, 11.2, 13.14 xv EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) BRICK FACE BEYOND SEALANT ALL ® AROUND WINDOW T.O. PRECAST BAND PRECAST I 103.- 4" BAND�` ��r� WOOD SILL WOOD NAILER RUNTHRU-WALL THRU-WALL FLSG. UP & FLASHNG �;1 OVER TOP OF Wi - -- WD. NAILER WINDOW SILL DETAIL �J SCALE: NTS VAUGHT • FRYE TRAFFIC ADDENDUM # 2 OPERATIONS projectnumber 2001 ARCHITECTS ATJFACILITY ore 03/11/02 AD-2 ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DESIGN Ref Sheet# A3.5 401 WestMowbin Ava�ue Stite200 FortCollins,C08p52 fax vw2za.I Gz FIaro9M22a.1191 www.�su n.c�n Checked by JR Scale (This page left blank intentionally) xvi EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 1.1. Addenda —Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 1.2. Agreement —The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; otht Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. 1.3. Application for Payment —The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by. such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 1.4. Asbestos —Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into,.the. air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.5. Bid —The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 1.6. Bidding Documents —The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 1.7. .Bidding Requirements —The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, and the Bid form. 1.8. Bonds —Performance and Payment bonds and other instruments of security. 1.9. Change Order —A document recommended by ENGINEER, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 1.10. Contract Documents —The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the ELCDC GENERAL. CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.5, 3.6.1 and 3.6.3 on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Shop Drawing submittals approved pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27 and the reports and drawings referred to in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 are not Contract Documents. 1.11. Contract Price —The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work). 1.12. Contract Times —The numbers of days or the dates stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13. 1.13. CONTRACTOR —The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 1.14. defective —An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER'S recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10). 1.15. Drawings —The drawings which show the scope, extent and character of the Work to be famished and performed by CONTRACTOR and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are refrrred to in the Contract Documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. - 1.16. Effective Date of the Agreement —The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 1.17. ENGINEER —The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement. 1.18. ENGINEER'S Consultant —A person, firm or corporation having a contract with ENGINEER to famish services as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.19. Field Order —A written order issued by ENGINEER which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 1.20. General Requirements —Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. 1.21. Hazardous Waste —The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 1.22.a. Lars and Regulations; Laws or Regulations —Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction 1.22.b. Le al Holidays —shall be those holidays observed by the City of Fort Collins. 1.23. Liens —Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. 1.24. Milestone —A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.25. Notice ofAward—A written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 1.26. Notice to Proceed —A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.27. OWNER —The public body or authority, corporation, association, firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. 1.28. Partial Utilization —Use by OWNER of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.29. PCBs —Polychlorinated biphenyls. 1.30. Petroleum—Petroleuni including crude oil or any fiaction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel on, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Wastes and crude oils. 1.31. Project —The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.32.1 Radioactive Material —Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of EICDC GENERAL CONDMONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ Crry OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 1.32.b. Re !ar {f orkfn Hours —Regular working hours are defined as 7:OOam to 6.00nm unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements 1.33. Resident Project Representative —The authorized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the site or any part thereof. 1.34. Samples —Physical examples of , materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged 1.35. Shop Drawings —All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data or information. which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for. CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR, to illustrate some portion of the Work. 1.36. Specifications —Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 1.37. Subcontractor -An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with arry other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. 1.38. Substantial Completion —The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified Part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 1.39. Supplementary Conditions —The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 1.40. Supplier —A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialrnan or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 1.41. Underground Facilities —All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. 1.42. Unit Price Work —Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 1.43, Work —The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable pans thereof required to be famished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of perfomring or furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. 1.44. Work Change Directive —A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph 42 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.23. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in paragraph 10.2. 1.45. Written Amendment A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with'the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related aspects of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within thirty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event %ig the Gentmet Times of the Agresment;%4iehever date is earliew. Starting the Work: 2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. Before Starting Construction: 2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review: 2.6.1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing and Delivery of Bonds: processing such submittal; 2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR 'shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1. Copies of Documents: 2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additi2ml copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed: 2.3. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 2.6.2.1. In no case will a schedule be acceptable which allows less than 21 calendar days for each review by Enrdneer. 2.6.3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.7. Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR and 0*4 shall each deliver to the ethee OWNER, with copies to ENGINEER certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance reipe requested by OWNER) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.4 6.6 &%d-S. . PreconstrueBon Conference: 2.8. Within twenty days after the Contract Times start to run, but before any Work at the site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals processing Applications for Payment and maintaining required records. Initially Acceptable Schedules: 2.9. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, at least tm days befem submission of the before an work at the site begin& a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as apprepaete designated by OWNER will he held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. and Division 1 - General Reauirements CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to snake corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until the schedules are submitted to and acceptable to ENGINEER as provided below. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times, but such acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling •,or',progrea9 of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's full responsibility therefor. CONTRACTOR's schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals CONTRACTOR's schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE Intent: 3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the place of the Project. 3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to 4 EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Fditim) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be famished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.4. 3.3. Reference to Standards and Speeaaons of Technical Societies; Reporang and Resolving Discrepancies: 33.1. Reference to standards, specifications,. manuals or codes of any technical society, organizatior or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of ar. governmental authority, whether such reference i; specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard, specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 3.3.2. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier referred to in paragraph 6.5, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in writing at once, and, CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as authorized by paragraph 6.23) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.5 or 3.6; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 3.3.3. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents or as may be provided by amendment or supplement thereto issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.5 or 3.6, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall talu precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: 3.3.3.1. the provisions of any such standard, specification, manual, code or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or 3.3.3.2. the provisions of any such Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). own risk. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, code or instruction shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 3.4. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered" "as directed" "as required" "as allowed" "as approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable" "suitable" "acceptable" "proper" or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. Amending and Supplementing Contact Documents: 3.5. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: 3.5.1. a formal Written Amendment, 3.5.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4), or EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 3.5.3. a Work Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.1). 3.6. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the following ways: 3.6.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5), 3.6.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or 3.6.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4). Reuse of Documents: 3.7. CONTRACTOR, and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization perforating or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER. ARTICLE 4—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS Availability of Lands: 4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR , of ar fi1' n �;eeharids lien .be:_ ._h lands able i....... and Regulate m. OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so famished with which CONTRACTOR will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments in the Contract Price or the Contract Times as a result of any delay in OWNER's famishing these lands, rights -of - way or easements, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.2. Subsurface and Physical Conditions. 42.1. Reports and Drawings. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 4.2.1.1. Subsurface Conditions: Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents; and 4.2.1.2. Physical Conditions: Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 422. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized, Technical Data: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data", CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 42.2.1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or 4.22.2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings, or 4.2.2.3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any 'technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information. 42.3. Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site that is uncovered or revealed either. 42.3.1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is materially inaccurate, or 4.2.3.2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents, or 4.2.3.3. differs materially from that shown or FJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) indicated in the Contract Documents, or 4.2.3.4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, prempd immediately after becoming aware thereof and before furdter disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.23), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such conditions or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. 4.2A. ENGTNEER's Review: ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine the necessity of OWNER'S obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings and conclusions. 42.5. Possible Contract Documents Change: If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required as a result of a condition that meets one or more of the categories in paragraph 4.2.3, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of such change. 4.2.6. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: An equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or in the Contract Times, or both, will be allowed to the extent that the existence of such uncovered or revealed condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for performance of, the Work; subject, however, to the following: 4.2.6.1. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraphs 4.2.3.1 through 4.2.3A, inclusive; 4.2.6.2. a change in the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph 4.2.5 will not be an automatic authorization of nor a condition precedent to entitlement to any such adjustment; 4.2.6.3. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.10 and 11.9; and 4.2.6.4. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Times if, 4.2.6.4.1. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or 4.2.6.4.2. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test or study of the site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or 4.2.6.4.3. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.2.3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or as to the amount or length of any such equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.3. Physical Conditions —Underground Facilities. 4.3.1. Shawn or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 4.3.12. The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,(iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities as provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. 4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, prealob immediately after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.23), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility: If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document such consequences. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shell may be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or length of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER,_ ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages incurred or sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. Reference Points: 4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference Points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. 4.5. Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material. 4.5.1. OWNER shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. s, r .• M'.i..... . .... .. .. .NO WON* ft :....: .. ... Y . ..... 464 .. EiCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Editions) .w/ CrIY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) ARTICLE 5—BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance, Payment and Other Bonds. 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall famish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithfitl performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also famish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agenes authority to act. 5.2. If the surety on any Bond famished by CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within ten days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. 5.3. Licensed Sureties and Insurers; Certificates of Insurance. 5.3.1. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.3.2. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraph 5.4. AW�WR—shelf CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance: 5.4. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of . or result from CONTRACTOR'S performance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or firnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 5.4.1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; 5.4.2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 5.4.3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; c., 5.4.5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and q. 5.4.6. claims fordamages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The: policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.4 to be purchased and maintained shall: 5.4.7. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.4.3 through 5.4.6 inclusive and 5.4.9, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability), OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for —the respective officers and employees of all such additional insureds; 5.4.8. include the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 5.4.9. include completed operations insurance; EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) 5.4.10. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under paragraphs 6.12, 6.16 and 6.31 through 6.33; 5.4.11. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be cancelled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.3.2 will so provide); 5.4.12. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12; and 5.4.13. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). 0W7VER's Liability Insurance: 5.5. In addition to insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5A, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER's expense OWNERIs own liability insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Property Insurance: :. f�41 _MIS Sy _ F-------- I •. Y • Y. r _ !!�!!Y�j�r� 6 p 1.- _!!! PRECAST WINDOW M S�SILL��SCALE�NTS R11 .bll 5 I VAUGHT • FRYE AV ARCHITECTS ,^ ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR DES) TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FACILITY 9 Z L J .E 091, ADDENDUM #2 Ref. Sheet # .m ►o Scale eaeasioned by eafemewm# of Laws and Rem-IntiAng limited to fees mid -end arehiteets)f 5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in ideatified in cae Supplemewlaty Conditions. The Fisk of seeh less and if a" es Pfelamly iimmmes l7SNi/TIRTIT.f.TF1RfT�_+T.. _/.TST.C_�7�_ ••_�.•I./.• EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 10 u,/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds. 5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. 5.13. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and; if Faquited- by my paFty in Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace. 5.14. If e.d',.`: paFty (Q*44E ef CONT Ai-rnni OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the Beft& a insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the edw p i CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing within tent fifteen days after meeipt delivery of the certificates (er etheF asidanee nested) to OWNER as required by paragraph 2.7. Partial Utilization —Property Insurance. 5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 412000) Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10; provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Supervision and Superintendence. 6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR'S representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR. Labor, Materials and Equipment: 6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER'S written consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit requests to the ENGINEER no less than 48 hours in advance of any Work to be performed on Saturday, Sunday Holidays or outside the Regular Working Hours 11 6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume fiill responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the famishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. 6.4.1. Purchasing Restrictions: CONTRACTOR must comply with the Citv's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions are available for review in the offices of the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's office. 6.4.2. Cement Restrictions: Citv of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and vroducers of cement or Products containing cement to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that bum hazardous waste as a fuel 6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of OWNER If required by ENGINEER CONTRACTOR shall famish satisfactory, evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Progress Schedule: 6.6. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.9 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below: 6.6.1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.9) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the Contract Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 6.6.2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 12.1. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in accordance with Article 12. 6.7. Substitutes and "Or-Equal"Items: 6.7.1. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or -equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by ENGINEER under the following circumstances: 6.7.1.1. "Or -Equal": If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for acceptance of proposed substitute items. 6.7.1.2. Substitute Items: If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment: proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify a& an "or -equal" item under subparagraph 6.7.1.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR If CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof; certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the fiunctionc and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The applicationwill state the extent, if any, to which the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will _ prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not _ acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract _ Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the _ Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected 12 E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) by the resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to famish additional data about the proposed substitute. 6.7.1.3. CONTRACTOR's Expense: All data to be provided by CONTRACTOR in support of any proposed "or -equal" or substitute item will be at CONTRACTOR' expense. 6.7.2. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEEWs sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.7.1.2. 6.7.3. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to famish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any "or -equal" or substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitutes proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2 and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER accepts a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute item. 6_8. Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others: 6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization (including those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2), whether initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to famish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) 6_9. CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 20 percent of the Work with its own forces (that is. without subamttaciinel. The 20 percent requirement shall be understood to refer to the Work the value of which totals not less than 20 percent of the Contract Price. 6.8.2. Biddine Documents require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are to famish the principal items of materials or equipment) to be submitted to OWNER date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER,--awl-4 OWNER's or ENGINEER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of efgarmomien se identified ffay be revoked on th is vAgeh awe GONFRACTOR WWI --hink an R.:,,0.. rem..rn..—.-..-.►r.T.='.lttT.ill nNVI1VtlCK. NO acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. 6.9.1. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and Omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any subcontractor, supplier or other person or omnization evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance with CONTRACTOR'S "Applications for Pavment" 13 6.9.2. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or famishing any of the Work to communicate with the ENGINEER through CONTRACTOR 6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fidlest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 14 FICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910.8 (1990 Mtim) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) Permits: 6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. 6.14. Laws and Regulations: 6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting therefrom; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.3.2. Taxes. 6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.15.1. OWNER is exempt from Colorado State and local sales and use taxes on materials to he permanently incorporated into the project Said taxes shall riot be included in the Contract Price. Address: Colorado Department of Revenue State Capital Annex r.w 1375 Sherman Street Denver, Colorado, 80261 Sales and Use Taxes for the State of Colorado Regional Transportation District (RTD) and certain Colorado counties are collected by the State of Colorado and are included in the Certification of Exemption. All applicable Sales and Use Taxes (including State collected taxes), on any items other than construction and building materials physically. incorporated into the moiect are to be paid by CONTRACTOR and are to be included in appropriate bid items. Use of Premises: 6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workers to the site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, nghtsof-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume fiill responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold hamdess OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. 6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER at Substantial Completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. Record Documents: EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV V2000) 6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9A) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, and prior to release of final payment, these record documents, Samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. Safety and Protection: 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be ,responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 6.20.1. all persons on the Work site or who may be affected by the Work; 6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraphs 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant or anyone employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a 15 notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.21. Safely Representative. CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. Hazard Communication Programs: 6.22. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cpordmatmg any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. Emergencies: 6.23. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from OWNER or ENGINEER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action 6.24. Shop Drawings and Samples: 624.1- CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals (see paragraph 2.9). All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show ENGINEER the materials and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.26. 624.2. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with said accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 626. The numbers _ of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. _ 6.25. Submittal Procedures: 6.25.1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or _ Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: 6,25.1.1. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, 6.25.1.2. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, slipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and 6.25.1.3. all information relative to CONTRACTOR's sole responsibilities in respect of means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. - CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. -- 625.2. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific -- written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contras Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. _ 6.25.3. At the time of each submission, _ CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may.bave from the requirements of the Contras Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. 6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals accepted by ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.9. ENGINNEER's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with _. the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning . whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of 16 EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Editim) w/ Crry OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals. 6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.3 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.25.1. 6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions accepted by ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.9, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Continuing the Work. 6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. 6.30. CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee. 6.30.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 6.30.1.1. abuse, modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or Suppliers; or 6.30.1.2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 6.30.2. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in ETCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 6.30.2.1. observations by ENGINEER; 6.30.2.2. recommendation of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER; 6.30.2.3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents; 6.30.2.4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 6.30.2.5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6.30.2.6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13; 6.30.2.7. any inspection, test or approval by others; or 6.30.2.8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. IndAmnifrcadon: 6.31. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person or entity. 6.32. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by 17 any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.31 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 6.33. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.31 shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S Consultants, officers, directors, employees or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. Survival of Obligations: 6.34. All representations, indemnifications, warranties and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the Agreement. ARTICLE 7—OTHER WORK Related Work at Site. 7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project of the site by OWNER's own forces, or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work and (ii) CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12 if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the parties are unable to.agree as to the amount or extent thereof. 7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with OWNER'S employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the.execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only out or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others, whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. 7.3. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOR'S Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR's Work. CONTRACTOKs failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. Coordination: 7A. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 7A.1. the person, firm or corporation who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; 7A.2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 7.4.3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. ARTICLE 8-0WNER'S 8.1. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer against whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER 8.3. OWNER shall famish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13. 8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Paragraph42 refers to OWNER's identifying and nuking available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site and drawings of physical conditions in existing E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910.8 (1990 Edition) 18 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) structures at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. and .- Iti ..-.! .. 8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.4. 8.7. OWNER'S responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4. 8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraphs13.10 and 15.1. Paragraph 152 deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. 8.9. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform or famish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ..1... ...... -�I` •Y... Y•Y. l! .- ARTICLE 9—ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 0WAER's Representative: 9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. Visits to Site: 9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER will endeavor for the benefit of OWNER to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on - site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on - site observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. ENGINEER' visits and on -site observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.13, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's on -site visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Project Representative: 9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more continuous observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraphs 9.3 and 9.13 and in the Supplementary Geaditiene of these General Conditions, If OWNER designates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the site who is not ENGINEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other person will be as provided in paragraph 9.3 9.3.2. Duties and Responsibilities Representative will: 9.3.2.1. Schedules - Review the Progress 19